The Wes Penre Papers--First Level of Learning Part 2 by Wes Penre

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

"The Wes Penre Papers"

- A Journey through the Multiverse – (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) (The website, in its current form, was first launched on October 11, 2011) E-Book by Wes Penre, 1st Edition, October 13, 2011 © 2011. Wes Penre (http://wespenre.com).

Part 2 of 2 of the First Level of Learning

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 1

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Table of Contents (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2)

Present and Future Challenges Present and Future Challenges, Paper #1: The Marduk Issue and the Earth-Bound Anunnaki (May 5, 2011) ….. Page 293

1 – Abstract 2 – The Anunnaki and Their Human Hybrids – The Global Elite 3 – ET Disclosure Projects and Their Major Advocates 4 – The Exodus of the Anunnaki Earth-Bound 5 – The Announcement of the New King! 6 – Satan Returns to Earth 7 – Marduk’s Council of 12 – The Corteum 8 – The Earth-Bound Anunnaki: How They Look Like and Their Whereabouts 9 – Marduk’s Challenges 10 – Supriem David Rockefeller and the Thule Order 10.1 – Supriem Rockefeller in Review 10.2 – The Thule Society, Fulfillment of Prophecy, and the Gateway to the Gods

PFC Paper #2: The Remarkable Michael Lee Hill Case (May 6, 2011) ….. Page 337

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 2

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

1 – Abstract 2 – Two Comparable Experiences; Two Comparable Blood Disorders 2.1 – The Terrell Copeland Case 2.2 – Michael Hill’s Sightings Over Lake Eire and Blood Test Comparisons 3 – Face-to-Face Encounter With Marduk 4 – Bill Birnes of UFO Magazine and UFO Hunters: How Much Does This Man Really Know? 5 – Some Additional Information From Michael on the Anunnaki Topic 5.1 – The WingMakers/Anunnaki Letter 6 – The Eric Clapton Connection 7 – Michael’s Meeting With a Known Musician, Claiming To Be of High Order and in Connection With the Arcturians 8 – Afterthoughts and Conclusions

PFC Paper #3: Revelations on the Story About the WingMakers, The Labyrinth Group, and S.A.A.L.M. (May 26, 2011) ….. Page 364

1 – Abstract 2 – How The WingMakers “Saga” All Began 2.1 – What is Myth and What is True? Here is the Key 2.2 – How the WingMakers Site Was Found 2.3 – Dr. Anderson, Defector From the ACIO/Labyrinth Group, Speaks Out 2.4 – The Origins of the WingMakers Race 2.5 – Mark Hempel, the Middle-Hand 3 – The Mysterious “James” Enters the Stage 4 – Who Took Over the WingMakers Site?

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 3

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

5 – Changes Made to the Original WingMakers Site 6 – S.A.A.L.M., Supreme Annunaki Assembly of Lord Marduk 6.1 – S.A.A.L.M.’s Secret Conversations Leaked 7 – Black and White, Or Just Different Shades of Gray? PFC Paper #4: The Animus, Artificial Intelligence, and Blank Slate Technology (June 4, 2011) ….. Page 413

1 – The Labyrinth Group, ACIO, and the NSA Revisited 2 – Fifteen; The Man Behind the Number 2.1 – A Cloak of Secrecy, Two Different Defense Weapons and Hidden Agendas 3 – Accelerated Intelligence 4 – The Corteum – What They Look Like 4.1 – Elongated Skulls vs. Skull-Binding and Cranial Deformation 5 – Seven Superdomains, Seven Superuniverses and the Seven Tributary Zones 6 – The WingMakers as the Central Race 7 – Prophecy 8 – The Animus; In Search For Soul-Carriers 8.1 – The Origin of the Animus 8.2 – Disconnected from Source 9 – Vertical Time, Blank Slate Technology, and Memory Restructure Procedure 9.1 – Horizontal and Vertical Time 9.2 – Memory Restructure Procedure (MRP) 9.3 – Using BST Against the Animus 10 – A’shayana Deane, The Guardian Alliance, and the BeaST 10.1 – The Makers of Wings and Other Things

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 4

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

PFC Paper #5: Present and Future Earth Changes and Their True Causes (June 17, 2011) ….. Page 452

1 – Abstract 2 – When Earth Nearly Died, Around 11,500 Years Ago 3 – Planet X, Nibiru–The Effects of the Incoming 3.1 – A Detailed Description of What Nibiru Looks Like 3.2 – Nibiru’s Effects on Earth and the Other Planets in the Solar System 4 – Monoliths in Space–Was Arthur C. Clarke Right? 4.1 – 2001–A Space Odyssey 4.2 – Revealing Photos From Leading University, and Video Taped Monolith Statement From Famous Former NASA Astronaut 4.3 – Reports on Monoliths in Space 4.4 – What the Off-Planet Monoliths Really Are 5 – The Year 2012 and The Wave of the Supernova

PFC Paper #6: The Return of the Gods (June 24, 2011) ….. Page 476

1 – The Tribulation 2 – The Lord’s Return 3 – The Battle of Armageddon 4 – And the Lord Will Reign for a Thousand Years 5 – Anu Stepping Down From the Throne 5.1 – Political Dramas on the Home Planet 5.2 – The New King of the Second Coming

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 5

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

6 – We Don’t Need No Anunnaki–We Don’t Need No Thought Control

PFC Paper #7: More on Artificial Intelligence, Increased Longevity, and Nano-Tech—The Path of the Gods (July 7, 2011) ….. Page 493

1 – Abstract: The Fine Balance Between Science and Metaphysics 1.1 – Waking up the Sleeping Giant 2 – The Codes of Consciousness 3 – How “New” Alien Technology Will To Be Introduced Creating Split of the Human Race 4 – Protecting Our Biology 5 – The Internet vs. the Innernet 6 – Welcome to the Machine Kingdom–Man and Machine Becoming One! 7 – Artificial Life Created, Called “Cynthia” 8 – Smurf’s Village 9 – WikiLeaks and a Flashback to the Atlantic Technology Era 10 – Technology and Longevity 11 – A Multi-Dimensional Perspective on Nano Technology

SOULutions Soulution Paper #1: Breaking the Spell (July 14, 2011) ….. Page 521

1 - Introduction to the Frequency Fence and the 3rd Density Quarantine 1.1 - Ungluing the Radio Knob--Freedom of Frequency 2 - DNA Code Activation 3 - The Quarantined Earth and the Misuse of Energy

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 6

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

4 - Subliminal Messages in Films and on Music CDs, and the Effects of Electronics 5 - How to Conquer Fear and Anxiety

Soulution Paper #2: Earth as Real Estate (July 25, 2011) ….. Page 542

1 - All Biological Life is Seeded 2 - The Free-Will Zone 2.1 - Free-Will vs. Predestiny 3 - Revisiting Old Egypt--Era of Magic and Multi-Dimensionality 3.1 - The Pyramid Structure and What It Does 4 - An Attractive Real Estate--The Gods Return 4.1 - Shapeshifting 5 - The Electromagnetic Spectrum and the Reptilian Consciousness 6 - The Purpose of the Human Experience 7 - The Pleiadians and The Complexity of Power 8 - Regaining Sovereignty of Mind 8.1 - Owning Your Sexuality 8.2 - The Migration into Virtual Realities 9 - The Collapse of Time 10 - The War Over Real Estate and the Human Factor 11 - Opening of Stargates to Let the Ša.A.M.i. in 12 - Pain and Sex and Pornography Addiction 13 - Numbers and Game Masters 14 - Remote Viewing within the Military

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 7

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

15 - How Do We Counter the Global Elite and the Hostile ET Presence? 15.1 - David and Goliath

Soulution Paper #3: Expansion on the Living Library, DNA, and Ascension (August 7, 2011) ….. Page 583

1 - Borrowing From, and Returning to, the Living Library 2 - From the Dark Ages to Big Pharma and the Witch-Hunt on Alternative Medicine 2.1 - The Witch-Hunt on Mind-Altering Drugs 3 - The Future--Back to Using the Living Library 4 - DNA - What it Is, and How to Reclaim What Was Taken From Us 4.1 - The Early Human had 12 Strand DNA, Corresponding with 12 Chakras 4.2 - How We Were Unplugged From the Multiverse and How To Plug In Again 4.3 - Healing Along the Lines of Time 4.4 - Triple Helix DNA 4.5 - Nibiru's Coordinates and the Original Creator Gods Have Landed on Earth 4.6 - The Number 12 in Relation to Earth and Our DNA 4.7 - The Family of Light and Multiple Living Libraries 4.8 - Sex, DNA, and the Living Library 4.9 - The Gardeners 5 - The Hierarchy of 144,000 6 - The Harvest 6.1 - We Must Slow Down 6.2 - Preparing for the Harvest Season

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 8

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

6.3 - Into the Harvest and Beyond

Soulution Paper #4: Understanding Multi-Dimensionality (August 21, 2011) ….. Page 619

1 - Moving Into a Multi-Dimensional Reality 2 - Messages and Mass Agreements in Dream Land 3 - Spirit Guides 4 - More on Time and How It is Used by Physical and Non-Physical Beings, the End of a Cycle and the Start of a New 4.1 - Time and Frequency (Earth Splitting in Consciousness into Mainly Two Different Planets) 4.2 - Choice and Victim Hood 5 - Amnesia 5.1 - Clarification of the "Human Experiment" and the Dependency on Linear Time 6 - Timelines and the Electromagnetic Fields 7 - Multi-Dimensionality in Summary

Soulution Paper #5: The Great Initiation (August 31, 2011) ….. Page 655

1 - Male versus Female Power 1.1 - Game Masters, Master Numbers and Divine Female Energy 2 - A Short Metaphysical Aspect on Astrology 3 - Geometric Downloads 3.1 - Crop Circles and Geometrical Figures 4 - What is Your Personal Reality? (Multiple Earths)

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 9

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

5 - The Law of One 5.1 - Jesus and the Law of One 6 - The Initiation Process 6.1 - The Fall From Grace 6.2 - Rising From The Fall 6.3 - It's All About Numbers 7 - Service-to-Others/Service-to-Self 8 - The New Earth 8.1 - The Split in Consciousness 8.2 - Technology in the New World 8.3 - Smart Cities; Safe Places to Be; Map Dowsing 8.4 - The Fusing of Probable Realities 8.5 - 2015-2024; the Formation of a New Society 9 - How to Emit Good Energy 10 - The Six Heart Virtues

Soulution Paper #6: Coming Full Circle (the Future, and the End of the Universe) (September 2, 2011) ….. Page 706

1 - Quality of Love and Light--The Old Atlantean Karma Revisited 2 - God's Black Angels 3 - Cruising Through the End Times 4 - The Cycle of Universes

Cognitive Meditation and Spiritual Exercises ….. Page 716

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 10

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________



The Quantum Pause Exercise (by Mahu Nahi, WingMakers) ….. Page 716



Three Steps to a Perfect Relationship (by Wes Penre, July 9, 2011) ….. Page 720.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 11

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(Present and Future Challenges Section) PFC Paper #1: The Marduk Issue and the Earth-Bound Anunnaki by Wes Penre, Thursday, May 5, 2011

1. Abstract I want to start the first PFC (Present and Future Challenges) Paper with a reflection of the far past hitting us in present time. First of all I need to make the reader aware of that it's best to read the "Anunnaki Papers" before you read this one, or you will most probably be lost in the logic. Some 4000+ years ago, the majority of the Anunnaki left Earth after had nuked the Sinai Spaceport and Sodom and Gomorrah. Marduk, however, who was Ea's eldest son, stayed on Earth with some of his loyal Lords. Marduk, in the past, married a human female (a crossbreed between Anunnaki and homo erectus), and was therefore forbidden to return to Nibiru; no human was allowed in "Heaven" (although some exceptions were made on occasion, such as Enoch, but otherwise, they were only short visits). So, Marduk had to choose to either keep his hybrid wife and give up his royal status on Nibiru, or abandon his wife and keep his status. Marduk, whom already was angry with his own King Anu and his Council, due to them putting Nammur's bloodline before his own, more or less said, "screw it!" and kept his wife. However, he never forgot or forgave his own relatives, whom he thought had betrayed him, and he declared war against the Enlilites (the RAM clan), and now Marduk wanted to be the Ruler of Earth. At least, that was better than being no king at all, he thought. So he fought a raging war against Inanna, the female Enlilite; a war which involved using humans as soldiers, dying in the thousands for the cause of two power-hungry Anunnaki. When the Anunnaki left the planet, Marduk's human wife was since long dead (she did not enjoy the longevity of the gods), but King Anu and the Council did not want Marduk back on Nibiru, due to his rebellious nature. Instead, they left him here on Earth to do whatever he wanted. If he wanted to be the King of Earth, he could "be their guest". But first, the gods nuked the Sinai Spaceport to prevent Marduk access from it, due to his threats to take it over. Since then, Marduk has been in charge of this planet; or at least a majority of it. He is the force behind quite a substantial faction of what we call "The Global Elite", "The Illuminati", or the "Powers That Be". It needs to be pointed out, though, that he is not the only one in charge. There are other inter-dimensional and dimensional

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 12

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

forces, steering parts of the Global Elite in other directions as well, so the situation is complex (we will go into this in more details soon). Left on our planet since the gods abandoned it are both Enkiites (Serpent Clan) and Enlilites (RAM Clan), and some of them are still loyal to the Kingdom (the Nibiru Kingdom), while Marduk obviously is not. So, the war between the two Nibiruan bloodlines is still going on here on Earth, and as usual, we humans, are the soldiers. Not very uplifting reading for the young, courageous soldiers, who go to Iraq and other places to fight for freedom, when in fact, they fight the War of the Gods, as almost always has been the case. This paper will cover the current Anunnaki situation on Earth as we know it.

2. The Anunnaki and Their Human Hybrids -- The Global Elite The reader, who has followed me this far may wonder; if Marduk and his Anunnaki stayed here on Earth and Marduk is still, after thousands of years, King of Earth (Satan in the Bible), left here to rule for another 3,600 years by "God" (Anu/Enlil) after been cast him down from "Heaven", why all those wars? Can't he just rule all the Nations with an iron fist and thus bring peace, although it's an oppressive peace? It's not that simple. Humans, also called Lulus, breed uncontrollably, and we are soon reaching the 7 billion mark. That's a lot of people to control; especially if you want to do it in secret. The decision to have 7 billion people on the planet at the same time is a divine decision, and nothing Marduk could do much about. What he does with the 7 billion, on the other hand, is another thing. When we look upon the power structure on Planet Earth today as average human beings, we may feel small, insignificant and helpless. Even if we don't like how we live our lives, we may feel we are "stuck within the system" with no power to change it. Still, the Anunnaki who are still on Earth do not exceed the amount of 300+ individuals, compared with almost seven billion humans. We know that these Anunnaki beings are highly intelligent and advanced (at least technologically and intellectually), and they use a few thousand human hybrids (the Global Elite) to be their CEOs over Marduk's global Empire. They are still in great minority, so they need to control us by some kind of very clever master plan. This is how it's done in general:

1. The Anunnaki keep themselves hidden and pull the strings from behind the

scenes. The Ša.A.M.i. have always ruled from within councils, and the Council of 12 was the superior council while the Anunnaki were here on Earth in larger quantities thousands of years ago. The original Council of 12 is no longer, according to a Ša.A.M.i. informant during LINK meetings, the ruling council on Earth. However, in old Nibiruan tradition, Marduk, here on Earth, has set up his own Council of 12, which is now his own Royal Council.

2. They use the purest hybrids on Earth; some of them being direct descendents of the old Anunnaki Lords in the ancient past. The purer your bloodline, the more power you are delegated. These hybrids are put in charge of politics, business, education, media, entertainment, banking and think tanks, to name a few. In other words, they are positioned where they can control the most

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 13

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

people.

3. With their money scam (the banking system) they are able to keep whole

nations under their thumbs, and make people in general dependent on money for their survival.

4. They use their ancient method of "divide and conquer" by something we call

"Problem-Reaction-Solution". When the Global Elite, through their alien masters, want a change in their structure; whether it's local or global; and they know people in general wouldn't agree to the changes, they create a problem big and traumatic enough for the population in general to cry for a solution (this is the "reaction"), and then the same people who created the problem in the first place now present the solution they wanted all the time. Out of fear and terror, people are now willing to accept the solution they wouldn't even consider before. A typical example is 9/11. The attack is the "problem"; they get a "reaction" from the people to do something about such horrible terrorist attacks, and the U.S. government tightens the belts on us with harsher national security; allowing people to be monitored, stripped, controlled, restricted, creating new laws where it's easier to control the masses, and so on. This is happening on an almost daily bases. They are using fear as a weapon, and unfortunately, we humans fall for it almost every time.

5. Of the 300+ Anunnaki who stayed on Earth, the majority of them (around

200) are loyal to Marduk and some are still loyal to the Kingdom (Nibiru). So right there we have the same conflict again between the Enlilites--the RAM Clan (the Kingdom) and a faction of the Enkiites--the Serpent Clan (Marduk's loyal Lords). So they are still using human soldiers as cannon fodder in their petty wars against each other in an attempt to win power over to their own side. Both sides are using the Global Elite members as their puppets. Wars are also a great way to keep the population from increasing in numbers too much, as well as manmade fatal diseases, viruses, vaccinations, prescription drugs, food and sweets that are poisonous to your body system, to name a few.

6. The whole power structure on Earth is built like a pyramid, with the Council

on the top; the Global Elite purer hybrid power bloodlines right underneath; less pure hybrids under them; and under them, hand-picked humans who have the brains to be able to do the job and can be manipulated easily enough by promises of power and wealth. Most of the latter have no idea whom they are actually working for; everything is on a need-to-know basis to keep the truth away from people. With those "regular" people, or those of watered-down bloodlines put in important positions, blackmail is often a common way to keep them loyal to the cause. Very commonly, they are offered young, beautiful women (often underage girls or boys) to have sex with, without their wives knowing about it, and in the future, if they refuse to cooperate, their dirty laundry is hung out in public. Hence, the many suicides in high places, and high level officials with their crimes being exposed in the media.

The situation is further complicated, because factions of the Global Elite have signed contracts with other alien species, like the Grays/Reptilians and the Verdants (more

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 14

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

about these later), creating more civil unrest, conflicts and wars, making this whole planet a giant war zones, with the great majority of people having no idea what is going on. Most of these bonds were made through TTPs (Technological Transfer Programs), where we got technology in exchange for what they wanted from us. In charge of the human Global Elite (the human hybrid parts of it), are the Rockefeller and the Rothschild banking families.[1] They have been the visible rulers for a couple of millennia, but under different names. The Rothschild's were previously called the Bauer's, for example. Both families are royal and go back to old Sumer, and further. There are 11 other ruling Elite families as well, whom also go back to the Anunnaki. They are, according to researcher and writer, Fritz Springmeier [2]: 1. Astor 2. Bundy 3. Collins 4. DuPont 5. Freeman 6. Kennedy 7. Li (Chinese) 8. Onassis 9. Rockefeller 10. Rothschild 11. Russell 12. van Duyn 13. Merovingian (European Royal Families) The following families are also interconnected with those above: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Reynolds Disney Krupp McDonald

So what is the difference between "regular people" and those who are of the ruling Elite, or connected to them by blood? First of all, many of them are descendents of the old Hebrews, and are therefore the Enlil's (YHVH's/YeHoVaH,s) chosen people in the Bible. They have been put near the top of the pyramid to rule over the rest of mankind. According to Sitchin's translations, they were not meant to rule us with an iron fist like they have over the last millennia, and kill us off and treat us like slaves and cannon fodder. The intention was apparently to govern us until we could manage by our own as a human species. We know that this never happened; they were immediately, under Marduk's command, drunk by power and wealth, and became the Ruling Elite we see today. They have no intention to set us free. But like I insinuated before, I don't think the intention ever was to let us rule the planet. The Hebrews, who were the Enlil's chosen people, were taken advantaged of by Marduk, and bribed. So they simply changed side. This is my belief. What I find notable is that king Anu and the Enlil got these strange epiphanies from Galzu, the mysterious person, and right there realized that we are all ONE and humans need to get Earth to rule over themselves. So why, then, did they leave

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 15

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Marduk here, too rebellious to come back to Nibiru, knowing he would make a mess down on Earth? If they loved their "children", as they apparently call us, would parents leave their kids with mass murderers? 2000+ years have passed since they were here last and nuked the Sinai Spaceport and Sodom and Gomorrah before they left. This means that they left between two Nibiru crossings, which is of some importance, because if they did, they can come back before 2060-2095. Their return doesn't have to exactly coincide with Nibiru. They know interstellar travel and can come through stargates and Einstein-Rosen Bridges as they please. Still, it's probably in their interest to come after the cataclysm that will follow around the time for the crossing. However, one may think that if they have had 2,000 years to evolve, they potentially could have come a long way. But keep in mind that 2,000 years, ~ 2/3 šar, which is 2/3 of a year in their terms. They don't count time as we do. We may argue that they are also interdimensional and multi-dimensional, which would perhaps speed up their progress, but if we look back on their history, they haven't developed hardly at all the last 500,000 years. They have always been the same warrior race with bloodlines fighting against bloodlines (as above, so below). It's hard to believe that they suddenly, in no time at all (in their terms) have developed so amazingly fast, relatively speaking, that they are now mature enough to govern us peacefully. Dr. A.R. Bordon is telling us they use nano-technology to develop their biominds until they now have almost reached Oneness. This is hypothetically possible, I assume, but it concerns me when I listen to Dr. Bordon, and by the same token read the following from his essay, "The Link": It is reported by members who have attended the conferences that they are near the completion of their cycle on oneness, wherein all knowledge and mind resources are used in service to the common. This, it was said, can only be possible when the diversity of biominds of each member remains an individuality while simultaneously being interconnected to the Ša.A.Mi. all-one by low-powered, low-energetic means that utilizes the planet’s life belt energetics – something akin to what Earth enjoys in the form of Schumann resonance. There is yet much we don’t quite understand about their system of oneness, as there are technologies used to enhance the common biomind that are beyond our level of technology at this time [emphasis not in original]. However, we do now possess a theoretical understanding of how it all works.[3] Here he says there is much we still don't understand, but should we then accept that we don't understand and take the Ša.A.M.i. suggestions to heart? How can we trust them? Let's pretend that you and I were a team and traveled around the world ten years ago and killed people left and right and played silly, but vicious power games which we thought appropriate, raped women and minors, plundered and dedicated ourselves to the worst criminal acts, and then disappeared for ten years. Suddenly, we come back and tell people that what happened ten years ago was in the past, and we are "clean" now! Would anyone believe us? Would they have a reason to? No. They would need so much more proof than our words. The ETs can tell us anything they want us to believe. A.R. Bordon told me their science group has developed "BS detectors" over the last 20 odd years, and that the ETs could maybe fool one or two of them, but not the whole group. I'd say: "why not?" It's easy to be arrogant about our own brilliance and think we can compare

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 16

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

even our most brilliant minds with those of the more developed ETs. I believe that if they want to, these ETs can pass any BS detector we may be able to develop at this time, with the ease of a thought (and perhaps a laugh). I also have reason to believe that the other alien species that show up on the LINK meetings are from the same confederation, just pretending they are not working together. You don't think aliens can be that sophisticated? We can, so of course they can.

3. ET Disclosure Projects and Their Major Advocates The situation may seem totally hopeless, but believe it or not, there is still hope, and not all aliens are here to conquer and destroy. In fact, the large majority of ETs in near space are not hostile to humans, and many of them are here to help us in one way or the other. They are not here to interfere with armed forces, or to put themselves in charge; most of them are working in the background and are observing. Sometimes I get emails from people saying that these peaceful ETs are not to much help if they just sit up there in spaceships somewhere without doing anything. First of all, that's not true; they are doing something, and we're getting into that soon, but most importantly; it's not for them to interfere or intervene. Most species are accustomed to following the "Law of One", which includes "non-interference policies" (more about the Law of One later). We are living in a Free Will Zone, and it's up to us as a biokind/biomind to work out our own problems. It's a part of learning; to go from adolescence to adulthood as a species, and we can't have things given to us on silver plates. We are the ones who need to consciously unite on a subquantum level (thought level) and find out what it is that we want as a humanity. This can't be done in institutions like the United Nations or others, presently existing on Earth, because these organizations are already controlled by those who are not working in our best interests. Under the "Soulution" section we will discuss different options we have as a species.

Figure 1a (left): Dr. Steven Greer. Figure 1b (right): Dr. Richard Boylan

One thing I want to emphasize already here is the dangerous mindset of people like Dr. Steven Greer[4] (and his team) and Dr. Richard Boylan[5]. The latter is more dangerous than the former. Both of them are embracing all ETs in Earth near space and tell us there are no "bad" ETs; they are all star-brother and star-sisters and should immediately be integrated with us, or we with them. They say the

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 17

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Government knows about the aliens (which is true), and now it's time for a disclosure, meaning that the Government should disclose the ET issue to the people. There are no "bad" or "good" ETs, of course, only different imperatives. What's a good imperative for one race may not be a good imperative for us, though. However, more often than not, imperatives can be combined and worked out to the best for two species. This doesn't mean, like Dr. Boylan says, that we should turn on our flashlights, metaphorically speaking, point them to the sky and shout: "Welcome all star visitors. Here we are!" Dr. Boylan in particular is inviting both the Zeta Reticulian Grays, the Verdants, the Tall Whites, the Anunnaki, respectively, without exceptions, calling them all star visitors and "good hearted". Both Greer's team and Boylan agree that all the negative ETs have left near Earth space and there are only positive ETs left! This is extremely naive; but not only that -- it's dangerous and a liability for the rest of mankind. Not all ETs have our best interests in mind, as we shall see, but Dr. Boylan and Dr. Greer don't seem to care and are very aggressively making their point. If someone brings up that there are ETs with clashing imperatives with us, we are immediately put on Dr. Boylan's black list as being government agents, disinformation agents or worse[6] (after I've published this, I'd be surprised if he doesn't put me on there too). Boylan and Greer are opening up a can of worms if they don't become more selective; it's like a channeler allowing any entities to come into their body. Dr. Greer is not any less aggressive than Dr. Boylan; when I suggested there may be those who don't have our best interest in mind, he (or his staff, rather) became very hostile and refused to discuss the matter and told me it is self-evident that all ETs are good and advised me to watch "The Disclosure Project" video again (from 2001). Greer is even calling one of his projects "The Orion Project". One may wonder, why? Orion doesn't have a particularly good reputation here on Earth. Also, he has sponsors in "high places", like within the Rockefeller family, and he's open with it. He justifies it by saying that branches of the banking/oil family are now ready for disclosure and support the North Carolina Emergency doctor on his quest. Both Greer and Boylan have a huge amount of almost cultish followers, and this is the danger. I have been in contact with people who are otherwise very intelligent and spiritually aware, but like one of them said: "When Dr. Boylan speaks, I'm all ears". This is concerning and quite discouraging in my opinion. We have to be more selective and mindful than that if we are going to make it. About a week ago, from this point in early September, 2011, when I am editing this paper, Dr. Richard Boylan did a reading, and also had support from his "star visitors", saying that a series of Earthquakes were going to hit North Carolina and Virginia. He gave us the exact dates, times of the day, and said that many people would die at this juncture. He has allegedly about 1 million people on his list, so I'm sure at least a few of them are from these mentioned areas. I read it and shook my head in wonder. Have can the man do this? Does he realize how much fear and terror he is creating? Did anyone leave their home, or sell it? Did they leave the target areas? Not for a moment did I think he would be correct. When, predictably enough, the first earthquake didn't happen, Dr. Boylan wrote a new email to the list, saying that the Cabal had changed their minds (this was supposed to be a manmade earthquake) and decided to hold that one earthquake

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 18

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

back and let the Virginia earthquake hit first just to make him and the star visitors look stupid. He said that now it had been changed to so and so time. I shook my head again in wonder. I asked myself, are people really listening to this guy? However, none of the two earthquakes happened (of course). Boylan then came back on the list, saying that the Cabal had held both quakes back to build them up to 8.4 on the Richter-scale or something of the sort, just to make them more potent. Still, they were going to happen on so and so date at so and so time. Nothing happened. Silence. Then Dr. Boylan came online again, after people had held their breaths in wait for this miracle man to come with his new predictions. This time he responded to a reader, who said that maybe they should do a mass prayer on the earthquakes. Boylan said no, because then the Cabal would accuse them to create earthquakes. Then silence again. No earthquakes. Then someone on the list said that the earthquakes will happen, but not at this time, and Dr. Boylan responded with something unintelligible and that was it. Nothing heard from Dr. Boylan since, and this was a few days ago. After all this clowning around, people on his list are still supporting him and thanking him for what he's doing. That's mind control when it's really effective. Dr. Boylan is looked upon by his member as a very nice, older man (who predicts earthquakes that never happen; scaring people shitless [excuse my language]). Where were the benevolent star visitors when he needed them? Out to lunch? (This information comes from Dr. Boylan's mailing list, "DrRichBoylanReports", between August 30 September 8, 2011). I would be happy to be on his "bad list". If he would put me on his "good list" I would have to go through my material with a toothcomb, because then I must be doing something wrong. This is very disturbing. Either Dr. Boylan is extremely gullible and easily manipulated, or he is working for the Cabal he is so fast to blame for every mistake he makes. Oh, I almost forgot, Dr. Boylan thinks that Obama is a star visitor, too, and will be so kind to help Dr. Boylan out and disclose to the world that these wonderful star visitors are here! Doesn't all this create chills down your spine? It does mine. Just recently, President Obama told people they could ask him questions online, and Dr. Boylan advised his followers to do so, like if it would make any difference. I am stunned. But the most disturbing part is not Dr. Boylan himself, but those who are following him in spite of these catastrophic errors and contradictions. And his whole "star visitor" agenda is breath taking. You see drawings of all these star visitors we know about, holding hands in friendship with cute smiles on their faces. Well, the thought is good, but don't tell us that all aliens out their, without discrimination, are saintlike, and we are ready to embrace them all. And don't put people who disagree with ONE word you're saying, Dr. Boylan, on some government disinformation black list. This is very counter-productive and outright dangerous. It also delays our mission, we who are working on revealing what is really happening. Don't get me wrong; most species out there are friendly towards us and have our best interests in mind, but they have not yet revealed themselves to us en masse for

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 19

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

a purpose. And why is that? It is because we have to overcome our greatest weaknesses first. We can't just chaotically stumble into the galactic community while fighting each other and being overly egotistical and ignorant, thus bringing our problems to their vicinity. We need to grow up first, and there are those who are patiently watching us doing just that. The only time they would interfere would be if we are literally destroying our planet (which we actually are close to doing). This is the Living Library, and there are those who would never let us go so far that we destroy their creation. They are also monitoring us and our nuclear activities and how we handle negative energy (more about that later). These are very concerning matters for them. More than once, the ETs have stopped nuclear missiles from going off; something that has baffled Military forces and even been mentioned in the Media. We have Anunnaki/Nephilim genes, and homo sapiens sapiens was created by Ea (the Biblical Lucifer), and this means we have a warrior stroke inside of us which we have to overcome and grow out of. I believe we are waking up to this fact, and the nano-second (1987-2012), when time is speeding up and the information is hitting us via gamma rays from the Sun and the Galactic Center, is strengthening our DNA and connecting the so-called "junk DNA' to our double helix to create a wiser, more peaceful Homo Futurus. I am not overly convinced that disclosure is the medicine right now. On the other hand, it's a matter of what we mean by disclosure. There are so many good, intelligent people out there who are working hard on disclosure projects of different kinds, but we need to understand that the Government, no matter what they say, are run by malevolent beings who don't have our best interest in mind. The Disclosure supporters say that the Government has come to a point where they have no choice but to tell the truth about the alien visitors, and that many people in the Military would be relieved if everything would be disclosed, but if the Government is disclosing the ET issue, it's going to be on their terms, and it's not going to be the truth. Disclosure will happen, but more on an individual basis at first. The benevolent ETs will not expose themselves through the Government, whom they certainly do not trust. The only "Disclosure" I would find valuable is to get more information from groups like LPG-C and others who sit on info regarding different ET races; who they are, where they come from, their imperatives, and who is working together with whom? We need to categorize them and find out whom to trust and whom to stay away from. Anyone can show themselves off as saints, but behind the veil being very dark beings. Dr. Bordon, just like me, is interested in intelligence gathering on different ET species to find out more about their relationship with each other, but he refuses to reveal what he knows about the group he belongs to. This is very unfortunate, in my opinion, because withholding this information could be potentially dangerous in the long run. Ed Komarek, known UFO researcher, made the comment why the LINK group is so secretive if they have nothing to hide? Carol Rosin, Greer's right hand, said in an interview recently that she is absolutely certain there are no ETs with malevolent intents left in Earth near space; they have all left, including the Grays (The Guardians said, before this statement, that if anyone tells you the Grays are no longer here, watch out). Her rationale is that if they were here, they had already taken over or destroyed us, and obviously, we

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 20

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(meaning we humans) are still here. This, in my opinion, with all the information that is out there which she is discarding, is quite naive at best.

4. The Exodus of the Anunnaki Earth-Bound In the 1400s CE, King Anu of the Ša.A.M.i. stepped down from the position as King of Nibiru.[7] This, however, did not come as a surprise, but something the King had prepared for hundreds of years, in our terms. For political reasons, he was forced to, apparently. The lobbying during this time was apparently intense, and both clans, the RAM clan (the Enlil bloodlines) and the Serpent Clan (the Enki's bloodlines) were as usual in competition for power and both clans wanted to put their people on the throne. Anu, who wanted the transition to be as peaceful as possible for the Nibiruan people, tried to calm things down. He announced that his successor would be judged due to his performance down on Earth before the Sinai nuclear disaster. How do we know this? According to the Life Physics Group (LPG-C), they come our of LINK meetings with these alien groups. These meetings have either taken place in exotic and secret places here on Earth, or onboard one of their crafts. The human faction of this group has been organizing these meetings only twice. The story about Anu stepping down, and the rest of it, was told to them by the Nibiruan representatives at these same meetings to give a briefing to us earthlings, so we can make more knowledge based decisions in the future, so they said. In addition to this, the LPG-C members are referring to witnesses (whom they call "Informants"), with whom they spoke over a few years time. What these Informants said, supposedly independent from each other in most cases, can be read in A.R. Bordon and J.W. Barber's: "Journal of End Time Studies Vol 1: January-June 2007: "Between the Devil and the Incoming Rock".[8] These witnesses are either scientists, (ex) military, or (ex) government agents on middle and higher levels. And lastly, I have my own experiences with LPG-C, from having been in contact with them for over 8 months as of this writing. They have shared a lot of inside information that will be released in increments (where parts of my own info is some of it). I've seen things unfold within the organizations and their struggles with coming to terms with the Intel and information they have regarding the Ša.A.M.i. and other present and future ET issues, and natural disasters. A few decades before the beginning of the Common Era (CE), the announcement that King Anu was stepping down was made. This resulted in a fast exodus of the Anunnaki still on Earth, and they immediately returned to Nibiru to be part of the lobbying. Both Nammur and Ea (now calling himself Ankur) left Earth to be with their father on the home planet. Ankur's sons, Marduk and Ningishzidda, and their families went back as well, causing the closure of the smelting operations in Bolivia. Others that returned were reportedly Nergal, Ankur's son, and his consort, Nammur's granddaughter Ereškigal; King Anu's grandson Ninurta and consort. Other Anunnaki, members of the RAM clan who returned were Nannar and his wife were; Iškur, Inanna, Ašnan, Nanše, and a few more. Nannar, so we're told, and his consort did return to Earth for a short time after that, to northern Syria, only to return to the platform to wait for transport to the home planet.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 21

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 2: Sacsahuaman - A side view of the complex

Then, in the later part of the second century CE, Nannar was instructed by his father and King Anu to return to Altiplano of southeastern Peru, to help Nannar's son Uti with closing down the smelters of Sacsahuaman and stop the runway operations in the Nazca area of southern Peru.[9] The smelters continued to process gold, tin and silver for a while, managed remotely from Turkey, but by the sixth century, Sacsahuaman was no longer in use and the pre-Incan civilizations from northern Peru through the north of the Atacama desert in northern Chile were left to fend for themselves; the Anunnaki were gone. Other colonies, to cite Dr. Bordon again[10], like North American Midwest, southeastern and southwestern native groups who came in contact with and taught by the Anunnaki how to manage agriculture, animal husbandry, and other basic matters, were also abandoned by the Anunnaki by the 7th and 8th centuries CE. For a couple of hundred years, we humans were more or less left alone on the planet for the first time since the Anunnaki created homo sapiens sapiens, about 300,000 years ago. But they would return!

5. The Announcement of the New King! The transition between King Anu stepping down and the announcement of the new King over the Kingdom (Nibiru) was a slow one and took about 600 years. Anu was very careful with whom he chose as his successor, because reportedly, he wanted the new king to be a person who once again could unite the Ša.A.Mi. (the Nibiruans), and stop the feud between the clans. Knowing how strong the polarity between the clans were, it was certainly not an easy task. For a while, he wanted to choose Ankur (Ea), but he knew he couldn't, because he was not the legal heir of the throne, according to Nibiruan law, and that would upset the RAM clan and only add fuel to the fire. As mentioned earlier, Anu also took into consideration the performance of certain royal candidates while on Earth, and didn't really find a proper candidate, as most of

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 22

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

them had been involved in raging wars and disasters. No one seemed to have a clean resume. As a side note, I find it remarkable how King Anu could be so judgmental, when he was the one who, according to Sitchin, allowed Alalu's nuclear missiles to fall over the Sinai Spaceport and Sodom and Gomorrah, knowing that thousands of earthlings would die horrible deaths and parts of the planet become radioactive for thousands of years. This speaks tons about the morals and ethics of this species, or the lack thereof, from our perspective. Too many destructive actions and decisions makes a person blind. We can argue that they have other imperatives than we do, and look at us as ants or unintelligent apes, but I don't think that justifies the cruel actions taken against us humans in the past. And aside from that, we need to think about our own imperatives in relation to this group of aliens, whom obviously think they own us because they manipulated our genes. They were never our creators; they were imposters who manipulated an already highly developed DNA/RNA. However, we will discuss this a little bit later on. When the exodus happened in the 6th-8th century CE, there were about 400 Anunnaki on our planet, and 3/4 of them were supporting Marduk, obeying him as their King of Earth or the Nibiru Kingdom, and were not recognizing King Anu as their king. This was a big problem for the real Kingdom, and Marduk had always been, and still was, a time bomb and a great concern. None of Marduk's followers could of course be considered as King Anu's successor.

Figure 3: Nannar, to the right, while still on Earth during Sumerian times.

Eventually, Ningishzidda came up with the solution. He suggested Nannar, the Enlil's son. He reasoned that, Nannar was the only one who could really succeed in uniting the Ša.A.Mi. again, and additionally, Ningishzidda said that Nannar had the vital force of his grandfather, King Anu himself. Ningishzidda had actually himself been considered by King Anu as his successor, but politely declined, again saying that Nannar would be the better choice. After a lot of pondering, Anu agreed, and Nannar, son of Nammur, the Enlil, and grandson of Anu, became the king of Nibiru in

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 23

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

the 1400s CE. After hundreds of thousands of years (at least), King Anu stepped down from the throne. He was apparently happy that the transition could be done without bloodshed. From our point of view, the leadership had been changed from the Serpent clan (Ea's bloodline) to the RAM clan (the Enlil's bloodline). Metaphorically, that would be a shift from the Democrats to the Republicans.

6. Satan Returns to Earth We know from face-to-face and mind-to-mind communications between members of the LPG-C and those from the Kingdom (Nibiru) that Marduk left Earth by the 8th Century CE, but what happened next? Marduk, obviously, was not wanted on Nibiru and was not allowed to stay there. In 2001, the LPG-C was informed that Marduk and approximately 300 Anunnaki returned to Earth again around the turn of the millennium (1000 CE), and has been here ever since, some of them taking control over the Earth population by force and by creating his own Pyramid Power Structure, with Marduk placing himself on top as the only God and King of the Universe. Marduk easily fits the picture as the Biblical Satan, and also fits right into the biblical prophecies, such as The Book of Revelation and The Book of Daniel, and him and Satan seem to be one and the same. He also took control over all major religions to use in efforts to manipulate the growing Earth population and to divide and conquer. The first thing he did was an attempt to rewrite history to Figure 4: Marduk erase all the knowledge humans had of their own history and origins, putting himself in the position as God Almighty. He even took on the task to rewrite the Babylonian Enuma Elish (Sitchin 1985). He is still worshipped as God in many secret societies, such as the Freemasons, unbeknownst by most members, except those few at the very top level, above the 33rd degree, Scottish Rite. Marduk is the "All Seeing Eye" on top of the Freemasonic Pyramid, and the "Eye of Ra" (Marduk Ra, whom later became Amen Ra when he was in hiding after the pyramid incident, previously covered in "Anunnaki Paper #3: After the Deluge" (Penre 2011) and my previous book, "The Myth Around Supriem David Rockefeller"[11] (more about Supriem later as well). Marduk changing history to give himself more power is mentioned both by Zecharia Sitchin in his "Earth Chronicles", Robert Morning Sky's "The Terra Papers" (which go into even more details about it) and comes from the Ša.A.M.i. themselves, through conversations during the annual LINK meetings between ET groups and the LPG-C, as mentioned earlier. By rewriting history and secret and occult instruction manuals, he could convert all these secret groups (secret societies) into Intelligence cells working for him, and thus be ahead of those who opposed him. Presently, he is also attempting to reconstruct a six-stage ziggurat "strong enough to support a landing platform at its apex."[12] This, becoming his new spaceport instead of the Tilmun (Sinai Spaceport) that was nuked by the Ša.A.M.i. and the "fallen ones" before they left a couple of millennia prior to the Common Era.[13]

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 24

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 5: Marduk Ra's Pyramid with the All-Seeing Eye. This can be found on the back of the one-dollar bill. Marduk is in charge of the banking cartel -- or at least most of it. There are more ETs involved behind the scenes, to whom some people in power have made an alliance with in more recent times.

Figure 6a: The Ziggurat from Sumerian times, being the Temple of Marduk around the 21st Century BC, and now under reconstruction in Iraq, supposedly to be used as Marduk's Spaceport.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 25

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 6b: Model of the reconstruction of the Temple of Marduk in Babylon

It's easy to see how Marduk in an almost childish revolt and rebellion towards his own people for not giving him the power he deserved in the first place (from his perspective), not only created (and still does) havoc here on Earth, but is also magnifying the ancient struggle between the two clans. The RAM clan of course doesn't accept his behavior, and he also puts his father, Ankur (Ea) in an almost impossible position. Ankur wants to support his son, but has to be as diplomatic as he possibly can; a wrong move or a wrong word can potentially start another war. The situation, from what I can imagine, is quite tense. After all, Ankur is the one who has felt the most compassion towards mankind, much due to that he looks upon us as his own creation; his own children. It was his sperm which created the first Anunnaki/human hybrids. Ankur, sitting on the original earthly Council of 12, whom decided about big issues and problems that needed to be solved here on Earth, had many times supported his son, or "protected him" from the rest of the Council. Now, however, when both Nammur and Ankur have left Earth, Marduk has set up his own Council (in the WingMakers "mythology" called "The Corteum"[14]), with himself on top with the rank of 60, something that is reserved for the King of Nibiru, only. By giving himself this rank, Marduk announces himself being both King of Earth (Satan), and that of Nibiru; thus not acknowledging the sitting King and the Kingdom. By giving himself the rank of King, and his refusal to give his obedience to the Kingdom in general, made the Nibiruan Council decide to put Marduk in the equivalent to quarantine here on Earth.[15] What this means, exactly, is not known to me, and I haven't yet been able to find out. Does it mean that Marduk is not allowed to leave Earth (which has been vaguely indicated to me), or is the picture bigger than that, something to the effect of what Robert Morning Sky wrote in The Terra Papers? According to Morning Sky's research, and from what the Star Elder told him, the whole Earth was put under quarantine, and humans, too, are not allowed or able to travel very far out in space. The Pleiadians, on the other hand, just like David Icke, are talking about a frequency quarantine (as mentioned earlier), where our DNA was tampered with to the extent that we have been stuck in this 3-D frequency range for pretty much 300,000 years. A similar thing is brought up in the Ra Material, where the Ra people are telling us we are put under quarantine by the Council of Saturn[16], which pretty neatly corresponds to the Nibiruan Council.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 26

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

This whole quarantine issue is going to be discussed in another paper as well, but it seems plausible that "quarantine" can mean different things here. It is clear that Marduk has a stronghold over most institutions, banking cartels, educational systems, religions, entertainment etc., in the world of today. However, he does not have the monopoly many researchers think. Besides the two factions of Anunnaki, fighting each other (the RAM clan and the Serpent Clan), there are at least two or three other major ET races competing over total control of Earth and mankind. This makes things even more complicated, and we will discuss all these challenges in separate papers, but will concentrate on Marduk for now.

7. Marduk's Council of 12 -- The Corteum At this point in time, we don't know all the names in Marduk's Council of 12 (also called the "Olympians" according to two of LPG-C's informants), but LPG-C has been able to find out at least a few of them, and their rank. It looks like the current hierarchy of the top Anunnaki on Earth are as follows:

Figure 7: Council of 12 Members as far as we know (2007)

These twelve members are then pulling the strings of the following Power Centers: Like the Organization Board shows in Fig. 8, there are 10 Power Centers all together. Like twelve spiders in the net sit the top rank Anunnaki, delegating their power downwards to the leaders of each Power Center, which are all supposedly humans (and/or hybrids). Those ten leaders are then reporting directly to the 12 Anunnaki (the Council of 12, or C-12). Logically, the C-12 members then report to Marduk in person, either in board meetings or on an immediate basis, depending on the urgency (not being totally convinced that Marduk is dead, I am still going to proceed as if he is alive. If he is not, what I am describing pertains to his successor; one of both of his two sons, Nabu and Gibil).

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 27

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 8: Probable meta-organization of earthbound Anunnaki influence/control

After doing some research and made contact with appropriate sources, members of the LPG-C managed to identify the 10 Power Centers with what seems to be quite some accuracy. They are:

1. The American/NATO group 2. The Russia/Mafia group 3. The Japan, Inc. group 4. The China, Inc. group 5. The OPEC group 6. The Cartel/Triad councils group 7. The supply margin economic/political groups in Latin America and Africa headed by Brazil (Latin America) and South Africa (Africa)

8. The seven members of the ecumenical community led by the Roman Pope 9. The two trigger states, Iran and North Korea (as a wild card group) 10. The economic/political group known as G8.[17] Please take note here, because what the LPG-C actually say in "Between the Devil and the Incoming Rock" is that the above is the Anunnaki pyramidal meta-structure on Earth, not that the Anunnaki is the only alien power force which controls the planet from the ground or beyond. I just want to emphasize this clear again, so the reader can keep it in mind for future reference.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 28

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

8. The Earth-Bound Anunnaki: How They Look Like and Their Whereabouts Before we start talking about the whereabouts of the earth-bound, I'm sure the reader is curious if there are any photos of real Anunnaki, besides from Sumerian clay tablets. The answer would be that there most certainly are, but they are not on the Internet. However, I have in my possession a photo of a first- or second generation Anunnaki female hybrid, taken in Puerto Rico. This is how they apparently look like (at least in our 3-D reality, I may add. More on this later):

Figure 9a: Earth-bound Anunnaki female hybrid of the first- or second generation; photo taken in Puerto Rico.

Figure 9b: Same hybrid female, manipulated in Photoshop for better details.

This particular photo has a story behind it, which I need to tell. It was taken by Dr. Bordon in a meeting in Puerto Rico. This particular LPG-C member, whom of course knew about their existence from earlier annual meetings, was surprised to meet four of these beings in the Puerto Rico gathering. Bordon told me that these beings were

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 29

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

taller than humans, but not tremendously taller; somewhere between 6 to 7 feet. They look like albinos, with white, kinky hair, which they sometimes wear long and sometimes short (like in Figures 9a and 9b). Their eyes are red when seen in certain light, and the red eyes in this picture is the only thing that has been manipulated, according to LPG-C. The picture was not meant to come in public domain, and certainly not on the Internet; only for circulation between the LPG-C scientists, The eye color was enhanced to emphasize their real eye color, which did not come out well on the original photo. Although I felt I had established a relationship with the LPG-C, and especially with Dr. A.R. Bordon, I was skeptic at first when I saw the photo, because I did a search on the Internet and could easily find the photo on different websites. Some even suggested it was a photoshop job of the Polish model, Anja Rubic (fig. 10).

Figure 10: The Polish model, Anja Rubic

I decided to send the alleged Anunnaki female photo to two different photoshop experts. The first one wants to be anonymous, but the second one was Barbara Brown, aka Wiolawa (http://wiolawapress.com), of Native Indian descendent, whom in my opinion has done amazing research into the exopolitical scene, mostly by using Photoshop as a tool. More often than not, she's been right on! I didn't mention anything about what I'd been told about this photo. In both cases they came back with the same answer: this person is not totally human, but a hybrid. Wiolawa even said she seemed to have some kind of "overlay". Reptilian? We'll see...

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 30

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Anja Rubic, on the other hand, having quite some similarities in looks with the Anunnaki female, is not the same person. The observant reader can see that if s/he looks carefully, but one may ask if Ms. Rubic may actually be an Anunnaki hybrid as well? I will left that question hanging, and if someone wants to look into that, it may be worth the effort. LPG-C guarantees that this is how the earth-bound females look like, and they tell me they know this from face-to-face encounters, and also by using Extra Neurosensing (ENS) remote viewing. To complete the story about the photo of the Anunnaki female, it was stolen (and I know this to be fact) from LPG-C by an impostor, who joined the group, pretending to do so with the best of intentions. He joined under the name Roy W. Gordon. The photo was supposedly taken in 2006, and some time in 2008, Roy Gordon stole it (and other sensitive information) and escaped. The photo was later posted on the Internet by the organization that Gordon was/is a member of: S.A.A.L.M. or the ACIO/NSA (National Security Agency), located in Pine Gap, Australia, known for its huge amount of Reptilian sightings[18], and also one of the major bases for Marduk associated Intelligence Agencies. S.A.A.L.M. stands for "Supreme Annunaki Assembly of Lord Marduk". Fig. 11 below is showing the S.A.A.L.M. version of the Anunnaki female:

Figure 11: The S.A.A.L.M. publication of the same Anunnaki female, stolen from LPG-C (click on image to enlarge).

The information added to this photo in form of text is inaccurate and part of a disinformation campaign by Marduk's Pine Gap faction, according to LPG-C.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 31

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 12a: Map 1 -- East Region of Africa

S.A.A.L.M., a department of NSA, was also involved in a smear campaign against James Casbolt, the MI6 whistle-blower and mind controlled slave, when he decided to go public. They managed to discredit him to such an extent that Casbolt had to pull his website, casbolt.com, a few years ago. We will spend more time on S.A.A.L.M. and their possible connection with the top secret Labyrinth Group within the NSA in a special section of this paper. We have already talked about Pine Gap, Australia, but where else can we find the earth-bound Anunnaki and their first and second generation hybrids? LPG-C did some research on this, and had great help from their Informants. Informants one, three, and four (2005, 2006) led them to Puerto Rico and the Ngongoro region of the Great Rift Valley, in the Serengeti National Park of Tanzania, Africa (see Map 1, fig. 12a, and Map 2, fig. 12b [areas are circled]). Click on the images to enlarge. Informants three and four, independent of each other, confirmed that there indeed is Anunnaki presence in the Tanzania area, including UFO activity. When comes to the Puerto Rico, the LPG-C "were not able to confirm any of the reports received concerning the El Yunque region, near the U.S. naval base at Roosevelt Roads, in northeast Puerto Rico; except for a number of confirmed "disappearances" of people in the Experimental Forest area near the naval base, and the unusual number of albinos in the area." [19] However, Dr. Bordon knew about the Anunnaki activity in Puerto Rico, at least as early as 2006, when the photo of the female was taken. Apparently, he decided to exclude that from the evidence at the point of the writing of his essay in 2007. [20]

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 32

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Most likely, it had to do with the embarrassment of Roy W. Gordon's infiltration which led to the theft of the photo. I really don't know the real reason for Bordon excluding his own encounters with the earth-bound in his essay, though, but the above is a qualified guess. Dr. Bordon is not very fond of talking about the Roy Gordon incident, and he gets easily aggravated when discussing the subject with me.

Figure 12b: Map2 -- Serengeti and Ngorongoro crater area.

I want to add some more detailed background information on Dr. Bordon's encounter with the four Anunnaki hybrids, because it could be of interest to the reader and our further research on the earth-bound. Dr. Bordon told me that they (Bordon and others) (whomever "they" are, however, is not clear) did some work as subcontractors for a contractor in 2006, which led them to go down from California to Puerto Rico. Here is the story in Dr. Bordon's own words: Now, the event that led to the photo from my end. In 06, we had an opportunity to do some work for a contractor as subcontractors, which required two of us to head down under for pressing the flesh and drying the ink on paper. The photo in question was one I took of a female, approximately 6'2" dressed in a very white dress draped over one shoulder in other words, the female in the photo in question. The photo was taken at exactly 41 degrees inclination to the plane on which she was (i.e., the ground floor of a large building/structure that housed a research center of sorts at an underground facility). The picture was taken with an old SLR and developed on site by people from the installation. Four shots were taken of her, two of which were overexposed with one of those somewhat blurry. All upstairs pictures of her were taken with a tele lens. The other one is one taken at the same level and there are people around her. The occasion was a party/reception in our honor, and there were four of them, three males and

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 33

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

this female. We were not allowed to take any pictures of the males, but I was told that I could take no more than five pictures of her, but that all of the background images of the setting in which the subject was had to be changed. This was done subsequently, in digitized form, putting a blank background, which it is visible and evident on the picture. Her eyes were red at close range, but even the clearest augmentation of the digitized original did not show her eyes clearly, so color was augmented manually. That was the only touch given to the original. [...] The other three almost immediately joined us. I know she had called them over via mind-on-mind communication, and asked her if she had done so. She acknowledged she had, and this surprised her even more. On that occasion, in fact that evening, my party and I learned these four were members of the ground group and that their homesite was in Puerto Rico. The one clear picture of her was retouched and background-changed, leaving her form intact but with the eye color accentuated in red. I did not make the changes but I can say that the picture of the female I met is the likeness of the individual depicted on the photograph in question. My question, given the likeness between Anja and this female, is whether there is a biological connection between them I raise that question because it is known that pure SAM [Ša.A.M.i., Wes' comment] and SAM hybrid females are known to engage in intercourse with human males and to conceive children who are then 2nd and 3rd generation hybrids. Same with SAM males of the ground group. This photo was not release [sic] to anyone by us, according to agreement with the contractor of record. We believe we were invited to come as a way of establishing bona fides that the contractor was indeed in direct contact and had access to SAMs. We were satisfied that this was indeed the case, and the case was closed. We then proceeded to perform the work for the contractor, were paid for our work, and that was the end of it. Except for the RWG affair [Roy W. Gordon, Wes's note], which began to unravel shortly after our return from down under. Things got quite nasty with the man who had been planted in our midst, and who had gone down with us. We are certain in hindsight that the man who returned back was not the same man who went down. I am also aware of the Casbolt case, as James came to us for possible deprogramming. Nothing came of it, and contact with him was broken. Now, in appearance, those who are from the home planet are taller than those who belong to the ground group here. The three male individuals we ran across were 7 feet in height or over, but not as tall as those whom we met during Link sessions, nor like those who picked me and my dad up in 1956 in South America during a fishing trip on a River between Brazil and Paraguay. All of this happened about 4 years ago. In the aftermath of the RWG affair, we did a thorough housecleaning of the disaster he brought to our doors. We have a working relationship with many people and used every contact known to us in finding out who and what was this man doing and representing. Among the things he left behind was a clean

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 34

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

picture of this female without the poorly done description of her on the lower left hand corner. I have no doubt this picture you showed me has been doctored and that we were not the only ones in possession of the digitized form now circulating. However, I was the one taking the picture and the picture is not taken at same level and it is not a frontal picture of her. She is gazing slightly to one side of the camera, as Ed argues in his video study of the photo.[21] After I'd asked Dr. Bordon some additional questions, the details became even clearer. He was very generous with explaining this to us (UFO researcher Ed Komarek [http://exopolitics.blogspot.com/] and me). I am publishing this, because I think it's important, due to that it gives credibility to Dr. Bordon's claims of having taken the photo of the female. I will not include information here which is of a personal nature, currently off limit for publication, or off subject. The occluded sections between the included ones will be marked like this: [...] . The rest is word for word. There were four, not five viable pictures. I remember taking five, which is why I said five. Again, the pictures of her I took with an SLR in color from about 80 feet distance, a little less than 30 meters. I was on a first or second mezzanine up, which made for the angle of view, which in the first picture I took (she had just come through a door that was to her right in the photo you sent. Again, all photos were developed on site and given to us before departure. The fifth I was told did not come out. I did not pursue it. Her eyes were, well, have you ever seen someone who was suffering of pink eyes, conjunctivitis, it is something of a pinkish-red from a distance, and the color remained pinkish on closer view - about 6 feet. We were never allowed to touch or be closed [sic] to them. Yes, there are pictures of her, one overexposed, the other with spots on her. These pictures were not "sanitized" (i.e., background removed). There was an additional photo taken the angle of which made her be at profile from me. These photos are in the possession of the contractor, all of them were retrieved when R.W.'s thing began to unravel. However, I am not going back to them to ask for these pictures. That's one dog I am going to let stay sleep. What really happen is a black mark on the contractor and on us, and revisiting the R.W. affair just ain't going to happen. Some of your and Ed's suppositions about Gordon are not farfetched at all and are closer to what happened. But that's all I will say about it. Obviously, there are problems with this photo. We had no reasons to distrust the product given to us at the time. Only one was photoshoped; none of the others were changed in any way. One of the things I would suggest is to not use that photo at all. There are better ones out there. When meeting the informants for the information XXXX [name excluded] and I reported in essay, pictures surfaced corroborating their likeness, although some at simple viewing of the photo told us the objects of the photo were hybrids. There are also photos taken by a fellow I know, who is photographically pursuing them around the world, and there are some taken by him or by one of his collaborators from either Argentina or

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 35

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Chile showing SAMs up in the mountains of the Andes [my emphasis]. I have not seen them, but I trust his word, since he's provided images of the skeletons of giants that are not in the public domain which we've been able to verify with LPG-C members from Russia that these were indeed viable (real) photos. Then there are photos of SAMs living in northern Wisconsin [my emphasis] we know about, photos of which are harder to come by, so XXXXXXX (my friend) has been making personal attempts at getting one or more. There is also a retired master sargeant [sic] who was stationed in San Antonio, TX [my emphais], who had taken distance photos of two of them in military uniform without insignias. So there are photos. With patience we will get to them. [...] Witness what is happening in South America. I'm staying in touch with a Chilean, an Argentinian and a Paraguayan, all of them working with video as the medium of capture. There are technical problems with video - they never worked for us in person with any of them. Digital photography is best. It does not lie and it does not change the subject. Now, let me address something that, once either or both of you come in ftf [face-to-face, editor's note] contact with any one of them, and become familiar with these folks, the last thing you think about is photographing them. There are too many other things on focuses on while this is happening. There is also the issue that some will not allow you to take pictures of them. Then there are some whose body electrostatic and electromagnetic fields is so high that it distorts even a digital picture. Or, better said, the digital photo comes out distorted, like as if the space around the body is broken up. And, Ed, wordy as this may be, until YOU have been in front of any one of these people, that's all I have to explain the experience. [...] ...Please hear this as well: this is NOT about disclosure; this IS about connecting.[22] So, first of all, a few new locations are exposed to us in the above email: Argentina and Chile (and up in the Andes), Wisconsin and Texas. Dr. Bordon also tells me in a letter dated, December 2, 2010, that the faction living in the Andes come from the Cydonia planes on Mars, and moved to the Chile mountain range just a few decades ago. Some of them can also be found along the Peruvian/Ecuadorian border. And here is some recent information I heard on a Pleiadian lecture from the summer of 2011; they say there are underground bases in the Middle East where some of the Anunnaki reside. They have lots of technology available to them down there and they pretty much steer the major events in the Middle East from under ground; partly by changing the brain frequencies on humans living on the surface, putting beliefs and ideas into their heads, which people think are their own. This is done with the intention to create and fuel conflicts of choice. A similar thing was done in Egypt during the uproar in the beginning of 2011.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 36

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

To summarize, these are the sites the Anunnaki have been spotted on Earth in present time with quite some certainty:

1. Pine Gap, Australia 2. Puerto Rico, South America 3. The Andes, The Chile, South America 4. The Ngongoro region of the Great Rift Valley, in the Serengeti National Park of Tanzania, Africa.

5. Northern Wisconsin, U.S.A. 6. Texas, U.S.A. 7. Underground bases in the Middle East Secondly, Dr. Bordon (and the LPG-C in general) are not for ET disclosure, but for connection. It sounds pretty black and white when we read it like this, out of context, but there is much more to that statement; something we will discuss in the "Solution Papers". I actually believe that they is correct, but to understand what I mean by that, we do have to dig into the issue much deeper, which we will.

9. Marduk's Challenges Although Marduk is using ancient techniques to control us via networks of secret societies, businesses, religion, banking etc., his problem is, and has always been, numbers. The latest Intel on him and his pure Anunnaki followers is telling us that they are about 330 in numbers, and every once in a while, they have been the target of snipers. That (and other reasons), have been what has reduced the numbers of the ''Fallen" and the Nephilim. Hence, they have been said to have been forced to do two things; fine tuning their networks in attempts to have them work more efficiently, and reduce the numbers of Lulu's (we humans). The second is supposedly done, among other things, by creating wars, famine, disease, poisoning our food etc. The latter is doubtful. I know that it has been in circulation amongst researchers for perhaps 20 years now (I was one of them), that the Global Elite want to reduce the population down to perhaps 500,000,000 people. That's a huge reduction! If they'd wanted to do that with the technologies which they have available, they would have done so by now. Instead the population has increased to 7 billion. My personal thought is that the PTB (Powers That Be) is just waiting out the natural catastrophes ahead, and they can help the disaster by adding their own weapon of mass destruction to the soup. The manmade disasters and weather changes they have already orchestrated fill other purposes, like inducing fear in the population, and biological warfare and to make duller people, easier to manipulate. The wars, on the other hand, are just the old never-ending wars between the gods. That's where the "fine tuning" comes in.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 37

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Marduk knows about the increase of energies from the Galactic Center and our own Sun, which brings information on gamma rays to us here on Earth. It's happened before; the last time we were lined up with the Galactic Center (the "Womb of the Mother", as the Pleiadians call it), about 26,000 ago, and in a lesser degree 13,500 years ago, when our solar system was lining up with the Central Sun the last time. This time around, during the nano-second, between 1987-2012, many people are prepared and ready to "download" the information from the Galactic Center, our own Sun, and the Universe in general. This is a big thing where numbers count again. Marduk knows he can't do much about the mass awakening, unless he kills off an incredible amount of people, and the question is if he actually would succeed anyway. There are ways (mentioned above) he can reduce the population, [23] but the question is if he will succeed. Some may think that the Global Elite is united, but they are far from it. There are serious conflicts and disagreements on higher levels, which may be fortunate for us, as it delays any major actions against us, and gives us more time to get the job done on our end. The major challenges I see Marduk facing today are:

1. Disagreements within his own circle of people 2. The ancient conflict between the RAM Clan and his own Serpent Clan. There

are still those loyal to the Kingdom residing here on Earth, making life harder for Marduk. We may ask ourselves if we should line up with them to fight Marduk and his cohorts, but I would definitely say no to that. We don't want to be involved in more massive wars that no one can win. And "violence always feeds violence", "if you kill with the sword, you shall die by the sword" etc. Basic karma is what it is.

3. The mass awakening of the Lulus. This is a major factor he may, or may not, know how to deal with successfully. However, as mentioned above, that part may take care of itself, similar to when the Enlil just let the lulus die in the Deluge. In my book, Marduk if not worse than the Enlil (YHVH).

4. The Incoming Nibiru. He soon has to face his nemesis, King Nannar, whom

reportedly is here to destroy Marduk and his network. In all his pride, Marduk may still think he can beat them, which will probably be his Achilles Heal. If we are to believe Bible prophecies, Marduk/Satan will not succeed, but there will be a big battle of Armageddon, where many people will die in the socalled "final"(?!) War of the Gods. Of course, humans will once again be used as foot soldiers...

What Marduk has done is to take advantage of time speeding up during the nanosecond. He is forcing us humans to work harder and harder, multi-tasking to the extent that we can no longer think, because we don't have time. The Pleiadians call this "functional insanity", which I think is a great description of the situation. The result, however, is that many people get so caught up in the fast pace of life, which is intentionally created, that we don't have time to think about deeper issues that would actually help solving our problems. The immediate resolution is to slow down! We need to stay calm, meditate, and calm down the frantic energies, or we'll succumb. This trap is very cleverly set up, and on the surface it seems like pure insanity, but if we look at it from Marduk's point of view, it's ingenious.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 38

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

There are many challenges ahead of us, and the Anunnaki problem is only one of many, as we shall see. Humankind needs to be prepared, or we stand no chance of survival. Of course, as always, mankind will survive as a species, but our numbers will be significantly reduced! Still, there are things we can do, and we have help behind the scenes; both from here and "above", so to speak. And I'm not talking only about ETs, but our own Higher Selves/Oversouls/Sovereign Integral; whatever we want to call it. We have a lot to go through in the "Solution Papers". I have another diagram I want to show you, which is included in Bordon's "Journal of End Time Studies Vol 1: January-June 2007: "Between the Devil and the Incoming Rock", and that is another pyramid power structure, looked at from a slightly different angle, showing the information flow going in two directions; downward and upward, where the latter is meant to be a "clear flow'', where all information goes from down to the top, while the downward flow is restricted and on a "need to know basis". This also has to do with more off-world policies and this structure is being implemented as we speak, if the interpretation of the situation is correct. As usual, when a picture is not clear, click on it to enlarge.

Figure 13: LPG-C's interpretation of the USA/transnational "crisis mode" space security, intelligence, and event response grid at present.

The ultimate challenges for Marduk and his human and not-so-human underdogs will be the incoming planet, Nibiru. The arrival is still a few generations in the future, but if we are to believe what old prophecy says (and we should), the Ša.A.M.i. from the home planet will defeat Marduk and his Global Elite and then rule us for another 3,600 years in something that can be described as Paradise on Earth, or "Heaven of Earth". But who gave us these prophecies? Who gave the information to John the Divine and Daniel? It should be quite obvious to the reader by now. If we study the chain of events here, we can quite easily see who is who. Marduk being Satan, Nannar and his people from the Home Planet being our Savior(s) ("Second Coming" of Nibiru). Nammur, the Enlil, is the primary YHVH (Jehovah), although YHVH/YHWH is a composite of different Anunnaki, and Ea (Ankur/the Enki) is Lucifer, who gave Adam

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 39

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

and Eve wisdom in the Garden of Eden (Edin). According to the Bible, the prophecies written therein are of divine origin, and if we look at the information I shared here a few sentences ago, we can see who the "Divine" ("God") is. I have always been fascinated by the early WingMakers material, and how accurate much of it is after some 13 odd years under scrutiny. James, the writer and interpreter of the material, writes regarding the Anunnaki and the Ša.A.M.i.: The genetic library that thrives upon earth is a form of currency that has no price tag. All I can say is that its value far exceeds anything that human thought could imagine. And with this incredible value, our planet attracts interest from a wide-range of extraterrestrial races, and this is as true today as it was a thousand years ago or a hundred thousand years ago. “Objects of inestimable value and rarity, such as earth, attract beings from outside our planetary system that desire to control them, which makes earth an extraordinary object of attraction. It's precisely this attraction that has brought the concepts of evil to our psyche.[24] LPG-C has discussed this matter with those from the Home Planet, so what does this species have to offer? LPG-C, on behalf of humankind, came with the following suggestion: What we are suggesting, instead, is the development of a network of cantonlike like-minded and like-disposed peoples who accept, realize, choose to, and develop means to open themselves to possibilities. We know the Kingdom is coming back, and the Kingdom and humankind are bound to each other by genetic makeup and past, some of which must be unlearned and undone in the present so that a peaceful future could be possible for both; them and us.[25] Dr. Bordon of LPG-C ends his essay with the following: What we are suggesting is not a war or even resistance to Marduk or those who carry out his plans and objectives. This would be, indeed, futile (to borrow a phrase from Roddenberry and his Star Trek Next Generation paradigm). Then there is the matter of the dedicated human said to be returning with them, who is to assume the combined offices of EN.KI. and EN.LIL. as First Lord of Earth – or something like that – in some kind of direct democracy. It would be nice to know what his sixty epithet names will be;[26] this will tell us a great deal of what to expect from what he is to offer to the remnant humankind left after the forecast defeat and imprisonment of Marduk, following some final confrontation of forces prophesied in biblical sources. All of the preceding would require of us that we change our views of what is to come and face them, not in religious or doctrinal ways, but rather in wellinformed and thoughtful exopolitical and scriptural ways. Why scriptural as well? We also need to know what is required of us in the dedicated human’s program for a post-Marduk Earth. We contend it is not an accident that much of what written patrimony left to us has been altered and in some cases

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 40

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

changed completely to suit doctrinal and institutional hegemonies and power. We are also not suggesting a naive, Pollyanna-like worldview of what is to come; quite the contrary, we suggest we must become informed not just about Marduk and his program, but also about the Kingdom and the dedicated human’s paradigm of an Earth seemingly patterned after what NI.BI.RU. sees 25 working for them. Will it also work for us? We are not suggesting it will not. We are asking that we begin a dialogue on these two seemingly diametrically opposed options, and learn what we may already know deep within us all that is best for us.[27] Is prophecy set in stone? Is it totally pre-determined? Of course not. Is it likely to happen? Yes, some, if not most of it, because it's planned that way. By getting people hooked to world religions and their offspring and cults and sects, via priests, religious leaders, mass media et al, we are constantly bombarded with religious propaganda, which makes it easier for the prophecies to stick. To our favor is the mass awakening that's going on as I write this. Prophecy, however, is always slippery, because humans are very unpredictable. When comes to Bible Prophecy and other ancient prophecies, much of that is more likely to stick, because humankind is secretly steered in the direction of fulfilling these old predictions (there are those behind the scenes who work furiously to make these prophecies come true), but they are also determined by the plans of off-planet beings, over whom we have little control. I can empathize with Dr. Bordon's statements above, seeing it from his, and LPG-C's, perspective. However, as they mention in so many places in their different essays, the Ša.A.M.i. and the Anunnaki are just a small faction of ETs in near Earth space, and they all have their imperatives. We know the history of the Ša.A.M.i., and their mindset, and this is evidence we can't discard. If someone says "they have changed now", I wouldn't take that as face value. Anybody can say that, or that "they're working on unity". The 60 epithets of Nannar would indeed be nice to see.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 41

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

First of all, there are other way to get rid of Marduk and his followers, and that is to educate ourselves (reading material like this), make it our own, work on our spiritual wholeness (spirit/mind/body), and our fear will diminish considerably. It has worked for me, astoundingly so. Knowing what I know and working on myself has left me with very little fear left inside. This is the stage we want to reach. This is a 100th monkey syndrome we want to achieve. Because remember, even Marduk and any other negative visitors, in our terms, are here because they perceive our fear. Those who have read "Hidden Hand'' know exactly what I'm talking about. You who haven't, here Figure 14: "Hidden Hand", a self-proclaimed Power Elite Insider gave us a lesson in late 2008 which became a catalyst for many is the link again, thousands of people. http://illuminatinews.com/00363.html, and I advise you to read it now. Stop here and read it first before you move on in this text if you haven't read it before. Then come back here and continue. It's that important! All challenges we are meeting now and in the future have a purpose. They are mirrors of our own fears and weaknesses as individuals and as a humanity, and they come into our existence to teach us lesson so we can grow; they are catalysts. How well will you and I survive? Well, it depends on how well we master fear and have taken care of our karma. The timelines are opening up and we are becoming more multi-dimensional. This means we also need to face our own fears and overcome them. We need to forgive ourselves and others, create a positive environment in our local universe and always work on having good thoughts about self, others, and the environment, and feel unconditional love towards everybody and everything. Unconditional love and service-to-others are the big keys. Listen to your heart; it's always telling you something important. Then, but first then, can you connect with your Higher Self and become an island in a stormy ocean. The waves may whip against your shores, but they won't penetrate the island. You can watch them, see the beauty in them, and do nothing else but that, then the waves will stop right there and conform into what you want them to be; a manifestation of beauty, not of fear. Think like this sounds too simplistic and too naive? Think again. If a solution is not simple, it's not the best of solutions. Everything is simple in its core; we are the ones who complicate things with our "logical" minds. The Multiverse isn't just "logical"; it's fluid and ever-changing. And who is changing it? We are!

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 42

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

This doesn't mean it's easy to change old patterns, beliefs and paradigms that are no longer working in our favor; we need to work on this one by one and face our limitations and fears, see them for what they are and overcome them. Not by fighting them, but to understand them, accept them and let the negativity and fear connected to them, go. That's how we grow, because our positive energies are contagious and spread like a wildfire. Be a positive example, and others will follow; they have no choice, because you show them who they really are. When Marduk and his Global Elite have no reasons to be catalysts for us anymore, and their terror doesn't bite, their difficult job is finished. The real so(u)lution is not "out there", but "in here", "inside". When we look at things, we need to understand that whatever it is, it has more layers to it; always! Make it a rule to always look at things from the highest possible level, and you will have a much greater understanding for things happening around you. Instead of being frustrated or afraid, think: "how can this serve me? What is the learning lesson in all this?" Only then will you become more enlightened. I can't emphasize enough how much this kind of thinking has helped me! In the same manner, we need to look at Marduk, the Global Elite and others, whom apparently have not our best interests in mind; at least not from our 3rd Density level perspective. They are doing a job that you and I didn't want to do. In that sense; deep inside themselves, within their energetic hearts, there is a tremendous love for us humans and everything else living. They manifest this by being our "opposites" (catalysts). Would you like to play the role of the "evil guys"? Not if you know what karma that would bring onto you. On the highest level, they are here to help us grow. They may have forgotten that on a conscious level (some of them have not), but they are still playing out their role. It's up to us to recognize this and overcome our worst enemy - FEAR! And the "evil ones" feed from it. When there is no fear, there is no longer any place for them. It may be a rude awakening, but this is how it is. It's up to us! The interesting thing is that the earlier creator gods, like the Pleiadians and the Vegans, whom, being the original creator gods of mankind, have better reasons to govern us, instead want to teach us to govern ourselves, without much help from outside forces (including themselves, except for giving practical advice when asked for). We need to think about if maybe this is what would be preferred. Unfortunately, the scientific community; even the rogue ones; have a hard time accepting the metaphysical beings that are here to guide us in these times. Yes, the best of the scientists are acknowledging them and may even say that the metaphysical entities may have their ducks in a row, but don't understand the dynamics. I would say, maybe they do? Maybe they really do; at least the most advanced of them. More of this in the "Solution Papers".

10. Supriem David Rockefeller and the Thule Order Almost exactly 2 years ago (June 2009) I published the last version of the e-book online about Supriem David Rockefeller and the Thule Gesällschaft (Thule Order, Thule Society). It was a blockbuster on the Internet. When I published the first version in the beginning of 2009, I had more than 500,000 visitors in a week. However, as information came in and things were revealed, the first version, with all its flaws and misinterpretations, later matured into "The Myth of David Supriem

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 43

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Rockefeller"[28], which became the last, and much more accurate version of the book, published, as I said, in June of 2009.

Figure 15a: Supriem David Rockefeller in 2009

Even today, 2 years later, many people are probably wondering who he really is and what the Thule Society was all about. So let's try to put it more in perspective, and start with Supriem David Rockefeller (SDR). There is something very mystical about him, which attracts a lot of people. "No smoke without a fire", as the saying goes.

Figure 15b: Supriem Rockefeller in late 2010

10.1 Supriem Rockefeller in Review There was a lot of debate whether this man is legitimate or not. He was (and still is) claiming that he has the manisola of both Marduk, Lucifer (Ea), YHWH (the Enlil), and more. What does he mean by this? Does it mean that he is all these beings? First we once again have to explain what "manisola" is. I am going to quote myself here from the Supriem book:

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 44

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Manisola means Mani (moon) and Sola (sol, sun). It can also be called “moonsun”. It is the term for the lunar and solar principle. The lunar principle is the female, and the solar principle is the male fertilizing the female. It is also the story of the Holy Grail. The Grail itself is the lunar principle, the female vagina. Now, in a nutshell, a Manisola as is spoken of in this chapter, is that only of the superior deities. It is the life force and looks like a bright blue orb. Once it enters the womb, that life force can be reborn and the child will have the same physical characteristics from the past and the memories as well. Wilhelm Landig, an esoteric writer, most probably a Thule member, wrote about Manisola in his book, Gotzen gegen Thule (Godlets Against Thule): They are living, intelligent bio-mechanical entities with a complex life cycle that begins as a circle of light and continues through a metallic form before reaching the reproductive stage. Through a regenerative process, a new Manisola grows within the womb of the adult. The regenerated part is expelled by the remaining mother-nucleus as a new energetic circle of light, corresponding to a birthing technique. This new circle enters on the same seven developmental stages, while the expelling maternal element rolls itself into a ball, which then explodes. The metallic remains contain particles of copper. The optical impressions that eyewitnesses of these Manisolas have had up to now are basically quite uniform. In the daytime they display an extremely bright gold or silver luminescence, sometimes with traces of rose-colored smoke which then often condense into grayish-white trails. At night the disks shine in glowing or glossy colors, showing on occasion long flames at the edges and red and blue sparks, which can grow so strong as to wreathe them in fire. Most remarkable is their power of reaction against pursuers, like that of a rational creature, far exceeding any possible electronic self-steering or radio control. Landig goes on to describe how, throughout the ages, all mythologies refer in one way or another to the Manisolas, which are seen as symbols of spiritual potency, unity and love. [...] These Manisolas and their accompanying manifestations are a representation of the morphogenetic grid in all its aesthetic glory. According to Landig’s book, they have been interpreted in various ways by different cultures. This also has something to do with the thought forms being projected. If one studies the third and fourth dimensional aspects of sacred geometry, one can see that these Manisolas are cabalistic vessels of creation. The Manisolas, or “bio-machines”, are primarily fourth dimensional interfaces with the life force itself.[29]

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 45

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

My first mistake, when writing about SDR was that I thought he was saying that he actually was all these deities. He never did. He said he had the manisola of all of them. Is that possible? Hypothetically, yes! After you, the reader now hopefully has become familiar with the Ša.A.M.i. and the Anunnaki from my previous papers, you are aware of the different major players on the Anunnaki stage. If you look at the beings Supriem says he's got the manisola from, most of them are Anunnaki and related by blood. Now add to the picture that the Anunnaki are/were master geneticists, they could easily create something like Supriem; very easily. They take a little piece of the life force off all these named beings and blend them together. Then they are able to "program" their creation so that certain traits become more prominent than others, and we have the personality the creator gods want; in this case, Supriem Rockefeller with the primary personality of Marduk Ra. But is he even human? I would say he is half-human, half machine. That's what the above definition of manisola explains. He is artificial intelligence, of sorts. This is one option, which is more plausible than many people may think. And this is what Supriem himself says he believes he is. So let us stay with this thought for a while, pretending this is the case and see what develops: If SDR has the manisola of all these Anunnaki entities (and a few reptilian traits as well), who would do that, and why? Obviously, someone who wants the world to believe that SDR is Marduk Ra, or the current presentation of him. Of all the known players, who would have an interest in this, and why? Basically, only one, as I can see it, and that would be Marduk Ra himself. By creating someone like Supriem, he would have a forerunner and a distraction. For many, it's a double-edged sword. Those who believe SDR is a manifestation of Marduk of some sort will keep their focus on him instead of the real deal. Those who write him off as a hoax will be less likely to believe it when the real Marduk enters the stage (or his successors, in case he actually is deceased). Another hoax, they think. So Supriem (whether he is aware of this or not) would work pretty well as a forerunner, and a distraction. Some people say he's just a prankster and a hoax. This is to simplify it to the extreme. There is more to the picture than meets the eye--always. This whole Supriem/Marduk issue started on the Internet already in 2001; very subtly in the beginning, but it was there. Supriem was then 26-27 years old, born on December 22, 1974, which is normally the Winter solstice, but the solstice was off one day that year, so he is almost born on the solstice, which makes it close enough. Ten years later, he is 36 years old (going towards his 37th birthday) and is still playing out the same story. Doesn't it get old after a while? Doesn't he grow up, and gets tired of this game if it's a hoax? One would think so. There are those saying he is using it to get to the girls in the many bars he is visiting (he is a chronic alcoholic), but which girl in her right mind would follow a guy home who says he is Marduk Ra? If he needs to use something to get girls interested in him that would certainly be repelling. And besides, SDR is quite verbal, intelligent, and has no problem getting girls without such cover story. I doubt he even mentions it to them when he works on seducing them. Only a few, close friends know about it, apparently. The rest have no idea whom he claims he is. So that explanation does not hold water, either. The other side of Supriem is the well-dressed business man, who travels around the world, supposedly meeting with people from the Global Elite. He very sophisticatedly

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 46

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

uses his FaceBook to keep people updated on his whereabouts, but in his role, that wouldn't come as a surprise. Still, is he really meeting with these "important" people? We don't know; he could just be a world traveler, using money from the profits from suspect business deals. Or he could actually be doing what he claims he does. Supriem has always trusted me, except when I published my second e-book about him, which I co-wrote with another person; a book I later withdrew from the Internet due to that it was not accurately painting the picture of Supriem. It is still available at scribd.com for those who are interested. Just keep in mind that I withdrew it and am of the mindset that it should never have been published. My co-author, however, is of another opinion, but I, as the major writer, had the last say in the decision to take it down. The trust SDR has found in me has led to that he has revealed a few things to me which I've promised to keep between us. I am still holding on to my word and will not publish anything I've promised not to. All I want to say with this is that he has been more open to me sometimes than he would if he thought I would publish what he told me. One thing he reluctantly agreed to that I could say is that he wishes he doesn't have to do what he is doing. It's like a curse, but he can't just stop it; it's his destiny. I asked him if that's why he drinks a lot. The answer to that was...silence. However, he said this in a context that makes me believe that he was not kidding me; he meant what he was saying, it was one of his "buddy to buddy" moments of confession. And this means that he is not totally in control of his own destiny; someone else is running the show. If so, we already know the purpose with the Supriem character; to distract and attract, in an effort from his handlers to displace our attention from the real deal. But what will be Supriem's end goal? If we listen to what he is saying in public, he will become the World Leader, the Maitreya, the Messiah that the world has been waiting for. He is the Second Coming, the Jewish Messiah, but in new clothing, meaning that he now wants to unite all races and religions into one. And he is promoting the Urantia Book as a reference to how the Universe is structured (similar to the WingMakers, who are also talking about 7 superuniverses), and gives special emphasis to the chapter about Lucifer's Rebellion, which is a metaphor of Marduk's rebellion against (the) god(s); the ones from Nibiru. Furthermore, he is supporting the rebuilding of Solomon's Temple, which is another part of Bible Prophecy of the End Times, and this will be his Temple, where he rules a united world. SDR's vision pretty much coincides with that of the real Marduk Ra, doesn't it? Of course, we know that Supriem is well read on the occult, ancient history (especially that of Sumer, old Babylon and Egypt, the two latter being Marduk's old domains), but why this obsession with Marduk? Because there is something to it, of course. A year ago or so, after I'd withdrawn my second e-book about him, Supriem said that the world will soon see him rise to power. I doubted it, and still does, of course (it will not happen), but I was curious as to what steps he would take. What happened was that he started traveling the world, intensively. Quite an odd thing to do for a poor man, like some people have portrayed him. I have also seen pictures

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 47

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(not photoshopped) with SDR together with a few prominent people of the Power Elite, which I have promised not to publish at this time. Still, I can mention their existence, and I am sure they will be posted in due time. So he is not an innocent hoaxer, although he is not whom he says he is, either. He is not the coming Messiah or the AnitChrist; these epithets are reserved for the Nibiruan Ša.A.M.i. and the real Marduk, respectively. Whether people believe the above explanation about who Supriem is or not, one thing is certain; the man is possessed. He has all the signs of being so. The major signs of entity possession are:

1. destructive and self-destructive behavior, 2. irrational behavior, 3. sudden extreme mood swings, 4. drug- and/or alcohol abuse, 5. sexual obsession, 6. sexual perversion (including pedophilia), 7. pathological liar, 8. violent behavior (including beating up a partner or a friend or a stranger on the street),

9. being threatening or even violent when someone opposes him/her, whether in opinion or in action.

There is more, but this will do for now. If a person has one or two of these treats, or more on rare occasion doesn't mean s/he necessarily is possessed, but if it's repetitive and extreme in nature, stay away. And don't fight these entities, because they are often more powerful than humans are in their current state. [30] Instead, if this happens to someone you know, work with it in dream state. Before you go to sleep, decide that your dreams are going to be about healing this other person. Doing so consistently may help tremendously.[31] Back to our topic now. Before we discuss Supriem in these terms, let's compare with someone else, whom we know for a fact was possessed, and even admitted to it. I am talking about the late singer, Jim Morrison. Jim told us that he got possessed when he was very young and his family was driving in the deserts, and they saw a dead Native Indian by the road. This affected the young Morrison so much that he unwittingly attracted and took on the spirit of this Indian, who showed to be a shaman. This empowered him a lot and helped him become the charismatic singer and songwriter the world appreciates. However, the price he had to pay was mental disorders, most of them listed above. He died at the age 27, in 1971 of heart failure due to extreme intake of alcohol, opiates and cocaine.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 48

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 16: Jim Morrison, close to the end of his short life

He said that by the end of his life, the shaman left his body and he felt like an empty shell, not capable of doing anything of what he did before. So he simply went on a fast, drug related suicide trip. If we now look at Supriem, we see a very similar pattern. It's enough to look at the list above to recognize these traits in him; including the same self-destructive behavior he shares with people like Jim Morrison and so many others; especially in the music and movie industries. I am going to leave it with that and continue with a, in my opinion, more interesting subject--Jarl Vidar and the Thule Society.

10.2 The Thule Society, Fulfillment of Prophecy, and the Gateway to the Gods When I wrote the Supriem book, I learned as I went along. I did not have the same knowledge as I have now, two years later. Still, the Supriem book is something I am quite proud of, because it fills a very important purpose and is a springboard to these papers. There is a lot of valuable information in this earlier piece of work.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 49

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 17: Thule Emblem

Likewise, I knew very little about the Thule Society, their goals, and why they are doing what they are doing. I simply knew too little about our ancient history and the visits of the gods. Yes, I had read the "Gods of Eden" by William Bramley, and Sitchin's "The 12th Planet", but now I have plowed through more or less the whole "Earth Chronicles" by Sitchin, and studied other sources as well on the subject, and believe I've nailed it down quite well. This new knowledge puts the Thule in a whole new perspective. So let us contemplate a little bit on this. Jarl Vidar, the German Thule member, at one time wanted to use me because I am a musician. He wanted me to create a piece of music within certain guidelines and frequencies to open up the stargate to let the gods in. He was of course talking about the Anunnaki ''gods'', who come from Nibiru. One of the purposes of the Thule Order is to help with the transition of the gods when they leave their home planet and come down to Earth; giant beings, armed and ready. Then, Vidar is talking about the Battle of Armageddon, which will happen so that the Earth can be cleansed. He further told me that many, many people will die in the process, but when it's over, there will be Paradise on Earth, where a selected few of the Nibiruans will rule us for another 1,000 years, in peace and harmony, so we can learn how to govern ourselves.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 50

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

As we can see, this is very similar to LPG-C's perspective, although the Thule is supporting both sides of the conflict, and I will tell you why in a moment. Hitler saw this whole Nibiru/Marduk issue coming; he was in contact with them mindto-mind, and he saw how they looked like, and he was terrified. He worked towards the goal of creating the Anunnaki Kingdom, but it was too Figure 18: Jarl Vidar of the Thule Society much for him to handle. It drove him insane and he started acting out in a very destructive manner (some say that Hitler worked with the Dracos and the Grays, and it may very well be that those who showed themselves to him were Reptilian in nature, but still working for the Anunnaki). Jarl Vidar, who is presently working in tight connection with Michael Noel Prescott, and together they have started a new branch of the Thule, which will embrace the New Aeon of the Anunnaki, is determined to follow the original protocols of the old prophecies. Jarl told me that the old Thule is still stuck in the Old Aeon, but he and Michael are here to introduce the new one. Jarl is often talking about Shamballa, the old city underground. He says he's been there several times and met with the beings down there. He describes them as very gentle and loving, and they have lived there for a long time. They now need help, in different ways, from humans to support them in their mission; some of them are reptoids. They probably also need strong, psychic humans, who can survive the End Times (Thule is all about Prophecy). This is the reason for the Triple Helix program; it's one way of connecting with the gods, and communicate with them. There are other, better ways, but it requires a lot of training, and the Triple Helix will probably do as surrogate until better ways of communicating can be established. We will talk about "Topological Thinking" in another Paper. Jarl recently wrote on my FaceBook wall that J.R.R. Tolkien was well aware of what is going on, and had actually been to Shamballa himself and met with the gods. I wouldn't be surprised, because it reflects in his Middle Earth books. Jarl also wants to take me down there whenever we get the chance, but I may opt out on that one. Jarl's only concern is to have the prophecies fulfilled. When I wrote the Supriem book, people were wondering why Jarl didn't care whether those he worked with supported Marduk or the incoming Ša.A.M.i., but it makes sense, because he wants to bring about the Battle of Armageddon so that the world can be cleansed. He wants the war to happen, because he believes it's imperative for us to be able to create the New Aeon; the New Earth, which will be Paradise, where the "gods" will rule for

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 51

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

1,000 years in peace and harmony. Jarl is purposely trying to create the conflict necessary before the Nibiruans arrive and the Battle can begin. Those who survive the "wrath of the gods" will be highly rewarded. A new Phoenix will rise from the ashes. And we are still supposed to believe the incoming Ša.A.M.i. are here for us? Jarl, loyal to his mission, is hooking up with Michael Prescott, who is a very dark person, because he believes Prescott is important for prophecy to be fulfilled. Prescott is using Mardukian Magic when he is trying to achieve their goals (Mardukian Magic being that given to us by Aleister Crowley, John Dee and others). The Thule and Jarl Vidar are not the only ones working furiously to make prophecy fulfilled; most secret societies are, in their own way. We know from my LPG-C sources that the incoming Ša.A.M.i. can be very loving and gentle, but also quite cruel. They have no second thoughts about killing off anybody who is not supporting the Kingdom, or is on Marduk's side. It sounds reasonable, perhaps, for many who have suffered because of Global Elite policies and suppressive acts like war, mind control, torture, rape, and all the rest of it. But the Nibiruans also make it very clear that if you side with Marduk in any shape or form, you will not be forgiven and killed when they come; and your future generations will be punished for your deeds! Why do you think that is? Because they want to free us from Marduk's suppression? No, these gods want to implement their own laws, rules and policies on us humans here on Earth and make us part of the Kingdom. They are conquerors, and by "cleansing" the Earth, killing off anyone who opposes them, what remains is a new generation of obedient sheep. Do they want to terminate the bloodlines of those who supported Marduk, because their future generations can become future rebels? I am not signing up for that even though I'm not supporting Marduk. Now, it doesn't impress me when we talk about "imperatives" here. When I discuss this matter with LPG-C scientists, they are not foreign to the idea, saying that this is the Ša.A.M.i. way of handling things, because it's in their nature. That doesn't make them "evil". In a sense, this is true; it's enough to look at our own human race to see how we solve our own problems, but the question is in that case, what are their imperatives? To me it's quite obvious. However, I am looking forward to a future in peace and harmony, where people slowly but surely raise their frequencies to overcome urges like war, revenge, and killing, for any given reason. If we welcome a species who are using the same violent policies that we do now, here on Earth, it is not helpful for humanity's growth. And it's certainly not in our interest to be part of the Kingdom. Apparently, we are facing a war of huge proportions, where the Mardukian Anunnaki, together with the Global Elite and their foot soldiers (which could be you, your brother or your neighbor), will be furiously fighting the Giants who are coming down here, fully armed, perhaps even with nuclear power We humans, as usual, are caught between, and we are the ones who are going to suffer the most; speaking of population reduction! It really doesn't matter if the war between the incoming and Marduk's branch are real opponents or if it's just staged, we humans are still caught in between.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 52

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Then comes the execution patrol. If you sided with the Global Elite and fought on the wrong side, wittingly or unwittingly, you're going to be killed, and your future generations will be punished. Can you believe what kind of karma all this will create here on Earth? And we thought the old Atlantean karma is bad? Not mentioning all the trauma it will create in everyone living here; we all will lose people we love and know well in this final Battle of the Gods. In other words; once again, they bring down their wars here on Earth--"as above, so below". I am told there is not much we can do about the fact the Nibiruans are coming! And that they are angry! Not at us, supposedly, but at the ones who enslaved us the last couple of millennia. Yes, the incoming are siding with us, but what are the end game? We know what the Bible prophecy says and that's what is played out before our eyes. However, we need to realize that prophecy is either "predictions" made by those who want to enslave us so that we think it's predestined and set in stone, and sometimes prophecy is to warn us about what is ahead if we don't change our ways of acting and thinking. We will discuss workable solutions in the "Soulution Papers". The Pleiadians said we are a very unpredictable race, so let's prove them right! Because of Prophecy, Jarl became very interested in Supriem. He knew Supriem was not Marduk, but had the manisola of all these different gods. And for any given reason, those who put the manisola (the life force) in Supriem's body, gave him a choice which faction of the Anunnaki to side with. Supriem has gone back and forth on his decision whom to serve, but has more recently sided with Marduk again, as it seems. For Jarl's purposes, as we discussed earlier, it doesn't matter which side SDR (Supriem David Rockefeller) is on. Jarl Vidar probably means well, but he is playing with inter-dimensional forces he doesn't fully understand and in his effort to fulfill prophecy, he needs to get in touch with the black arts. After a while, a person who plays both sides in a game where these both sides are destructive, it will certainly cloud one's mind and will backfire. Jarl says that the stargate is open and ready for the gods to enter. I don't know if this is true or not, but it doesn't matter. The gods are coming within the next 50-90 years. We are living through the introduction stage of the "Tribulation" right now, waiting for the gods to arrive (The Battle of Armageddon), and after that we are facing a 1000 years of "Heaven on Earth" (some say 3,600 years, which is not according to prophecy), but Heaven on Earth, in my opinion, can only be achieved without the gods. In the ancient past, while the original Anunnaki were still here on Earth, in charge of we humans, there were periods where there was peace on Earth and people lived happily and in harmony with these creator gods, but it never lasted. The warrior instinct, the jealousy, the power hunger, the great egos of the gods always came to the surface sooner or later, and conflicts and wars broke out again. Personally, I am tired of this kind of past/present/future. I want something better for mankind--I want total sovereignty. We can do it without having the gods show us how to change our own diapers. I know I can do it (and I'm human), so why can't you, and the rest of us? Yes, we have warrior instincts, too, because we are of the same genetics as the gods, but we are still different. We have something they don't have; we have strong emotions. We need to learn how to tame them, but once we do, we are heading for the stars all by ourselves, by connecting via thought and emotion to our Oversouls. The strength and the answers how to become a galactic citizen doesn't come from warrior races. Already before we were tampered with by this Sirian race,

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 53

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

we had something they lacked; something Ea apparently was quite impressed by: we had compassion! Perhaps the reader remembers from a previous paper, how the early, "primitive"(?) apes (homo erectus) sneaked up on Ea and opened his traps, so captured animals that were meant for food for Ea could run free again. Even though the Anunnaki genes are added to these compassionate forefathers of ours, compassion is a strong trait still in humans; it is even pre-dominant! It never left us, and it is there to serve us into becoming multi-dimensional and galactic citizens. Maybe one day we can turn this around and be the teachers instead of the students. Perhaps we have a lot of traits we need to teach the Sirian Ša.A.M.i.? Technologically, we are far behind them, but spiritually we are ahead of them. Do they need us? Perhaps. After all, for Ea to distinguish the emotion of compassion in us he must have felt compassion too, deep inside. Perhaps it was we who taught him how to be more compassionate, and that's why he saved mankind on a few occasions? But in general, do we need them? Not at this point. What about the Global Elite? Yes, they are here because we need to manage our fear. I have grown out of them. I don't fear them at all; I don't fear Marduk, and I don't fear the Incoming. But I love this planet, and I love the idea of a Living Library. I am also willing to welcome peaceful ETs to visit and trade with us. They give us what we need and we give them what they need. I am not talking about a TTP (Technology Transfer Program) which the government has set up with certain ETs today; I am talking about resources. Food we're growing; minerals, water, supplies. This is what is already happening out there in the Universe every day. But we are not included, because we haven't learned how to manage our fear. We are still in the destructive hands of the few, and as long as we are, we will stay in quarantine to protect the off-planet species. A new planet, which vibrates on a much higher frequency than the old Earth? Is that possible? Yes, Jarl, it is! Absolutely! But it can't be achieved by fulfilling prophecies that were made up by the gods who have power Figure 19: An Anunnaki holding a pine corn, and control as their main attribute with representing the pineal gland (symbolic for intentions to absorb us into their Kingdom. genetic engineering) No, we need to claim sovereignty over our biokind and this planet. We do so by creating a new one by our own efforts; not to play out the gods against each other--again(!) The Pleiadian said in one of their more recent lectures that there are groups here on Earth who are working with, around, or alongside with prophecy, and some of these groups are working hard to make these prophecies come true. I am aware of 5 groups working with any of the above. They are, The Thule; LPG-C; the WingMakers;

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 54

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The Corteum and the Labyrinth Group; and S.A.A.L.M. The three latter groups we will cover in detail as well in the few upcoming papers. What the human race needs is education. We can't gather around certain imperatives if we don't know the options. This is the sole reason I am writing all these papers. Mankind needs to know what's going on so we can make proper decisions, or we'll be caught up in something which will be our demise as a species in the long run--we will end up as cyborgs in a high tech Machine Kingdom!

Notes: [1] See, http://illuminati-news.com/moriah.htm; or google Rothschild and Rockefeller. [2] Springmeier, Fritz, 1995: "Bloodlines of the Illuminati": http://www.thewatcherfiles.com/bloodlines/ [3] Bordon, A.R., 2007: "The LINK - Extraterrestrials in Near Earth Space and Contact on the Ground", p. 42. [4] http://www.disclosureproject.org/; http://www.theorionproject.org/en/about.html; http://www.cseti.org/ [5] http://www.drboylan.com/ [6] http://www.drboylan.com/goodbadugly.html [7] Bordon, A.R. (2007): "The LINK - Extraterrestrials in Near Earth Space and Contact on the Ground" p. 53. [8] A.R. Bordon and J.W. Barber (2007): "Journal of End Time Studies Vol 1: January-June 2007: "Between the Devil and the Incoming Rock". [9] Bordon, A.R. (2007): "The LINK - Extraterrestrials in Near Earth Space and Contact on the Ground" p. 54. [10] ibid. [11] http://supriemrockefeller.wordpress.com [12] Bordon, A.R. (2007): "The LINK - Extraterrestrials in Near Earth Space and Contact on the Ground" p. 56, op. cit. [13] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ziggurat_of_Ur#Neo-Babylonian_restoration [14] Penre/Bordon correspondence, January 26, 2011 [15] Bordon, A.R. (2007): "The LINK - Extraterrestrials in Near Earth Space and Contact on the Ground" p. 56. [16] http://lawofone.info/results.php?search_string=council+of+saturn+quarantine&look_here=answer, question&search_type=any&row_limit=30&numeric_order=0&ss=1 [17] Bordon, A.R. and Barber, J.W., (2007): "Journal of End Time Studies Vol 1: January-June 2007: "Between the Devil and the Incoming Rock" p. 19 op. cit.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 55

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________ [18] Icke, David (2010): "Human Race Get Off Your Knees, The Lion Sleeps No More" p. 665-666. [19] Bordon, A.R. and Barber, J.W., (2007): "Journal of End Time Studies Vol 1: January-June 2007: "Between the Devil and the Incoming Rock" p. 22 op. cit. [20] Bordon, A.R. and Barber, J.W., (2007): "Journal of End Time Studies Vol 1: January-June 2007: "Between the Devil and the Incoming Rock". [21] The following information is based upon one of my conversations between Dr. Bordon, UFO researcher Ed Komarek, and me on January 24, 2011. [22] Penre/Komarek/Bordon correspondence, January 25, 2011. [23] Many researchers today believe that the Global Elite (Marduk's puppets) want to reduce the world population to a manageable 500 million, which is a significant reduction, if they would succeed. [24] http://www.wingmakers.com/neruda3.html [25] Bordon, A.R. and Barber, J.W., (2007): "Journal of End Time Studies Vol 1: January-June 2007: "Between the Devil and the Incoming Rock" p. 24 op. cit. [26] Each SAM Lord or King has as many epithets as there are numbers in his/her rank. For example, when Marduk was in better standing with the home planet, his rank was "50" (he later changed it to "60" when he became the self-proclaimed King of Earth and Nibiru. Marduk's 50 epithets can be read here: http://members.fortunecity.com/marchosias/oddities/necronomicon/book50.html [27] Bordon, A.R. and Barber, J.W., (2007): "Journal of End Time Studies Vol 1: January-June 2007: "Between the Devil and the Incoming Rock" p. 24 op. cit. [28] http://supriemrockefeller.wordpress.com/ [29] Penre, Wes (2009); "The Myth Around Supriem David Rockefeller" ch. 6: http://supriemrockefeller.wordpress.com/2009/05/12/chapter6/. E-book, pp. 110. http://www.illuminatinews.com/supriem-rockefeller.pdf [30] Barbara Marciniak channeling the Pleiadians, Winter Sessions, 2010. [31] ibid.

For Additional Research: I. Anunnaki History and the Role of Reptilian ETs: http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/sumer_anunnaki/anunnaki/anu_13.htm#inicio

(Present and Future Challenges Section) 1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 56

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

PFC Paper #2: The Remarkable Michael Lee Hill Case by Wes Penre, Friday, May 6, 2011

1. Abstract Shortly after Michael Lee Hill, a 39 years old musician and filmmaker[1] from Ohio, made contact with me, he was all over the news. Fox 8 wanted to interview him; he was in "The Daily Mail", one of Great Britain's biggest newspaper online; Wikileaks brought up his case; Coast to Coast took him on; Cleveland Scene Magazine made an interview with him, Whitley Strieber's "Unknown Country" posted his story, and he was just now selected to be included in the New Ohio Kent State University Book "Cleveland Stories- True Until Proven Otherwise", and much more...[2] So who is this man; why this sudden interest in him, and why am I bringing him up here, writing a whole paper about him?

Figure 1: Michael Lee Hill

Well, it all started in the summer of 2006,with his UFO sightings over Lake Eire, one of the Great Lakes. For the UFO enthusiast, it may in the beginning seem like just another UFO case among 1000s of others and will fairly soon be put to rest. However, as it showed, there was no doubt that these UFO sightings were real. First of all, Lake Eire is a "no fly-zone" area, because there is a nuclear power plant there, and since 9/11, there is a five mile wide no fly zone around Power plants, nuclear or coal (Michael's hometown is where the CEI Electric Power Plant is and the Perry Nuclear power plant is around 18 miles East and is also situated right on Lake Erie)[4]. Still, Hill managed to take clear videos of UFOs hovering over the lake in their usual erratic flying patterns that no known human aircraft can do. And moreover, Michael says it's like they know he's filming them, and that they are posing for him!

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 57

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

This is quite unusual, but would still be forgotten after a day or two if there wasn't a lot more to the story. The weird things started when Bill Birnes of the "UFO Hunters" group[3] contacted him and another young man from Virginia, who was a former military, now discharged for very specific reasons. I think this is a good place to start our story.

2. Two Comparable Experiences; Two Comparable Blood Disorders In January, 2011, The History Channel published a documentary on Michael and the young ex-military man from Suffolk, Virginia, Terrell Copeland. This whole documentary is uploaded to YouTube[5] and it's a very good idea to watch it before you continue reading the rest of this amazing story (http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VVQHq6rkiU0). Amazingly enough, it also appears that Michael had a face-to-face meeting with Marduk himself, or someone who presented himself as him. But before we go deeper into Michael's case, let's introduce Terrell Copeland to the picture.

2.1 The Terrell Copeland Case Terrell Copeland is 25 years old, and was discharged from the Military due to a strange blood anomaly. The Military doctors could not find the cause to it, but considered it reason enough to discharge him all together. So what was this blood anomaly all about?

Figure 2: Terrell Copeland

In fact, it releases massive amount of CK (Creatine Kenase) into the blood, which in turn super oxygenates the bloodstream. Normally, this condition will create a lot of problems for the person, such as muscle damage. Or usually it's the other way around; severe muscle damage leads to high CK levels. Terrell's CK levels were as high as 2000ul! For a normal person, the level rarely reaches over 200ul. This is all

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 58

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

recorded in Terrell's Military records, which are included and exposed in the YouTube video above. However, Terrell has no muscles damage! And he is in perfectly health. What differentiates him from a "normal" person, though, is that he has had a number of UFO encounters; both close to his home and away from it. He has also had his home broke into and strange people threatening him. Being an ex-military with access to military fly craft, he says that what he's seen is not military. And indeed, strange, similar phenomena, also discussed in the movie, occurred here during George Washington times, and are recorded as such; I doubt those were "military". Videos are showing how big orbs in the sky are hovering around and sometimes split into two. In general, these UFOs are showing patterns that seem way beyond current technologies; even the secret ones from TTPs (alien "Technology Transfer Programs). Bill Birnes of "UFO Magazine" and "UFO Hunters" is an interesting character in his own right. He seems to know a lot more than he is letting out, as we shall see in the Michael Lee Hill case later in this paper. However, it starts already with the Copeland interview. During the interview on History Channel he is telling Copeland that Copeland is an alien hybrid. He is told by his colleague in the video that this is highly controversial, but Birnes is saying it to Copeland with great emphasis and with no hesitation, like it is the plain truth, and he knows it. Copeland himself is not surprised, and it indicates to him as well.

Figure 3: Bill Birnes

2.2 Michael Hill's Sightings Over Lake Eire and Blood Test Comparisons Then, Bill Birnes and the UFO Hunter team go on by visiting Michael Lee Hill in his home in Ohio, close to Lake Eire. Michael is putting on his coat and takes the whole team to the exact places where he has encountered his own UFO sightings over the Great Lake. What is remarkable to the team, and to the viewer, is that Michael's sightings look almost identical to the ones Copland had. The two persons' sightings are compared in the above video. Michael also tells the team that he has had encounters his entire life; hence his own personal interest in UFOs and ETs. However, Michael is not alone to have seen these objects over Lake Eire. They were seen already in 1988 by Sheila Baker, and it was noted in the newspapers from that time (also evidenced in the video; "Cleveland Plain Dealer", July 12, 1992). Even the Coast Guard witnessed this event, and UFO Hunters are showing a copy of their report on History Channel. Michael also tells the UFO Hunter team that he has had some very real close encounters with aliens whom have done experiments on him against his will, just like we've heard about many times before from other abductees. Still, Michael's experiences go way beyond what is exposed in the History Channel video, which we shall explore in a moment. But first, let's continue with what was revealed in the video.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 59

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 4: One of Michael Hill's sightings over Lake Eire

Dr. Ted Acworth got a copy of both Copeland's and Hill's videos to compare them with each other. He had never seen anything like it before, and couldn't explain what these objects were. Bill Birnes gets quite excited over Michael's story and asks him if he wants to have his blood drawn, because he suspects Michael has the same blood anomaly as Copeland. Michael's agrees to do this and they go to a laboratory at Massachusetts General Hospital. Copeland joins the team. The line of thoughts here is that if Michael has the same anomaly as Copeland, is he a hybrid? They are tested by one of the leading doctors in the cardio/pulmonary field, Dr. David Systrom [5a]. Copeland, as well as Hill, are going through the same tests to see if Copeland's anomaly is still present and if Michael has it too.[5b] Both tests show that they both have an elevation of CK in their blood! Dr. Systrom and his team do not want to speculate as of why the levels are high. There is no muscle damage in any of the two persons, and nothing else seems wrong with them either. It remains a mystery. Both tests show that they both have an elevation of CK in their blood! Dr. Systrom and his team do not want to speculate as of why the levels are high. There is no muscle damage in any of the two persons, and nothing else seems wrong with them either. It remains a mystery.

3. Face-to-Face Encounter with Marduk? I had no idea who Michael Hill was when he contacted me one day on my FaceBook. He apparently had read up on some of my material and felt inclined to make contact with me.[6] He told me that the sightings over Lake Eire were just a small part of a much bigger story. He also claimed he's had face-to-face communications with the aliens who fly the spacecrafts (encounters of the fifth kind). He also asks me to keep in mind that he had no knowledge about the Anunnaki at the time, and he hadn't read Sitchin's

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 60

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

books. He had read somewhere about Nibiru, but didn't know what to believe, so he just decided not to give it too much attention, and if it is real, "time will tell". Michael says that when there were indications that the ETs were of the Anunnaki, he found it strange, but on the other hand, he didn't know what or who they were. However, in July of 2008, Michael had a face-to-face experience with these people, and now he does believe! He says he had a meeting with members of the "Ruling Family" of the Anunnaki to discuss a "change in Anunnaki leadership", and what the next step will be for humankind as we go from the Age of Pisces into the Age of Aquarius. In short, the meeting was about if we humans are ready for a disclosure of the alien presence on Earth or not. Are we ready to be disclosed to the Anunnaki and other alien races? Of course, this sounds very odd. Why Michael, a musician and a filmmaker among thousands and thousands of others? Hints: blood anomaly, hybrid, pre-selection, agreements between lives. This is how it all started, and it developed into one of the strangest encounters I have ever read or heard about. Still, Michael is also one of the most credible witnesses I know of, and I have no doubts whatsoever that what he is saying to me are his true perceptions of what he has experienced. In July of 2008, a friend of Michael's took him on a camping trip to New York. They were heading for an annual event, called "Sirius Rising Festival"[7] (keep in mind that the Ša.A.M.i./Anunnaki are originally from Sirius, something that will show relevant. Michael knew nothing about this connection at the moment). His friend, in his turn, had a friend called Loki; Michael is not sure of the spelling (Loke/Loki is the name of a Scandinavian ASA God by the way, ASA-RRR being another name for the Sirians, according to Robert Morning Sky in his Terra Papers. Michael says it's pronounced something like "low-kee"), whom also joined in with them at the Festival. Suddenly, Loki said he was going to check on a friend's campsite to see if everything was OK, and that he would soon be back again. Michael decided to follow Loki to the campsite, and that's where it got really strange, as Michael put it. When they arrived, this camp site hade a round gazebo named, "I Dream of Genie Bottle", and that's how it looked like from the inside, as it turned out. While Michael and Loki were still standing outside, Loki told him that there were some people inside the "Genie Bottle" who were waiting to see him. Michael found this very curious, but he was also eager to see who they were. Well inside, Michael noticed it was a round structure with a beautiful bed in the middle, with beautiful fabrics, making up the whole interior. For some reason, once he got inside, Michael found it very disorienting, and sometimes he couldn't find the door back out. On the bed sat two people, a male and a female, but the strange thing was that Michael couldn't see their faces; everything from shoulders and up was blurry. He says he doesn't know if it was the lighting, but their faces were dwelled in shadows and couldn't be distinguished at all.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 61

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 5: From the Sirius Rising Festival

The male asked Michael to sit down, so he took the bean bag directly in front of the circular bed the two strange people were sitting on, and at the same time Loki exited the gazebo. The male asked Michael if he had performed any of the rituals on site, or walked "The Labyrinth" yet, which he told the male he hadn't, and didn't even know what they were. The male then asked him what he was there for in the first place? "You know what is going on around here, right?" Michael told him he doesn't buy into that ritual stuff, and the male said, "Great! Me neither! There are some strange people doing strange things around here, don't you think?" At that time, Loki returned and told the two on the bed that this was Michael Lee Hill, who had filmed the UFOs over Lake Eire. Then, the male's demeanor totally changed, and he said, "Have you ever heard of "Coast to Coast" radio show? Michael told him yes, and that he'd actually been on it. The male went on saying that there had recently been a man on that show named David Sereda, who was talking about a testimony from a Senior Scientist from Lockheed Martin, who's name was Boyd Bushman[8]. He said this Bushman information, which had now been released, had upset many insiders, and he wanted to know if Michael knew anything about that? At this point, Michael was beginning to freak out, but felt he needed to be honest, so he said he does know something about it, because it was in his film, "From Here to Andromeda"! The male seemed really shocked and asked who brought this person to him? Apparently, he also started throwing out some threats towards Michael and Bushman. He then seems to calm down and said that they needed to find out how much Michael knew, and that they were going to do some experiments on him, and that it wouldn't hurt. A few new people entered the gazebo and performed some kind of mind-reading procedure on Michael, with devices which read/manipulated his "third eye". One

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 62

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

device looked like a small wand with a bright purple/blue LED on top of it. Michael could feel it, and he says it actually felt pretty good. Then they had what appeared to be shiny, flashing instruments and laser pointers, and they told him they were going to remove some memory blocks.[9] The procedures they used on Michael were not painful at all, and when they were done, the male said. "I heard that you wanted to meet us? And that you have filmed our craft." This is when Michael was told he was sitting before the "King of the Anunnaki". The actual name of the person was never given to Michael, but after all that went down, he had all the reasons to believe this male was Marduk himself, who is the one and only King of the Anunnaki on Earth.[10] "Marduk" continued, saying that Michael is part of this Ruling Family as well (the Serpent Clan faction, supporting Marduk), and that it was a great synchronicity that he was "led" there, because now a meeting could take place between them all over a "change in Anunnaki leadership", with a new time arriving for mankind with a new "game plan" to discuss. They told Michael that he and someone else were incarnated here now, at this time as humans (as opposed to Anunnaki) to be here for the end time changes (could this "someone else" actually be Terrell Copeland?). Loki then intervened and said he had spoken to Michael already, and they both thought mankind is ready for open contact with races from other worlds and dimensions, and become members of the Galactic Community. Michael spoke up as well, agreeing with Loki, and adding that mankind needs to be released from the bondage that had kept them in survival mode; that it's time that we humans get the chance to reach our true potentials. The male on the bed, Marduk, listened while Michael and Loki were talking and then said, "If that's how you feel, let's do it." Michael asked, "When?" and Marduk replied, "Obviously before 2012!" He said this in a tone of voice like if it was a silly question and that it was quite self-explanatory. So it seems, Michael is telling me, that there will be an open First Contact with the Anunnaki some time before 2012. The meeting was coming towards an end, and Michael asked if he could see their faces, and they said, "No, you will see our faces ... tomorrow." Then they added that they needed to talk about a change in Anunnaki leadership. Apparently (and this was in summer of 2008), they were about to change Kings. Michael admits this sounds crazy, but that's what happened, and in one way or another, he is involved in this process, and he still doesn't know how and why, and has no idea how to process this within himself. As they were about to leave the Genie Bottle, the Anunnaki hybrid, Loki, walked over to Marduk, whom Michael got the feeling had tears in his eyes. Loki put his arm around Marduk and said with the most loving voice, "Don't worry, now you can finally rest, my King."

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 63

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The male Anunnaki leader King followed Michael out, and Michael thought, "screw it", let his curiosity take overhand and took a chance to sneak a peak at Marduk's face. First off, he noticed Marduk was wearing a glowing, white-hooded robe and his face was not human. Michael describes it as looking "wavy" with very sculpted features, quite like a gargoyle, but actually very beautiful. He was not scary-looking at all. The strangest thing was that the Anunnaki leader seemed not to be physical, but appeared to be transparent. I asked Michael if he could draw a picture of the gargoyle face, but he told me he can't draw at all. I sent him six or seven pictures that are in public domain and asked him if any Figure 6: Traditional gargoyles. We see them everywhere of them corresponds with what he on buildings, especially high up, close to the roof. Some are winged, others are not. saw, and this is what he told me about fig. 7 below: "That first picture is kinda close but imagine the facial features from the eyebrow up more pronounced and the entire face/head was translucent." The next morning, still at the Sirius Festival, Michael woke up and poured some water over his head. When he looked up, he saw a male and a female walking up to his tent on the dirt road, and he instantly "knew" it was the Anunnaki leader and his female follower (consort?) Now they looked very human. The male stopped in front of Michael and said, "Good morning, Commander Michael!" Marduk, here walking around on the Festival campus amongst all the celebrating people who Figure 7: Reptilian "gargoyle type"? had no idea who he was, still had the sculpted facial features, but they were subdued, and he had the most radiant blue eyes. He and Michael spent most of that day together, and he offered to make Michael dinner. Michael took him up on it. "The meal was awesome", as Michael put it; lamb with ocra and curry sauce. They talked, and Michael says Marduk was really a beautiful soul. He asked the Anunnaki leader what he was going to do about the Boyd Bushman issue; the information being revealed in Michael's film? Marduk said that now when they knew Michael is one of them, they will not be able to touch him, so he was told not to worry about it. This was Michael's first meeting with the Anunnaki.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 64

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

4. Bill Birnes of UFO Magazine and UFO Hunters: How Much Does This Man Really Know? (Michael in Contact With Secret Military Industrial Complex) Michael was pretty stunned when he noticed that something Bill Birnes said to him actually became true. Was it intuition on Bill's part, did he know something Michael didn't, or were they just conclusions from his years of experience in the UFO field? I don't know, but if I had to choose one, I'd choose the latter. This is what happened: Bill Birnes predicted during the interview for History Channel UFO Hunter episode "Alien Contact" that we are being prepared by a "behind the scenes" secret Military Industrial Complex Group and given a coarse of study to help us prepare to meet the actual ETs. To Michael, that has actually happened, he says. Michael will now share some personal correspondence between this group that was spoken of during UFO Hunters, and himself. I will present it in Michaels own words (due to that his story was given to me via email, where we all sometimes don't bother with spell and grammar check, I have adjusted this on some occasions in Michael's correspondence for the reader's convenience. Everything else is exactly as I received it from Michael. Any words added by me are within brackets [] ): "A - I was featured on "UFO Hunters" show episode because I am a level 5 contactee. They flew me to Boston to have my medical & blood tests done by a Harvard Professor. The results of my blood test was that I have an unknown blood condition/bloodline that is not normal human blood. I had no clue what any of this bloodline stuff was about at this point. I was featured on the History Channel’s UFO Hunters, hosted by Bill Birnes, publisher of UFO Magazine. On the episode, the UFO Hunters decide to test my blood and the blood of another apparent contactee. We both had a unknown very rare blood anomaly/bloodline, A Harvard doctor uncovered "non-normal human level" elevated levels of Creatine Kinase, which is a very rare occurrence in just one person, let alone two. This anomaly releases massive amount of CK into blood which in turn super Oxygenates the bloodstream; you will see below what the end result is on the human body. B - A group of Military Industrial Complex Insiders began giving me a coarse of study on the subject of Higher Physics, and a true picture of the bigger reality in which humanity finds itself in at the moment. Here is an example of an insider's information given to me regarding this blood anomaly/bloodline [which] the History Channel revealed." "And the whole part about not having a choice just verifies the importance of your bloodline. I'm sure you've seen the movie "Dune"? Probably as many times as me? You know how important bloodlines were to them? You do realize that this blood "anomaly" is something like mitichlorines from Star Wars?

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 65

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Oxygen carrying capacity in blood equals percentage potential of nervous system usage and your bodies over all potential electrical capacitance ability. Whether you use the "force" or not the potential is there. The Scientologists can test for this with that machine of theirs they use for auditing. A question that triggers a deep emotional response would show a much stronger reading with you than most anyone else." [11][12] "C- I then had my life infiltrated with black-ops agents; 3 that I know of. One of those 3 came into my life as a new girlfriend who a few months into the relationship took a blood sample from me during a very private moment, When I confronted her, she fessed [confessed] up & told me everything. Her first words were "Your hard earned tax dollars [are] being put to good use" and that the group she worked for confirmed what they were looking for in my blood, The Human/Anunnaki hybrid Bloodline [emphasis not in original].. Below is an e-mail from this secret group of insiders I mentioned. They began to ask me point blank questions such as the following; (these are actual cut & pastes from talks I have had with them)....." "It is not a complete surprise to any of us that you were a target of trickery, deceit, malfeasance, misuse, abuse, misinformation and disinformation. To top it all off, you've chosen a most public life that looks like it's reflected back to you all of the fears embedded in the human soul from long ago. But, in between all of the horsepucky, you have been fed some manha. But you'll have to figure out which is which, having chosen the road you are taking. As to your blood anomaly, don't feel lonesome. There are others like you, people that don't get sick very easily, who have factors and strange enzymes that look like nanoscience out of some pulp sci-fi novel. And who live very, very long lives, and can appear and disappear at will. No big deal. What is a big deal is what you do with the hand that has been dealt to you. It is obvious you have gone on a testing spree of latent faculties and were mucked with to see what you'd do and how you'd react. If someone wanted you dead, you'd be long gone. But that is not what this is about. What this is about - for you and for all of the observers interested in your trek - is what's between your ears and in that nervous system of yours fed by the blood others want. And what you are lacking is systematically useful information - about it, about yourself, about your descent, about your own biology, about the faculties you have experienced which have led you to fear and then to new realizations. Living a public life without boundaries and selfimposed limits is like being a candy store yourself and everyone wanting to have a lick at you for the taste (as this woman appeared to be the case, until she essentially cut a piece of your dick for the blood of it), for the experience and for the perceived value of the brand of candy you are. The world knows now you have something in your blood that makes you different, even without you seriously knowing what it is. Or do you? Do you know what it is that is so sought after as confirmation of descent?

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 66

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

If not, why not? If yes, what are you going to do about it (the information)? And when are you going to stop the world and get off it, like you would a bus, for a while, to take stock of the experiences and of the questions before you?"[13] Michael continues by telling me he wants to share another letter he received from this same Military Industrial Complex Group Insider (Michael's terms). He can't reveal the name of this group, he says, but the letter is filled with knowledge that not too many people on this planet are privy to: "A LETTER TO MICHAEL Thursday 10 July 2008 Dear Michael: Thank you for your email today. I just received a copy of what you sent, and decided to reply with a letter directly to you. From where I’m sitting, I hear two Michaels speak out – the musical Michael, which is a musically inclined personna that’s gone through a musical evolution, and the private Michael, which is the one that’s gone through an awakening. Inside, both seem so closely tied that it may or may not be noticeable to you. In here, I’m going to answer to both, and hope that the real Michael (who is the blend of both worlds) understands the words I use in replying to your long note to us, and to me. You know, these two Michaels have a distinct role to play in this whole crazy thing we are all participating in. I’ve wondered, and had asked XXXXX more than once, just why is it that you came to us. He pointed out your reply to him when one of us asked whether or not you were sure about doing a concentration with us. XXXXX and I will be your guides, once you get under way. What I am still trying to grasp is who the group is that is in touch with you, and why did they give you approval to work with us. There are several possibilities as possible answers to those questions. But we’ll save them for much later, at a time when the three of us are together somewhere, somewhen. I say these, as a kind of preface to you, because I am a wide eyed, curious, born-in-Missouri show-me kind of guy. But I also have enough gnosive experiences to know how it all works, why, and what the rules are. Gnosive is a word you’re going to hear and read often from now on, so you might as well get introduced to what it means. Gnosive is a mode of getting information that uses all, every pore and cell of your body as one huge antenna that sets up interference with fields and fields and more fields not just in our space/time but also in other space/time ratios. In saying all of this, please also be prepared to ditch and completely discard anything you might have learned about how the human body-mind really works, and expect to have your notions of reality, materiality, spirit, God, and

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 67

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

What Is be severely challenged. Many rebel, but I don’t think you will…. Something tells me you won’t. Gnosive IS our lifeline to anything and everything and everyone else – not just Earth human, but also to other forms of life in the universe. Know-how, knowings, and knowledge we have plenty to offer you. What you do with it is what I stand ready to be surprised and glad and awed. I now know that all of us Earth humans are intricately woven into a connective tissue-like weave, much more than a network, and much more like a kind of overfunction - spokes to a grand wheel at the center of which is nothing and everything, because all of us together are It. This may sound like just another construction to support the Christian view of a Christ, but it is not. Come to find out, EVERY living form in our known universe (and from other space/time ratios) are organized like that. We’ve known this for over twenty years now, and keep learning how it all works, and why. Then there are those who are not from here, some of whom are already on planet surface, some already living around where you live and elsewhere in the upper Midwest. They look like you and me, but you can tell they are not from here. The life forms with whom you are connected to and communicate with may well have "representative" or "crew members" already on the surface, in Ohio and other nearby states. This would not surprise me in the least; in fact, by what you described in your email, I would expect it. Let me then give you a capsule view of what we are about, what kind of science we practice, what I believe is the set of reasons ‘they’ sent you here to us, and what my vision is of why you are here. About us. We are a germ that was planted in the soil of some minds back in the early ‘80s and germinated in some of us in the later years of that decade. The idea did not come from any of us, but rather from one of ‘them.’ From those small beginnings, we are now still a small group (50+) but we are independent of any organized worldview and control, and we are organized as a cooperative that operates by consensus of all its members. It is a handful to operate, but it keeps us out of the penetration and control of outside forces – if you know what I mean. The principle is simple: some can be fooled all of the time, all can be fooled part of the time, but not all can be fooled all of the time. In the latter years of the decade of the 90s, we had prima-donnas and egomaniacs who wanted to be the stars, and it almost tore the whole group apart. But, fortunately, everyone saw things for what they were and decided as a group that we did not want that; we wanted all involved and participating according to individual plans and wishes. Our mission statement is simple: we are here to study what can be said about what Nature is and how she works. The story is continuing to evolve; the whole thing is a work in progress. But we are of one mind about the mission. And we accept help from wherever and whenever it comes, provided the interests and purposes of those sources of help are similar (consonant) to what we see to be the interests of the human race (and not just the controlling forces that now direct and control all significant aspects of our evolution, science, technology, etc.).

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 68

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

We have decided to be wide-eyed about things, especially about those who are not from here. We chose not be label them as aliens, ufonauts, and some of the other words often used to name them. We simple deal with what it, and what is (with the exception of one group) is that they are not from here. Our Science One of the things we discovered without intending to is that the universe and all other aspects of it is actually idiomaterial. Idiomaterial means that it is matter and thought and we can’t tell it apart. Life physics (which is what came out of this effort) literally leads us to seek explanations on causation, not just the unification of all forces of nature (as material or standard physics does). We use a means and method of going out of the body that is technologically supported and allows a person to do that on demand; we called it extension neurosensing (or ENS for short). The theory and technology was developed by some of us. This technology showed us that the world (universe), life (not only biological life but all other forms of life, even non biological ones), God (or what we discovered lays behind the ‘source’ of all energetics in what we came to call the Unum – everything that emanates and finds source at a T [or Thought]-boundary. This is not just a mathematical construction, but a ‘place’ one can see, some can even visit and survive it as form. And yes, it is a source of infinite love. We have learned much from it and about how Nature is and works in the last twenty or so years. We have also learned a lot about ourselves as individuals and as a species or biological kind (or simply biokind). As you get started, your are going to be literally bombarded with a whole lot to read and absorb. This will go on for the better part of a year or so. You’ll be expected to write essays to explain what and how you are piecing together the new picture you develop of how things really work. The focus during this first year will be on how Nature works and how we human beings can master the use of what Nature offers us, and all those who are like us who already know much better and much more than us at present. We will encourage you to write well and often, and hope that some of the things you come up with are publishable. Most of the other Research Fellows are doing just that now, some of whom have already published for all members of the "XXXX" Group to read and comment on. You will then have the chance and opportunity to interact with them by phone and by messenger on what they said about what you wrote, and defend, modify and update your point of view. Most everything you read will go a long way toward helping you unlearn what you learned before and what you think you know about the subject(s). I’m here to tell you that not all is the way it’s cracked out to be. Fox Mulder, the famous FBI agent in The XFiles had a saying on his office wall that said, "The Truth is out there!" under the photo of a UFO. Well, we politely disagree and state categorically that "The Truth is everywhere!" and here you are going to learn to tap into the Truth that is due you by the effort and time you put in seeking it. One thing that you’ll discover as you move into this new realm of knowledge is that as you learn and evolve, you’ll reach new levels of knowing and know how, and that this comes with new responsibilities and patterns of thinking and behavior. The whole thing is really a kind of personal bootstrapping by the sweat of your brow and the mind that is married to your body.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 69

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

We say superposed to your body, because they both coexist in the same space/time. And you’ll get to learn and use new languaging systems that involve much more than just words. An example of this you are already experiencing with your extraterrestrial contacts; you have a languaging system that allows you both to communicate with each other, both ways. Eventually, you’ll also experience things in the Unum itself, a realm of space/time ratios in which some of the spatial dimensions are enfolded and create initial problems to a neurosensor just beginning because it creates perceptual effects that are weird to the uninitiated and inexperienced. But that’s all right; with time, wisdom comes and from wisdom new and far more expanded understanding. In the same vein, you’ll also inevitably going to move to, and ultimately grasp and understand the need of something called topological thinking, which to most of us represents the next stage in mental development for the human race on Earth. And you’ll learn how to develop this in yourself, because you’ll need to in order to progress along a path you’ll also realize is there and open to you. Ultimately, you’ll come to see that everything, literally, is physics – but not a physics that is exclusively material or exclusively noetic (thought), but both – in other words, idiomaterial. This is far beyond even subquantum physics. You’ll come to see and realize that every cell, indeed, every elementary particle that makes your body particulate, is a black hole and a white hole at the same time, and that this merges everything you are made of with a vacuum (actually a plenum) that is full of energy that constitutes a literal ocean of it. The entire universe, which is but one of seven superdomains, is nothing but particles that emerge from and go back to this plenum in a kind of continuous, neverending Texas two-step dance. And you’ll also discover that there are millions of possible infinities which are intimately and forever connected to what to us is infinitesimal – smaller than the smallest piece of matter. So you’ll get to touch both infinity and the Planck limit – the boundary of the infinitesimal – during your journey with us. And you’ll realize that the human mind is far more powerful than humankind today even fathoms. Why you Were Led To Us This is an interesting exercise for us, because we distinctly get it that it has to do with what your friends who are not from here want you to learn and evolve into. You see, right now, they see and sense your good heart and open, connected intention and life giving ways. You also have music in you, but not in the sense of just playing the guitar or composing songs. You see, to create matter, you need music – or more specifically, sounds. Not just any one sound, but specific sound frequencies in combination [13a]. You’ll also learn about this in the course of your concentration. And you’ll learn how to use them to light encode objects out of thin air. Yes, what we spoke about before, As you said in your biography – synchronicity. And the synchronicities do not end there. With you comes to all of us new roads, avenues and doors that you already opened for yourself. You’ve already crossed these doors. When these new doors you’ve already crossed become aware of your bootstrapping new self, new interest will arise in what you as part of all of us bring to the world. In that sense, the mission you set for yourself comes to pass, and with you as

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 70

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

part of a far larger thing. This also translates into the entertainment as education aspect of this whole thing we are doing means. An act you learn to do and produce will speak a billion words. This will definitely get attention, and it is incontrovertible – you cannot argue with it. And the kind of music you may come to know and write and produce will be nothing like what exists today, because you’ll most likely learn to use the true Pythagorean scale, from which creation itself comes. Think also of the value of getting to know your flying friends by pressing the flesh, as it were. Don’t discount it. Maybe being here is what they hope you will use in getting to that point with them. There is a far larger issue, many new problems and immense opportunity all blended into one phenomenon in that. But this is one phenomenon we will have to participate in very carefully and very intelligently. We are not without contacts in this respect. And much, much more needs to yet be done in this area. So welcome to the stage, brother. Life will never again be the same for you. Only you can determine and decide if what you’ve chosen was the right thing for you. I suspect strongly it is, but that is not for me to declare with strong emphasis. Funny, though, the stage onto which you’ve jumped in your vision or dream is not the only one where there is a small audience. This one too has an audience of a handful now. But, as the message to me was, Build it and they will come," said, they will and they are coming. As all the other Research Fellows are finding out now, you too will realize that you’ll learn by teaching others what you develop, evolve into, and become. Finally, and extremely telling by how you sign off, peace is the basis, the platform, from and through which most of what you’ll learn to become comes through. Without peace, you are quite right to say that fear reigns in the human heart and mind. And that we cannot allow to happen. Our own survival and thrive as a biokind rides on it. At peace, XXXXXXXXX Ph.D Managing Scientist" Michael says: "I have been given a coarse of study from this secret group just as Bill Birnes predicted on the History Channel show." "As I stated, I have met many 'ET's' now, The main group I have been personally contacted by in all of this is the Anunnaki; both the ones who have been here all along but hidden behind the scenes and the 'Incoming' Anunnaki as well." "The Anunnaki are returning, and I believe that is why the masses are being prepared with shows such as the History Channels Ancient Aliens show, in particular the 'The Mission' episode which dealt almost exclusively with the Anunnaki." "Last but not least, I would like to share a communication I received from a 'Military Industrial Complex Insider' as an example of what these 'Insiders' are telling me about what they know regarding me & my contact with these ORBS OF Light..." (Michael's comments are within parenthesis, Wes's note)

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 71

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

"I'm termed a sub contractor (W.S.F.M) (These folks make pilotless drones for fire fighting with NASA; (http://ntrs.nasa.gov/archive/nasa/casi.ntrs.nasa.gov/20080008870_ 2008008509.pdf) More of Boyd Bushman's revelations are being run through several labs/tests as we speak Michael, you will be kept up to speed. (This individual is speaking about Senior Scientist for Lockheed Martin Boyd Bushman's testimony from David Sereda's & my film From Here To Andromeda - http://www.fromheretoandromeda.com/bio_boydbushman.html) You will have no doubts by now Michael that the intelligences associated with the orbs selected you, just as you have since become aware that the intelligence agencies know this also but, are at a loss what to do about it. All are awaiting the orbs associated intelligences moves unfold via interaction with you. Part of the reason of your selection was your frame of mind , you exihibited/transmitted neither fear nor anger, painful to these orb intelligences and much magnified, to what may be imagined. Your enthusiasm to transmit your encounters is also factor It is no coincedence that you are witnessing and recording the complete range of UK Ministry Of Defence phenomena, there is motive and close/direct & mental encounters which I believe will be revealed soon. - (W.S.F.M) sub contractor" Michael goes on: "Then through another communication it was stated how the Powers That Be had tried to silence the Lake Erie UFO Story and discredit me in the process, This was my exact reply..." "They sure did try to shut down this Lake Erie UFO story but the fact is the actual ufo activity over lake Erie is growing and growing and hundreds of people are seeing and filming it. All the major media has covered the story and they have here filming these objects as well. Early May you will see this story all over the news. So Yes, They did try and discredit me a few years ago but we are well beyond that now and you can't keep a good man down. I have never given up trying to help humanity no matter what they said because i knew the TRUTH. I will be vindicated now because this story is going worldwide, It is disclosure." And here is his actual response to Michael's reply: "And out of those "hundreds" we have you the one chosen by Enki to be his messenger. er wait....you're the Maitreya. And you need vindication because you don't care what anyone thinks about you.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 72

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

peace. XXXX" Furthermore, Michael tells me that it has been confirmed that Marduk is a flesh and blood Anunnaki, who sits on top of the Planetary Masonic Zion Apparatus. Here are his own words again: "So the plan that's made mention in the Illuminati Zion protocols and carried out by Baal worshiping illuminates is traced back to the Annunaki. Supposedly there has been a split in the ranks of the Annunaki and Marduk is the usurper to the throne. Mars seemingly plays a role in this. There is information leaking out now about a base in Mars, connected to Earth by a stargate accessible from Pine Gap[14] and other bases. But this may suggest that the connection to Mars and Earth share different timelines. (i.e. if you stargate to Mars you may be there now but in the Earth's past ) From my current per view - this earth is a dimension in 3D density where archetypes of good/evil are allowed for choice to be made for sovereign individuals. Marduk - represents a negative polarity and the Marduk-Ra-Mars energy has suppressed the Feminine Gaia Venus principle on the planet to hasten technological evolution on this planet. DR XXX XXXXXX ACTION_ACIO <-------------------------------* SAALM 33 DEGREE OF ZION PINE GAP NTH AUSTRALIA" I know this Insider well from my experiences, but not as a friend. I have had a few quite unpleasant encounters with him, and he will be further exposed in my following Paper. Michael crossed out this person's name, but I will expose him, and thus take responsibility for its accuracy. This Insider goes under a pseudonym, Dr. Roy Gordon, and is working for the NSA/ACIO. This name may sound familiar to the reader, and if not, see PFC Paper #1: "The Marduk Issue and the Earth-Bound Anunnaki", section 8. He was the one who infiltrated LPG-C.

5. Some Additional Information From Michael on the Anunnaki Topic For those who are familiar with the WingMakers[15] and have read "Project Camelot's interview" with James in 2008[16] may find some similarities with the following letter, which Michael received, but he wants to keep the sender anonymous. If the reader is not yet familiar with the WingMakers material, I strongly recommend that you read up on it, especially the "Neruda Interviews"[17] and the Project Camelot Interview, because the WingMakers have a lot of significance to what is happening in the world today, and what will happen in the near future.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 73

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Here is the letter that was sent to Michael, quoted in full (I have not bothered with correcting spelling and grammar errors). The letter in itself has no real significance, because I don't know who wrote it, but I include it here for future discussions, as this matter is quite controversial. I have from one of my sources, that WingMakers Material that is more recent than the Neruda Interviews is a mix of truth and halftruths, and that the website(s) have been taken over by someone else, and that the original, genuine "James" is no longer in charge of the information being published. However, that is for later. 5.1 The WingMakers/Anunnaki Letter "They (Anunnaki) don't deactivate nukes, that would be the friends of the Wingmakers ... The Atlantians who avoided being enslaved by the Annunaki by moving into another dimension of Earth where the Annunaki can't go - so they sealed the grids between the dimensions[18]. Just recently these Atlantians breached the grid between the dimensions... and even though they have been sending messages to their fellow citizens, for 11,000 years now, they were mostly distorted by the HMS programing[19]... humans were too pre occupied with survival, until now. THis era is the first time humans have had a moment to think "outside the box", because the annunaki incarnated, left running the programs of the Annunaki ... the "bloodline" is of the self-created gods, but now the Atlantians are incarnating too... The indiscretion of these human-annunaki is infamous, so some of us may in fact have some of their DNA in us. The Annunaki are the rulers of this Universe, they are not fallen angels, they are another species completely different than Angels (obviously) , we have the same creator, and the same free will. They choose to take advantage of thier technology to enslave entire planets, and ours was just one of them, but we shall prevail...because we have discovered how to turn the HMS [19] off. to turn off the HMS, one must simply say NO MORE ... will participate in the deception of dualities ... and follow through with that. NO MORE! No more will I be part of this deception. No more will I contribute my energy to the works of deception. No more will I stand idle while others suffer. No more will I shake in my self doubt and allow those in power to decide my fate. No longer will I be sucked into the distractions of the Elite. No longer will I reserve my activism for a future time… the time is NOW. If you do this – not only in words but deeds – you will see a space open up in your life; a sort of emptiness and stillness that lacks human embroidery or definition. This is the place in which you can stand-up and radiate the oneness, equality and truthfulness of the Sovereign Integral [20]. This is the activism that will change the world. It will not be the organizations, the sects, or the militias that bring change. They cannot stand up to the Elite. Only the Self, the Sovereign Integral, operating in harmony with Earth/Nature can stand-up to the Elite and usher in the era of transparency and expansion. Do you know of the forming of The Council of these incarnating Ancients/Atlantians? And it's function?

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 74

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

I know their origins...and their purpose, it is the same as ours ...to enhance and expand our own consciousness via experience in Matter, Energy, Space and Time, and to self-create and express our unique identity as Sovereign Integrals from the Central Race ... Our DNA is the same as the Annunaki, they have deceived themselves, in their visions of self-created grandeur. And are suffering the consequences of their attempts to keep the other species of this Universe in a prison... which I am sure was an exhaustive task. Our template has the advantage of being created last, using the best of the features of all previous six species [the 7 root races. See Helena Blavatsky's and Alice Bailey's work, Wes' comment]. The Annunaki's part in the plan was no mistake... we needed this experience so that we might appreciate being who we are ... which is a species with all the abilities of the creators, and each with the potential to be individual representatives of First Source's divine love. SECUs, (sovereign entities of the central race) is who we are... as "First Beings" of Light we were identical, in all but one aspect, and that was that our consciousness was individuated ... so that we would reach out to each other, and discover what makes us Unique, which is the highest attribute of creation... and demonstrates ITs presence and trust in us. We are explorers, first and foremost, and creators second. We were multidimensional being and created a world, this world, so that we could experience "separation". We fragmented our soul consciousness - our true identity, from our body's consciousness, by creating a mind that was totally unaware of our connection to the Central race, so that we could experience the genuine and authentic emotions of an independent individual uniquely Using free will, we each chose what we needed to develop our own unique personality... our own identity. Over ten thousand life times, we experienced All that IS ... and now, as you say, school is over. And now is our opportunity to demonstrate our skills as Masters...we have a little time yet to practice, before the Galactic Alignment activates the last of our DNA that has been preserved for this "time" [Wes' emphasis]. Those who are prepared for when the "full activation" of the Source Codes are "shifted" on, will find themselves fully conscious of All the realities they have ever experienced enhanced and expanded via self-creation and awareness of all our individual and collective abilities. Creation is the manifestation of matter energized, It requires Light and Sound, The Light is what activates us, our Life force, and the sound is the tone of our words ... the expression of our thoughts. Collectively we are a force that manifests even the wildest dreams. once the media gets our focused attention collectively...and manipulates the energy we give to any one expressed thought, it will manifest...even our darkest fears. Being aware of our creative abilities is what the PTB (Powers That Be, Wes' comment] have over us . these laws of creation hold true no matter if you are conscious of them or not

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 75

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

... we, as a collective created this world, and we have the ability to choose where we direct our energy and the ability to choose what we are co-creating. No one can prevent us from doing that ... true sovereigns, can not be told, what they can and can't do, they are self-aware of their unique abilities and value as a member of this species...Sovereigns share one common goal global equality which is perceived universally as WHOLEness.. I like your Wingmakers Painting. I have a unique version of it framed and in my line of sight, given to me by its creator. I assume that you are aware that it is a self portrait of a very real person. We share a common interest in the work of the LTO [Lyricus Teaching Order, Wes' comment]."

6. The Eric Clapton Connection I mentioned earlier that Michael Lee Hill is a gifted musician. However, there is more to it than that; he claims that he is Eric Clapton's son! Before you hit the exit button on your browser, listen to this! Michael himself had no idea about the above until just recently. Let's start on this end; Michael got a letter from Bill Birnes, UFO Hunters: From: William J Birnes <XXXXXXX.net> To: Michael Hill <xxxxx.net> Hi, Michael, Hope you are well. I am writing the manuscript for the UFO Hunters season 1 book now and am up to your chapter on alien contact. I was hoping I could either get on the phone with you or through email, update your information, especially as it regards your biological parents. I think it would be a real blockbuster to have an interview with you about what you learned after the episode when you spoke to your biological mom. What do you think? Best, Bill Birnes What Bill was about to announce to the world in his new book is what came out of the blood tests; when the History Channel found out about Michael's blood anomaly from the Harvard Professor. They found out he was adopted, and asked Michael if he could track down his biological parents to see if the blood issue was a family genetic trait.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 76

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 8: Eric Clapton and Alice Ormsby Gore [photo probably late 1960s]

For the first time in his life, Michael got in touch with his biological mother, and also got to meet his two half-sisters. He says it was great to meet them all, and that he should have done it sooner, but time was apparently not right until recently. The shocker came when Michael asked his mother who his biological father is, and she told him, Eric Clapton! And she had plenty of fact and information to back up that claim. Michael tells me: I don't know if I will ever get to meet Eric, I have just about as much of a clue how to contact him as any of you do. I love my Father and Mother who raised me so much, It's not much of an issue but I sure would love to get to meet him and jam with him :-) I was born March 11, 1968 so I would have been conceived around June of 1967 which would make Eric around 22 then. She told me she was very upset because Eric had brought his new girlfriend to the Hospital when I was born, she told me that this girl's father held a lot of power in the music industry due to my own research. I believe that girl was Alice Ormsby Gore who was the youngest daughter of William David Formby Gore, 5th Baron Harlech, A Lord in England. You see, William David Ormsby Gore has serious ties into the Entertainment (Illuminati) business and these people had already planned on Eric going Solo out of Cream and hooking up with Alice and me, and my mother were not part of that plan. It is known that Eric started dating Alice Ormsby Gore in 1968.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 77

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

My Mother did tell me Eric has a blood Anomaly as well, Eric had told her he was a blueblood boy or something to that effect. My Biological Mother and two half sisters have had no ET contact or UFO sightings that they recall. In early 2008, I interviewed a woman named Debra Hunter-Pitts, who claims to have been the lover of Eric Clapton and Carlos Santana. She also claims to have two sets of twins with both. You can find the interview here: http://www.illuminatinews.com/Articles/75.html. Normally, when I write something, it starts a debate; so also in this case. Some people emailed me and said that it sounded plausible, while others discarded Ms. Hunter-Pitts as a fraud. I got to feel her out, and I know she is not a fraud. She herself truly believes in her story; from the beginning to the end. Michael himself mentions this article to me, because he stumbled upon it, most likely when he was looking for information on his dad. He says it's a very interesting connection, and that he knows Eric was involved in some anti-government work behind the scenes.

7. Michael's Meeting With a Known Musician, Claiming To Be of High Order and in Connection With the Arcturians It's obvious to me that Michael is here on Earth in this incarnation for a specific purpose, out of the "ordinary". He has a blood anomaly, which attracts certain ET races; both those whose imperatives are clashing with our best interests, and those who may be here to support us. Michael has another "ET" experience, which happened after his encounter with Marduk at the Sirius Rising Festival. Michael is telling me he has met a "cosmic being", who is of the "Ancients". This person also told him he had had an encounter with the Arcturians ,[21] face-to-face. According to Edgar Cayce, the well-known "sleeping prophet", the Arcturians are the most evolved beings in the Universe at this moment. If this is true or not is up for debate, but they are certainly a very positive, evolved race. This person that Michael met also knew about the blood anomaly, without having seen the UFO Hunter show! (Again, to protect his sources, Michael does not want to reveal who this person is in public, but he revealed it to me. Michael's source is indeed a known musician; I have proof that Michael knows him well by now, and when you see this man on stage and in interviews, you see a very evolved being with one of the most positive energies I've ever felt. This is one of the reasons I am publishing this part of Michael's story. When you watch and listen to him, he immediately raises your vibrations). When Michael has asked him who he is, this man says, "I'm of the Highest of the Most High". He says further that the Ancients were a very evolved race who were tricked into the human lives/condition, and around 5,000 years ago their physical human incarnations were slaughtered somehow. Michael continues: These Ancients decided to ascend into higher realms and at the right time - at the end of this current cycle (Now) 2012, They would reincarnate under the

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 78

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Radar so to speak into this timeline as humans to awaken and bring great change and "Heaven On Earth" This Spiritual master told me that there is a Bloodline connected to these Ancients in Human form, A "Royal" Blood Line. Michael has spent quite some time with this other musician, and out of the blue, as the two were walking the streets of Pittsburgh, he suddenly said to Michael, "Michael, you have the bloodline." Michael was caught off guard, but told his friend that indeed he had a blood anomaly, but he doesn't know what it really means. His friend replied, "It's Royal Blood". Michael said he doesn't know what this means either in relation to himself, but his friend just said, "I know...but you will!" And again, apparently, this man had not seen the UFO Hunter Show. So Michael asked him how he would know, then? His friend told him, "Michael, I can tell the minute I meet someone if they have the bloodline. That's why I am incarnated right now; to meet and greet the Ancients as they awaken." He went on to say, "Michael, The last time we met was 5,000 years ago, and before that was 9,000 years ago, You have the Bloodline; you are one of the Ancients." Furthermore, he went on to tell Michael that long ago, before the last Pole Shift, many Ancients were tricked into human incarnations, not being told how dark this realm had become, and they were slaughtered, These beings ascended into the higher realms and waited for the right time to begin incarnating back into this timeline again, at the end of this current cycle to help humanity through these difficult changes. Michael then sent me a quote of something he found, which does not originate from his friend, but is related and he was wondering if I could post it as a side note. Here goes: There was a meeting of galactic leaders as to why the Earth should be helped or not... There were a lot of quick judgments as to leaving the Earth and its inhabitants to their fates of doom and destruction. But there were also those who wanted to help and they couldn't just come here to do it themselves the way they were because it would violate free will... so there was a test given even to the ETs. To be born here on Earth as humans, to be in THEIR shoes so to speak and if they gave in and were corrupted, the earth shall be left to it's destruction. If they could keep the light and awaken within this nightmare as humans, they can change things and bring about the golden age so no free will would be breached because it would all be done from within enemy territory, from behind enemy lines! This planet is not to fail for it would affect all else because everything is connected. To round off, I want to quote Michael directly once again, regarding more information coming from his friend, so the reader gets it directly from the source: He [Michael's friend] said he is responsible for the assembly of a Council of people/beings who have this "Royal" bloodline and there is 150 seats to this council. He told me I was number 63 out of the 150 and I was introduced to number 65 and was told who number 64 is.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 79

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

I can't reveal their identities at this time for obvious reasons. He told me more of why these beings were slaughtered in the past. These beings came from higher realms and were somewhat tricked into human incarnation not realizing how Dark this realm had become. These beings were "prophets and seers" to the pharaohs of Egypt and these beings held the keys & knowledge to multi-dimensional travel and the pharaohs wanted this knowledge above all else, when the "Ancients" refused the pharaohs this knowledge because they knew the knowledge would be misused, an order was given to slaughter the "Ancients". This being told me he's waiting for the scientists of this council of 150 to awaken. I asked him so what happens when you find all 150? He responded......"Were going to have a meeting" He went on to tell me he didn't know how many people of the bloodline were incarnated, could be thousands but this council he is forming is first come or Awaken first serve.

8. Afterthoughts and Conclusions Although this story may sound incredible to the reader, Michael's UFO case got quite some publicity, and no one can really explain what Michael saw over Lake Eire. As I said earlier, Michael is a musician, who needs to think of his career, but still comes out in the open with this information. I have talked to him quite extensively, and the way he comes across, there is virtually no way I think he is a hoax, or is at all lying. He appears to be a very honest and pleasant man, and his energies are very comfortable and nice. If anything needs to be added to that, I would say he is very curious by nature, and perhaps gets more involved with certain beings than is good for him, but who am I to judge? His story is very coherent, though, and ties in to much of my research. Many people, at least in the UFO field, can probably accept Michael's videos as being genuine, but what about the encounters with the Anunnaki Leadership? We have previously discussed in other papers that the Anunnaki are not genuinely humanoid; some of them are reptilian and reptilian hybrids, and I believe we can establish as a fact that they are also working in unison with factions of Reptilians and Dracos; perhaps even the Grays (I am personally inclined to believe the Gray connection is true, but need more proof. Dr. Bordon, according to himself, asked an Anunnaki in one of the LINK meetings if they were working with the Grays, and the answer was a definite "no!"; evidence point in the opposite direction). This person, whom Michael met on the bed at the Festival, shape-shifted from a gargoyle type of being to a humanoid, who could not be distinguished from any other human in a crowd.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 80

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The Anunnaki are not 3rd Density beings; the are interdimensional and capable of bending and manipulating light, something Life Physics terms LERM (light encoding of a reality matrix), so that things we see can have a different shape and form if we look at them from a different light perspective. Some alien life forms are extremely savvy at this. Lastly, I want to make a comment about something which concerns me, though. Michael seems to, out of curiosity maybe, connect with beings who have different-even clashing--imperatives. My concern is his connection with S.A.A.L.M., Dr. Roy W. Gordon, and the people at Pine Gap. If what the Ša.A.M.i. from the home planet Nibiru are saying about being connected with Marduk in any shape and form is true, Michael is in great danger, and so is his family and descendents, unless he is highly protected by positive forces. Michael says that he thinks Marduk is a very nice person, who is here to play the role of the "bad guy" as a catalyst for us, to help us wake up spiritually; that it is a sacrifice on his part. Even though this, on some level, is true, it doesn't mean that we who are aware of this should hook up with the "catalyst". Our task, as I see it, is to acknowledge that a certain person is a catalyst and move on towards a higher level of consciousness. Still, I have noticed that Michael is very determined and has made his choices. It is not for me to decide what is right and wrong, because there simply are no such things in a Free Will Universe. All is experience and we are here to learn what we are setting ourselves out to learn, dealing with the karma we are creating (and have created in the distant past) and then move on. And whatever choices we make, it's quite a ride!

Notes: [1] Michael is most famous for his video series, "From Here to Andromeda": http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2nmn4xHF1o4 [2] http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2011/05/03/every-year-they-get-closer-ufo-fan-hails-clearestvideo-yet-and-says-they-know-im-filming-them/ [3] http://www.history.com/shows/ufo-hunters/bios/bill-birnes [4] Perry Nuclear Power Plant is located 35 miles north-east of Cleveland, Ohio. Since 9/11, TFRs (Temporary Flight Restrictions) has been put in place around this area. According to section 99.7 in the "Code of Federal Regulations", "Pilots must be aware of standing notice, issued under Section 99.7, advising them to avoid the airspace above, or in proximity to, sites such as nuclear power plants, power plants, dams, refineries, industrial complexes, military installations, and other similar facilities." [5] http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VVQHq6rkiU0 [5a] http://www.massgeneral.org/transplant/doctors/doctor.aspx?ID=16720 [5b] I am guessing the spelling of certain people's names, for which I apologize. No one is spelling them out in the video, so I have had to make qualified guesses. If someone knows about these people, feel free to email me so I can make corrections.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 81

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________ [6] Penre/Hill correspondence, April-May 2011. [7] http://www.brushwood.com/sirius.html [8] The interview between Sereda and Dr. Bushman can be watched here: "Secret UFO Propulsion Systems – Boyd (Lockheed Martin)", http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2011/04/17/secret-ufopropulsion-systems-boyd-lockheed-martin/ [9] This sounds very much like memory blocks which are put in place after alien and military abductions to have the abductee forget the experience. And Michael knows he has had some abductee experiences on top of everything else. [10] Some Intel is indicating that Marduk is dead. I can't reveal my sources, or the details, for obvious reasons (this is sensitive). He was still alive in the beginning of the 21st Century, but died any time between there and a few years ago. This means that the person, whom Michael talked with, still could have been Marduk, but also an attempt to show himself off as Gbril, Marduk's son, who supposedly now has taken over the Throne of Earth. In other words, Marduk could potentially still have been alive at the time of Michael's encounter and died soon after. There are indication in Michael's story which support this theory. Whatever the truth is on this matter, in this paper I will refer to the male as Marduk, because this is how Michael perceived him. [11] Penre/Hill correspondence, April-May 2011. [12] The machine this Insiders talk about is called an e-meter, or electro-meter, which responds to emotional charge in the body/mind/spirit complex. A carefully planned question is asked to the client (preclear, or pre-OT in Scientology terms), and if the question has any relevance to the client, s "read" is detected by a needle on the machine. This is a working principle, which I have been subjected to thousands of times during my Scientology period. I have also sat on the other side of the machine and asked questions to others. I can testify that it works.

Figure i: Scientology e-meter, also showing the "cans" the preclear holds to emit the electric current to the e-meter. This young lady is thinking of something which bothers her; an electric current from her thoughts transfers through the wires to the e-meter, and the needle reacts to the current. This way, the emotional trauma can be located in the preclear's subconscious mind, brought to surface, confronted via "two-way communication", and discharged. The result is that the preclear gets rid of emotional trauma connected with the incident. A simple principle, and it should be obvious to the reader, after have read my "Science Papers", that this principle works. [picture source: http://www.rtc.org/religion/pg003.html] [13] Penre/Hill correspondence, April-May 2011.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 82

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________ [13a] Now compare this "sound information" with what Jarl Vidar wanted me to do--compose something that could open a stargate. I have known since I was a little kid that sound is the key to creating matter; from the smallest to galaxies, to entire universes. I told my friends this at a very young age, and of course they thought I was a nuthead. However, no matter what they said, I knew I wasn't. [14] Pine Gap, Australia, is a base for the U.S. National Security Agency (NSA), or rather a semi-secret branch of it called ACIO. We will go more into details about this organization in the next Paper. They are quite significant in this whole scheme. [15] http://wingmakers.com [16] http://wingmakers.com/downloads/Interview_James_PC.pdf [17] http://wingmakers.com/interviews.html [18] This is basically what we are going to do with our energy work and our activation of dormant DNA. If we choose this path, we will, just like during the old Atlantis Era, create a New Earth on a higher frequency where the Anunnaki can't go. History repeats itself! [19] Human Mind System (HMS) – The Human Mind System is separated into three primary functional mechanisms: The unconscious or genetic mind, the subconscious, and the conscious. These three components intermingle to form what most people term consciousness. The HMS is the most opaque and distorted veil that has stood between humanity and its true self, perverting its self-expression within the domains we call reality. ref: http://projectcamelot.org/james_wingmakers_sovereign_integral.html [20] http://projectcamelot.org/james_wingmakers_sovereign_integral.html [21] For more information on the very pleasant Arcturian race, see Dr. Norma J. Milanovich's excellent book: "We, the Arcturians (A True Experience)" from 1990.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 83

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(Present and Future Challenges Section) PFC Paper #3: New Revelations on the Story about the Wingmakers, the Labyrinth Group, and S.A.A.L.M by Wes Penre, Friday, May 26, 2011

1. Abstract This is a hot potato! When I'm writing these words, I am still not exactly sure how to approach these related subjects. Many people have read the WingMakers Material (WMM)[1] and many have been very inspired by it. Others have come out and proclaimed that it's all a hoax. Here is news for everybody who reads this; it's not a hoax. However, it's a pretty complicated issue, and there are a lot of organizations and agendas connected to it. So I am going to tell you the real story behind the WingMakers to the best of my ability; how it is connected to both LPG-C (Life Physics Group in California)[2], The Labyrinth Group[3] (allegedly in California, but a reliable anonymous source is telling me U.S. East Coast), NSA (National Security Agency), ACIO (Advanced Contact Intelligence Organization), and S.A.A.L.M. (Supreme Annunaki Assembly of Lord Marduk, Pine Gap, Australia). The last three are all connected, as we shall see. The whole WingMakers issue runs through the Military Industrial Complex and all the way to the top, as they say, but it didn't use to be that way. Figure 1: From the original WingMakers site, now located at wingmakers.us

Confused yet? Good, because that's what "they" want you to be. So let's see how we can hopefully make it clearer with this paper.

2. How the WingMakers "Saga" All Began First of all, who am I to think I am able to shed some light to this confusing issue? Well, for a couple of reasons, actually. The WMM fascinated me from the first time I read it, and has ever since. For a long time I was absolutely hooked on it, like so many other people before and after me. And when someone gets that hooked on it, there is more than a little truth in it. I quoted, elaborated on, and used a lot of the material on the previous version of my website, wespenre.com, and I made the connection to so many other subjects I had been researched earlier. Then,

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 84

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

happenstances took me on a journey which made me doubt at least some of the WMM. So I started pulling the strings and what I found out was quite astounding.

Figure 2: Chaco Canyon, New Mexico, where the Ancient Arrow site is located, according to the WingMakers Material.

But more important than that; I got much of it relayed to me from the "horse's mouth, "Dr. Anderson", who was the instigator of the WMM in 1998. I know where he is, but the circumstances are such that I can't reveal it in public at this moment. However, he has relayed to me the incredible story of the WingMakers Material.

2.1 What is Myth and what is true? Here is the Key People have, since the first WingMakers site launched in 1998[4], had a problem with that the WMM is supposedly both myth and truth mixed into the story line, like has been done so often by fantasy and science fiction writers. Of course, the discussions have been, what is true and what is fable? Well, if we know how certain controlling forces work to obscure true information we also know that they often put out the truth in plain sight to blind us! It's a little mind game they are playing. Let me explain how this was done. I know that many people who read these words have already read the WMM, whether it's the original version, the later version, or both. Either way, I urge you to read this whole paper from beginning to end, because hardly any reader of the WMM has read it from the perspective I am now going to present it. I want to start from the beginning, with the original "Dr Anderson Interviews", published in late 1998. Once the current version was published on the Internet, the original one was taken down. Luckily, there were people like former White House employee, Fred Burke (http://www.wanttoknow.info/) , who had downloaded the whole original website and liked it so much that he created his own domain, http://wingmakers.us. Thus, the original site is still available to the public.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 85

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

"Dr. Anderson" is of course a made-up name, used by a true defector from the ACIO and the Labyrinth Group. What Dr. Anderson presented in his interview with "Anne" is true in the sense that the defector told her what he knew from the level it had been presented to him within the organization in which he once belonged (see later in this paper). However, he did withhold some of what he knew and hid some of it by speaking in mythological and symbolical terms, probably both to protect himself, and due to the fact that if you want to teach a child quantum physics, you don't start him/her out with the higher math. He also changed the names of the ET group, the Corteum; a few dates, and a few other things, for what he considered, "good reasons," But my point is: Dr. Anderson was genuine.

2.2 How the WingMakers Site Was Found For you who remember some of the early WMM, this is a refresher, and for the rest, here is the story. In 1972, according to the early material, the Ancient Arrow (AA) site was found in New Mexico by a few young hikers. By coincidence, they found the caverns which led deep into the mountain side. These caverns were spreading out like veins from an aorta on both sides of a long tunnel. Each side-tunnel ended in a chamber, 23 all together, and these chambers all had artifacts in them. The young hikers were in awe because they figured what they saw couldn't be of this world!

Figure 3: Chamber 4 Painting [from WingMakers.us]

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 86

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The site was of course quickly taken over by the U.S. Military and isolated from the public. To make a long story short, the military came to the same conclusion as the hikers, that these artifacts, in form of out-of-this-world paintings, were something they'd never seen here on Earth before. Hence, the site was classified and the NSA (National Security Agency) took over from there and put an Above Top Secret stamp on the project. Out of NSA, a secret organization had branched out, possibly already in the early 1950s, when the U.S. government made treaties with alien races. This organization was called the ACIO (Advanced Contact Intelligence Organization), headquartered in Virginia (California according to the later WMM), with branches in Belgium, India, and Indonesia. The AA was incorporated by the ACIO, because they early on understood that these painting and other things they found in the chambers were not made by some old Indian tribe that suddenly may have left the area (although there were indicators that there indeed was an Indian tribe that all of a sudden, hundreds of years ago, disappeared in "thin air" in the area). The site was traced back to around 800 AD. When they further explored the caverns and the chambers, they found other artifacts besides the paintings, such as poetry, music discs and a disc containing more than 8,000 pages with written material in a language not even the best linguists at the ACIO could decode. The Ancient Arrow Project was put on ice for 22 years, due to that we didn't seem to have the technology to open the disc and decipher what was written on it. However, in the earlier part of the 1950s, a young genius hit the scientific field like a torpedo. He quickly outsmarted his professors to such a degree that they didn't want to have anything to do with him; it was too embarrassing. This young man with his long hair and ponytail simply refused to buy into the current scientific dogma. He wanted to build computers powerful enough to use for time travel; like something that was taken from a science fiction novel. Of course, he didn't get much response from the academia of that time. Although he was rejected by most professors; eccentric at best, and insane at worst; the ACIO quickly recognized his genius and hired him in 1956, when he was only 22 years old. He was literally obsessed with time travel, and no one knew for sure why he had this exclusive drive; perhaps it was a mystery even for himself. ACIO eventually put him on this above top secret project to develop Blank Slate Technology (BST), which is a very specific type of time travel (he called it "Freedom Key"), which we will look into much more in a separate papers. We need to understand that the ACIO was the primary interface with alien technologies and how to adapt them into society as well as the military industrial complex. When this young genius came into the picture, the ACIO was already savvy with some alien technologies, which they had gained access to via so called "Technology Transfer Programs" (TTP), apparently starting in 1954 (if not earlier), when President Eisenhower had an encounter with a faction of the Grays, which resulted in an exchange program where the U.S. government at the top level was given alien technology in exchange for abductions of a limited amount of humans for genetic experiments.[5] It needs to be noted, though, that not all Grays agreed with this exchange, but there is a faction of them, as mentioned in previous papers, whose purpose is to further develop their own genetics, using human DNA to help

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 87

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

them accomplish this. The experiments done on abductees (mostly without their conscious consent), are often executed without even using anesthesia. In the abductors own non-emotional state of mind, they look upon the human species as laboratory rats; no more, no less. However, we have traits in our DNA/RNA which are interesting to them; we have feelings and emotions! These are ancient traits which were put there by our original seeders, the Lyrans and other species they are interconnected with. This young genius, later known as "Fifteen", quickly became the head of the ACIO and its offshoot, the highly secretive "Labyrinth Group", possibly located on the U.S. East Coast. As it were, he was contacted by two different ET races, whom were both willing to offer technology in exchange for something we have here on Earth that they wanted. One of the groups was the same Grays I mentioned above, and the other group is known in the WMM as the Corteum. Fifteen rejected the Grays but stayed with the Corteum. So who are the Corteum? Some say they are part of the Mardukian Anunnaki, left here on Earth and now connecting with this group of secret scientists. However, I said in the beginning that the ET issue is complicated. The Ša.A.M.i. and their Anunnaki work together with the Reptilians and possibly the Grays on one level, while independent groups of the same basic race (splinter groups) work independently from those on Nibiru. This ET group, code named "The Corteum", is an old renegade group of the Ša.A.M.i., still living on a planet around Sirius B, but have been involved in TTP (Technological Transfer Programs) for quite a while with the human U.S. Government. They have now deceived this serious, otherwise human-friendly group of scientists into building a crystalline-scalar-mechanics based weapons technology to prevent an alien invasion.[5a] They are after the 7 Tributary sites, where New Mexico is only the first. They want to use something they call the "7 Trumpets" technologies to open up wormholes. The technology that the Corteum have inspired Fifteen and his Labyrinth Group to develop is to secretly (unbeknownst to the human group) re-activating the "Seven Jehovian Seals" to allow an alien invasion. The Labyrinth Group has been led to believe that the opposite is true; if they, in cooperation with the Corteum, can develop this technology and find the WingMakers sites, one by one, they may help them being able to avoid an alien invasion, which was scheduled for 2011, but has been slightly delayed (more about that later). The Grays offered a full scale technology transfer program to Fifteen in exchange for genetic information of human DNA. The reason he turned them down was because of a previous agreement with the Corteum, who were the ones with the most advanced technology in Fifteen's field, and hence more able to help him with his task. However, the Grays had something the Corteum lacked; their technology how to make memory implants, and skills in genetic hybridization. This may sound odd to the reader, because the Ša.A.M.i. had a lot of skills in genetic engineering, but what Sitchin is telling us on several occasions in his books is that not all Ša.A.M.i./Anunnaki have these skills. Just like we humans; only because we humans know how to build space shuttles doesn't mean all of us know how to build them. Only the rocket scientists and rocket engineers do, although we all gain from their knowledge. Same thing with genetic engineering; the Ša.A.M.i. (even those not from Nibiru) have their scientists/geneticists just like us, but even Marduk never had

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 88

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

the knowledge how to genetically engineer species; it was not his field of expertise. And most probably, none of the members of the 200 in the Corteum Group had this knowledge either, other than perhaps a general knowledge, not enough to create complicated species and/or manipulate their genes. In addition, the Corteum group is supposedly consisting of 200 members, but these are only the ones who show up for the meetings, so to speak. In the background, there is a huge amount of their kind, overlooking the process. Not even our government (on any level) is aware of that, I think.

Figure 4: Photo allegedly taken of "Fifteen" in Hawaii around 1978

After been pondering over the Gray issue for some time, Fifteen and others within the Labyrinth Group started reconsider whether they should make an agreement with the Grays or not. After all, the Grays' technology could be useful; especially the memory implants, which could be used to create photographic memory in the group members. So they made a deal after all, and Fifteen got a lot of information on genetic hybridization from the Grays. Still, they apparently never told the Grays about the Labyrinth Group for several reasons; they didn't want the Grays and the Corteum to work together (perhaps that was the Corteum's idea not to work with the Grays), and the Grays had no need-to-know, so the Labyrinth Group officially worked with them outside the organization.

2.3. Dr. Anderson From the ACIO/Labyrinth Group, Speaks Out In December 1997, a reporter by the penname Anne got contacted by someone who said he was a linguist who had defected from the ACIO, or "Special Projects Laboratory", as it was called then; an unacknowledged department of the NSA. He called himself Dr. Anderson for protection, albeit this was not his real name.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 89

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Anne, a typical, dedicated journalist, was, rightfully so, very skeptic at first when Dr. Anderson told his story. He told her everything he knew as a top linguist, working under Fifteen. Dr. Anderson had been a part of the first crew who explored the Ancient Arrow site, and because he spoke multiple languages (some of them extinct), he became one of those in charge of translating the disc. Up to the day when Dr. Anderson defected, they had only translated about 7% of the 8000+ pages, so he didn't have no, or little, knowledge of what the rest of the disc contained.

Figure 5: Structure and Relationships of the Labyrinth Group [click to enlarge]

After Fifteen had broken the "code", which finally started the project, the Corteum, who had infiltrated the ACIO already in 1958, became part of the project and helped out with their technologies as well. Fifteen had found out that some of the material on the disc was old Sumerian/Akkadian languages, plus a few others. Dr. Anderson, after had started his internship at the ACIO, was subjected to something called "Intelligence Accelerator". He said they had the (alien) technologies to increase raw intelligence in a person by as much as 500%. In addition, they had this genetic implant technology (which they allegedly got from the Grays) which created photographic memory. The whole ACIO staff had been subjected to both, including Dr. Anderson himself. These technologies were held very secret and were not revealed to the government or the intelligence agencies; it was entirely on a need-to-know basis. To have access to this information, a person would have to have clearance level 12 or higher (highest is 14, with Fifteen being the only one having 15). Dr. Anderson had clearance 12. These high level clearances is the Labyrinth Group. This group split from the ACIO to enable secrecy from the NSA and lower ranking members of the ACIO. Fifteen was afraid that if too many people had access to the technology stemming from the TTPs (Technology Transfer Programs), the chances are great that these technologies would be compromised and used against humanity's best interests. However, the Labyrinth Group is taking these technologies on a regular basis and dilutes them to a point where the ACIO can sell them to private industry and government agencies (probably via a network of contractors, to remain secret), including the military (this is a part of the reason for the speed-up of technology the last few decades). So, we can see that the "best interests" for some groups or individuals are not considered "best interest" by others; it's all very subjective and in line with a group's imperatives.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 90

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Speaking of secrecy; for more than 40 years now, the Labyrinth Group has accumulated considerable wealth on their own. They have been able to build their own security technologies which has thus far prevented any detection from intelligence agencies like the CIA, KGB, MOSSAD, or MI5 and MI6. The Corteum were permitted access to all of the information systems of the ACIO, which was considerable, according to Dr. Anderson, because they could be of assistance and were on slightly similar IQ level as Fifteen, after the latter had had "Intelligence Acceleration". He also said the Corteum are friendly and have no motives to take over our planet in some kind of One World Government agenda. However, he said that there is another alien race, who does have these motives, and we are going to talk more about them (the Anima) in a later paper. I have reason to believe that the "Anima Problem" is a deception, and in the next paper I will explain why. Dr. Anderson also told us that the head of the Corteum alien race, working with the Labyrinth Group, goes under the name of Mahu Nahi, and that he actually liked this Corteum leader (keep the name Mahu Nahi in memory). Dr. Anderson considered Fifteen the most powerful human on Earth due to his brilliance and his power. He was the first human who was subjected to Accelerated Intelligence and the memory implant, and in his case, from had already been brilliant, now had an intellect comparable to that of the Corteum and the Grays. Still, Dr. Anderson was portraying Fifteen and his seven Directors as benevolent, who in their own way have humankind's best interests in mind. The main problem Dr. Anderson had with them, though, was the secrecy. He thought this information should be in public domain.

2.4 The Origins of the WingMakers Race In a classified document, no. 040297-14X-P17AA-23, from Dr. Jeremy Sauthers, Director of Special Projects, ACIO, to all Labyrinth Group Members (FYEO), which described the Ancient Arrow Project to the team, is telling them on page 2, that the WingMakers originate from the Pleiades. He is also stating that they were the ones who originally seeded life upon Earth "and facilitated life's evolutionary leaps and biological transformations."[6] They (and the Lyrans [same genetic origins]; see endnote #6) were the human genotype, who brought with us a "library of genetic codes" that, through experimentation, produced the human species, but also most other life forms on Earth[7] (the story of the original seeding of mankind can be review in my "Genesis Paper #1: Human Origins and the Living Library". Here we learn that the Pleiadians and the Lyrans are the same species. A faction of them fled to the Pleiades when the Anunnaki came, but returned to Earth and eventually started working together with the Anunnaki in their effort to manipulate the DNA of the early humans. At that point they most possibly interbred with the Anunnaki and created a new hybrid, making parts of the Pleiadian Lyrans also part of the Anunnaki species. We know very little about the origins of the Anunnaki, and they may just as well be a splinter group from the original Lyrans, before any of them had any encounters with Planet Earth). The Pleiadian WingMakers were in control of time-travel technologies, and put time capsules here from a future time (in our terms). Their hope seems to have been that we will be able to connect to our future selves and grasp a greater understanding of human destiny, among other things.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 91

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The renegade Pleiadian Group, channeled by Barbara Marciniak, are here to steer us in a new direction, away from the Technology Transfer Programs and back in connection with nature. They are here to do this because they live in a machine technology reality themselves, which is quite brutal, oppressive, and inhumane. In their efforts to do something about it, this group has managed to trace back their timeline to the nano-second, between 1987-2012, where humanity made decisions which created the hellish future this renegade group lives in. In the sense of ancestry, they are us in a future time, but also us in the past, and if we can make better choices now, it will also affect them positively, and by the same token we will be able to positively change our pasts. They call it "healing along the lines of time". In their books and channeling session, they are emphasizing that we need to get away from electronics as much as possible, and get back to basics to become more multi-dimensional, like we once were. Instead of connecting to the Internet they want us to connect to our "Innernet", which is our own psychic abilities; that's where the answers and the connection with the Multiverse lie. The WingMakers, whom, like we said, are also from the Pleiades (if we are to believe Dr. Sauthers and the WMM), claim to have been the ones seeding the concept of the Internet for the purpose of developing a global culture. They say they did it because it's the way to communicate globally amongst people on Earth, but also because it's going to be the universal communication device for us in the future, albeit in a much more advanced version, of course, in a form of a "intra-galactic, digital nervous system". The WingMakers teach us that by the time their final time capsule is discovered in 2023, "the Internet will be the focal point of the new global culture..."[8]. This statement alone (if true and not altered) is telling us the the Pleiadians, whom Dr. Sauthers refers to as the WingMakers, are not the same group as the one Barbara Marciniak is channeling. The latter wants us to get off the Internet as much as possible and develop our Innernet" instead. The WingMakers website, in its current form, is promoting the Internet as an intergalactic communication network. Beware of deception! We are going to talk about the Internet a lot later on, but the Super-speed Internet is not developed for humans, but for aliens. For them to be able to use our technology here on Earth, it needs to be more sophisticated. We, in our current development, have little use for super-super-speed Internet, do we? Think about it. The Internet was developed to eventually work as a network meant to ultimately control mankind by certain alien species, not to be used by alien species in general. The Pleiadians Barbara Marciniak is channeling is warning us about the Machine Kingdom. If I didn't know better, I may have considered this as a fairly good communication device; just expand on what we have and connect to the intergalactic network. However, this is not the way aliens communicate with each other in general; thus the distinction between the Internet and the Innernet. The latter is what we need to develop more of, not the former. This is where this world is going to split in two; one where people are migrating to gigantic cities where technology has become a serious addiction and a suggestive way of survival, and the other where people who have had enough, start saying they don't want any more of machine technology and will move out in the country and perhaps open up their own, selfsufficient communities. There, due to lack of an abundance of electronics, people will be able to connect with their own Innernet, become more psychic and multidimensional. Go out in nature and notice the difference! It's not that there is

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 92

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

anything wrong with technology in general, but at this point in time, where our bodies and minds have been so polluted by electronics, misuse of negative energy, and the effects of the TTP, we need to disconnect from the mindset of it, remove our biological life form from it, and go back and reconnect with the elements to regain our power and sovereignty over our own biokind. It's like a person who have been on the whole spectrum of addictive, recreational drugs for a long time and wants to quit. Big part of a successful recovery program would be not only to stop taking the drugs, but to disconnect from everything that reminds him of the drugs. It's imperative that humankind survives the next 100-125 years or so, which will be very challenging, but to do so, we need our inner awareness to guide us, so we are able to consciously direct our energies to create oases in a world of turmoil and destruction. How well we succeed with this will determine our survival potential as a species. What we do after that, in the sense of space travel and connecting with the galactic community, is a totally different matter. My own take of the "Pleiadian Agenda" is to introduce to us the possibilities to make decisions not only based on survival but at the same time connect subquantum-wise to our Innernet, without technology. This is our key both to survival and enlightenment at the same time. Space travel is coming into the picture later, as does technology under responsible conditions. We need to go through "withdrawals" first; actually, in a literal manner. It's come to a point when people are addicted to their cell phones and Facebooks. I have heard stories where kids sleep with their cell phones under their pillows rather than their teddy bears, in case someone would text them during the night, and other kids have insomnia, because they think they'll miss a message on their Facebook and run up in the middle of the night to check it out. This is very serious, as we are losing our young generation to electronics!

2.5 Mark Hempel, the Middle-Hand Although Dr. Anderson only had a security clearance of 12 and probably got a watered down version of the truth from the upper lines, he learned more than he felt comfortable with. He soon became the leading linguist and was the one who translated the disc from Sumerian. After had visited the AA (Ancient Arrow) site a couple of times and experienced a "presence" in there, which he was sure was the WingMakers themselves, and due to the translations, which he felt communicated directly to him, he knew this information needed to get out to the public; contrary to Fifteen's clear intentions. Dr. Anderson felt it was his duty to do so, and the WingMakers "told" him this while he was working on the project. They didn't want to bother Fifteen with it, because they considered him being way too involved with the Corteum to be able to see clearly. Dr. Anderson was nervous, because if he defected from the Labyrinth Group (something that was previously unheard of), he was afraid they were going to erase his memory so that everything he'd learned from when he joined the ACIO until the day he defected would disappear like it had never happened (yes, they have the technology to do so). He knew this is probably what they would do, unless they wanted to find him and reprogram him, because he was such a brilliant linguist. There was even a chance they would kill him.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 93

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

In spite of these considerations, he decided to defect in secret, so he just left one day. He knew he didn't have much time and quickly needed this information to go out to the public. So he chose a random journalist, "Anne", who could interview him and hopefully publish it in a newspapers, or magazine. Once the cat was out of the bag, Dr. Anderson had a better chance to survive and perhaps let him keep his memories. This was a delicate situation for Fifteen and his group, because he didn't want any extra attention drawn to him, and if the damage was done and the cat was let out of the bag, the best he could do was to be silent, in hope that this was too incredible for people to believe. The interaction between Anne and Dr. Anderson resulted in the "Dr. Anderson Interviews".[9] They were supposed to be 5 in number, but after two interviews, Dr. Anderson "disappeared" and Anne was no longer able to get in touch with him. No one knew at the time if the Labyrinth Group got to him, if he was killed, had his memory erased, or just went underground. Anne, who was a born skeptic, didn't know what to do with the material at first. This was the strangest interviews she's ever done, and if she tried to publish them, her career would probably be over. Still, she thought she owned it to Dr. Anderson (whom she didn't even know if he was alive) to somehow get this information out. Hence, she picked a young music producer and web designer she knew about, to help her out. His name was Mark Hempel, who also was a pioneer in Internet Radio. Even then she wanted to be anonymous, so she packaged the transcripts of the interviews, the artwork and the audio tapes and sent it via courier to Hempel with not much more of an explanation than something like, "please publish this material. It's very important!" Mark read the interviews and found them fascinating, but had no idea if they were true or not. The anonymous nature of it all perhaps helped him make the decision to publish it. For whatever reason, he created a website at http://wingmakers.com/ in 1998, where he released the two "Dr. Anderson Interviews", a mythological mini-novel called "The Ancient Arrow Project", the audio tapes, the poetry and the artwork, Figure 6: Mark Hempel

Without even announcing it anywhere, the website quite immediately got hundreds of thousands of visitors and became a blockbuster on the Internet. The site became extremely popular and was discussed all over the network, in forums and otherwise. It was probably the most discussed "conspiracy" website in the later part of the 1990s. It looked like Dr. Anderson got his information out to a lot of people after all. However, something strange was about to happen...

3. The Mysterious "James" Enters the Stage Today, the originator of the WingMakers material is known as "James", although this name was never mentioned in the original interviews or in the first version of "The Ancient Arrow Project". No other name than Dr. Anderson was mentioned.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 94

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

So where does the name James come from? To answer that question, let's see what happened after Hempel published the WMM. Once Hempel's website had become popular beyond belief, the rumors, with no doubt, must have reached the ACIO and the Labyrinth Group. Fifteen must have been furious at first; some of what he had decided to keep secret over the years was now irreversibly in public domain. It was too late to do anything about that. His worst fear had manifested; the chance of having to deal with defectors from the Labyrinth Group who started speaking in public! The problem was that the material on the WingMakers website spread like a wildfire all over the Internet, so they couldn't just ignore it. By the same token, there was a chance that Dr. Anderson would contact the journalist again to give the three additional interviews. No one really knows what Fifteen thought, but we know what solution the Labyrinth Group came up with... Mark Hempel, who had no idea who the instigator of the WMM was, was contacted once again, this time by this mysterious "James", who said he was the one who had been interviewed and thus was the owner of the material. James was probably quite convincing and could perhaps even give Hempel information that only Dr. Anderson (or someone within the Labyrinth Group) could have known. If Hempel still doubted James, he probably got convinced once and for all when this mysterious person sent additional material for Hempel to post on his website, plus he wanted Hempel to change things around in the original interviews and add a whole new project to the AA story. The reason, he said, was that new information had come to him and he had decoded more from the Tributary Zones. He also had the transcripts from the three "missing" interviews with "Anne", so it was now five interviews all together. In addition, he changed the name of the interviews from "The Dr. Anderson Interviews" to "The Dr. Neruda Interviews", the latter by which they are most commonly known today. After Hempel had remodeled his website, little by little, in increments over a couple of years, made it look more professional, and added the new material; the old website was, as I mentioned earlier, simply erased from the Internet. The Dr. Anderson interviews were now just a memory. With time, James contacted Hempel to add more material, including music CDs which are still sold from the website, and he also added a 24th Chamber all of a sudden, making this whole thing look more and more fictional and mythological, which he also said it was. The WingMakers had become "wholesale". Figure 7: James of the Although James said in the Q & A Section on the website that WingMakers it is a mix or myth and truth, it had now become quite difficult for the reader to distinguish between what was what. There were also serious attempts from readers and researchers to debunk the whole WMM, based on all the new, fictional content. Albeit there were (and are) still people who believe the WMM is true, the debunking efforts succeeded quite well, and many previously dedicated followers started putting their attention elsewhere. The possibility that the

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 95

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

WMM was a hoax was lively debated on forums and by serious truth-seekers. Hempel himself was confused about this whole thing and happened to say in correspondence with a researcher or two that he, too, thought it was probably a hoax. Or, did Hempel know more than we think and was told to say that it was probably a hoax? Either way, Hempel's "doubts", if they ever were real, were only temporary. He soon became a dedicated WingMakers fan; of the new website, I should add. Others, like Fred Burks, who could not relate to the new material, referred back to the original and kept that to heart. Even more confused? Don't worry; things will soon start to make more sense. James met with Hempel in Hempel's home on one occasion around 2008 for a long, recorded interview, resulting in an audio presentation on the new WingMakers website.[10] Here you can listen to James' voice, which is an unnaturally deep baritone with a subtle Spanish accent. The accent sounds legitimate to me, but his deep voice sounds manufactured, for whatever reason. Perhaps he didn't want people to recognize his real voice; I really don't know. The interview, however, quite obviously was orchestrated so James could promote his new site and his new information on the "Sovereign Integral"; the reconnection with our Oversoul. A lot of additional material was added as well to the website over the years, and it became more and more esoteric in the sense that James showed a lot of interest in Alice Bailey, Madame Blavatsky and the Great White Brotherhood. He was talking about Ascended Master in quite some length in his Q&A section, and gave references which seemed very odd to me when I read them. Something didn't feel quite right. Eventually James, always through Mark Hempel, created a few more websites. They were, in the order they appeared:

1. The Lyricus Teaching Order (http://lyricus.org) 2. Event Temples (http://eventtemples.com) 3. The Sovereign Integral (http://sovereignintegral.com) The last one was published in 2008, and although there was not yet anything substantial posted on the website (and still isn't, 3 years later, except an illustration of what the Sovereign Integral is, without any explanation attached), James apparently decided to start promoting it. He therefore accepted an interview with the Project Camelot crew, also in 2008, where Kerry Lynn Cassidy and Bill Ryan were doing an email interview with James.[11] This interview was a shocker to me, to many other people who read it, and I think, to the Camelot crew as well. James was here presenting a totally new paradigm, telling us that we are stuck in a hologrammic 3-D Density prison. This, in itself, is nothing new, but he said that Anu (the [former] King of the Anunnaki/Ša.A.M.i.), the most powerful being in the universe, had created this whole 3rd Density illusion. More specifically, he said Anu has been tampering with our DNA, trapped highly spiritual beings from the Atlantis Era into these body containers, and once the spirits decided to "try out" the bodies which Anu had "created", they were trapped once and for all.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 96

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

These bodies, according to James, had hologrammic "videos" embedded in them, so that when these highly evolved multi-dimensional spirits entered the bodies, naive as they were in their free state, they got caught up in the illusion Anu had created. From within these new bodies, they saw a beautiful world and could look at extraordinary pictures which excited them to the maximum. Hence, these who tried out the bodies told the rest how exciting it was, and soon enough, the majority of the free spirits found themselves trapped in 3rd Density bodies after Anu had "closed the trap" so that the souls could no longer leave their bodies at will. Not everybody was trapped, though. James is telling us that the time of Atlantis was a highly spiritually evolved era, and many different beings were here on Earth at the time, including people from the Central Race[12]. Some of those from the Central Race managed to escape this trap, and James was one of them. However, Anu, who apparently was a very clever being, cloned the real universe and created a new one, in which we are living today. In this Universe, Anu is God, where all the stars, galaxies, nebulae, planets and whatnot, are his creations. In this cloned universe, life is sparse, and humans are the only inhabitants. There are a few other planets where Anu has seeded life, but these planets are only inhabited by humans. Sometimes, aliens of another kind can enter Anu's cloned universe for short periods of times, but must then return. If they don't, they either die or get stuck in this reality, just like us. This is, according to James, the reason we sometimes see Grays and strange creature coming out from inside of the Earth or from under the oceans; they are simply stuck here and can't go back to the "real universe". Of course, James is also presenting a solution. He says that Anu was scheduled to come back shortly before 2012; the event the Global Elite have been preparing for, but now the plans have changed. Anu is in business elsewhere, having his attention directed towards something totally different, and has left us to our fate. So our only solution is to find the "Grand Portal", which is a metaphor for we humans to be able to, as a group, realize we are spiritual beings, trapped in a 3rd Dimension/Density, which only exists because Anu created it, and that science and religion need to merge into one for us to break the "godspell". Only then will the illusion shatter and we will return to the Universe of origin and become multi-dimensional. Anu's science in this case needs to be well understood so we can grasp how he created the 3rd Density. When we do, and also understand we are spirits in a body, we can break out of the prison as a whole humanity. In the same interview, Bill Ryan is asking James what he thinks about Nibiru and the return of the Anunnaki. James says (just like he did in the audio interview with Mark Hempel) that Nibiru is no longer an issue, and nothing to worry about. I know for a fact that this is a lie, and in a later paper I will explain why.

4. So Who Took Over the WingMakers Site? I also know for a fact that Dr. Anderson (whom I from hereon will call Dr. Jamisson Neruda, because it more accurately states who he is) is still alive and well, because I've been in touch with him. I am also aware of (and it's pretty obvious) that the original Dr. Anderson and James are two entirely different persons. Their energies are far different, and the way they use the English language is even different. Dr. Anderson is scientific in his approach, but is trying his best to simplify his answers

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 97

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

and his writing, while James is esoteric to the extreme and does not bother with attempting to make himself understood by the general public. He is also very artistic. One can tell they are definitely two totally different personalities. And by the way, who was it that we mentioned earlier, being very artistic, and someone Dr. Anderson liked? Well, let's go to the point: who took over the WingMakers site? It looks like the impostor doesn't even try very hard to keep that secret. "James" is not human; he is the Head of the Corteum! How do I know? Well, this is from the original website, which was taken down; from the original Dr. Anderson Interview #2, http://www.wingmakers.us/wingmakersorig/wingmakersinterviews/ www.wingmakers.com/interview/iview2.shtml: Dr. Anderson: "Yes, they've been involved from the beginning. The Corteum are as integral to the Labyrinth Group as any of its human members, so nothing is hidden from them. The leader of the Corteum mission to earth is called -- in English -- Mahunahi [Wes' emphasis], and he happens to be an artist first and foremost, and a scientist is his secondary nature. He was always excited to see and hear about our findings. He asked if we could create a way-station to the Ancient Arrow site so he could visit the site himself, but it just wasn't practical to do so without drawing attention to the site." So the original "Dr. Anderson" trusted Mahunahi at the time when he released the information to "Anne". We already discussed that the WingMakers site was hijacked shortly after it was published and gradually changed with time until it became almost unrecognizable. A few years after the new site was set up, James opened a Q&A section, and this quote is from there, http://www.wingmakers.com/jamesqa.html: Question 9: Who/what are you James? Where do you get your information from? [James]: In my dominant reality, I am known as Mahu Nahi [Wes' emphasis]. I am a member of a teaching organization whose roots are very ancient, but paradoxically, very connected with humanity's future. This teaching organization is concerned with transporting a sensory data stream to earth in order to catalyze select individuals of the next three generations to bring innovations to the fields of science, art, and philosophy. These innovations will enable the discovery and establishment of the Grand Portal on earth. Thus, it seems clear that the WingMakers have been taken over by the Corteum, allegedly a faction of the Earthbound Anunnaki, and "James" is the Corteum Leader. What does this mean and what implications are there? Well, it's a very clever take-over! The Corteum changed the name Anderson to Neruda because Jamisson Neruda is very close to "Dr. Anderson's" real name! I was

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 98

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

told this as being a fact by the real Dr. Anderson, who later became Dr. Neruda. Furthermore, "James" (I will call him by his real name, Mahu Nahi from hereon), after had taken over the project, also added a lot of real information to the website! In fact (and this is also coming from the real Dr. Neruda quite recently), there is a lot more real information on the current WingMakers site than the original one! In other words, there is disinformation on both the old site and the new one. However, the following were most likely the steps the Corteum and the Labyrinth Group decided to take after Dr. Neruda had let the cat out of the box in 1998.

1. When they found out about the leak, they waited it out to see how it would be received. Unfortunately (for the Labyrinth Group), the Anderson Interviews spread quickly on the Internet and became well known in "conspiracy" circles.

2. Mahu Nahi, the head of the Corteum, decided to take care of it, most certainly with Fifteen's blessings. Mahu contacted Mark Hempel, again via courier, is my understanding, erroneously saying his name was James (like in Jamisson Neruda), and that he had a lot of additional information to add to the website. He also told Hempel that some of the old information from the Anderson Interviews were slightly incorrect and needed to be erased and exchanged with new information. He also wanted Hempel to change the name Anderson to Dr. Jamisson Neruda.

3. Mahu told Hempel, in addition, that he had complements to the "Ancient

Arrow Project", and asked to have this published as well and the old version erased. Much of this information, both on the AA site and in the Neruda Interviews is true, but not all of it. Some of it is disinformation, so the reader needs to have this in mind and use discernment and cross-checking techniques to verify what's in there. Still, the part that's true is incredibly important information.

4. Mahu was quick to add that the AA project was mythological in nature, with

truth in it. Same thing with the Neruda Interviews. He wanted Hempel to make sure the readers knew this. Hempel complied with everything Mahu told him to do. Hempel was told that humanity was not ready for everything yet and that it had to be released in increments over time.

5. Mahu delivered as promised, and Hempel posted. 6. With time, Mahu, with assistance from Hempel, opened three additional

websites, on three different domains; one at the time: http://lyricus.org ; http://eventtemples.com , and http://sovereignintegral.org . These sites were meant to be expansions of WingMakers.com with more information on the Central Race, the Lyricus Teaching Order and the Sovereign Integral. As it were, some of this information showed to be true as well, but not everything. Mahu has promised there's much more to come.

7. 2008 was a strange year for the WingMakers fans. Mahu decided it was time

to become more public than he had previously. He had always stated that he didn't want to reveal himself too much, because he wished for the information to speak for itself. Mahu, who claimed to live in New York at the time, flew to meet Hempel, who lived out-of-state. If I remember correctly, Mahu was

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 99

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

actually on his way to meet colleagues somewhere else, but did a middlelanding at Hempel's house for a limited amount of time. This, in itself, is strange, because Mahu is not human, but of the Corteum, who are supposedly over 7 feet high. He would obviously had made quite an impression on Hempel, who now supposedly saw him for the first time. Mahu, of course, could have; with or without Hempel's knowledge; flown by private jet or with a Labyrinth Group airplane, out of public scrutiny, but he would have had to show his real self to Hempel at least. If this is what happens, this makes it clear that Hempel is now involved in this up to his neck, knowing who Mahu really is. However, there is another explanation. Just like the Ša.A.M.i. in general, they are everything from 6-9 feet tall, and Mahu could potentially be on the shorter end of the spectrum.

8. At the end of 2008, Mahu accepted the email interview with Project Camelot,

which set the stage for the future of the Corteum version of the WingMakers story. We can from hereon expect a lot of disinformation from this camp. Interestingly, Mahu did not want to show himself to the Camelot team. There could have been many reasons for this, but I find it at least worth mentioning.

For a while, I was wondering why LPG-C was using the Neruda Interviews as a base of information when researching things like BST and the Anima Problem (alien race, supposedly trying to take over Earth. I will address them in a separate paper). Now I understand why. They know that Dr. Neruda is the "real deal", and the Corteum decided to use his real name when they took over the WingMakers site. So here is the cleverness of the take-over and how it was done: Mahu Nahi, himself being artistic, decided to present the truth as it were in the form of art. It's beautifully done and quite intriguing; especially as it has a lot of truth in it. But why would they reveal the truth? Why not just make something up and lie about it? There is a saying that goes, "hidden in plain sight". This is the most perfect example of this saying. Mahu saw that Dr. Neruda in the Anderson Interviews had given Anne (real name Sarah) the truth as he knew it, but mixed it with some disinformation; however, he still revealed enough truth not to mislead the public entirely. He was more concerned with protecting some sources. So what Mahu did was to reveal a whole lot more true information than the real Dr. Neruda did. By then saying it is a mix or truth and myth, and that the AA project is quite mythological, the Corteum could confuse the public enough to get away with it. Some people would discard Mahu's new information and relate back to the original Anderson interviews, which in themselves were partly disinformation. Others would embrace Mahu's information, but can't be sure what is true and what is myth. Mahu does a good job with pretending that things which are really true are myth and vice versa. The reader needs to put this in perspective.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 100

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Mahu knew that others would just debunk the whole thing and call it psy op, disinformation, or a hoax. This was all part of the plan. Of course, it is a psy op, but it doesn't mean it's a hoax. There is actually more truth than not in the material and more truth than on most other websites out there. To fully understand this scheme, we need to rewire our brains and embrace a new way of thinking. What needs to be realized is that we can no longer continue saying: "Website A is set up by the government or the Global Elite as a psy op, disinformation campaign, so therefore we should just discard it and expose it as as an evil intent and a Big Lie". However, "Website B is written by a known wellintended Truth Seeker who has the best interest for humanity in mind, so let's listen to him/her instead." No, this kind of thinking is simple-minded and will only lead us further and further away from what we need to know. The "truth" is in both camps, as is the disinformation, and we need to read everything with a fine toothcomb, because often the truth is told between the lines. This is important to understand! In this particular case, the Corteum/Labyrinth Group, in their own more self-serving ways, want the information out as well. As we shall see in a later paper about BST and the Anima Problem, in a strange way everybody seems to be "on the same side", but still not quite. Different groups have slightly different agendas, but the common denominator is to convince us humans that what this is all about is to save Earth against an Invader Force which is very real. In a perfect world, we would all unite as ONE to face this threat, similar to what Ronald Reagan said in his famous speech from the 1980s when he addressed the ET issue. He said that if we were to face a threat from Outer Space, we would probably finally be able to unite as ONE humanity. However, things are more complicated than that. Still, we need to understand that there is no "black" and "white"; only different shades of gray. And there is a reason the Corteum wants a big chunk of truth out to the public, and it's not in our best interest. They want to misdirect us towards the wrong enemy; it's like when the little kid says to his parents, "Mom and dad, look what my sister is doing over there!!!" When the parents are looking in the direction the little boy is pointing, he quickly slips his hand into the cookie jar and steals a cookie while they are busy looking elsewhere.

5. Changes Made to the Original WingMakers Site Again, thanks to Fred Burks (http://www.wanttoknow.info/), I don't have to spend too much time comparing the original website with the later one. He already did that, and I am going to use the most important information from his comparison here. For the reader, who wants to dig deeper into this (which I suggest), visit Fred's page here: http://www.wanttoknow.info/wingmakersorig/wingmakerschanges). By using simple color coding, he and an associate were able to compare all changes that were made from the original website. You can learn all about it here: http://www.wanttoknow.info/wingmakersorig/wingmakersinterviewschanges. You can also download two pdf files (Interviews 1 and 2) where you can compare the changes one by one:

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 101

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

http://www.wanttoknow.info/wingmakersorig/wingmakersinterviews1changes.pdf http://www.wanttoknow.info/wingmakersorig/wingmakersinterviews2changes.pdf

6. S.A.A.L.M., Supreme Annunaki Assembly of Lord Marduk S.A.A.L.M. is (or used to be before their presence was revealed on the Internet) a secret organization, branching out from the NSA and the ACIO. Their sole purpose is to keep "King Marduk" on the Throne of Earth, as her righteous ruler, even after the return of the Ša.A.M.i. from the home planet. They believe in Prophecy and consider Marduk being the AntiChrist the bible has been predicting, and they have until 2012 to accomplish this goal. At least this is what their members believe, as revealed in leaked information from internal conversion being held on a secure S.A.A.L.M. Intranet Server, from which the members could log in wherever they were on the globe, to retrieve new information as needed. James Casbolt, former MI6 and S.A.A.L.M. member, defector and whistle-blower from both, released some sensitive information on his website a few years ago. He was later cleverly set up by S.A.A.L.M. and was forced to take his website, jamesbasbolt.com, down. They started a severe disinformation campaign against him as per "Item #6" of the Laws, all S.A.A.L.M. members are obligated to follow: Item 6 tells us that the agency will seek extreme termination with prejudice in the case of a breach of this agreement resulting in the disclosure of unauthorized information, beginning with extreme harrassment [sic] in order to stop the disclosure.[13] One thing Casbolt put out on the web was a communication from an unknown S.A.A.L.M. member, emphasizing the year 2012: My contacts claim this is Enlil waiting before his final address in which he spoke to all S.A.A.L.M members on behalf of Lord Marduk and Queen Nanshaazuur. Enlil announced that the capstone of establishing Lord Marduk as King of Kings of SoL will soon be set. The speech concluded with a sincere thanks to all members efforts and a toast was pronounced to the target date of Dec 22nd 2012. Casbolt was, from my understanding, the one who leaked the information from the secret network and put it on the Internet. For obvious reasons, the information didn't stay there for long, and was abruptly taken down. A discussion about the security leak is even included in the hijacked information. What S.A.A.L.M. apparently forgot about was the Wayback Machine (or the Internet Archive), where anyone can type in a website which is no longer available into their search engine, and it will show up the way it looked like; normally including all changes that were made to it over time. This is where I got the information from. However, S.A.A.L.M. got smarter with time, realized their omission, and made sure the information from the Archives were no longer accessible. Their rules and regulations are very strict; disseverance under some circumstances is punishable with death. S.A.A.L.M. is also a part of the Freemasonic Global Network,

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 102

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

starting at the 33rd Degree of Zion. Marduk, according to this group, is the head of Freemasonry world-wide. I have had some personal, interesting experiences with this group; something which goes back to at least 2008. However, I am going to start this section with some correspondence between me and Benjamin Fulford, who is a well-known researcher into the Global Elite. In January 2009 I had just posted an early version of what became the free e-book, "The Myth Around Supriem David Rockefeller". The early version was called, "Lucifer's Redemption." It is no longer on the Internet, and was eventually replaced by the current e-book version in June 2009. In my early research, I stumbled upon S.A.A.L.M. again; I had had encounters with them earlier. This section was taken out from the above e-book, because it was out of context. However, here it does fit in, so I will give you the story (some readers who have followed my research over the years may have read this before it was removed from the Internet): In November of 2008 I was part of an email group led by a certain Rev. Anthony Pike, who said he lived in India. On that list was also Prophet Yahweh[14] and James Casbolt (former MI6 and subjected to Project Mannequin [15] and other mind control programs), among other interesting researchers, so I decided to join. Anthony Pike was the one who was most active on the list and posted quite a lot; he acted pretty much as the main authority in the group. After a while he told the group he was a member of S.A.A.L.M., something James Casbolt was already aware of, because he mentions Pike in his book, "Agent Buried Alive" (http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/ ciencia/ciencia_mannequin03.htm). I had a vague idea of who they were, because I had at that time read "The LINK" by Dr. A.R. Bordon for the first time. This made it even more interesting, and perhaps I could learn something new. I knew of Prophet Yahweh before, because he claimed to be able to summon UFOs somewhere down in Arizona or Nevada, and he said they were Yahweh's ships. He is a black man, Figure 8: Prophet Yahweh claiming to be a true Israelite, and therefore, he and his people had the right to Israel. He actually managed to summon UFOs when ABC News were watching and it was all over the news on June 1, 2005. Knowing that Yahweh is the Enlil, it was double interesting to have Prophet Yahweh on the list. However, he didn't say much; was more of a silent member. Now back to the story. As I had published the first version of Supriem Rockefeller, which was a blockbuster, I got an email from a visitor who said that Benjamin Fulford claimed that the whole Rockefeller story was a hoax to discredit him, and that he would go public with this fact shortly. So I emailed Fulford to find out what the situation was. Here is the correspondence. On February 1, 2009, I asked him the following questions:

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 103

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Hi Benjamin, My name is Wes Penre, and I am emailing you from www.illuminatinews.com. I found some information regarding Supriem D Rockefeller and Michael N. Prescott which I found intriguing, but rather confusing. I know about you from before and find your information and interviews pretty interesting and helpful. It was pointed out to me that the SD Rockefeller story is a hoax to discredit you and that you will go out and announce this eventually. I have a few questions, because I wrote an article on this. I understand you probably are a very busy man, but I would appreciate a lot if you had time to please answer the following (to the reader: my question are always in bold): 1. Did you write the following comments to the letter from SD Rockefeller? MESSAGE FROM BENJAMIN FULFORD in Japan ~:|:~ Both the Freemasons (5 million agents worldwide) and the Asian Secret Society (6 million worldwide members) have invited me into their senior ranks. I agreed to join only if they both promised to support a 3 yr campaign to end poverty, end war and stop environmental destruction. There is going to be an announcement of a new financial system between January 20th and early February. However, this may be delayed by die-hard Satanists who do not want to see their rule end. By the way, I have been informed that David Rockefeller has ceded control to Sen JohN D. Rockefeller IV and Evelyn de Rothschild has ceded clan leadership to Baron David de Rothschild. So, according to my latest intelligence the 5 points of the pentagram consist of:Queen Elizabeth, Papa Bush, J. Rockefeller, David Rothschild and the Satan worshipping Pope. The above comments from you are then followed by the following message from Supriem Rockefeller: Date: Wed, 3 Dec 2008 18:42:59 -0600 From: Supriem Rockefeller To: Michael N Prescott Subject: Re: “Buy Sell” Forward this to them-

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 104

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

As you may know, the Vatican has been hiding the truth from the public about the Messiah. They have implanted into the public’s mind that Jesus was the Messiah, which they know not to be true. The word Vatican means ‘House of the Serpent’ which the Pope even has the Serpent on his chest plate and he carries the Sun staff, the symbol of Marduk Ra. I was Marduk Ra but became Amen Ra once I was sentenced into exile. Amen just means ‘The Hidden One’. They pledge their allegiance to me by placing the obelisk in St Peters Court inside the Sun Circle surrounded by the Celestial Cross. The German order called ‘Thule Orden’ and ‘Vril Society’ know who I am, n fact, they found me after they had access to the Vatican’s vault and read about me. The text form [sic] 2026 BC said ‘In the Second Coming, he will call himself ‘Supriem’ and come from the west’. No matter how you spell Supriem or Supreme, it is still SPRM. They even saw drawings that looked exactly like me. They told me that they knew I was Lucifer, the Son of G-D, leader of the 12 Elohim and keepers of the D12 Stargate. Marduk Ra was just one of my names, I am the same life force as YHWH, Samech, Moloch, Azazel, Lucifer and the Supreme Deity. It is time for my rule again, thus those who are against it will perish. In fact I have the ability to end Earth as a planet if I see fit. The time is around the corner for my rule, Heil Imperium!! The Thule wanted to test my DNA, so I allowed them because I knew they were important to my alliance. They found that I do carry the Triple Helix Blue Blood of the Elohim. In fact, I have more than one DNA sequence. They knew that my several thousand year exile ends in 2009 (according to the 12/60 frequency in which I was sentenced, not the 13/20 frequency). I have more than one DNA sequence because I am born of both Elders and Ancients (Serpent or Reptilian). I was given the DNA sequence of the REAL Trinity – Baal, Astarte, Tammuz – all into ‘One Male’ – Lucifer – The True Messiah.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 105

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

2009 is the Second Coming, the exile is over. I have several races, not from Earth, that I lead and they are waiting on me. I have an army of multidimensional beings that are subservient to me. [These are the Alpha Draconis REPTOIDS and the Orion Group REPTILIANS.] We use magical rites to control the invisible world affected by the three dimensional world. We have a technology that no one can stop. The ramifications of this technology used as a weapon are something out of a science fiction movie. We have to ensure that this technology stays within our working group. Someone could use this to disable aircraft from 400 miles away and there is nothing to trace, it would just look like the aircraft had a system failure and plummeted out of the sky. Someone could use this to disable any alarm system, create a financial crisis by aiming at a stock exchange, someone could start wiping out every satellite in constellation and leave zero trace of what, where and how this happened. The 400 mile range is minimum, it can be increased via plasma antennas. In fact, I have drafted The Allied Union constitution which is a policy making organization that unites 220 countries under one flag with an entirely digital universal currency called the ‘Allied Unit’ that works over the ‘Supriem Network’. The ‘Supriem Network Plan’ is attached in this E-Mail. To answer a question, someone asked me about how do you get every country to comply? Simple, first it will be obvious that this is the only way society in the future will prevail and if that is not enough, have you ever seen the movie ‘The Day Earth Stood Still’? The story maybe fiction but the warning and technology is real. Let’s say ‘Country Orange’ did not want to comply, now all of the sudden their country’s defense system and major economic institutions are paralysed by something they don’t understand or cannot figure out but they were warned in advance so they know who is controlling it. This is why I say it is imperative this technology never gets out of our hands, it is the ultimate weapon of a silent [endless] war.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 106

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

What we have here is not a morality tale of right and wrong, good or evil, it is simply an ultimatum to the countries– “You either comply with us for a more efficient and proficient society or you won’t have a society. “ My group, which consists of former employees and some currently employed by various Intelligence Agencies and my own group based in Germany with Russian and Nordic sects, and a vast presence in South America and Antarctica, are wanting to speak to Lockheed-Martin about incorporating this technology on their satellite constellation so the entire globe would be covered. We can offer them a partnership. If one satellite 300 miles above the Earth were retrofitted with one of our antennas, you could disable any electronic device in Northern America via an EMP effect. Our knowledge is based in Resonant Frequency and we have mapped the tonal range of Earth’s frequencies including gravity and how to detune and change oscillation of X, Y, Z axis. Same principal behind the resonant tuning of point A to point B for an envelope effect of collapsed time-space, creating something similar to what you call a ‘Casimir Effect’ and understanding the ‘Impossible Space-Time Transition’ of 2×10-33 cm, 10-43 seconds. Sorry, can’t really translate equations in email. Our ‘Vril Power’ is synergistically combining Gravity Units (GU) at positions specified by the coordinates (x1, x2, …) and (u) – a process in time, can be thought of as a matrix-valued function of dimensionality (n1, n2, …) U=(ux1×2…) (n1, n2, …). If the status of a gravity unit varies as a function of time then, at any given instant, a ’snapshot’ of that gravity unit at that instant in time would be ui=u(ti). You will first have to understand Gravity Units (GU) and Knowledge Units (KU) combined with Time (T) and its frequency in which you resonate. Our concept of TIME undoubtedly presents new ideas which are unknown for you. First of all we cannot regard Time as a dimension or continuum, as you do. It is not that time is quantified, but one cannot conceive a moment as a point on the axis of time.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 107

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The interval dt, although it can tend towards zero, could never be perceived as small as we would like to. There is another aspect to this question we wish to underline. You consider that the highest speed a sub-particle in the cosmos can reach is 299,780 kmph (speed of light) and you regard this speed as ‘constant’. This is not a poor measurement. Indeed, it is this same speed that we recorded within this same three-dimensional framework, but all one needs to do is change framework or three-dimensional system so that this limiting Speed changes remarkably up to the point where the only reference which can reflect the change of axis is the measurement of this speed or constant, C. I would have to get into the detail traveling using Resonant Frequency at another time, to complicated for email. Back to my original topic, it is imperative that your group is our partner to keep under wraps for our working group, it doesn’t cost you anything to be part, we are not asking for money. We are going to cover the planet’s ground and sky with this spectrum, an artificial ‘aether’ if you will. I was also presented with an opportunity from the Russians, I was told Putin was the original source, for us to buy up an entire stockpile of CU 63,65 which you may know is used for satellites and in weapons. Eglin AFB tests the SFW (Sensor Fused [sic] Weapon) which use copper as its main munition. I would like to have talks with Lockheed asap for partnership discussions. As you can see with the news and its status quo, everything is lining up to usher in the ‘Supriem Network’. Let’s also talk about the returns I can bring in through our ‘Buy Sell Program’, if you think it is an absurd amount on the return, you have nothing to lose to find out the truth. Like I said, we never touch your money, all we need is the proof of funds to proceed and the money never leaves your bank. This is a great way to be autonomous and self-funding to exclude external auditing. This technology I offer must always stay in our own working group that we will put together.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 108

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

We are about to reshape the world. The ‘Supriem Network’ will soon be the only way for financial transactions and communications. It connects the entire planet. Democracy has failed and it is time to show what One Ruler with a strong team backing him can do, I know you are with me. Michael Prescott is my right hand man, so you can continue working through him at this juncture, I will step in as the situation progresses. Regards, Supriem Samech Marduk Ra Lucifer (Finally Redeemed) Head of the True Elohim, God of Victory and Son of the Creator, G-D.

2. Who exactly wants to discredit you? From what I understand the email from Rockefeller was meant for the Italian Freemasonry, with a cc: to Leo Zagami? Where are you coming into the picture, besides from you writing the comments above and posting the email (if you did)? From what I understand, you were never involved in the communication between Rockefeller and the Italian Freemasons. So in other words, how could this have been written to discredit you? 3. Who are SD Rockefeller and Michael N. Prescott? Are they pranksters or ‘for real’ people? If they’re ‘for real’, where is the hoax in all this? Michael N. Prescott’s MySpace site looks pretty serious to me, unless he is working for the CIA as a disinfo agent. I would like to find out the truth about this, so I can publish it accurately. I really appreciate your time to read this and hope for a reply. Respectfully and in friendship, Wes Penre, Illuminati News I got a reply from Benjamin: Thanks for the e-mail Wes. Here is what I know about the Supriem Rockefeller business. They contacted Leo Zagami and the Italian Freemasons in an attempt to get them to go along with their plan for a new financial system. Leo then contacted me to ask for an opinion. The thing that struck me about this business is that it coincided with some stuff I have been hearing from the Reverend Anthony Pike, a self-described descendet of the notorious illuminati Ted Pike. The Rev. Pike had previously

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 109

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

sent me photographs of a person he said was Lord Enlil, son of lord Marduk, the leader of Satanic forces on the planet earth. A third source of information (a member of the British Royal Family) also talked about a Nazi faction in the secret government under George Bush senior with assets in Northern Euorpe, South America (notably Paraguay and Uruguay) the Antarctic (the Norwegian ”antarctic base.”) and parts of the US military/intelligence establishment. This fit with what “supriem” described as his power base. Since separate sources mentioned similar people, I forwarded a photo of Enlil to Mr. Zagami. The Italians did their own research and came to the conclusion the photo was a fake and that there was no Supriem David Rockefeller in the Rockefeller family. Please contact Mr. Zagami about how he came to that conclusion. To me the whole business has all the makings of a psy-ops attempting to get us to fall into the weird zone and thus be discredited. That psy-ops may well be traceable to the Papa Bush Nazi clique. My latest intelligence tells me there is a move to annouce a new financial system (a transparent, honest one) that is still being fiercly opposed by the “seniors” (Papa Bush, Evylin Rothschild, Queen Elizabeth et al). If the good guys win, there will be an announcement of a Marshall plan for the planet earth with the aim of eradicating poverty, war and environmental destruction within a 3-year period. And yes, I did write the letter you posted on your web-site. There is much I cannot say in order to protect the lives of people who are trying to do good. Benjamin Fulford Here below is the picture of “Enlil” (on top) he talks about in the email and the second picture is of “Nannur” (Nannar), Satan’s grandson (as referred to in the emails below):

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 110

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 9a: The Enlil, allegedly, put in circulation by S.A.A.L.M.

Figure 9b: Naanur, a second picture spread on the Internet by S.A.A.L.M.

The above pictures were attached to these messages: From: cosmicrf@xxx.com To: cosmicrf@xxx.com Subject: Son of Satan Date: Thu, 6 Nov 2008 17:26:41 +0530 For those who are still sceptical about the existence of a physical ‘hell’ below your feet, St Anthony is now attaching a photo of the Son of Satan, Lord Enlil, titular head of the ‘Supreme Annunaki Assembly of Lord Marduk’ (SAALM), whose members include Henry Kissinger and Zbigniew Brzezinski. Also attached is a photo of Satan’s grandson, Lord Naanur aka Nannar, who is photographed with another member of SAALM at their meeting on 26th Oct 2006 in Basle, Switzerland. So, my friends, the global reign of the Antichrist is about to commence and all people will be ‘chipped’ in their forehead or right hand as prophesied in the Book of Revelation. So, dear friends, choose this

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 111

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

day whom you will serve, God or Satan, Christ or Antichrist. Remember, your eternal destiny is at stake – so, let’s hope you make the RIGHT decision. Yours in the battle for planet earth, Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike (UK) Cosmic Research Foundation Markapur, A.P. 523316, India E-Mail cosmicrf@xxx.com Date 6th Nov 2008 From: cosmicrf@xxx.com To: cosmicrfgroup Subject: Cycle of Insanity Date: Mon, 3 Nov 2008 12:05:18 +0530 Global Theocratic Movement Both the Queen and Bush are trapped in a ‘cycle of insanity’ that they cannot escape from ie. they know St Anthony is speaking the truth, but they are unable to implement it due to governmental and societal constraints which forbids implementation of that which St Anthony is propounding; hence, the mental and physical logjam. In addition, both the Queen and Bush know full well that they don’t rule either Britain or America as the REAL POWER lies UNDERGROUND. Yes, friends, St Anthony is talking about a REAL PHYSICAL HELL right below your feet!! In fact, recently, on Fri night 8th Aug in the early hours of Sat 9th Aug, St Anthony’s only begotten son, Daniel, was physically abducted and abused by PHYSICAL DEMONS from hell aboard their spacecraft while he was camping in the Kent countryside. In this respect, in UK one of the main U/G bases is located below Welford AFB nr Newbury, Berks and in US one of the main bases is at Area 51, NV and also at Dulce and Los Alamos, NM and in Australia at Pine Gap nr Mt Zeil. Now, friends, St Anthony says its time to WAKE UP to REALITY and kick the Devil off planet earth once and for all rather than allow the ‘demon-cratic insanity’ to continue resulting in the total destruction of all life on earth. Yes, friends, only GOD and his THEOCRATIC Govt can save planet earth; and that’s exactly what St Anthony and his ‘Global Theocratic Movement’ intend to do. In this respect, St Anthony has already established the ‘Theocratic Parliament of Britain’ in April this year and the ‘Theocratic Parliament of America’ and the ‘Theocratic Parliament of Israel’ in October. So, St Anthony means business and the Devil is now shaking in his boots as theocracy rises to the ascendancy and democracy plummets to the bottom of the bottomless pit. So, friends, REPENT NOW and come join the winning side!! Yours in the battle for planet earth, Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike (UK) Cosmic Research Foundation Markapur, A.P. 523316, India E-Mail cosmicrf@xxx.com Date 3rd Nov 2008

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 112

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Then I contacted Leo Zagami, who confirms that Supriem Rockefeller is real and according to Leo one of his arch enemies right now. The Enlil/Naanur pictures looked very photo-shopped to me, so I did some research and at the same time got the original pictures sent to me by one of my visitors, showing that the Annunaki pictures are fakes. The second picture of Naanur is a photoshop job of Henry Kissinger, but I am unable to find that picture at the moment. Even the all-seeing eye on the wall in the first picture is an add-on, plus the S.A.A.L.M. insignia on the wall. The man in the picture is the Top Elite Player Zbigniew Brzezinski. These photos apparently were modified by the Intelligence Community and spread on the net by Rev. Dr. Anthony G. Pike.

Figure 9c: The original picture of Mr. Z-Big (Zbigniew Brzezinski)

When I exposed Enlil as being Brzezinski, I sent an email to Benjamin Fulford to that effect and didn’t hear anything back. I didn’t know what to make out of that at the time, but I let it go.

Figure 10: Rev. Anthony Pike

Interestingly enough, one morning I got this letter from Rev. Pike (cc’d to me, but primarily sent to Ben Fulford) as a response to an email Fulford sent to him in regards to the fake photos. My original email to Fulford is at the top, followed by Fulford’s comments to Pike and ending with Pike’s response. Pike says that James Casbolt, the ‘brave whistle-blower’, posted these photos as well on his website to tell the truth to the people. Mr. Casbolt did indeed do so, but when he found out they

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 113

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

were fake, he immediately took them down, being honest enough to tell his visitors that he had been the victim of a slander campaign. Here is my email to Ben Fulford, followed by his response to Rev. Pike. Pike's final response is at the bottom:

From: wes penre <research2003@xxxx.net> To: benjaminfulford@xxxx.com Subject: Picture Fraud Date: Wed, 4 Feb 2009 17:11:08 -0800 Hi again Benjamin, Got these pics from one of my visitors, so that takes care of that hoax. Now we’ll see if we can narrow it down. I re-watched your interview with David Rockefeller on YouTube. Great stuff!! Thanks, Wes

From: benjaminfulford@xxx.com To: cosmicrf@xxx.com Subject: Picture Fraud Date: Thu, 5 Feb 2009 12:30:18 +0900 Your photo of Lord Enlil is a psy-ops fake. You are either being fooled or you are yourself a Govt disinformation agent. Please see below. Benjamin Fulford, Tokyo Tel. xxx-xxx-xxxx

From: cosmicrf@xxx.com To: cosmicrfgroup Subject: SAALM Photos Date: Sun, 8 Feb 2009 22:45:33 +0530 Dear Ben and all our viewers, St Anthony wishes to state that the originator of the Enlil photos, 33 degree Elder of Zion, SAALM/NSA operative and computer graphics expert, Ray Bordon, at freedomfighter_annunaki@hotmail.com aka Dr A.R. Bordon aka Dr Roy W. Gordon at a-c-t-i-on_acio@hotmail.com,http://foundationreportsinlifephysics.org, has always stated right from the beginning that the Enlil photos, of which there are 2, not 1, are purposely ‘graphically engineered’ to ensure ‘plausible deniability’. In this respect, Brzezinski is ‘P1′ and Kissinger is ‘P2′ in the SAALM hierarchy and Brzezinski is a direct descendant of the Marduk/Enlil lineage who has

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 114

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

similar features to Enlil, but not identical, as also Hugh Hefner, by the way!! Now, Ray was tasked with the job of ‘leaking’ info on SAALM to the general public, but has now had much of the material removed from the Net due to orders from within the SAALM hierarchy who were getting worried about all the undue exposure, especially as both Lord Marduk and Enlil don’t like their photos being taken by anyone. However, interestingly enough, the photo of Lord Naanur, who is described as being the brother of Enlil, but traditionally, is understood to be the son of Enlil and grandson of Marduk, is supposed to be a very rare ‘one off’ photo of the ‘jolly’ fellow whose personality is purported to be much more ‘jovial’ than that of Enlil and Marduk, and who is standing alongside ‘P13′ of the SAALM hierarchy at the SAALM conference in Basle, Switzerland on 26th Oct 2006. So, friends, please understand, to get ‘cosmic top secret’ info, which is categorised 38 points higher than the H-bomb, out into the public domain demands a great deal of ingenuity on the part of those ‘leaking’ the information. So, please understand, folks, St Anthony, as former founder/director of the ‘Freedom of Information Campaign’ in London from 1991-96, is just trying to ‘leak’ all this info out as best he can, as is Ray Bordon, James Casbolt and other fearless ‘whistleblowers’ who are risking life and limb to educate YOU, the general public, about the alien presence on earth and the upcoming New World Order of the Antichrist; and, of course, the Second Coming of the Messiah, Jesus Christ, who will defeat the Antichrist at the Battle of Armageddon and establish the long-awaited 1000 yr Millenial kingdom of God on earth in 2030. Now, for those who have not yet seen the SAALM photos, St Anthony has managed to retrieve some of them, along with copies of Brzezinski’s photos which were used as a means of superimposing Enlil’s features on Brzezinski as well as the SAALM logo in the background, which are herewith attached. Finally, please remember, the aliens are here, and have been here for thousands of years – so, please try to understand that we are simply doing our best to educate you all concerning matters which have been kept concealed from the general public by the ruling elite, but which are now, in these last days, being revealed to the world. Yours in the battle for planet earth, Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike (UK) Cosmic Research Foundation Markapur, A.P. 523316, India E-Mail cosmicrf@hotmail.com Tel 91-8596-224312/9959-684635 Date 8th Feb 2009 At first, I was stunned because of the mentioning of A.R. (Ray) Bordon being mentioned in this psy op, and I must admit that made me skeptical of LPG-C' intentions for a while. However, nothing is what it seems, and after have researched LPG-C very intensively, and communicated with the scientists there a lot for the last 6-8 months, I have learned how S.A.A.L.M. and the ACIO work. Around the time of 2007-2008 (an eventful time period in many ways, it seems), LPG-C were subjected to a major slander campaign that almost got them "out of

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 115

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

business" so to speak. They were infiltrated by this ACIO agent, Roy W. Gordon, who stole pictures and sensitive material from the Life Physics Group California and escaped with it (I have mentioned this story elsewhere in my papers). Around the same time (or shortly after), S.A.A.L.M., in conjunction with ACIO, started using LPG-C names in their own email correspondence, pretending this closed group of scientists were part of S.A.A.L.M., and they also faked their email addresses to extend the harassment and to muddle the waters further. Dr. Gordon also contacts people on the Internet via forums and directly through emails. I have personally had a few, not so pleasant, encounters with him regarding Supriem Rockefeller, where he said Supriem is not whom he says he is and he started emphasizing he, Roy, is working for the NSA, which couldn't be interpreted otherwise than a covert threat. I stood up against him, and he "disappeared"; I never heard anything more from him on that subject. Anyhow, over time I have learned beyond any doubt, that LPG-C, or any of its members, have never been a part, or in liaison with, this Serpent Clan group. The people at Pine Gap are professionals when comes to confuse the public, to count out their "opponents". One way of doing so is to play both parties in a conflict, war, or game. Still, I am not surprised to see Brzezinski and Kissinger on the ACIO/S.A.A.L.M. member list. Now it’s time to reveal who Rev. Anthony Pike really is and the character of this man; the professional disinformation agent who screwed up big time for S.A.A.L.M. He is telling us a lot of relevant things, but also mixes in blatant lies to sidetrack those who want to know the truth. Albeit, by the time of this writing, I would be surprised if either Roy W. Gordon or Rev. Anthony Pike are still part of the Pine Gap Group. They have been more of an embarrassment to their group than of assistance. I am aware of that Dr. Gordon is still signing off his emails with "Pine Gap", but again, I would be mighty surprised if he is still with the group. In 2008, he was the one who put me on Pike's mailing list (without my consent), but I left it alone, because some topics were of some interest to me. I very rarely posted anything on that list, but mostly just read the postings from others. However, Rev. Pike’s behavior on the list became more and more bizarre, and one day he posted something that really caught me off guard. This guy lives in India and Great Britain, respectively, and he is supposedly pro-environmental. In this series of emails he seriously stated that he wants all motor vehicle drivers shot on the spot, or trialed for crimes against humanity, and executed! As a response to my reaction to this statement, he said he was “seriously kidding”, but if you continue reading the emails below, you’ll see he was deadly serious.

> >—–Original Message—–> > From: Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike [mailto:cosmicrf@xxx.com] > >Sent: Saturday, March 17, 2007 5:05 AM <> >To: cosmicrf@xxx.com > >Subject: Steps to Save the Planet

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 116

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Steps to Save the Planet 1) Shoot all car/truck/bus/bike drivers on site and airline pilots. 2) Plant one billion trees. N.B. Steps must be implemented immediately to avoid a global catastrophe and extinction of human race. P.S. To escape being shot, STOP DRIVING YOUR CAR!!!!!!! Yours in the battle for planet earth, Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike (UK) Cosmic Research Foundation Markapur, A.P. 523316, India E-Mail cosmicrf@xxx.com Date 17th March 2007. Cosmic Research Foundation Markapur, A.P. 523316, India E-Mail cosmicrf@xxx.com

From: “Wes@xxx” To: “‘Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike’” Subject: RE: Steps to Save the Planet Date: Sat, 17 Mar 2007 14:17:32 -0700 Are you kidding or are you serious? Wes Penre, Illuminati News

-–Dear Joe [Joe = Prophet Yahweh, Wes' comment], This is just to help clarify who is a Satanist and who isn’t. A Satanist is a sinner. A Christian is a saint. Satan managed to separate the church from the state so that his kingdom on earth would not be affected. Satan then proceeded to take over control of the church so that now both church and state are controlled by Satan. Yours in the battle for planet earth, Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike (UK) Cosmic Research Foundation Markapur, A.P. 523316, India E-Mail cosmicrf@xxx.com Date 17th March 2007. Cosmic Research Foundation

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 117

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Markapur, A.P. 523316, India E-Mail cosmicrf@xxx.com

> >From: Prophet Yahweh > >To: “Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike” > >Subject: Re: Steps to Save the Planet > >Date: Sat, 17 Mar 2007 08:36:02 -0700 (PDT) IN THE BLESSED AND HOLY NAME OF YAHWEH Dear Anthony Pike, I am not a Christian. I am a black orthodox Jew. And based on what you said, only Christians are saints. I strongly disagree with what you said. Also, your second email below, about shooting all who drive, reminds me of how people who looked like you declared that all my people (slaves) who ran off from their plantations, to find freedom in the Northern Non-Slave states, were to be shot on sight. Rather you were joking or not, I did not appreciate receiving your last two emails to me. Because of these two points, I politely ask that you take me off your list. Thanking you in advance, Prophet Yahweh

Dear Pastor Ramon, There’s NO DIFFERENCE between a true Jew and a true Christian. However, if you’re a ‘fake’ Jew or Christian you got problems. Regarding car drivers, they are guilty of mass murder and genocide and should be tried for ‘war crimes’ and then executed. If this is not done, God will do it Himself in the ‘Day of God’s Wrath’ from 2012 – 2030 (Rev 11.18). Regarding our mailing list, I will give you time to ‘cool down’ as yours is purely any emotional reaction; and, furthermore, you have already been appointed as one of our ‘X-Men’. Yours in the battle for planet earth, Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike (UK) Cosmic Research Foundation Markapur, A.P. 523316, India

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 118

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

E-Mail cosmicrf@hotmail.com Date 19th March 2007

Dear Wes, Thought I’d wake a few people up!!!! Yes, I’m seriously kidding!!!!!! Watch this space for more info on the subject. God ain’t finished with this planet yet!!!!!!!! Yours in the battle for planet earth, Rev Anthony G. Pike (UK) Cosmic Research Foundation Markapur, A.P. 523316, India E-Mail cosmicrf@xxx.com Date 19th March 2007

Date 22nd March 2007 >From: “Wes@xxx” >To: “‘Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike’” >Subject: RE: Steps to Save the Planet Dear Rev. Pike, I strongly agree with Prophet Yahweh. I was shocked to get the message (see bottom of this email) that car drivers etc. should be shot! Are you trying to help the Illuminati to reduce the population? In my eyes, this would be mass murder or genocide; far worse than Hitler’s Holocaust. Looks like you are showing your real satanic colors, pastor. If there were only TWO choices I could make and I HAD TO make one, whether to follow you or Hitler, I think Hitler is the better choice. At least the amount of victims of his were only within the million bracket. Who are you to decide who is to live and who is to die? We don’t need yet another genocide, sir. As a matter of fact, we don’t need any more killing whatsoever. Haven’t we had enough already? I don’t know what is clouding your eyes, but whatever it is it will lead you straight to the place you warn others about. Please remove me from the list and I would appreciate if you distributed this, my letter, to the rest of the group. Thank you, Wes Penre, Illuminati News P.S. I will burn the information kit you sent me in the mail. I don’t want to have anything to do with it.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 119

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Dear Wes, Thanks for your and Prophet Yahweh’s great words of wisdom. You and him are the type of people that brought Hitler to power and will shortly bring the Antichrist to power through total lack of understanding of what I’ve said and the aim of saying it. Prophet Yahweh, for instance, thinks I want to kill car drivers because car drivers are purposely going around trying to run people over. Okay, why don’t you put your mouth over the exhaust pipe for 1 minute and see what happens – yes, you got it, you’ll be DEAD. So, every time you go around in your car you are literally murdering thousands of people!!!! I also heard that car exhaust fumes are radioactive- so, what with computer screens, mobile phones and TVs, let alone nuclear reactors and bombs, the whole planet is in radioactive meltdown!!!! Yours in the battle for planet earth, Rev Dr Anthony G. Pike (UK)

James Casbolt, the former MI6, S.A.A.L.M. member and more, who was also on this list, but not very talkative, mentions Pike as a "friend" in his book, "Agent Buried Alive".. Needless to say, I left the group shortly after I'd blasted Pike, telling him things I don't want to repeat here. Ramon (Prophet Yahweh) was equally upset and left as well. I guess all organizations have their agents who can't control themselves, and so does S.A.A.L.M. Here are excerpts from emails posted on the Godlike Productions Forum (GLP)[16] in December 2009, where Dr. Gordon is threatening one of the forum members. I will quote the whole post: Well I recently checked my e-mail and was surprised to see this e-mail in my inbox. Unfortunately I reported it as a phishing scam to Google, and they took it out of my box! But, I did save the message. This was from: "a-c-t-i-o-n_acio@hotmail.com" So I guess feel free to e-mail him! "STAY AWAY FROM ANY SUBJECT MATTER DEALING WITH LORD MARDUK OR YOU WILL BE TERMINATED WITH EXTREME PREJUDICE YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED DR ROY GORDON ACTION_ACIO SAALM 33 DEGREE OF ZION

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 120

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

PINE GAP NTH AUSTRALIA"[17] As a note aside, the above email from Dr. Gordon reminds me of the law under which the members are subjected. "Items 5 and 6" of that law, taken from a leaked, secret Intranet conversation between members, says: Item 5 dissuades us from disclosing anyone from the association with S.A.A.L.M. punishable by death. Item 6 tell us that the agency will seek extreme termination with prejudice in the case of a breach of this agreement resulting in the disclosure of unauthorized information, beginning with extreme harrassment [sic] in order to stop the disclosure.[18] Dr. Gordon apparently felt a power rush at the moment and tried to instigate the threat of a similar nature being applied to public who reveal too much about "King Marduk". However, if true that Dr. Gordon has been expelled from S.A.A.L.M., public statement like this was probably part of his problem.

Figure 11: Dr. Roy Gordon, as he depicts himself these days

Dr. Gordon also has a facebook account which is much more laid back: http://www.facebook.com/profile.php?id=100000180909654&sk=info

6.1 S.A.A.L.M.'s Secret Conversations Leaked S.A.A.L.M., with their Headquarters in Pine Gap, Australia, is an offshoot from the ACIO, with the whole purpose, as mentioned earlier, to keep Marduk's clan in power after Nibiru has passed through the solar system.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 121

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 12: Australian map with Pine Gap circled in red in the middle (click on image for enlargement)

Pine Gap, near Alice Springs, Australia[19], has a bad reputation, and is known for alien and UFO activities, especially reptilian. It's not a place you want to go camping. There are also a lot of Global Elite research and experiments going on in the area, such as Echelon[20] and Project L.U.C.I.D.[21], most of it is orchestrated by a faction of the Earthbound Anunnaki of the Serpent Clan, possibly in cooperation with a faction of the Alpha Draconian Reptilians. S.A.A.L.M. were using a secure server to communicate to their members, where they could speak more openly. However, Casbolt (most probably) decided to put their conversations on the Internet so everybody could read. He was successful and at least some of the communication leaked out. I'm going to post that information here, so the reader gets a fuller picture of this organization, also because S.A.A.L.M. apparently have now closed the Internet Archives pertaining to their correspondence. First a few pictures that were attached to the information:

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 122

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 13a: Between Christ and Satan [click to enlarge]

Figure 13b: Close-up of one of the above book pages

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 123

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 13c: A Masonic S.A.A.L.M. Passport

P6 Intro Intro Brothers: Welcome to the S.A.A.L.M We have our work cut out for us. Please download attachment form on which we ask that you provide us with certain information on yourself. This information will NOT be shared with any patrons or funding sources, present or former employers, or anyone outside the group. The information gathered therein will be used to catalog talent within the group, suggest assignments to new members and invite "old" members to task forces, focus groups, analysis conferences, etc. In other words, it is intended for dcision-making on deployment of talent within the group to tasks as they may appear on the horizon. We hope to have an information system set up such that a server not connected to the net but accessible through "gates" can store all group production by member, so when specialty and talent needs to be identified for any one or more tasks important to the group, this may be quickly by the stroke of a few keys. Additionally, upon consultation with foundation legal counsel, it has been determined by the first-among-equals that any work performed by anyone, of any nationality, for and on behalf of S.A.A.L.M. will require strict compartmentalized coverage under certain chapters and parts of the Code of Federal Regulations (CRF) and other congressional acts and laws. We will handle highly sensitive information without the benefit of formal clearance vetting; therefore, each of us need to sign at minimum a nondisclosure

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 124

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

agreement that describes what our legal advisors require S.A.A.L.M members to be covered for. Shortly, you will also get a security indoctrination memo from one of us. This will address item No. 2 in the nondisclosure agreement following the CV questionnaire. This is information with you, in compliance with legal requirements set for us to go by. We have established a nonvetting status for S.A.A.L.M members to receive and work with what is essentially information of a classified nature. Nonvetting means that there will not be a lengthy background check process, and that much of the responsibility for keeping the ranks free of checkered characters and egomaniacs falls on us the founding members. The suggestion has been made, and the first-among-equals and some of the first members agree, that the first fifty members be declared "founding members" -- a distinction that constitutes more of a badge of courage and wisdom about the necessity for S.A.A.L.M and the personal valor for being a stand-up and be counted kind of person. We will need to have these documents back as soon as feasibly possible. Keep copies for your records but off the desktop. Again, welcome Brothers. Work is ahead of us, but let's have fun doing it. In service to All. P6 Xxxxxxxxxxxx P4 Update Task Members I am going to invite you to log in onto the SAALM group, go to the FILES section, click, and get into the Orion_Sirius_Asmodeus Folder. Once in, to the the Exercise 1a- WA-G4B0032 Word.doc, download it and follow the instructions at the end of the file. We are using an identical strategy here to the one used in getting our own folks to gain perspective(s) on and discernment of an information-set, and then subject the intellectual extract(s) of what you are able to gain from your analysis of the set to your "other" brain's "intellect" and see what happens. What will be interesting for us to learn about all of yourselves in doing this exercise. When you start dealing with real information on things of interest to the group, I need to know you will have the metamethod in place and your visceral "nose" is working and fully engaged. We'll also get to see throughout these exercises how much, how well (or how little) you trust your enteric brain, its information processing and your trust and use of the information it generates for you...Makes sense? Tell me your views and feelings on the task. CA-3 continues his and the team's trek. His location is not related to his tasks, but rather it is a necessity for him at this time. He is proceeding on down to the next location, and once over onto the other. We're heeding his recommendation and taking them in tandem.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 125

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Recruiting continues. We pick up seven and lose three (due to the CV/NDA requirement). The team you belong to is still short of people but it will come. The two others are beginning to work on T&D assignments (such as what you are starting now). For the next 12 months, we'll slowly bring everybody up to par and up to speed on things, and once 2D is in your hands, allow about 3-6 months to have people get into Accelerated Learning [23] from the inside out, not the other way around. Am enclosing a relatively new article DA-1 and I did a while ago, as it is pertinent to some of the questions you raised about enteric info processing and A.L.. It is actually a presentation on the bases of life physics, with particular attention to 4-spacetime "reality matrices." I have a feeling it will help you understand things a little clearer.[24] P4 PA Alpha Subject: Preapplication from Alpha member for Working Group FYI, this came to P4, P5 and myself today. I've polled the others, and have their agreement that RomanCandle would be a good addition to the Working Group. He is member of Alpha group, Traveler-1 (DTS) and Raven's group. I was also forewarned by DTS that GreatWaldo (the fellow with the Annunaki Gold from the Rothschild line is also interested in joining, but have not heard from him yet. Anyway, below please find copy of his message to P1 P2 and P12

G07 -- Chief Scientist G09 -- Project Officer Membership Preapplication -- S.A.A.L.M. Working Group -This is my preapplication for membership in the S.A.A.L.M. Working Group. I am sending this preapplication by advice of my Alpha-FAE, Traveler-1, and per conversation with P3 on 3 September 2006. You already have my CV and I have signed all documentation required earlier this year. I respectfully petition membership in the Working Group. I have contributions to make that members may find helpful, and I am ready to do my part in the effort. Sincerely, RomanCandle

Since this is preapplication, that means he is announcing intention and testing the waters... He's the orange... I will put together a summary of what he submitted, and as he is an engineer at the lab, he is covered by things you

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 126

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

are not covered for, so let me get around that and see if I can get hold of his CV and possibly a resume, at least of things you can see... We need to vote on this. Good enough? Let me know as soon as possible, so as to be able to give him an answer to what I understand will be a formal application once he hears from one of us unofficially... In service, P4 Dear GA-2, Thank you for calling last night. I’m afraid that this is what happens when I get stressed past a certain point, and it is evident to me and my family that things have gone way past what I can cope with and remain functional at this point in time. I’m sorry I was not able to truly listen to you. Could you please put the substance of what your assessment of the present situation is in an email to each of us? Before I continue, please let me update you on the situation with the man in St. Jo with the terminal colon cancer…I believe it was the 4 th of this month that we found out about him and prayed for him. Yesterday (9/7) we got word that the man, whose rent has now been fully taken care of, went back to the doctor who reexamined him and stated that the problem was not nearly as serious as they had first believed! That was the same day I interfaced with Hurricane John and asked it to disperse some of its energy and please slow down. It did, from a category 4 to a 2…I’ll bet lots of people were praying the same thing, and there are a lot of devout believers in Mexico! Thank you all for adding your prayers and energy to Mother Earth’s and mine. My big question is how did this Casbolt person know our email addresses? Never mind the shocking nature of his allegations. It feels like someone is really trying to massage my view of what is, and that is the one thing guaranteed to send me into red alert emergency lockdown defend against all comers mode. Sorry, that’s simply how it is with me just now. The written word is something tangible yet way less charged than personal contact, which I apparently can’t manage at this time. I can deal with the written word best right now. The whole reason I decided to participate in the first place is that this seemed like the first really pure and altruistic group endeavor I’d ever heard of since, say, the early days of the space program. It seems like the very best way I can help others, and the transformation in my own being astounds me. To have this endeavor threatened, from whatever source and for whatever reason, makes me sick in the core of my soul. I’m doing everything I can to manage my stress so I can truly understand what is going on and thus know how to appropriately respond. This is why I told you at the very beginning about having PTSD, because I was concerned that just this sort of thing would happen, to the detriment of us all. I feel incredibly protective of this mission, these people--all of them, and the things we’re all learning, and the idea of this know how in the wrong hands horrifies me. Yet whoever is originating all this had to have rather intimate access to our group--a security breach of the

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 127

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

worst kind--and this has been an ongoing concern for me from the very beginning. I think the blog may have been a mistake. It seemed like almost a dare to the entire intel community, and I think no spy worth his dark glasses could resist attempting a crack at such a tempting, alluring target! CB and I are working up a sitrep/intel analysis to follow ASAP. It will be sent as an attachment to an email. If that’s not ok, if you want it sent another way let us know. What works best for me in such a situation is information, and the best medium for me to process information and correlate it with what I already know from this and other data streams is the written word. Thank you for your patience. I want to get to the bottom of this and understand it all. Namaste, Wise Owl September 8 2006 1335 CDT Dear First-among-Equals, What follows is our joint assessment and analysis of the present situation as seen from our perspective. It is based on telephone, email and IM conversations between us and yourselves, email exchanges between us, Mr. S and yourselves, the Casbolt letter, and communications from S. to us, which we immediately forwarded unanswered to you. It is based on gnosive and intuitive methods as well, and thus what we interpret may not be the complete picture. We’ve looked at the overall cumulus of information available to us many times, considering all possibilities, and this is what we’ve come up with. The grandfather of all concerns is how much of this technology has gotten out, and to whom? Who does Mr. H actually work for? And how did he get to be in such a sensitive position before anybody had received any CV or NDA from him? This looks like a professional intelligence operation of the highest quality combined with a security breach at a high level within and structurally endemic to this organization. Either that or it is an elaborate test for us which we consider to be entirely possible since it is hard to believe that fuks with your professional associations could be so badly blindsided. The primary problem appears to be a spectacular failure of internal security at a very basic level. The decision to place Mr. H in such a sensitive position before securing a signed NDA and a complete and fully substantiated CV was a poor one. Not only that, but there are 13 people in this group, and we haven’t seen any documentation on any of them. The only CVs we’ve seen were the most recent one about RC and one before which everyone agreed was unsuitable. We think the blog was a mistake, practically an invitation for some enterprising young intelligence operative to have a crack at such a tempting target. There are people in that business who’d attempt it just to see if it

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 128

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

could be done! Then there is plain old greed, which must not be ignored. And you yourselves have written in “Between the Devil and the Returning Rock” about how thoroughly our military and intelligence communities were compromised, about the presence of M.s people on military bases on US soil. Yet these organizations were invited subscribers to the blog! We understand that you are scientists and creative geniuses, and are finely focussed on the investigative and development side of things, but perhaps have not before now needed to become personally involved with security as we would imagine the companies you were with previously would have had excellent internal security. And we well understand the nature of a true scientist is not only to discover but to share, compare notes, see what results everybody comes up with. Yet when it comes to developing a technology with the express purpose of saving billions of lives, security should be of paramount concern and should be in the hands of experts. Mr. S is of particular concern to us. His email to Ga-2, cc to us, dated 08/28/2006, looks like a set of legitimate questions a student would have about this rather exotic subject. However, they could also be the final, confirming kind of questions a mole would ask to be sure he had the information accurately interpreted and memorized. Possibilities, not certainties. Yesterday he’s alleging to have been told that H was murdered, quits the group, then today he’s asking for more modules?! We shouldn’t be allowing this guy anywhere near this organisation and this information/technology. What concerns us most is the fact that Ed K.[22] is discussing things he couldn’t possibly have learned except from a leak from within this organisation. Either that, or someone is doing a damned good job of monitoring what should be secure and private communication channels. That is an industry basic security measure. The reality is that today’s world is full of people who wouldn’t hesitate to steal this technology for profit or worse. Finally -- who is James Casbolt and how does he know so much about this project? We understand that this was a “sticking our necks out” sort of venture but that doesn’t mean we should become sharkbait because of poor security -that would be a complete waste of everything we’re all working for. Mistakes have been made, but there are valuable lessons to be learned from all this. We need to learn from this and adjust our structure and practice accordingly. Knowledge must be applied to become wisdom! We trust the L but they are not obligated to save us from our own foolishness. It is indeed our responsibility to defend our own biokind and sort out our own political and cultural differences. As we understand it, they are helping this project in an extraordinary way but they have limits to which they must adhere. Let’s not waste this opportunity to help our own planet and

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 129

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

many others besides by allowing ourselves to be this vulnerable to penetration. We should be taking all available measures to secure this project because its premature exposure will nullify the effectiveness and thus thwart the very purpose for which all this is being done: it will put the possibility of BST into the reach of the enema, the man from the gateway, and every terrorist with access to the Internet. Security should be comparable to that of the Manhattan Project. Instead, we have this present dilemma. Wise Owl and Cannonball James Casbolt, the MI6 whistle-blower, who was cleverly taken down from the Internet and successfully silenced. Don't get me wrong; he's still alive from what I know, but his, sometimes quite revealing, website was successfully shut down. There are those who have written Casbolt off as a hoax because he had the fake pictures of Enlil and Naanur on his website together with some photos which was supposedly from Dulce underground base, but in fact were fake too. Unfortunately, this is often what happens to whistle-blowers when they come close to the truth. Casbolt was fed fake pictures to discredit the rest of the relevant information on the website, and some researchers fell for the trick and started discredit him, instead of looking at the bigger picture. So the rumors of Casbolt being a hoax spread quickly over the Internet and most people now wrote him off. Casbolt saw no other solution than to discontinue his website-unfortunately.

Figure 14: James Casbolt

It is true that Casbolt, just like he says in interviews and in his excellent book, "Agent Buried Alive", he has been subjected to heavy mind control from within the government. He was subjected to a specific one called "Project Mannequin", and he is apparently trained as an assassin. However, he has been working on breaking the control, which is not an easy task, and done his best to reveal his experiences. Once in a while, he has fallen back in line and had "relapses", but that is to be expected. I, for one, am not discarding Casbolt as a hoax at all. He fits too well into the picture, and most of what he has been telling us is true. To his defense, he also apologized for the fake pictures on his website, admitting he had been tricked. But it was too little, too late, as it seems. What a shame. There is some quite interesting conversations, as I mentioned earlier, between S.A.A.L.M. members, ripped off a secure server, put on the Internet (much of it by Casbolt himself), taken down, but then retrieved from the Internet Archives. Fortunately, people were able to download this information in time before it even disappeared from the Wayback Machine. I am not going to copy the whole thing here, as it can be conveniently read at "Bibliotecapleyades.net"[25].

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 130

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

My next paper will continue the story about the WingMakers, the Labyrinth Group, the Corteum, and how they have set up their great deception. Let's add the "Anima Problem" and Blank Slate Technology (BST) to the mix.

Figure 15: Diagram of Ancient Arrow site (click on image to enlarge)

Notes: [1] http://wingmakers.us; http://wingmakers.com; http://lyricus.org; http://eventtemples.com; http://sovereignintegral.com [2] http://lifephysics.org [3] The Dr. Anderson Interviews (http://www.wingmakers.us/wingmakersorig/wingmakersinterviews/ www.wingmakers.com/interview/iview1.shtml); The Dr. Neruda Interviews (http://wingmakers.com/interviews.html) [4] http://wingmakers.us [5] Michael E. Salla, PhD, "Eisenhower's 1954 Meeting With Extraterrestrials: The Fiftieth Anniversary of First Contact? Research Study #8", January 28, 2004, Revised February 12, 2004, http://www.exopolitics.org/Study-paper-8.htm [5a] Ashayana Deane [2002]: "Voyagers II", p.553. [6] This claim has also been confirmed by the Pleiadian renegade group, whom Barbara Marciniak is channeling, in the book, "Bringers of the Dawn", (1992). Most researchers into human origins today subscribe to this theory by now. However, they were not the only ones who were seeding us, and the best

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 131

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________ probability is that the Pleiadians (WingMakers) did so together with a humanoid group of giants from the Lyran star system. [7] Again, here is more confirmation on what was told to us by the same above Pleiadian Group. When the Anunnaki from Nibiru came down to Earth to manipulate our DNA, the "Living Library" was already well developed, but was hijacked by the Anunnaki. For more info, see "Bringers of the Dawn". [8] Classified ACIO Document, no. 040297-14X-P17AA-23, from Dr. Jeremy Sauthers, Director of Special Projects, ACIO, to all Labyrinth Group Members (FYEO), p. 2. [9] The "Dr. Anderson Interviews", http://www.wingmakers.us/wingmakersorig/wingmakersinterviews/ www.wingmakers.com/interview/iview1.shtml [10] http://wingmakers.com/whats-new.html [11] The Project Camelot Interview can be found here: http://projectcamelot.org/james_wingmakers.html. Also, James is presenting a .pdf free download at WingMakers.com: http://wingmakers.com/downloads/Interview_James_PC.pdf. [12] See, Wes Penre (2011): "Metaphysics Paper #1: The Creator Experiencing Itself". [13] From "Indoctrination for Members of S.A.A.L.M." [undated]. [14] http://illuminati-news.com/ufos-and-aliens/html/abductions_and_encounters.htm [15] http://educate-yourself.org/mc/casboltintro08sep08.shtml [16] http://www.godlikeproductions.com/ [17] http://www.godlikeproductions.com/forum1/message951627/pg1 op. cit. [18] From "Indoctrination for Members of S.A.A.L.M." [undated]. [19] http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/sociopolitica/sociopol_pinegap08.htm [20] ibid. [21] ibid. [22] Ed K. is Ed Komarek, known UFO researcher, especially into the Tall Whites. His blog address is, http://exopolitics.blogspot.com . [23] Note here something interesting: "Accelerated Learning" (S.A.A.L.M.); "Accelerated Intelligence" (WingMakers); "ATI" (LPG-C). Three different names for the same thing. All three groups are using techniques to speed up Intelligence in its members; alien technology, I should add... [24] "Life Physics" and "Reality Matrices" are also taught within LPG-C. [25] http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/sociopolitica/esp_sociopol_illuminati_40.htm http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/archivos_pdf/SAALM01.pdf http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/archivos_pdf/SAALM02.pdf http://www.bibliotecapleyades.net/archivos_pdf/SAALM03.pdf

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 132

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(Present and Future Challenges Section) PFC Paper #4: The Animus, Artificial Intelligence, and Blank Slate Technology by Wes Penre, Tuesday, June 14, 2011

1. The Labyrinth Group, ACIO, and the NSA (a Background) The NSA (National Security Agency) is a government organization whose forerunner was the "General Services Special Projects Laboratory" (SPL). SPL was formed in 1938, and very little is known about it. It was not meant to be an official body. Then, in 1949, the "Armed Forces Security Agency" (AFSA) was created, on May 20. [1] On November 4, 1952, the NSA was officially formed and instigated by Harry S. Truman.[2] A year later, in 1953, SPL was folded into the NSA as un unacknowledged department, and ultimately, the ACIO# (Advanced Contact Intelligence Organization) was folded into the SPL as an unacknowledged research laboratory. [3] ACIO, in fact, is older than both the NSA and the AFSA, as it was created in 1940, two years after SPL. It was two levels deep and its code name was "Black Root".[4] The reason for all this secrecy and security was not due to war or Intelligence gathering on antagonistic countries or leaders, as many people think. Rather, it was (and is) because of the ET issue. It's mainly a race against whom is going to get ET technology for military applications first. The Labyrinth Group, which was created by code name "Fifteen" (more about him in the next subsection), came into existence much later, in 1963, with its main purpose to learn how to master Blank Slate Technology (BST) to counter an alien invasion, something which will be discussed in details later in this paper. In review: the Neruda Interviews contain more correct information than The Anderson Interviews (see Wes Penre: "PFC Paper #3: The True Story About the WingMakers, The Labyrinth Group, and S.A.A.L.M. (May 26, 2011)" for reference). In fact, as explained in the above reference, the WMM was taken over by the Labyrinth Group and the Corteum, the latter being an alien faction working with the Labyrinth Group. After that, the WMM became more esoteric and purposely made less comprehensible for the public. The new owner of the WingMakers site, Mahu Nahi of the Corteum, wanted people to believe that it was mostly myth to defuse the truth that had been released by Dr. Neruda, a defector from the same group. So, for the record (and this is coming directly from the horse's mouth, Dr. Neruda, whom I've been connected with), the Neruda Interviews are what is containing the most truth of all the WMM, in conjunction with the "Ancient Arrow Project", although the latter has been altered by Mahu Nahi, a.k.a. "James". The rest of the WMM still contains truth (like in the case of the Sovereign Integral, the Energetic Heart, and

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 133

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

most of how the human template is constructed), but needs to be read very carefully to distinguish between truth and falsehood.

2. Fifteen; The Man Behind the Number (Some of this will be repetition from previous paper in order to give the whole story, so a lot of additional information has been added). According to the Neruda Interviews, Fifteen was born in 1934 and was only 22 years old when he joined the ACIO in 1956. He was a renegade genius from the universities who wanted to build computers powerful enough to be used for timetravel. He came to the ACIO from Bell Laboratories due to an alliance between the two organizations at that time. In 1958, the Corteum became known to the ACIO, and due to Fifteen's incomparable genius he was the obvious choice for being the one working with them. The Corteum found his obsessive interest in time-travel interesting, and somewhere along the line they told him about Blank Slate Technology (BST), a very special form of time-travel, which the Corteum had been trying to develop for some time. Fifteen was hooked as soon as he got to know about it. While working within the ACIO, Fifteen was approached by the Zeta Grays, who wanted to offer him a full-scale Technology Transfer Program (TTP#), but Fifteen turned them down. He did not fully trust them, and he had already a similar (and better) program set up with the Corteum. Also, the Grays were much less organized and united than the Corteum, and the least thing Fifteen wanted was instability. Albeit, there was something the Grays had which the Figure 1: Zeta Gray Corteum lacked; memory implants and their genetic hybridization technologies. After much consideration, he decided to make a deal with them as well, but outside of the organization. He did not want too close of a relationship with the Zetas. In exchange, we provided them with access to our "information systems relative to genetic populations and their unique predisposition across a variety of criteria including mental, emotional, and physical behaviors; and they [also] provided us with their genetic findings."[5] We need to keep in mind here that there are several different bands of Grays, and not all of them are from Zeta Reticuli I and II; some of them are not even from our galaxy. Grays are pretty common in the Universe. However, even the Zeta Grays are not united, and different factions have different imperatives. Something many of them have in common (although working within different, unrelated groups, sometimes antagonistic to each other), is their genetic research agenda. They are a dying race and need genetics from the Living Library (Earth and its life forms) to strengthen their biokind. Their deteriorating bodies have to a large degree lost their ability to host an Information Cloud (soul), and have therefore become more and more like artificial intelligence.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 134

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Factions of the Grays made treaties with humans already in the early 1950s through the Eisenhower administration (if not even earlier, through Hitler), and offered TTP in exchange for being allowed to abduct humans and animals in small quantities for their research. As if this wasn't bad enough, the Grays broke their agreement and abducted far more people than the government had agreed to, and in addition, the Grays did not report each abduction case to the government either, which Figure 2: Joint Corteum & ACIO Seal they had promised. I am not sure if Fifteen was unaware of this fact when he made this new agreement with another faction of the Grays, or if he was willing to pay the price of deception for the exchange of technology on a conscious basis. His reasoning is unknown to me, unfortunately, as it would tell us more about this man's character. Whatever the case, the Grays were clearly interested in our information databases, and this was their primary agenda in regards to the ACIO, as it looked like. This particular band of Grays reported directly to Fifteen, because they saw him as someone with an IQ similar to themselves, and regarded him as the CEO of Earth. In many ways, he actually was... In 1963, two hundred Corteum members under the supervision of their leader, Mahu Nahi, and 118 brilliant human scientists joined Fifteen in the project of building the Labyrinth Group, which was somewhat connected to, but mostly separated from, the ACIO and the NSA. By using his influence, and with some help from his alien friends, Fifteen soon found himself in charge of both the ACIO and the Labyrinth Group, which was one of his big goals. In completing this, he had great help from Dr. Neruda's stepfather, who was a high executive of the ACIO and supportive of Fifteen. He assisted in putting Fifteen as the CEO of the ACIO. Fifteen could now put a cloak of secrecy around both groups in a way he couldn't have done prior to that. He now had free hands to develop BST. A little bit later in this paper, I am going to explain why Fifteen and the Corteum are so interested in this time-travel technology, and how the technology works, and it has to do with prophecy, and an alien race from another galaxy; an Invader Force, whose purpose is to establish themselves here and steal our genetics; however, in a much more aggressive way than the Grays. At least, this is what the Corteum has been telling the Labyrinth Group. Fifteen soon made the Labyrinth Group quite a wealthy organization by selling soft technology to the government and certain major Companies in the U.S. and the rest of the world. These technologies came from the Corteum, and some from the Grays, but Fifteen kept most of it within his group, and only sold what he thought would be "safe" and not used for destructive purposes. This is the main source of income for the group, to be able to finance their research. Then, what Fifteen considers "safe technology" is up for debate.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 135

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Fifteen, for obvious reasons, is a very private person, and he is working on BST more or less 24/7; that's mainly all he does. The number "fifteen" has to do with security clearance within the ACIO and the Labyrinth Group. Levels 1-11 are assigned to the ACIO only, and 12-14 are all within the Labyrinth Group; in fact, they are the Labyrinth Group. Level Fifteen is reserved for Fifteen himself, hence his nick-name. His real name is not known to me. So how does he look? He is now, as of this writing, on his Figure 3: Fifteen in Hawaii, 1978 77th year; there is a description of him in the Neruda Interviews, and a photo taken of him at his resort in Hawaii in 1978, when he was 44 years old. It was put in circulation (without Fifteen's consent, I'm sure) (fig. 3). This picture has been verified to me by reliable sources as being genuine. Fifteen is of average height, and when Dr. Neruda defected, he had shoulder-long hair, gray, usually worn in a ponytail. Neruda said he always reminded him of Pablo Picasso with long hair, and the same penetrating eyes. They are also mischievous, "like you'd expect from a child who's done something wrong on the surface, but underneath, they've created something wonderful, it's just that nobody understands the wonderful part yet." His country of origin is Spain, which is interesting, because Mahu Nahi, the leader of the Corteum alien race, who supposedly took over the WingMakers site, has a Spanish accent and lets the people know in Hempel's recorded interviews that he was born in Spain, outside Barcelona. If he's a Corteum, that's of course misinformation, but if the person whom Hempel met in his home in the Summer of 2008 was Fifteen, it explains both the accent and his height. Hempel didn't mention Mahu's height, but if he was a Corteum, he would have looked slightly different from a normal human. The evidence speaks of a person who looks quite normal, of about average height, visiting Hempel in his home, and unless someone else within the Labyrinth Group is from Spain as well, Fifteen fits the profile. Just some food for thought.[6] Fifteen is on a life mission. Some of us can relate to that. Ever since we were little kids we knew there is something we need to do and we need to find out what it is. Fifteen found out early in life that he wanted to work with developing time-travel technologies. He probably didn't know why he had that inner drive, but when other kids were playing regular children's games, Fifteen was already thinking about timetravel. In school and the universities, he quickly outsmarted his professors and didn't keep quiet about it. He was outspoken and eager to show what he knew. Of course, us being aware of how things work in the field of education, the professors, instead of taking this brilliant young man to heart, they felt threatened by him and often kicked him out from their school of learning. His already off-the-chart IQ was boosted exponentially when he was subjected to the Corteums' "Accelerated Intelligence Technology" (AIT#). Then, after he had selected the cream of the crop from the scientific core of the ACIO, he let them undergo the same procedure in an effort to create a team which could successfully develop BST#.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 136

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

2.1 A Cloak of Secrecy, Two Different Defense Weapons and Hidden Agendas Fifteen has already from the beginning been very secretive about everything he is doing. Nothing whatsoever which is discussed within the Labyrinth Group is allowed to be discussed with anybody outside the organization; not even with life partners. Hence, Dr. Neruda is the first, and only person so far who has defected from the Labyrinth Group and started talking both about the Animus Problem (which will be addressed in this paper) and BST. Dr. Neruda says in his interview: Fifteen withholds his knowledge from the media and the general public because he doesn't want to be seen as a savior of humanity--the next messiah. And he especially doesn't want to be seen as some fringe lunatic that should be locked up, or worse yet, assassinated because he is so misunderstood. The instant he stepped forward with what he knows he would lose his privacy and his ability to discover BST. And this he'll never do. Most people who know about this greater reality are fearful of stepping into the public scrutiny because of the fear of being ridiculed. You have to admit, that the general public is frightened by what it doesn't understand, and they do kill the messenger.[7] To fully understand why this is such a secret I need to touch on the subject of the Animus before we go into them in detail. Briefly, the Anima (Anima or Animae; plural of Animus) are apparently an alien, ontocyboenergetic* life form from another galaxy who are planning on coming here to Earth as an invader force; as conquerors, but also to get hold of our DNA. Due to a catastrophe in their past, they developed into a machine race with artificial intelligence. In other words, they lack what we call a soul, or information cloud. [8] Their intention is to once again be able to have soul-carriers (biological bodies biokinds - which can carry a soul) and to have information clouds inhabit them. If they don't, they can not be part of the evolvement towards being ONE with the Prime Creator, and their part in the universal cycles will be very limited. Therefore they are planning on invading this planet, steal our DNA, and perhaps our whole biokind template, and kill off the rest of the population. So why Earth? Why travel from a distant galaxy to invade us, a small planet in the outskirts of the Milky Way? First of all, we are not "just" a small planet. Our biokind is very special and part of an intergalactic experiment called the Living Library. Yes, the Living Library was interfered with some 300,000 years ago when the Anunnaki took over this planet, but our soul-carriers are still very special, and carry traits which are quite unusual in this galaxy and beyond; namely, a wide range of emotions! Still, we are not the only target for the Animus. They have set out probes in our solar system as well as in others. This year, in 2011, they are scheduled to set up a new probe close to Earth to study our development as a human species. Last they checked (around 12,000 years ago), we were still not developed enough for them to

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 137

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

interfere, but Fifteen and the Corteum are afraid that we are now! This means that an invasion could be scheduled by the Anima shortly after the probe has scanned our present biokind/biomind. This is where BST comes into the picture. With the gain of certain knowledge, Fifteen is hoping to be able to stop the invasion by using his time-travel technology. Details about how this works will be discussed in a separate section below. Thus, we can see from Fifteen's point of view why he wants to keep this whole thing secret. However, Dr. Neruda didn't agree with Fifteen's approach to use BST to stop this alien race. Just like LPG-C, the Labyrinth Group have their form of remote viewing (RV#), similar to Extra Neuro Sensing (ENS#), but although the subject of ENS is not supposed to be able to detect the neuro-sensor (or ENS, the person who remote views), the WingMakers detected the ENS used by Fifteen and they started to probe her. When Fifteen established that the beings whom detected her were actually WingMakers of the Central Race, he got cold feet and stopped all future RV sessions. He was afraid that the WingMakers would jeopardize his BST plans and stop him. This was another reason why Dr. Neruda defected. He believed that the WingMakers' defense weapon installed on our planet would be more effective than BST; he said that all logic showed this to be true, but Fifteen strongly disagreed. So how can the seven WingMakers sites be defensive weapons? It's because, due to extensive RV sessions, Dr. Neruda came to the conclusions that among other things, they are DNA triggers. It is known inside the Labyrinth Group that these sites are supposedly meant to activate something in our DNA. This hypothesis alone makes a great connection to the renegade group of Pleiadians whom Barbara Marciniak is channeling. The latter is, in their own words, here to help us activate dormant parts of our DNA[8]. Although they have not mentioned anything in their lectures about the Tributary Zone in general, they have made hints to that such exist, and of course the Pleiadians are not the only alien race interested in seeing our DNA evolve. The Anima, in more clear language, is after our "source code"; the code which the Lyrans and their group of Original Planners implanted in our DNA, the code which is being "decoded" as we speak by gamma rays transmitted from the Sun and the Galactic Center by the Founders, who appear in segments, in form of light-waves! By understanding this source code, they can prevent us from evolving. At least, this is what makes all the sense to me, but there is another twist to this story, as we shall see when we move on. The purpose of this activation was still a mystery when Dr. Neruda defected, but Neruda himself thinks it has something to do with stimulating our fluid intelligence and enabling sensory inputs that have been dormant within our central nervous system (and he is right). The enhancement of the central nervous system, still according to both Dr. Neruda and Marciniak's group, makes the defensive weapon more effective to any alien attack. In fact, it has to do with ascension; the rest is secondary. Dr. Neruda contemplated that the WingMakers' defensive weapon had to do with rendering our planet invisible to the 2011 probes sent out by the Anima, and in a sense, that is true as we shall see in the Soulution Papers. Here are Dr. Neruda's own words:

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 138

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

They [the WingMakers] wrote that higher frequencies were emanating from the central universe, and that these seven sites comprised a collective technology that somehow coordinated these frequencies or higher energies to bring about a shift in the planet's vibratory structure, enabling life on the planet to survive the shift and remain undetected by the Animus. [...] It confirmed that we're dealing with the Central Race, and that they want the cultural artifacts from the seven sites to be shared with the public. These elements were connected to the effectiveness of the defensive weapon. [...] They left behind poetry, music, paintings, and even a glossary. It seems to me that all of these elements -- in addition to the philosophy -- are connected. Also, I'm suggesting that something fundamentally changes when these materials are absorbed, and perhaps this change, whatever it is, resonates with the technology from the seven sites. [...] ...I've absorbed the materials and I've noticed changes.[9] It sure sounds to me that the WingMakers sites were left here on Earth by the Lyran/Pleiadian group who were chased away by the Anunnaki, supposedly 4500,000 years ago. They are activation sites and defense weapons against those who would try to stop humankind from evolving. The WingMakers sites are heavily encoded and encrypted, and Marciniak's Pleiadians say that intruders of any kind will not be able to figure out the source code. Humankind (or parts of us) will evolve! The artwork, original music, and the text is telling the story, but the Lyrans knew, or course, that this material could come into the hands of something like our Military Industrial Complex and therefore not come out to the public in its pure form (or at all), but they knew it would. This was planned by soul agreements! Dr. Neruda says that he had some profound experiences when he was alone in the caves at the Ancient Arrow site in New Mexico, where the first WingMakers site is located. Apparently, he had a visitation from the WingMakers themselves in the cave; more of a perceptual nature than a physical, but still very real. They told him not to trust what Fifteen was doing, and that he was too involved with the Corteum to see the real solution. It is Dr. Neruda's conviction that the WingMakers put this defensive weapon on Earth to protect their genetics (us). This was the soul agreement! In a Multiverse, where all time is simultaneous, and the Founders and the Builders think "long thoughts" because of their long lifespan, were already planning 300,000 years ago for what is happening now. Dr. Neruda most probably has a soul agreement with the Builders and the WingMakers) to reveal the information to the public, which he did in 1998. These kinds of soul agreements are done in Sitter Space (the astral worlds between lives). It was no coincident that Dr. Neruda got involved with the Labyrinth Group, received the information he needed, "happened to be" in the cave alone and receive the message from the WingMakers. It was all in the plan to get the material out to the public, although Dr.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 139

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Neruda was of course, like the rest of us, in oblivion as of what his mission was; it was predestined to happen as part of his life mission. Even if the information was distorted afterwards, it doesn't matter. The information triggered the source code and is speeding up our evolution. The source code is still not understood and is not supposed to be; the secrecy and cover-up by the different alien/human groups involved, frenetically trying to decipher a source code they can't even find, is a waste of time; humankind is evolving and the source code is being triggered every second of the day. The WingMakers must be the Central Race (the Founders), the original seeders of planets and universes, working in unison with the Lyrans, Vegans and other species involved in the first seeding of mankind to make sure the source code was hidden in the human genome. The WingMakers sites are simply the "light switches" which send signals in encoded form to the source code, hidden in our genome, and the DNA activation begins. So what determines when the 'light switches' should go off? Well, the Sun does, and the Central Sun in the middle of the Milky Way Galaxy. When the star constellations and the lineup of our solar system with the Galactic Center is in a straight position with the Central Sun (i.e. right now), the latter, from its Galactic Center Tributary Zones, sends signals to our Sun on gamma rays, and from there signals are relayed to the WingMakers sites, which turn on the light switches. It looks like the Tributary Zones on Earth (which I think are 12 in numbers, not 7 due to that the original planners worked with the 12 system, not the 7 system) are just relay stations. The real Tributary Zones are hidden on planets in another dimension in the center of the Milky Way Galaxy, which we call the "Central Sun". As usual, what so often is blinding scientists and highly educated people in the Military Industrial Complex is that they think everything has to have something to do with weaponry; defensive or offensive in nature. Few are looking in the right direction. No higher evolved beings who are spiritually inclined would suggest a defensive system that has anything to do with violence of any kind. This case is no exception; the WingMakers sites have nothing to do with defensive attack. So Mahu Nahi (James of the WingMakers) is correct in describing the Sovereign Integral and the Grand Portal. But if Mahu Nahi is the head of the Corteum, why on Earth is he telling us the truth? Well, he is smart enough to understand what the WingMakers sites actually are; something he is very careful to keep a secret from the Labyrinth Group. On the other hand, he knows that the source code in our DNA is getting triggered as we speak in many, many people, and there is little he can do about it. Therefore he took over the WingMakers site after had decided that he could just as well give the public the truth in a watered-down version to get people hooked. But hooked to what? He must have figured that if he gave us the truth about the Sovereign Integral (our reconnection with our Higher Selves, i.e. our Oversouls) and our journey to find the Grand Portal, he would have people occupied and it may help him find the source code. Many races out there want access to the source code for different reasons. In addition, according to The Guardians, a certain frequency distortion has been embedded into the WingMakers music CDs and some of the paintings and poetry has

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 140

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

some advanced code inserted so that it actually could prevent us from having our DNA reactivated. It's all about delaying the reactivation effect until after 2012, when the aligning with the Galactic Center is happening in full. After 2012, if we haven't taken advantage of what has been sent to us in form of encoded information on gamma rays, it's much harder to get the activation process started. So apparently, if we are to believe Ashayana Deane and her Guardian Alliance, it could be dangerous to follow the "spiritual" practices Mahu Nahi suggests when comes to the paintings, and reading the poetry and listening too much on the music CDS could be delaying our reactivation. My own thoughts are that Mahu and the Corteum took over the WingMakers as an experiment to see how many serious spiritual truth-seekers they could attract to their site. They were probably hoping to attract the cream of the crop of active awakened individual and "deactivate" their DNA, or keep keeping it dormant while they continue studying all our DNA activation, looking for the hidden source code. The bottom line is that I seriously suspect that the Corteum knows what the real purpose of the WingMakers sites are. As we shall see soon, their intention is not only to fool those of us who are awakening, but also to fool the Labyrinth Group or any other organization working on a similar project as they do. Does this mean we should avoid the WingMakers Material as if our life depended upon it? No, there is a lot of very important information there, but we should be very careful not to get involved in any of the particular practices that have to do with the paintings and avoid the music CDs to be on the safe side. There are other, more general practices, like breathing exercises, which are just old, common knowledge from Eastern Philosophies, and there is no harm done to do them; I actually encourage some of them, like "The Quantum Pause" (http://wespenre.com/quantumpause.htm). In addition, if you like their music, I would suggest you look into some of the New Age composers; some of them are extremely good. I personally like anything of Deuter and of Liquid Mind, to mention two. Both are writing high quality music which relaxes you and helps you tune into higher frequencies.

3. Accelerated Intelligence Accelerated Intelligence is something which the Corteum brought to the group. The purpose is to activate the thalamocortical system of the brain. When they have activated this specific section of the brain, inducing a small functional cluster within this system, it expands the higher-order consciousness. These are the neural coordinates of consciousness, pertaining to higher-order reasoning, useful to scientific inquiry, mathematics and general problem solving. This was the technique Fifteen was subjected to and in his turn let all his employees take advantage of as well. Shortly after this was done to him he got the vision of BST, as a solution to his time-travel theories. So how does this technique work? Dr. Neruda is describing it in some details in the Neruda Interviews #2: Few people realize that their conscious mind only processes about 15 bits of information per second of linear time. However, in vertical time, the unconscious mind is processing approximately 70-80 million bits of

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 141

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

information. Thus, in normal consciousness, humans are aware of only an infinitesimal amount of the information that is constantly being fed to them at the unconscious level. The Corteum technology was designed to reduce the filtering aspects of the conscious mind and enable the higher frequency information packets to be fed to the conscious mind. In parallel with this effort, the brain circuitry--if you will--is re-wired to handle the higher voltage of the information that is being fed to the consciousness, allowing capabilities like photographic memory and abstract thought to coexist. These capabilities become the matrix filter that draws from the unconscious repositories the most relevant information at any particular time based on the problem or task at hand. [...] It's not really a simple question of the quantity of information processing, but rather the relevance of the information in linear time based on the intention of the individual. When one goes through the process of the Corteum technology, their ability to tune into information packets that are relevant to a situation or problem is vastly improved. In most people, when a given situation confronts them they access their conscious mind and pull out the solution that has served them in the past. Thus, people fall into ruts and patterned behavior, which closes down their access to the unconscious information packets that are based on real-time situation analysis and have extremely high relevancy. "This technology accelerates the circulation of information between the conscious and unconscious aspects of the mind to flow in the pattern of an ascending spiral rather than the pattern of a repetitious circle. And because of this it unleashes the innate intelligence of the individual. So you see, the Corteum technology doesn't increase raw intelligence, it simply facilitates the natural intelligence of the individual.[10] I will talk a lot more about vertical time and BST in a moment. The concept of vertical time is imperative for BST to work. But a few other things first:

4. The Corteum - What They Look Like For those familiar with the WingMakers Material (WMM#) it has been a mystery who the Corteum really are. They are presented as a benevolent race, not connected with the ETs that interact with of world's governments, i.e. the Grays or the Reptilians. There is no real public picture of the Corteum that I am aware of. The only thing I've found is the artsy image at WingMakers.com, which doesn't tell us much. Still, I don't believe the Corteum are one single species and this is another thing we need to learn about aliens; they rarely work alone. Species, as they develop (not always so much spiritually as technologically) and are involved in space travel, have a tendency to join together with other alien species from other star systems in different star confederations. Thus, species with similar imperatives and agendas work together to accomplish their goals. This means that factions or Reptilians, Grays, Insectoids and humanoids are working closely together as one species when comes to bringing forth

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 142

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

their development as separate species. We have a tendency to think that Grays have their agenda, while the Reptilians have theirs and so on. In reality, amongst alien races whom are developed enough to routinely engage in traveling between the stars, this is rarely the case.

Figure 4: The Corteum, depicted on the WingMakers site: http://www.wingmakers.com/corteumphoto.html.

However, we know how some of them look like due to a description by Dr. Neruda. He says that: They stand nearly three meters high (almost 10 feet) and have very elongated heads and bodies. Their skin is very fair; almost translucent, like you might expect from a cave dweller. Their eyes are relatively large and have various colors just like our own, except the Corteum have different colors to their eyes depending on their age and, in some instance, their emotional state. What's very unique about the Corteum is that they have an incredibly articulate nervous system that enables them to process virtually everything that occurs within their environment, including the thoughts of another. Which means that when you're in their presence, you need to have control of your thoughts or else you'll potentially offend them. They're very sensitive emotionally. [...] They speak perfect English or French, Italian, Spanish, or most any other language for that matter. They're very gifted linguists and can acquire average language skills in a matter of a few weeks, and operate as masters of the language within a few months. Their minds are like sponges, but like I said before, while they possess incredible mental powers to absorb new information and synthesize it with previous information, they're not

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 143

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

necessarily adept at creating new information totally unrelated to existing information. That's precisely what impressed them so much with Fifteen. [11] Furthermore, Dr. Neruda explains to us that their reason for being so interested in BST is because the planet from where they come has become very fragile because its protective atmosphere is degenerating "at an alarming rate". This condition has led them to become nocturnal, only coming to the surface at night, and even then, only for short moments. Their outer skin becomes more and more sensitive while their atmosphere becomes less protective. From their perspective, BST would restore their environment. So where have we heard this before? It's a similar story told by Zecharia Sitchin regarding the Anunnaki and their home planet, Nibiru, which needs gold to restore their atmosphere, and it's an ongoing process. These people are miners, and they have not been mining only here on Earth, but on other planets in our solar system and elsewhere, too. I have heard from a source that some of the Corteum is indeed a faction of the Earth-bound Anunnaki, who stayed behind and still dwell on our planet, mostly underground. They are not the S.A.A.L.M.# faction, which works on putting Marduk and his people on the World Throne once and for all, but are still loyal to the Kingdom (home planet Nibiru), and are working with the Labyrinth Group to perhaps (at least officially) solve their planetary issue once and for all. In his description of how the Corteum look like, Dr. Neruda is both describing the Anunnaki and the Tall Whites, encountered by Charles Hall [11a], who explained that the eye color of the Tall Whites (some call them Tall Grays) change as they grow older, and their nervous system is quite sensitive, just like Dr. Neruda says. Before we move on, I'd like to bring up the subject of elongated skulls, which has been a matter of discussion within the UFO community for a long time.

4.1. Elongated Skulls vs. Skull-Binding and Cranial Deformation An interesting thing with Dr. Neruda's depiction of the Corteum is that they are extremely tall (the Anunnaki can be 7-10ft tall), with elongated skulls! According to Sitchin and LPG-C, the Ša.A.M.i. and the Anunnaki, even if their skulls can be slightly elongated, they otherwise look pretty much like us; we have their genetics. However, giant elongated skulls have been found in South America and elsewhere, and you can study them in some museums around the world. I would suggest you google "elongated skulls" and do your research; it's very interesting, and the research is almost addictive.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 144

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 5a - Alien skulls, some elongated.

We can see the same traits in some of the Egyptian pharaohs as well, and very much so in Queen Nefertiti (see fig. 5b).

Figure 5b - Comparing a giant, elongated skull with a bust of Nefertiti.

Some people, who want to debunk this, refer this special kind of skull to something called "skull-binding", where some tribes bind the heads of young infants while the skeleton is still soft and this will bring about this trait. Although this is true, it's rather an attempt to copy-cat the Old Gods. The difference between the original ones and the ones that are "skull-bound" is the size of the skull and the jaws.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 145

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 6: Skull-binding

I have heard suggestions that the elongated skulls that have been found belong to the Titans, who were deformed offspring of the Anunnaki mating with humans. For the records, the Corteum are not Titans; they are not related. It always puzzled me why the Anunnaki, as depicted in the Sumerian cuneiform is always wearing headgear and headdresses. Did they actually have elongated skulls and wanted to hide this from the humans? This contradicts the information I've received from Dr. Bordon of LPG-C, who says the Anunnaki look pretty much like us, but are usually much taller. The question is; the Ša.A.M.i. he is seeing in the LINK meeting, do they wear headdresses? The readers may ask themselves why I don't just ask Dr. Bordon this question, but over time I've learnt that he is not very eager to answering questions he thinks are of less relevance.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 146

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 7: Were the headdresses to hide their skulls?

Also, as we now know, the humanoid species is very common in this galaxy, and the variation is mostly in length, skin color, and perhaps the shape of their heads. There is overwhelming evidence that those LPG-C call the Ša.A.M.i. are not one species working alone, but a dominant race in a galactic federation to which they belong. Therefore, it is not farfetched to think that some of them have elongated skulls.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 147

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 8a: Egyptian Royalty in stone on chariot.

Figure 8b: Nefertiti in stone

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 148

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 8c: Queen Nefertiti's mummy, supposedly (Anunnaki hybrid)

Figure 8d: Egyptian Royalties, entertaining themselves

Skull-binding and intentional cranial deformation has been common throughout history in most parts of the world[12], and most of these intrusions on infants have been in an effort to please, and look like, the "gods". The question is, which gods? Skull-binding even happened in Egypt; people thought that if they extended the skulls, they would get larger brain and become more intelligent. As in comparison to whom? It is interesting that skull-binding has been most common in Egypt, South Africa, and South America (such as Peru), where the Anunnaki have had the greatest influence, aside from the Three Rivers in Mesopotamia. Is this the reason why we

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 149

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

find tribes still doing it today and that we have found deformed skulls in these areas? But where do the larger, deformed skulls come from? Hybrids? Pure Anunnaki? Or did the Anunnaki skull-bind their own children within certain families? If the latter is true, that explains why we see the Anunnaki and their hybrids depicted both with normal skulls, and deformed. It could also explain why the Corteum have elongated skulls (if Dr. Neruda is correct); they belong to a certain family or "tribe" of the Ša.A.M.i./Anunnaki. Point in case is that it's very unlikely that Mark Hempel had a visitor, who traveled regular airline from New York to Minnesota, being 10 feet tall, with an elongated skull. It's more likely that someone else, more humanlike looking, visited Mark in his home with a Spanish accent. But why a Spanish accent and why this unnaturally low baritone voice of the person speaking in the interview sessions by Mark Hempel from 2008? I don't know, other than it's confusing and that's perhaps what it's meant to be; the person in the interview, who claims to be Mahu Nahi of the Corteum, may not want his true voice in a recording. (These interviews can be downloaded in mp3 format from the WingMakers site for your consideration[13]). It is evident that the WingMakers site was taken over by the Corteum. However, Fifteen and the Corteum are not our enemies, according to Dr. Neruda; they too want to save the planet from the incoming threat and wish for us to evolve; they just want to keep their work secret. Hence, you will see a lot of uplifting, spiritual information on the WingMakers site, which was put there by the Corteum. This information is true and you can feel it in your heart. Then there are other things, not so inspiring, which are mixed bags at best, and disinformation at worst. Is this confusing? It is meant to be. If there is a lot of truth in something and those who don't want this truth to be leaked need to take some kind of action. What is more effective than anything else--more than killing the messenger often--is to create a disinformation campaign on a large scale. However, for the clever there are ways to sort information from disinformation; listen and read with your heart.

5. Seven Superuniverses, Seven Tributary Zones, and Seven Superdomains In the WMM they are talking about 7 superuniverses with a Central Universe in the middle, which is the Universe of Source (the Prime Creator). Like some people pointed out in the WingMakers Q&A section[15], this sounds very similar to what is described in the Urantia Book.[16] Nahi Mahu replied that in some cases the WingMakers share the philosophy with Urantia, but it's still quite different. However, when we look at it, it may not be so different after all. As we shall see, Dr. Neruda's presentation of the 7 superuniverses coincide and fit pretty well with LPG-C's 7 superdomains, but is a light version thereof.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 150

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 9: The Grand Universe with its 7 superuniverses, according to Dr. Neruda and the WingMakers

This is how the 7 superuniverses are described in the WMM by Dr. Neruda. He says that the Labyrinth Group learned from the Corteum that: ...the Central Universe is stationary and eternal, while the seven superuniverses are creations of time and revolve around the Central Universe in a counterclockwise rotation. Surrounding these seven superuniverses is "outer" or peripheral space, which is non-physical elementals consisting of non-baryonic matter or antimatter, which rotates around the seven superuniverses in a clockwise rotation. This vast outer space is expansion room for the superuniverses to expand into. The known universe that your astronomers see is mostly a small fragment of our superuniverse and the expansion space at its outermost periphery. Hubble-based astronomy extrapolates, based on a fractional field of view, that there are 50 billion galaxies in our superuniverse, each containing over 100 billion stars. However, most astronomers remain convinced that our universe is singular. It is not--according to the Corteum. On the fringe of the central universe resides the Central Race, which contain the original human DNA template of creation. However, they are such an ancient race that they appear to us as Gods, when indeed they represent our future selves. Time and space are the only variables of distinction. The Central Race is known to some as the creator gods who developed the primal template of the human species and then, working in conjunction with the Life Carriers, seeded the galaxies as the universes expanded. Each of the seven superuniverses has a distinctive purpose and relationship with the central universe via the Central Race based on how the Central Race experimented with the DNA to achieve distinct, but compatible physical embodiments to be soul carriers. [...]

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 151

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The Central Race is divided into seven tribes, and they are master geneticists and the progenitors of the humanoid race. In effect, they are our future selves. Quite literally they represent what we will evolve into in time and towards in terms of space. [...] The Labyrinth Group believed that the WingMakers are representatives of the Central Race, and that they created our particular human genotype to become suitable soul carriers in our particular universe. The Ancient Arrow site is part of a broader, interconnected system of seven sites installed on each continent. Together, we believe this system constitutes a defensive technology.[17] And Dr. Saunter, in the opening to the Dr. Neruda interviews, is convinced that the Central Race, which, from what the Labyrinth Group have concluded, are equivalent with the WingMakers and from the Pleiades. Barbara Marciniak's Pleiadian renegade group are saying that they seeded mankind together with the Lyrans, so a consistent picture is starting to emerge. The Ancient Arrow Site in New Mexico; the one and only WingMakers site that's been found (at least as far as public knowledge goes), is (according to the WMM, although I believe there are at least 12 sites--the Guardians say 24, which is 12x2) just one of 7 sites, also called Tributary Zones in the WMM, spread out over the continents of Earth like in fig. 10 below.

Figure 10: Global position of the 7 Planetary Tributary Zones [click on image to enlarge].

Each of these Tributary Zones on Earth corresponds with one superuniverse, where the site in New Mexico most likely corresponds with our own. If this is true, there is a Tributary Zone, according to the WMM, in the core in the galactic center of each living galaxy in our universe. They are, symbolically or literally, located on planets very close to the galactic core. And, like Advanced Physics is aware of today, the core of the galactic center, at least in a spiral galaxy like our own, consists of a Central Sun and a gigantic black hole. This black hole is what the Pleiadians call "The Womb of the Mother"[18], i.e. the birth center of the galaxy. It's like a super orgasm where the nebulae and stars were spread in a rotational orbit around its center. The

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 152

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

fact that we are now aligning ourselves with the Galactic Center is a phenomenon known in mainstream physics as well, but is pointed out both by Marciniak's Pleiadian group and Mahu Nahi in the interview sessions with Mark Hempel [19]. Both say that this has to do with change in consciousness. People who have learned to vibrate on a higher frequency and to keep their frequency on that level most of the time, despite of turmoil around them will experience this new boost of energy coming in from the galactic center differently than someone who has not prepared at all. So, some people will become highly enlightened during this time period, while others will be overwhelmed by the strength of these energies. If a person has a lot of anxiety, hate, anger, resentment, and judgment in his or her personality, these traits will amplify. On the other side, these who have learned how to love, appreciate things, forgive themselves and others, apply humility in life, be compassionate, understand self and others, and apply valor in life, will have those traits amplified, and will use them as a springboard towards higher dimensions and frequencies. Interesting also is that the 7 superdomains explored by LPG-C correspond somewhat with the 7 superuniverses. It is my conviction that Dr. Neruda knew this when he did his interviews with Sarah, but needed to simplify it, or no one would understand what he was talking about. Same thing when the Labyrinth Group took over the WMM; they explain in their "Liminal Cosmogony"[20] briefly how the 7 superuniverses are connected, then explaining that this is an excerpt of a grander work, which will be revealed later. I would say that this grander work, which will be released by the Corteum and the Labyrinth Group, is quite similar to that of LPG-C's "Working Model" (See Physics Paper #1[21]). In figure 11 below we can see what LPG-C call "The Unum", which is the composite of 7 superdomains, described in detail in "Physics Paper #1":

Figure 11: The Unum with the 7 superdomains

Here, the "superuniverses", or superdomains, as described by LPG-C (http://lifephysicsgroup.org), are as follows:

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 153

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Prime-Causal Thought Unisonic Logomorphic Syntonic-Diffusive Templaic or Quantum Potential 4-Space/Time[22]

Obviously, the experience upon which we have our main attention is in 4-space/time, although we exist simultaneously in all superdomains. These superdomains correspond to the seven superuniverses, used both in the WMM and the Urantia Book, although they are approached differently. The Void corresponds to the "Peripheral Expansion Space" in the WingMakers superuniverse version (see fig. 9 above). There is much more to the earthly seven Tributary Zones and with the Working Model than I have brought up here and in other previous papers, but that is material for another time and not in the scope of what we are discussing here. I find it interesting, though, that both the WMM and LPG-C are working with the "7 System", while the Pleiadians and the Guardians (and many other metaphysical contacts) are working with the "12 System", saying that this is the system within the human biomind is operating, and in expansion, we will tune into the "13 System".

6. The Central Race as Creator Gods Dr. Neruda in the interviews confirms what the Pleiadians have said about seeding the Universe and provide it with functioning soul-carriers*. He says that the Central Race experimented many times with different kinds of soul-carriers until they formed one that was good enough to take a particle of the Source energy force into the outer, expanding universes. If not being able to do so, its experience in the 3rd dimension (or 4-space/time) would be of limited value, as it can't bring any of that back directly to Prime Creator. The Central Race holds the genetic template, or archetype, of the human species, in spite of what form it takes on, or what time it lives in. So long as it is a soul-carrier of intelligent life forms in the sense of bi-pedal beings with a torso, two arms, and two legs, the Central Race holds the genetic template. All other, lesser-developed versions are drawn towards this archetype like a magnetic force. All versions of the humanoid species are just time-shifted versions of the Central Race. At least this is the view of the Corteum.

7. Prophecy Prophecy is a pretty wide but interesting subject, because there are numerous such since the beginning of time. In the WMM several different ancient prophecies are discussed of which some of them are not even known to common man, and these are some of the prophecies supposed to come true in our time. To distinguish between the WMM prophecies and other significant ones, I'm going to categorize

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 154

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

them and explain them one by one. The Prophecy Papers, which will be released after the first batch of papers, are going to go deeper into the other ones. There are many, many ancient texts dealing with prophecies, and only a handful are known to the public. Most of them are hidden within secret societies and organization who have locked them in, only to be viewed by high level, very trusted members. The ACIO, and the Labyrinth Group in particular, have access to many of them, if not most, according to Dr. Neruda. These prophecies are pretty powerful when comes to describing the 21st Century and its challenges. Fifteen got access to them when he became the Director of Research for the ACIO. Being able to leave your body while doing remote viewing is nothing new. People have been able to do so for ages but only in organized forms within the Mystery Schools and other occult orders. This can be accomplished on an observational level, where you don't interfere with what in going on at the place you're going to. Instead of just going to a certain place in horizontal time (which is our normal timeline), some have been able to access future events from a vertical access point. People who know how to do it can then go into the future (or even back from the future) to this time from the vertical access point. However, they are unable to change any events; still, they can see what is happening there with quite some clarity. According to Dr. Neruda, some of these time travelers have come in contact with the WingMakers and have been provided messages about the future; messages which have been recorded in symbols, pictures, or in extinct languages like Sumerian, Akkadian, Mayan, and Chakobsan. One interesting and quite alarming part of the prophecies, which also seems to be a common theme from ancient texts and symbols, etc. is something that is supposed to happen in the early part of the 21st Century, around 2011 (this is all according to Dr. Neruda. I haven't had the chance to verify, or look into this yet as of its validity). The major institutions, like the United Nations, will be infiltrated by an alien race. This race is a predator race with technologies way more sophisticated than our own. Being aware of humanity's obsessive interest in TTPs# the last 40-50 years, it shouldn't be a problem for this alien race to more or less make any deal they want with us. They will pose as humanoids, but are really a blend of human and android; in other words, they are synthetics. This alien species has as one of its imperatives to establish a One World Government on Earth and rule as its executive power. This is one, perhaps the most, challenging thing we have to deal with in the very near future, according to Dr. Neruda and the Labyrinth Group. These prophecies have been kept out of public domain, and were also meant to be kept secret within the Labyrinth Group so they could deal with the problem in isolation. However, that changed when Dr. Neruda defected and the WingMakers site was launched in 1998. Whether this prophecy about the alien race is true or not, time events are not set in stone due to that people are creating their own reality every second of the day, and so are other beings in the universe. Therefore prophecies, the older they are, the less accurate they may be when comes to pinpointing a certain time frame, and even the event itself. If we are lucky, it's not going to happen. Anyhow, an invasion is not

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 155

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

likely to happen this year but a probe will apparently be put in orbit around Earth to see how our species have developed, if at all. This group of artificial intelligence aliens, whom we call the Animus, visited us already 8,866 years ago (counted from 2011 and back), but then thought we were too primitive to care about. What they would think now, however, is another issue...

8. The Animus, In Search For Soul-Carriers Most people today have heard of Artificial Intelligence, robots, androids, thinking machines etc. Most of it I believe took life with Arnold Schwarzenegger and the "Terminator" movies. No doubt that this was a hint to the public of what was to come. Not that any of this hadn't been mentioned before; we have Isaac Asimov's "I, Robot" and other "profound" revelations in the sci-fi genre. This is often how it's done; the truth is revealed to the public via fantasy and science fiction literature and movies. Someone with inside information writes an sci-fi book or a movie script to prepare us for the future. It stays in our subconscious mind, which does not differentiate between fiction and reality (as they are both one and the same), and then in the future when what was relayed to us as entertainment becomes reality, it's easier for us to accept because we have a reference point when our subconscious mind gets triggered and carries the memories of the books/movies up to the surface. Today, the Media is talking about artificial intelligence (AI#) ever so often and predict our future as a machine society. Many scientists, both those who are for and against (to encourage a debate), come out in the open about it as well. No one can miss it because it's all over the place. On the other end of the spectrum, metaphysical beings, such as the Pleiadians, Bashar, the Ra Collective, and others, are consistently warning us from being part of that future. They stress that if we don't change our ways, we will be part of a society where intelligent machines rule, and once again we may go back to being openly enslaved from being covertly enslaved, like we are now. So what is this all about? Can it be something bigger than just man creating intelligent machines? The answer is a definite "yes!" We are being prepared. This is happening on different levels. Yes, man is using alien, and even Tesla technology (which is alien technology as well) to develop intelligent machines to do the work for us and be able to quickly do the math required for higher science. On a lower level, robots for common people are discussed as well, being used as housekeepers, janitors and whatever they can be useful for.

8.1 The Origin of the Animus On the higher level, we are told, is the Animus. They are of central focus in the WMM, and a key problem, according to Dr. Neruda. Dr. A.R. Bordon and Dr. E.M. Weinz of LPG-C# have showed concern about this alien race as well; so much that they released an essay to the public called, "The Anima Problem - Possible Location of the Threat Locus"[23].

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 156

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 12a: "The Whirlpool Galaxy", M-51 in Canes Venatici. The origin of the Animus, according to Dr. Neruda.

The two LPG-C scientists agree with Dr. Neruda regarding the seriousness of this problem but disagree as of their origin. Dr. Neruda suggests that the Anima come from a planet in a galaxy called "The Whirlpool Galaxy", or Messier 51 (M-51) in the constellation Canes Venatici, about 25 million light-years away from Earth (fig. 12a). M-51 is a spiral galaxy, type Sa (The Milky Way being an Sb galaxy). These classifications are mostly about the size and form of the bulge in the center of the galaxy. However, I need to make an important note here: although Sarah, who interviewed Dr. Neruda suggested that the Animus home planet is located in M-51 and Dr. Neruda is affirmative to this, I believe this to be either a typo, or more plausible, a deliberate "mistake" made by the Corteum, when they took over the WMM. In the first interview, it clearly states that the distance to their home galaxy is 37 million light-years. When asking LPG-C about this inconsistency, they confirm that the distance should be about 37 million light-years, not 25 million, which is the distance to M-51. LPG-C suggest in their essay that the main choice of candidate for the Anima species is an elliptic galaxy, type E1, in the constellation of Leo. This suggested galaxy is called M-105 or NGC 3379, depending on which galaxy classification model we use. M-105 is on an approximate distance of 38 million light-years from our solar system (fig. 12b). In LPG-C's case, though, it is no more than a qualified suggestion at the point of the writing of the essay (2007), and other galaxies, such as M-96, M-95, M66, M-65, and NGC 3628, are also mentioned as candidates. What they have in common is that they all belong to the Leo group of galaxies, and their approximate distance from Earth is 35-38 million light-years. Who and what is correct or not remains to be seen, and is outside the scope of this research paper.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 157

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 12b: M-105 (NGC 3379), an elliptic galaxy, type E1, in the constellation of Leo. The origin of the Animus, according to the LPG-C essay.

Also, ancient scriptures, now in the hands of LPG-C, indicate a huge interest in the Leo constellation, hinting at this particular Animus problem, and by using ENS (remote viewing), LPG-C has found signature of Animus presence in all the above mentioned galaxies. This, in my opinion, is quite alarming, if correct, meaning that they have spread like cockroaches over our region of the universe.

8.2 Disconnected From Source It is described in the Neruda Interviews that the Animus race is a highly artificial and machine-like species. This means that their intelligence is artificial as well, and their brains are no more than very sophisticated computers which can think intelligent thoughts on their own of a much higher accuracy and more more precisely quality than we humans and many other species in the universe. As machines, they can regenerate themselves to a large degree, just like we exchange components in a machine or a computer to have it continue working. So, in our terms, one individual of this species can potentially live for millions and and perhaps billions of years. But just like machines in general, they lack emotions and empathy, and thus can't understand how biological entities work.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 158

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 13: Ontocyberenergetic life form as presented in the Working Model. The Anima would fit into this category and perhaps look something like this.

A body in this, and any known universe, needs to be biological in nature, and sophisticated enough to be able to be a soul-carrier, i.e. possess a soul. A machine can have a certain level of consciousness, but that consciousness is totally disconnected from Source because it lacks a soul. This is exactly the case with the Animus. If one of them "dies", which is basically only possible if someone destroys it, or it gets involved in an accident from which it can't be regenerated, that's the end of it. That individual ceases to exist once and for all; there is no afterlife for such a being.

The Anima are apparently aware of their mortality in this sense, and their disconnection from some kind of Higher Consciousness and Intelligence, and this bothers them. They want to reconstruct their bodies by adding DNA to them, thus hopefully being able to create soul-carriers. This can only be done by collecting DNA from biokinds throughout the universe, and subsequently, by infiltration and invasion. It is a mystery to me, though, how something which lacks a soul can have consciousness enough to long for one; it requires a soul to long for something. But then again, there is more to the picture, and part of the "Animus Problem" may be disinformation to hide something just as hideous. Once again, although this, if true, is very threatening for us humans, it's a matter of imperatives. To understand this problem and be able to face it intellectually without preconceptions and belief-system based ideas, we have to eliminate the belief in good and evil, and instead think in imperatives. From our point of view, this alien AI is evil and counter-survival to our species, but from their viewpoint, it's evolution. They need to connect to Source again. Unfortunately, at this point they are limited in their understanding of how biominds with Information Clouds think and work, and they don't grasp why it would be something wrong with terminating the intelligent beings of a whole planet if necessary. They don't have the luxury of emotions and feelings. It's from this perspective we need to face the problem. In our ancient past, around 12,800 years ago, they found our planet and noticed it was inhabited with biominds (humans). We were not evolved enough for their taste at the time, but decided to keep us under observation. Now, in 2011, they are coming back to put a probe in orbit around our planet to study our current stage of development. If they find us evolved enough, they will most probably invade; first by infiltration, and then by more direct means. We live in a "Free Will" universe, but it is also monitored by the Central Race and other essential Beings from higher dimensions and the Animus knows they need our approval to be able to take over. Same problem some other aliens have when trying to steal our DNA. They achieve this approval by tricking us by finding out what it is we want the most. In our case, from the standpoint of our Military Industrial Complex (MIC) it is technology, so by signing up for a TTP, they will get what they are after. Most likely, greedy factions of the human race, in position of power, will drool over the technology the Anima have to offer.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 159

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The problem, as it is presented, is not an easy one to solve, as we can see. This is why groups like the Labyrinth Group and LPG-C are working behind the scenes in attempts to resolve it, out of scrutiny from the higher levels of our world governments. Here is where BST# (Blank Slate Technology) comes into the picture as one potential solution to the Animus Problem, as presented by the Corteum. I am not certain how the Animus became a machine race; if it was due to some catastrophe in the past, by choice, or if they were created by an external species, whom eventually left them to care for themselves. There are some indications (which I may go into more in the future) that the Verdants had a finger in this a long time ago, but more research needs to be done to know for sure.

9. Vertical Time, Blank Slate Technology, and Memory Restructure Procedure The information which has leaked out on these subjects come mainly from Dr. Neruda, but are also mentioned by Ashayana Deane from her communication with The Guardian Alliance, whom are said to be a benevolent, ancient race, also helping us out in the times that are and these to come. The Guardians, however (which we will go into later), are not very happy about what the Labyrinth Group is doing. Although they acknowledge the people on the ground (humans) as good people, doing what they're doing for reasons to help mankind, they are not in favor of the Corteum, whom they say have a very dark, service-to-self agenda which has everything to do with Blank Slate Technology (BST). I will present both sides in this paper.

9.1 Horizontal and Vertical Time To understand BST, we need to understand how vertical and horizontal time work. Here on Earth we live in the 3rd dimension, or 4-space/time, if we use LPG-C terms, where time is the 4th dimension. We normally experience time as being horizontal, with a past, present and a future. What most people don't realize is that we live hundred, maybe thousands, maybe ten thousands of lives simultaneously in an expanding Multiverse. This means that we are living several lifetimes at once here on Earth. Obviously, you are living one of the lifetimes now around 2012, and there's where your main attention is. Still, you may be living another life in the 1,500s, other other lives in the 800s, 100s, 500s BC, 50,000 BC, 5,000,000 BC and so on. We call this reincarnation, but it's not what it really is. Reincarnation implies that we die and are reborn again after a certain linear time has passed, always from a past into a future. In reality, seen from a multidimensional perspective, we live all our lives on Earth simultaneously, and the only reason we usually are not aware of our other-selves is because they are separated by time. The important thing to know for now (there is so much more to it) is that we perceive time as horizontal. People in general are not even aware of what I just

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 160

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

wrote in the above paragraph, and even less aware of that there is vertical time as well. There is a whole new complex science on concepts of time, which expands upon the mainstream concept of the same. This explains how 4-space/time in its expanded reality is actually 6-space/time; three spatial dimensions and three dimensions of time, namely: length, width, height, local/horizontal time, vertical time, and five infinites with 12,900,000 "intervention points" into horizontal time [24]. However, the precise science of this is beyond what will be discussed in this paper, and we are only going to touch this briefly to be able to understand how BST works. From the perspective of horizontal time, when a major event is happening, e.g. the murder of JFK, the Hiroshima/Nagasaki a-bomb incidents, the first landing on the moon, 9/11 etc., it leaves a "print" on the horizontal timeline, which can be used as an intervention point of entrance from a vertical timeline. This can be done through remote viewing (and is done by remote viewers all the time), but so far, those who visit these entrance points can only do so as spectators and will not be able to change any events that happened in the past (or will happen, if the remote viewer is visiting the future). Thus, we can call this "passive time-travel", and it is very much possible and has been known to man for decades. BST, however, is "active timetravel", which means that events can be altered and interfered with, so that the future from the point of interaction will be different than it was before it was done. In other words, an alternative timeline is created. Again, the life physics around these concepts will not be discussed here. I have taken part of the physics that goes with it, and it is indeed not as incredible as it may sound and after a little study, it makes sense. However, I am not ready to collaborate on it at this time and hope you will have patience with this and wait for the right time to post additional evidence to what is brought up here. The Animus, according to the Neruda Interviews, first visited our planet about 300 million years ago and revisited us 8,866 years ago, approximately 2,000 years after the Deluge. Mesopotamia had not yet started to flourish, and civilization was in the stage of rebuilding itself after the Flood. Also, a lot of Anunnaki were still here, according to Sitchin. This was enough for the Animus to decide they should wait and see how we developed.

Figure 14: Horizontal and vertical time, showing insert point or intervention point (click on image to enlarge)

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 161

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The easiest way to explain vertical time is to think of an x and a y axis, where the x axis is "Horizontal Time", and the y-axis being "Vertical Time" (fig. 14). Horizontal time is self explanatory only because we are so used to perceiving time this way. Now, think of vertical time as each moment in existence stacked upon the next and all coinciding with one another. Thus, time is the composite of all moments of all experience simultaneously existing within no-time, which can be referred to as eternity. Dr. Neruda explains it quite plainly in the interviews: Vertical time infers that one can select a moment of experience and use time and space as the portal through which they make their selection real. Once the selection is made, time and space become the continuity factor that changes vertical time into horizontal time or conventional time.[25] And the difference between horizontal and vertical time is that: Vertical time has to do with the simultaneous experience of all time, and horizontal time has to do with the continuity of time in linear, moment-bymoment experiences.[26] Remote viewing, or ENS, which is its more advanced form where you use an avatar, is of course nothing we have invented here on Earth; it's a universal technique, used by most advanced aliens in order both to time-travel and to move quickly from one place to another. By the same token, BST is not originating as an idea in the heads of the Corteum or Fifteen, either. Variants of this technique exist elsewhere in the universe, but Fifteen's technique is a quite unique form of BST. However, few alien species are willing to share their specific techniques with other races once they have developed them. According to Dr. Neruda, it's one of the most protected and guarded of all technologies. This is the reason why the Corteum can't go visit some alien species somewhere and get the key how to master BST. Dr. Neruda, whom after all is a defector from the Labyrinth Group, is further telling us that in order to develop the specific kind of BST Fifteen is working on it requires a developer to apply new theorems and new laws of physics which have not been developed before. Then a new suite of technologies need to be built, based on a new matrix of how the world works. Almost everything we previously held true needs to be destroyed, re-invented, re-formulated, and integrated into this new matrix. This is why the Labyrinth Group and LPG-C are not on collision course with each other; they are both developing a new life physics, but slightly different from each others. They are not working together on any level; LPG-C being a totally separate unit, not part of any government bodies, while the Labyrinth Group is connected with, and part of ACIO. There are more reasons why the two are not working together; probably more reasons than I am aware of, but to understand it better we need to know exactly why Dr. Neruda defected. I have already given a reason or two, but later on in this paper, I will bring it up some more.

9.2 Memory Restructure Procedure (MRP)

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 162

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The WingMakers sites can in certain terms be viewed as "time capsules", as described in the WMM. They are programmed to be activated at a certain time to counter the Animus invasion and ultimately to protect the DNA of the Central Race (whom I prefer to call "The Founders". However, as long as we are talking about the WingMakers, the Corteum and the Labyrinth Group, I'll use their terminology). Built into these time capsules is a "Memory Restructure Procedure", or MRP#, which is intended to be used to wipe out the memory of the artificial race and thus prevent the invasion to take place. The Labyrinth Group, or more specifically Fifteen has, as it appears, been able to understand this technology well enough to be able to use it on his own people, in case they defect or start to talk. Any specific type of memory, or any specific event, can be erased from the memory bank and the victim won't ever suspect that something is wrong. One can argue that a similar technology is used towards alien abductees to create "missing time", although the latter technology seems less perfect. Another similar technique is used on military "special forces", who are part of special teams who meet with aliens, take part of top secret technologies, visit secret facilities on Earth and elsewhere in the universe (yes, it happens!). Once they depart from their mission, the military is using a blank slate memory erasure program, which will wipe out the memory of the soldier so he can't talk about his experiences.[27] Dr. Neruda, however, still has his memory intact from the time he spent with the Labyrinth Group and the ACIO, and he thinks the reason why they didn't come after him was because he had already revealed too much and instead of making the effort they simply took over the WingMakers site. Fifteen didn't think that MRP, attached with the time capsules, is enough to stop the Animus, and this is the main reason he thinks BST is necessary. So let's take a look at what it is and how it's intended by humans to be used on the Anima.

9.3 Using BST Against the Animus First, let us take another look at what Blank Slate Technology is. We already discussed how a time-traveler can be either passive or active, or both. ACIO, the CIA and other government bodies know very well how to remote view and how to time travel, but only in passive form, as spectators. BST, on the other hand, is the technology necessary to interact with vertical time and change it. You have to be able to "page through it like a book", to quote Dr. Neruda, until you find the exact intervention point where you want to intervene. This is where it gets scary, because it's so complex, and if you intervene with vertical time, you also intervene with horizontal time. So if you even think about doing something like that, you have to be able to calculate the exact consequences of that intervention. This is why Fifteen and the Labyrinth Group decided to cooperate with the Corteum; their computer technology is about 4,000 times as powerful than our best supercomputers. Still, it has taken a super-genius like Fifteen more than half a century to pinpoint this down to a workable technique, and I'm not sure if he's done yet. With the help from Corteum technology, the Labyrinth Group is able to create highly complex scenario models. These models then helps the group figure out the best

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 163

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

intervention point. BST is a composite technology having five discrete and interrelated technologies. I'll let Dr. Neruda describe them, one by one (the emphasis is mine for better overview): The first technology is a specialized form of remote viewing. This is the technology that enables a trained operative to mentally move into vertical time and observe events and even listen to conversations related to an inquiry mode. The operative is invisible to all people within the time they are traveling to, so it's perfectly safe and unobtrusive. The intelligence gained from this technology is used to determine the application of the other four technologies. This is the equivalent of intelligence gathering. The second technology that is key to BST is the equivalent of a memory implant. As I mentioned earlier, the ACIO refers to this technology as a Memory Restructure Procedure or MRP. MRP is the technology that allows a memory to be precisely eliminated in the horizontal time sequence and a new memory inserted in its place. The new memory is welded to the existing memory structure of the recipient. You see, events -- small and large -- occur from a single thought, which becomes a persistent memory, which in turn, becomes a causal energy center that leads the development and materialization of the thought into reality[27a]... into horizontal time. MRP can remove the initial thought and thereby eliminate the persistent memory that causes events to occur. The third technology consists of defining the intervention point. In every major decision, there are hundreds, if not thousands, of intervention points in horizontal time as a thought unfolds and moves through its development phase. However, in vertical time, there is only one intervention point or what we sometimes called the causal seed. In other words, if you can access vertical time intelligence you can identify the intervention point that is the causal seed. This technology identifies the most probable intervention points and ranks their priority. It enables focus of the remaining technologies. The fourth technology is related to the third. It's the scenario modeling technology. This technology helps to assess the various intervention points as to their least invasive ripple effects to the recipients. In other words, which intervention point -- if applied to a scenario model -- produces the desired outcome with the least disruption to unrelated events? The scenario modeling technology is a key element of BST because without it, BST could cause significant disruption to a society or entire species. The fifth and most puzzling technology is the interactive time travel technology. The Labyrinth Group has the first four technologies in a ready state waiting for the interactive time travel technology to become operational. This technology requires an operative, or a team of operatives, to be able to physically move into vertical time and be inserted in the precise space and time where the optimal intervention point has been determined. From there the operatives must perform a successful MRP and return to their original time in order to validate mission success.[28]

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 164

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

At the time Dr. Neruda defected, the Labyrinth Group had about forty scenario models and around eight intervention points defined. In the interviews with Sarah, Dr. Neruda is too uncomfortable giving out the most likely scenario because of the highly classified nature of the information. It's also a matter of not only national security, but in this case, world security. Dr. Neruda, just like the Pleiadians, lets us know that Earth is a very special planet due to its tremendous bio-diversity and a complex range of ecosystems. Its natural resources are very unique and plentiful. Dr. Neruda says: "It's a genetic library that's the equivalent of a galactic zoo." This directly corresponds with the Pleiadians saying that Earth is a Living Library, where plants, animals, and human DNA are seeded by using DNA from multiple different planets within, and outside, of our galaxy. The Animus showed interest in this planet because it wants to own its genetics in full; not only our human biokind. The Animus is a synthetic race, as we've discussed earlier, and they have the ability to clone themselves to whatever extent they think necessary. No birth control needed, as sex is not a part of their life (or should I say "existence"?). Only "birth control" they want is to determine how many copies of themselves they need. Although expansion of their empire is one imperative, they mainly want to become soul-carriers. Synthetic organisms are not able to carry the higher frequencies of a soul, which always requires an organic nervous system. So, in other words, the Animus race wants to become immortal, and the only way to do so is to connect with Source via souls/information clouds. In summary, what the Labyrinth Group is trying to do is to catch the first thought from the Animus, where they decided to invade Earth and redirect that thought through an intervention point in vertical time. When the most well-suited intervention point is found and decided upon, ENS (people using the advanced avatar based remote viewing technology) will use BST, creating a "blank memory slate" of the whole race at the moment of the exact thought, and then insert a new thought, perhaps saying something to the effect, "Earth is not a good planet for us, let's move elsewhere and never come back." This, in spite of how dangerous it sounds, is the plan in a nutshell. So why not just trust the WingMakers/Central Race to have installed defensive weapons good enough to keep the Animus away? This was exactly the point Dr. Neruda made in a session with Fifteen [29]. Fifteen, however, doesn't trust the Central Race in this respect. Through RV sessions, his group of ENS have discovered Animus activity in many galaxies; even as near as the Andromeda, which is our closest neighbor galaxy, aside from the Magellan Clouds. Did they invade all these planets despite precautions made by the Central Race? If so, what stops them from invading us? These were the questions Fifteen asked himself. Instead of waiting to see what will happen once they have found all the seven WingMakers sites, he decided to develop BST to eliminate the threat once and for all. After had RV'd the Central Race back in time when they were about to create Earth, Fifteen knew that they would never allow Fifteen to develop and use BST against the Animus or for any other reasons either, for that matter; BST being the most guarded technology, once developed by the Central Race. Fifteen is aware of that BST can be used both for benevolent purposes and for evil, and this is exactly the reason why

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 165

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

the Central Race don't want anyone to have access to it without their direct permission. The risk that this technology falls into the wrong hands are great. And of course, there are organizations, like S.A.A.L.M., who are doing all they can to try and infiltrate both LPG-C and the Labyrinth Group; both working on developing BST, separate from each other. In addition, the remote viewers, such as Samantha, are not part of the Labyrinth Group, and in cases as such when she remote viewed the Central Race, Fifteen afterwards authorized his staff (in most cases Dr. Neruda provided the correct coordinates so they knew where to erase) to use MRP# on the remote viewer, so she would forget everything that had to do with the ENS sessions. This, naturally, kept both Dr. Neruda and other Labyrinth Group member in constant anxiety of having their memory erased. That's a lot of power assigned to Fifteen. I am certainly glad that I am not in the position Dr. Neruda and others were (and those who have stayed within the group still are). I get the impression that Fifteen is jumping the gun because things are taking longer than he feels comfortable with, but it was no accident that the Ancient Arrow site in New Mexico was found, and our DNA seems to be programmed to find these sites when the time is right. Thus, to me it seems logical to wait it out. Still, I can see Fifteen's concern when he finds out how widespread this synthetic race is; this being the main reason why he wants to bypass the WingMakers technology and develop his own version of BST. And of course, in the middle of this is the ignorant human race. Now, however, the cat is out of the bag, but if Dr. Neruda hadn't defected, it's doubtful that anyone outside the Labyrinth Group would know anything about this. Speaking of knowing and of memory; it's known and acknowledged that Marduk rewrote history and erased our memories once upon a time and started a brand new Era, where humans had no knowledge of any previous "gods". Instead he implanted new, false memories of Earth's history. Whether he used the same Blank Slate Technology that the Labyrinth Group and LPG-C now is developing or not, is more than I can tell, but this all makes me wonder how many times in the past the Anunnaki have erased the memory of the human population. How many times in the Wars of the gods have they wished for their human slaves to remember a "new" history, a new made-up past? Alien contactees say that the Vegans, Lyrans and the Pleiadians are here to set the record straight and give us our real history back, and that is exactly what I see and hear them doing. The Fallen Ones are losing this battle, at least against some of us, because we refuse to fight with weaponry anymore; we simply leave them behind and pass them on our spiritual path. To where we are going the gods can't go, because they don't know how. Perhaps in the future, it will be our task to help them evolve, if possible.

10. Ashayana Deane, The Guardian Alliance, and the BeaST The most outspoken opponent to Blank Slate Technology and the Corteum is perhaps the alien "Guardian Alliance", communicating through their spokesperson, Ashayana Deane, former Anna Hayes, co-founder of "Azurite Press of the Melchizedek Cloister Emerald Order"[30]. In May of 2010, she was interviewed by Kerry-Lynn Cassidy of Project Camelot Productions[31], where Mrs. Deane through the approximately seven

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 166

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

hours interview went through the teachings of the Guardians[32]. In the third section of the interview, she and Kerry are getting on the subject of the WingMakers, and Mrs. Deane, to Kerry's surprise, is talking about them in quite a negative manner. In essence, she says that the Corteum, whom in the Guardians' opinion are running the show, are playing both sides by helping, and taking help from the Labyrinth Group to develop BST in a secret mission to erase the memory of the human race-not the Animus. She further refers to her books, "Voyagers I & II", which are talking more in detail about the WingMakers, the Corteum and issues related to them. Kerry, who interviewed James/Mahu Nahi of the WingMakers/Corteum in 2008, and seems to have a relatively positive attitude towards them, was confused when Mrs. Deane corrected her on the subject. Mrs. Deane is continuing, saying that the "people on the ground", meaning the humans who found the Ancient Arrow Site in New Mexico are not bad guys; it's the Corteum who are tricking everybody. During the interview she is in contact with the Guardians, metaphysically, and they confirm that what she is saying is true.

10.1 The Makers of Wings and Other Things During the last part of the interview, Mrs. Deane says that the Ancient Arrow sites are actually owned by the Guardians, and not by the WingMakers. Furthermore, she claims that there are not seven sites, but 12, with an additional 24 "sub sites" (the 12-System again); something she is not explaining in any more details than that. It also so happened, that the Melchizedek Cloister Emerald Order was going to hold a workshop just a few days after Kerry's interview, discussing, among other things, the WingMakers issue, or as the Guardian Alliance apparently call them, "The Makers of Wings and Other Things". Although some of their information is free online, Mrs. Deane is charging for those who want to attend the seminars, so I don't know the details of what was discussed there. If you, the reader knows, please email me for details (http://wespenre.com/contact.htm). She is, however, selling the context of the workshops after the fact on her website, http://www.azuritepress.com/products_us/woab.php, but to a pretty high price, which I am not ready to pay at this time. By following the latter URL, you can at least read some of what was discussed in the workshop (all emphases in original): This workshop marked the official beginning of the Step-down Program with the first Camelot Project interview and the beginning of the end of the Wingmakers-Corteum invasion agenda via the 7 Broken Ancient Arrow sites. Following the 7 ½-hour Camelot interview, the Speakers were ready to deliver some wonderful information about the 12 Primary Ancient EloheiAquari Arrow Sites (Guardian sites also called the “Silver Seed Gates” and created by the Krystic Elohei-Elohim and Aquari Races), their secondary sites (24 in total) and how they ‘hold the keys’ for the Mirror Ball activations (involves Earth’s coronasphere layers). The Mirror ball activations initiate in the Encryption Lattice (EL) of our anatomy, so there was detailed information given on the natural Living Current flows between the Atomic (Spirit) Body, the Light Body, the EL and where the metatronic NET Fields exist within these layers. These activations will allow us to progressively clear the NET implants (we started to clear the D6, D5 and Density-1 levels at this workshop and the D3, D2 and

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 167

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

D1 levels will be starting to clear during subsequent Sliders workshops) which will in turn, allow us to progressively anchor the Krystal Spiral and Time Wave. By 21 December 2012, the Krystics are aiming to have transformed these Mirror Ball activations into the full Mirror in the Sky, which will provide the strength we need at this time to fully deflect the Metatronic 55activation.[33] Interesting also is to read Mark Hempel's and Mahu Nahi's reaction to Mrs. Deane's statements about the WingMakers she made in the Kerry-Lynn Cassidy interview. Shortly after the videos had been uploaded to the Internet, Mark Hempel sent a very threatening email to Kerry, saying that Mrs. Deane is wrong and is misleading her listeners by spreading misinformation about the WingMakers. He makes sure to Kerry that he and James are not taking this lightly and are ready to sue both Project Camelot Productions and Ashayana Deane if the misinformation of this specific information is not edited out from the video. Kerry got pretty shaken up by this; I can imagine especially as she and Bill Ryan, her former interview partner, had just split up due to indifferences. Kerry probably felt quite vulnerable and alone, because Project Camelot Productions was her new project, now working pretty much on her own. James/Mahu Nahi then sent an email himself to Kerry in form of an open letter to Mrs. Deane, emphasizing that the names in the WingMakers story are not real names, and the Corteum was a fictional name, so how can the Guardians use these terms as if they were real? He soothed down the energies a bit with his email and asked Mrs. Deane to consider a cooperation with him rather than opposing him, but the underlying seriousness in this matter was present throughout his email. Mrs. Deane responded, and this whole conversation back and forth is posted underneath the videos on the Camelot Productions page[34]. For a while, Kerry considered following Hempel's advice to edit out the section of the interview in question, so she removed them for a while, but then seems to have made some kind of agreement with all parties that the video could remain in unedited form if the correspondence back and forth was included on the page. Figure 15: Ashayana Deane I find it quite interesting, though, that Hempel reacted like he did and was supported in this by Mahu. What they are suggesting, both of them, is pure censorship. That goes against the teachings of the James who is presenting himself on his websites, so this was apparently a hot potato for one reason or another. I have reasons to return to Ashayana Deane in additional papers. I have read both of her books, Voyagers I & II, and I find her information both extremely interesting and consistent. She and the Guardian Alliance, with their tremendous wealth of information, have helped me a lot in my own research. I used to be skeptic of her and her sources before I actually read the books. My attitude changed 180°.

(Note: As I am editing my papers before publishing, I get a note from A.R. Bordon saying that a good friend of his told him that she'd heard that Ashayana Deane could be in trouble because "she knows too much". And for you who are unfamiliar with

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 168

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

her work, I'll tell you, she is blasting the Anunnaki big time, and the WingMakers people and the Corteum as well. By and large, I tend to agree with her...Bordon, at this time, knew nothing about that I am writing about Ashayana Deane in this, and other papers. He did not read any of them before they were released).

Notes: [1] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/National_Security_Agency#History [2] ibid. [3] WingMakers: "The Neruda Interviews #3", http://www.wingmakers.com/neruda3.html [4] ibid. [5] WingMakers: "The Neruda Interviews #1", op. cit. p.3. (I wanted to quote that part exactly as it was stated in the interview, because it's important). [6] See Wes Penre: "PFC Paper #3: The True Story About the WingMakers, The Labyrinth Group, and S.A.A.L.M. (May 26, 2011). [7] WingMakers: "The Neruda Interviews #3", http://www.wingmakers.com/neruda3.html, op. cit. [8] Barbara Marciniak (1992): "Bringers of the Dawn", and numerous lectures, channeled by Barbara between 1988 and 2011 (ongoing). [9] WingMakers: "The Neruda Interviews #2", http://www.wingmakers.com/neruda2.html, op. cit. [10] WingMakers: "The Neruda Interviews #2", http://www.wingmakers.com/neruda2.html, op. cit. [11] ibid. op. cit. [11a] For more info from Charles Hall and his encounters with the Tall Whites on Nellis AFB in Nevada, I suggest you start with this excellent video: [12] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Artificial_cranial_deformation; http://wiki.bmezine.com/index.php/Cranial_Binding [13] http://wingmakers.com/whats-new.html [14] skipped. [15] http://www.wingmakers.com/creator.html [16] Urantia Book online: http://www.urantia.org/en/urantia-book/read [17] WingMakers: "The Neruda Interviews #1", http://wingmakers.com/neruda1.html, op. cit. [18] Barbara Marciniak channeling the Pleiadian, 2010. [19] Mark Hempel interviews James of the WingMakers, April 5, 2008, Session #1: http://wingmakers.com/downloads/Interview_James_Session_1.mp3

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 169

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________ [20] http://www.wingmakers.com/liminalcosmogony.html [21] Wes Penre (2011): "Physics Paper #1: Exploring the Unum - The Ever-Expanding Multiverse" [22] ibid. [23] see http://wespenre.com/e-books.htm for free download of this essay. [24] New Life Physics, http://lifephysicsgroup.org/ [25] WingMakers: "The Neruda Interviews #1", http://wingmakers.com/neruda1.html, op. cit. [26] ibid. [27] Barbara Marciniak channeling the Pleiadians, 2010. [27a] The observant reader who has read my "Physics Paper #1" will recognize that this is also being taught by LPG-C. I brought this up with Dr. A.R. Bordon of the Life Physics Group, and he said that his group had already started developing this science when the WMM was released. The reason the two are similar to each other is because the truth is the truth, he says... [28] WingMakers: "The Neruda Interviews #1", http://wingmakers.com/neruda1.html, op. cit. [29] "Ancient Arrow Project", http://www.wingmakers.com/book-aap1-8.html [30] http://azuritepress.com [31] http://projectcamelotproductions.com/interviews/ ashayana_deane/ashayana_deane.html [32] Keylontic Dictionary Online, http://www.keylonticdictionary.org/online/member/index.php?page=guardian-alliance [33] http://www.azuritepress.com/products_us/woab.php [34] http://projectcamelotproductions.com/interviews/ ashayana_deane/ashayana_deane.html

Definitions (words followed by an asterisk *): Ontocyboenergetics: (onto = life form; cybo = artificial; energetic = soul carrier): This life form has both artificial and natural systems, also known as a cybernetic organism (Figure 4:1). They often have living tissue over a metal or ceramic-like endoskeleton. Ontocyboenergetic means they are intelligent, cybernetic organisms dressed by organic tissue. They are hominid, and with a larger head than the trunk head human proportions, and their height is almost 7 feet. This group of beings has not been examined closely by the LPG-C as of yet. What is known is that there are several groups in this class, some not from our galaxy. (A.R. Bordon and E.M. Wienz: "A NEW AND VERY ADVANCED PHYSICS: EXTENSION NEUROSENSING IN THE STUDY OF FUTURES SCENARIOS---A Preliminary Report" pp. 3). Soul-carrier: a biological body created by creator gods, good enough to be able to carry an Information Cloud/soul. Artificial bodies can have intelligence, but their bodies are not suitable enough to carry an Information Cloud.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 170

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________ Acronyms (in alphabetical order) (words followed by a pound sign #): ACIO: Advanced Contact Intelligence Organization AI: Artificial Intelligence AIT: Accelerated Intelligence Technology BST: Blank Slate Technology ENS: v. (to) Extra Neuro Sensing: The application of a new type of advanced remote viewing technology, developed by the Life Physics Group California (LPG-C). s: Extra Neuro Sensor: the person who remote views. LPG-C: Life Physics Group in California, http://lifephysicsgroup.org/ MRP: Memory Restructure Procedure RV: Remote Viewing S.A.A.L.M.: Supreme Annunaki Assembly of Lord Marduk. A splinter group of ACIO, with headquarters in Pine Gap, Australia. TTP: Technology Transfer Program. A few different alien races over the last 40-50 years, allegedly starting with a treaty with President Eisenhower and the Tall Grays, have had the governments of different countries involved in TTPs, where we get alien technology we can use (mainly for weapon and industry), and they get access to our genetic library. These TTPs are highly classified and are not supposed to leak out to the public. WMM: WingMakers Material

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 171

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(Present and Future Challenges Section) PFC Paper #5: Present and Future Earth Changes and Their True Causes by Wes Penre, Friday, June 17, 2011

1. Abstract There are a lot of earth changes right now; much more than has been the norm in modern history. We have seen an increase in earthquakes, tsunamis, tornados, flooding, and strange weather behavior in general; mostly out of the ordinary. Even people who usually don't specifically notice such things are starting to wonder what is going on. When comes to earth changes I have noticed that people could be put in these three categories; 1) Those who just go on with their lives, perhaps notice a few abnormalities happening, but think it's nothing unusual, not caring to look into it. These are the ones in oblivion and denial (this is the majority). 2) Those who notice it, have made some research and are quite alarmed and frightened about it. 3) Those who know many of the causes and reasons, but either have great confidence in that they will make it through, or at least are trying to do something constructive about it. These people are usually the ones who have a greater concept of existence than the average person. Many people have emailed me and asked me what is going to happen in 2012, and if it's going to be the end of the world or not? Some emails are fearful, while others are just inquiring. It's a complicated subject, but I am going to do my best in this paper to explain our main challenges and what may happen around 2012 and beyond. I am going to start with the more alarming challenges and end with the more positive ones. There are a few alien agendas as well which are to be counted in, but I will not bring these up them here, as they are already discussed in my earlier papers[1]. The ones we shall discuss in this paper are more cosmological, astronomical, and astrophysical in nature.

2. When Earth Nearly Died, Around 11,500 Years Ago It's always hard for a species to accept that something catastrophic may happen within their own lifetime or the succeeding generation. Logically we all know that

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 172

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

catastrophes and earth changes have happened numerous times throughout history; no one would deny that. It's quite different if someone says it may happen right here and now. Then, all of a sudden, we have a tendency to get into denial and even try to stop the "doomsayer" from speaking; we don't want to hear and just go on with our lives. Albeit, if we think about it, and have the understanding that we live many lifetimes at once only separated by linear time, we know that this has happened to us all before. Our immediate respond could be fear, which is normal and quite appropriate--for a while, but only the knowledge of the above can sort out who has more survival potentials than another.

Figure 1: The Deluge, painting by John Martin in 1834

Sometimes physical preparation is not enough, but more of a secondary nature--one has to create a safe environment with energy coming from within. This is often the reason why some people always seem to be "lucky", while others in a similar situation are not. It has very little to do with luck but the person's use of energy, wittingly or unwittingly. If we raise our own vibrations and become more aware of our wholeness (which can be summarized as our biomind plus information cloud, i.e. body/mind/soul), and have all apparent pieces of the wholeness vibrate together towards a common goal, in consciousness of what they are and work as one, we create a vibration that is free from fear and full of love and light. Not only will this state of consciousness help us individually, but it will also affect others around us. By developing ourselves, become more enlightened day by day, week by week, year by year, we are thus being the ultimate service-to-others by being examples and bring our vibration of higher consciousness into our environment. A few enlightened beings can save a whole city. Then, of course, one has to be realistic, too. In some factions of the New Age movement, people think they can literally take a bullet and they believe it won't hurt them. Ultimately, they are correct, but the odds are not that great. So, common sense and a big portion of energy work will be most helpful. This is very important to keep in mind when we face what is coming. The part that may not happen in our lifetime is still our responsibility, because it will happen to our

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 173

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

children and grand-children. Hence, it's our responsibility to remind them of who they are--that they are spirits in a biomind, and that they create their reality beginning with their thoughts and emotions. The earlier we do this in a person's life, the better. The reason for this is that the little kids are much more receptive than teenagers and adults due to that they have not yet been indoctrinated with false ideas from society and have their existence as pure spirit fresher in mind. It is known from studies that young children can easily perceive multi-dimensionality when taught to them--this is because it's natural for them. Catastrophes and disasters have been very common in Earth's history; some of them very devastating, like the extinction of the dinosaurs and the Deluge. The latter, being much later in history (circa 9,500 BC according to Sitchin) wiped out most life forms on Earth. The most essential geophysical effects experienced by Earth were 1) a massive rupturing of the crust, 2) a realignment of Earth axial configuration, 3) elevation of new mountains, 4) a widespread realignment of sea and land, much of our planet's animal and plant life was annihilated, and 5) these changes were accompanied by a gigantic flood[2]. Interesting is that the Deluge, just like Sitchin suggests in his "Earth Chronicle" series, happened 11,500 years ago, which coincides with when Nibiru entered the solar system, three cycles ago. But not only Sitchin is suggesting that a planetary body was the cause of the Flood. D.S. Allen and J.B. Delair, two established researchers, who wrote "When the Earth Nearly Died: Compelling evidence of a world cataclysm 11,500 years ago" (Gateway Books, 1995, 386pp), came to a very similar conclusion, however without even mentioning Sitchin's previous extensive work on the subject. They are describing Marduk (Nibiru), "the radiant visitor from interstellar space, spewing great jets of fire from time to time, and of its break-up of a major planetary neighbor of Mars (Tiamat), and its subsequent departure sunward with a great mass of the stricken planet's debris.[3]" There is compelling evidence that the Flood was a direct consequence of Nibiru's crossing at that time. Other great catastrophes in the more distant past, like the extinction of the dinosaurs some 65-66 million years ago, have been lively debated as of what could have been the cause. Although the mainstream explanation for the sudden disappearance of the dinosaurs is currently that Earth was hit by a large meteor which changed Earth forever (which could be true), it could as well have been the passing of Nibiru, just the same. If so, the meteor theory is not so farfetched, as chunks of a Nibiru moon has separated from its main body during passing and fell down on Earth, Mars and our own Moon (which is not our moon, by the way, but that's another story). Not all encounters with the Incoming Planet have been devastating, though; it depends on its slight changes in orbit, which sometimes has been natural, from what angle it enters the inner solar system, but it has also been due to aliens watching over their Living Library, helping us through the otherwise very devastating Nibiru crossings. How Earth has been saved from Nibiru's gravitational field as well from other major spatial events will be discussed later in this paper. Which brings us closer to the discussion what will happen this time when Nibiru pays a visit, some 60-100 years from now.

3. Planet X, Nibiru--The Effects of the Incoming

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 174

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Subjects that have to do with catastrophes and threats to mankind, which can potentially instigate fear in the receiver, are the ones I always dread to write--I really have to force myself. Analytically I know that it has to be done, but I'd much rather stick to more uplifting writing. Still, if I ignored it, my attention would on it constantly, understand that people need to know, or I'll do them a disfavor. And remember while reading the following that we do have choices and that there are solutions to any problem. I will go over the ones I can think of in the "Soulution Papers", so I hope you'll stay with me until then. There was a time when I didn't think Nibiru is going to affect us in any greater sense, if it even exists at all. However, intense research has made me convinced that it really is quite an issue. It is not going to wipe out humanity, but its passing through our solar system is going to affect us to such a degree that many people will not survive. This may sound like fear-mongering to some, but I think it's more honest to share the truth with you, rather than suppress it, like they have in done the Media and in the higher echelons of society. If we face our real challenges (the ones that matter) for what they are, we can do our best to work in unison on a solution. If we are oblivious, we are going to be taken by surprise, and we will not like it then, wishing we would have known.

Figure 2: A bird's perspective of Nibiru's orbit (again not in scale)

The Global Elite certainly know at least some of what is ahead of us and they are preparing. Many who have read books and articles by true and honest reporters have seen evidence of the Elite building bunkers, and whistleblowers are coming out reporting that some of the higher ranking Elite Members and their families are preparing to move underground to survive. Some may even hope to move off-planet with help from alien allies. Little do they understand that bunkers and underground facilities won't help them much when Mother Earth is shaking in her transition, in great pain in her efforts to give birth to a New World, while responding to the wounds and pain we are creating by sticking holes in her veins (oil extraction), cutting off her source of oxygen (exploitation of the rain forests), destroying her auras (the atmosphere) with pollution so that she loses her multidimensional connections, and by misusing negative energy, unwittingly but stupidly destroying nuclear power stations, doing nuclear bomb testing, and so much more. The list goes on, and we, the people just let it happen. We may disagree to what is being done to Earth, but that doesn't do much good. And this is just what we humans are doing, and does not include outside forces. However, the reason I brought up the issues in the last paragraph is because the more negligent and brutal we are to Mother Earth, without whom we wouldn't be physically alive, the worse the karma we will bring in from outside. Some of these outside threats have natural causes and are just part of the cycles of the universe, but depending on how we are moving our energy here on Earth is directly equivalent

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 175

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

to how well we will survive future events. We, as a human species, have a lot of energy work to do to help calming the forces of nature.

Figure 3: The approximate orbit of Nibiru, and its path through our solar system

With this said, let's return to Nibiru. According to Zecharia Sitchin and other researchers, Nibiru is on a 3,600 years orbit around our sun. Every time this giant planet, 5 times the size of Earth enters our solar system, the gravity pull is very significant and affects all the planets in one way or the other. It comes in from the south, at an angle, and will at its closest pass between Mars and Jupiter (fig. 3). This, however, is close enough to create great earth changes. At the time this will happen, we will see what appear to be two suns in the sky, Nibiru being one of them and our natural sun the other. The evidence of this planet being a part of our solar system and now on its way to hit us again after 3,600 years is overwhelming. Not only did Sitchin do a good job with documenting this from his translations of the Sumerian tablets, but if we look back in history, we can see that major earth changes happened approximately every 3,600 years. This, of course, coincides exactly with Nibiru's cycle. Also, like Sitchin and other scholars of today say, Nibiru is inhabited by an advanced species of giants, in their own language called Ša.A.Mi. (see previous papers), who are to a large degree responsible for creating us, the modern homo sapiens sapiens (the "thinking man") from their own DNA. Now, how can a planet, which is supposedly many times larger than Earth, have intelligent life? That goes against everything we have learnt in school. Until recently, one of the things Sitchin was criticized for was just that; how an advanced race could have developed on such a huge planet, which upon everything else spent most of its existence out in deep space, far away from any heated star? We have evidence that this is the case, nevertheless, which gives us indications of how little we still know, and how rigid we are in our thinking. Cosmologists and

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 176

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

astrophysicists have, until recently, stubbornly compared everything we don't know anything about with what we know. If we can't wrap our heads around it, it's not true. The thinking amongst scientists has been that if Earth is a perfect life-bearing planet, we need to look for other planets that are very similar to our own. If a planet is not of earth-size or revolve around its sun (which has to be similar in density to our own) within a certain distance, it's out of the question that it can contain higher life forms. Science is still quite rigid about this in general, but lately a new way of thinking has started to emerge. Here is an excerpt from an article at "Space.com" from May 10, 2011, titled "How Rogue Alien Planets Could Host Extraterrestrial Life": Interstellar planets might either be rogue planets that were originally born around a star and were later cast out by gravitational tugs of war, or sub-brown dwarfs that formed alone in interstellar space. Scientists have suggested that interstellar planets could support life under or even on their surfaces. "It has been speculated that Earth-like rogue planets could have very thick atmosphere that keeps them relatively warm, or moons of giant rogue planets could experience tidal heating and have oceans beneath their icy surface," said planetary scientist Heikki Vanhamaki at the Finnish Meteorological Institute in Helsinki.[5] This is precisely the situation with Nibiru. When Sirius C turned nova, the Ša.A.Mi. survived by moving underground, living off the energy which was still emitting from Nibiru's core. Later on, when Alalu, allegedly the first of their kind who visited Earth around 500,000 years ago and found gold in huge quantities on our planet, could they start mining for it and use it as a conductor for their atmosphere so that life could be supported and sustained on Nibiru's surface as well. Soon enough the inhabitants could reestablish themselves on the only giant continent existing on the Red Planet. These beings, who later became known as the Anunnaki, continued there mining for gold here on Earth and elsewhere in the solar system, and even in other star systems in the galaxy, as they were (and are) very capable of space travel. So, is the incoming planet going to affect us big time now in 2012? Not really. In that sense it is not part of the 2012 prophecies. Nibiru is not coming to its closest point to Earth until 60-100 years from now, but we are already feeling the effect from its gravity pull; this is partly why the abnormal earth changes are taking place right now. Still, this is just a mild beginning of a natural cycle that humankind has been subjected to many, many times in the past and survived (albeit reduced in numbers). Not all earth changes can be blamed on Nibiru, however. We are also aligning with the Galactic Center, with the perfect alignment happening by the end of 2012, something we will talk more about in a while. Some of them are also due to not-sonatural causes, like HAARP (High Frequency Active Auroral Research Program) [6] and other similar weather modification programs run by our own government to create earthquakes, tsunamis, and extreme weather changes in general for their own service-to-self purposes. HAARP, which main facilities are based in Alaska, was for long a secret government program, but after a while, the evidence that this program is really up and running became so obvious that the government is no longer denying it. Of course, in line with their standard operating procedure, they just

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 177

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

ignore people's protests. The government has learned since long that protests are like empty barks in the wind.

3.1. A Detailed Description of What Nibiru Looks Like

Figure 4: Ša.A.Me. at Perihelion in the Solar System (not in scale and is not showing the current position of the Incoming Planet) (click image to enlarge)

Dr. A.R. Bordon of LPG-C, gives a detailed description of Nibiru in his essay, "THE LINK", chapter 8[7], which I am directly going to quote here: Ša.A.Me. is reportedly a rocky, watery planet some 4.8 times the size of Earth. It is also reportedly a much older planet than Earth (approximately 6.8 billion years old). Its solid core density is said to be 4.2 times that of Earth, with a considerably larger electromagnetic charge. Its crust, converted into miles, runs a average of 427 miles, within a spectrum of 149 at its minimum and 820 at its maximum. The magmatic core makes the planet to be still volcanically active, with some two hundred volcanoes said to be harvested on the surface for heat, carbon dioxide, trace gases and oxygen. The planetary orbit of Ša.A.Me. I render here is based on a privately calculated ephemeris (the position of the planet every decade since its initial identification in the early 1980s).[8]

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 178

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

He also includes a more detailed image of Nibiru's orbit and its passing through the solar system, which we shall discuss (fig. 4). Here we can see that Nibiru is coming in at a retrograde angle, not showing the 11 satellites accompanying it. These satellites, according to researcher James McCanney (M.S.), in his breath-taking, but very well researched book, "SURVIVING PLANET X PASSAGE--A supplement to the text PLANET X COMETS AND EARTH CHANGES" [9], will behave just like comets, they too being rocky objects with a lot of frozen water, contrary to the actual planet, which has internal heat sources and therefore has liquid water. Nibiru itself will look and behave like a huge comet, followed by a trail, which is due to loss of water mass because of electromagnetic interaction and other reasons (see Multimedia 1 below). http://www.youtube.com/watch?feature=player_embedded&v=hSmHWyWx-r4 Multimedia 1: Nibiru on the incoming, followed by its 11 moons

3.2 Nibiru's Effects on Earth and the Other Planets in the Solar System Now that we have a grasp of how Nibiru will behave and look like, let's talk about what the direct effects will be on our planet and the solar system this time around. Dr. Bordon is referring to McCanney as a bona fied source in this matter, and perhaps the only one who has described this in detail (in the above mentioned book, and others in a series. I would highly recommend that you get it. I believe it's available for a symbolic $5.00. The reader should be aware that the book is written in an intention to shock, which is the author's way of saying, "if it's not shocking, people will ignore it"). I haven't been able to find any other sources, either, that are more to the point than McCanney. So let's see what he has to say about what most probably will happen:

1. Electrical interaction as weather effects. Very unstable weather patterns will be the result (McCanney 2003, p.20).

2. Results on Earth: Water. Violent storms, with excessive lightning, wind and water, with much of the water coming in from outer space. This will last for days, even weeks at the time. These will start occurring month, even years, before its passing. Secondary effects will be that the infrastructure will be destroyed to such a degree what we will not be able to repair the damage. (McCanney 2003, p.20).

3. Result on Earth: Wind. Cyclones coming in groups will destroys whole

towns, so those with houses will be left with only debris. Rains will be intense and last for a long time, creating mudslides, weakening the roadbeds. Rivers will flood, and people will be isolated, surrounded by rising water levels. Jet streams will also become erratic, with the consequence that one day will be extremely hot, while on the next day it may snow--even in the tropics (McCanney 2003, p.21).

4. Effects on Life on Earth. Animals will die of starvation, and the water,

which will be everywhere in abundance, will be undrinkable[10]. Those who

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 179

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

haven't made it to very high ground at this point will find it harder and harder to be able to do so, until they are unable to move (McCanney 2003, p.21).

5. Chemicals Other Than Water. “Chemicals other than water such as

ammonia, hydrocarbons and other complex oils may start to influx from outer space as Earth becomes more electrically active and reacts to the increase in solar electrical activity caused by the approach of the large comet and its nucleus (Planet X)” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 21). “If the comet's orbital path brings it so that Earth passes through its tail, the interactions will increase and we would see severe flooding and immense hurricanes with associated tornadoes and cyclones on both land and sea. The influx of hundreds of other chemicals would also occur” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 22-23).

6. Interplanetary Electromagnetic Interactions. Streaming of large,

electrical discharges between planets and their moons, as between the planets themselves, will be clearly noticeable from Earth: "Jupiter especially, with its large electrical interaction with the Sun will seem to be throwing lightening bolts across the sky. The huge comet will likewise begin to discharge electrically to the other planets and a huge trumpet like call will ring through Earth's atmosphere as the searing electrical discharges interact with the upper atmosphere. Colorful auroras will light up even the daytime sky with finger like dancing lights as the electrical discharges continually interact with the ionosphere” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 21). “Sharp whistling noises will be as music choreographed with the electrical light show in the heavens. The comet itself will appear as many colors but through its middle will be an intense blue or purple neon-like light that will be visible in even the daytime sky. This is due to the extreme amounts of electrical currents flowing through the comet as it interacts with the Sun. If the comet is close to Earth, it may at times be mistaken for the Sun or Moon” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 22).

7. What It Will Look Like. "Historical records indicate that it could be reddish or bluish in color..." (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 22).

8. Magnetic Field Reversals. “As Earth's magnetic field reverses more

frequently, large sprays of high-energy atomic particles will pummel Earth's upper atmosphere causing severe levels of radiation that would cause cancer in large numbers of survivors unless they were properly sheltered. These may also cause gene mutations in the species causing new or altered animal or plant types to form in a fairly short time” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 22).

9. Problems Presented by Companion Objects. “There could be one major

complication, however. If, as in the past, the large comet is accompanied by companions, these might be large and of planet size themselves and if they are perturbed away from the main comet nucleus . . . these too could become captured into the solar system. These then could remain to continually harass Earth as they wander through the solar system for possibly hundreds of years to follow” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 22).

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 180

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

10. Temperature and weather. “The Sun would be blotted out for days or even

weeks as the huge comet passed by and Earth's temperature would fall rapidly. Heavy rain would turn into snow and cover numerous parts of the globe, forming glaciers. Animals would be quick frozen into these glaciers and would be perfectly preserved for thousands of years to come. Our Moon would likewise flood and experience the same effects although it does not have an atmosphere like Earth.” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 23).

11. Fire and Brimstone. “There could be the possibility of meteor streams

coming into Earth's atmosphere and seeming like a rain of stars from the heavens. Mixed with the influx of hydrocarbons in the atmosphere this would be the fire and brimstone spoken of by the ancients” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 23).

12. Possible secondary effects. “One example is that all the vermin (bugs,

snakes, frogs, locust, bats etc.) would be forced to come to the surface and out of caves and historical accounts say that they covered the Earth as one of the "plagues". The ancients also tell us of the water turning to blood, which must have been due to a chemical that polluted the waters. The vermin are forced out due to the electrical currents set up in the mantle of the Earth.” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 23). “If the comet comes close enough to the Earth to make a direct "electrical attachment", then those in the immediate area where the snake like electrical current would touch Earth would see a huge pillar of fire as if a vast cyclone reaching into the heavens. The air would reek of ozone and the pounding noise would scorch the Earth and deafen those within hundreds of miles distance.” (McCanney 2003, p. 23). Furthermore, “if the surface gravity of the nucleus of the [planet] is greater that that of Earth, then the comet could literally suck the atmosphere and oceans off of Earth leaving it to look like our sister planet Mars” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 23).

13. Gravitational effects. “The final and most severe Earth Changes would

occur if the intruder passed close enough to Earth to cause gravitational effects. There has been a tremendous amount of incorrect information propagated on the Internet stating that magnetic fields would couple and cause a pole shift. The real cause of the physical pole shift is caused when a large gravitational "wave" or impulse passes through the mantle of Earth and basically jerks it around the core beneath. The physical pole shift (as opposed to a magnetic pole shift) is where the north rotational pole of Earth is shifted southward and a previous southern area becomes the new north rotational pole. The south rotational pole is likewise shifted. In a previous pole shift, the old north pole was somewhere just north of the state of Wisconsin while the old south pole was in what we now call the south Indian Ocean. The shift moved the tropical area of Siberia northwards in a matter of hours, flashfreezing entire herds of tropical mastodons and wooly mammoths in their tracks while they were still standing on all four feet. Today we are discovering them thousands of years later with the meat as fresh as the day it froze. Tropical plants including delicate flowers were found undigested in the throats of these animals. (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 24). “During a mantle shift caused by gravitational impulse of the passing large

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 181

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

comet nucleus, tremendous earthquakes develop and the Earth is recovering from these and adjusting for centuries to come. Volcanoes will become active and new fissures in the Earth's surface will bring fourth new volcanoes where none existed previously. There is a second type of gravitational wave pole shift I call the "precession" pole shift. It is induced as Earth's spinning core processes in the gravitational field of a near by passing large comet nucleus and is illustrated later in the text. The Earth's mantle rides over the core in a separate type of pole shift, and may move in a totally different direction” (McCanney 2003, op. cit. p. 25). What is very clear from the above quotes is the resemblance with Biblical, and other prophecy. I would sincerely suggest that much of the Biblical predictions, spelled out in the "Book of Revelation" and the "Book of Daniel", have everything to do with the incoming Nibiru and its inhabitants. And it's all backed up by both known history, hidden (but now revealed) history, and myth. In my mind it makes it quite solid evidence. If we also take time and listen to our channeled friends from cosmos, whom so patiently are working on putting the records straight after all the lies we've been subjected to, they are telling us the same thing. The reader may argue that McCanney had already made up his mind and therefore could use his own imagination to make it look like prophecy when describing the passing of this big planetary body, but if so, I again would advise the reader to get hold of the book and read it. The author is making very solid points and his arguments are very well researched. I would love to say that it's all fiction, but then I would mislead the reader. Again, McCanney's book is written with an intention to shock, by not holding back on facts, no matter how devastating they may sound. The reason for doing so is because he knows that most people need "high voltage" to be able to wake up from their daily busy lives and dramas. If you want to impinge, you'd better do it with all your might! In this case, I agree. After been asleep for so long, we need a high power jolt to focus our distracted and scattered attention units. Furthermore, he is of the opinion that only an uninformed society would succumb; if we know what is ahead of us, as a mass consciousness, there are no limits to what we can do. People in the worst situations are often the most inventive. This has been proven over and over again; those who thought they would be powerless in a life and death situation suddenly find themselves unusually proactive. Survival is a very strong instinct! In the book, James McCanney is quite to-the-point describing what we need to do to prepare: ...the preparation will require not only preparing stores of goods to weather the situation, but it will require people to be settled in their new surroundings with a complete life style change that has no dependencies on standard utilities or infrastructure of society. Those that make the break early will have the greatest chance of survival. Those that wait to the last minute will be left unable to cope with all that will have to be done. The stress levels will be severe in the worst case scenario, so being in the new surroundings and already adjusted will be of utmost importance.[11] This is good advice, and the sooner we prepare, the better. Not only because we stand a better chance to survive in general, but knowing how the Western Society in

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 182

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

particular reacts to disasters, it would be a great idea if we're already settled and ready to go when things start changing drastically. It's discouraging to see what happens here in the United States and elsewhere in the Western World when disasters hit. I am thinking about Hurricane Katrina as a typical example. People grouped together in families and close fiends (when possible), and protected their territory. Looting was way too common and couldn't be kept under control. Of course, I can understand when people are starving that they need to grab what they can, but only because we are not helping each other across the domains of families and friends. I am also running a blog called, "News From Behind the Scenes" (http://battleofeath.wordpress.com), where I posted an article about which products would be the most possible ones that were going to be off the shelves in case of a catastrophe[12]. Weapons, like guns, and ammunition was listed as item #7. People often comment on the articles I've posted, and in this case, the majority of the people thought that guns should be #1 on the list what to get under these circumstances in order to be able to protect themselves, family, and property. This is very sad, in my opinion. It only shows how service-to-self and separated we are from each other. If a stranger passes by, we have a tendency to think of them as a potential looter, thief, rapist or murderer, rather than a hungry soul wanting something to eat, and in such circumstance we could share what we have with this starving wanderer. So, instead we threaten the person at gun point and shoot if they are doing anything "suspicious". Then compare this with what happened in Japan when the tsunami hit just recently, and the nuclear reactors started leaking. There was no looting reported whatsoever. Instead, people all over the catastrophe area helped each other out to the absolute best of their abilities and contributed with whatever skill they had to save as many people as possible. People were less concerned about starving than we would here in the West under the same circumstances. In Japan, people knew that if someone had something they needed, they would share. They actually even put out signs outside their houses: "WE HAVE WATER!" Here is polarity; service-to-self vs. service-to-others. If a world-wide catastrophe would hit today, who do you think would have the best survival potentials? The Japanese or the Americans? We have a lot (and I mean A LOT) to learn from what happened in the aftermath of the Japan tsunami. Unfortunately, people in the Western Societies have developed a culture very similar to that of the legendary Atlantis, which went from a highly spiritually evolved empire to a very service-to-self society. This was the main reason why so many from that culture was swept away in the Flood, 11,500 years ago. Barbara Marcinak's Pleiadians have suggested for a very long time that we get away from machine technology as much as possible and start returning to nature. They even go as far as to say that Earth will eventually split into two worlds; one machine world, where people walk around like zombies, totally relying on technology to get through the day, and one world where people get together in communities and help each other out, living with nature and can thus evolve, in our bodies, together with Earth (the 5 elements [the aether being the 5th]). Entities like the Pleiadians, whom are channeled through a human vehicle/biomind, have an ability to read a person's

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 183

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

energy field and also that of the planet itself. They can not totally predict the future, because we are making choices and change our minds constantly, but they can read the trend. And what I mentioned above is the trend, and I can see it. Personally, I know there will be a time (after I am finished with what I need to do), when I, too will return to nature, just like I did years ago, until I decided to return to society because I knew I was ready to do what I came here to do. These papers are part of it. My suggestion is that we prove the Pleiadians wrong and work on creating one world, free from intrusive and controlling technology, which make us passive and nonresponsive to outside events. Let's show them that we, as humanity, can do better than that and join together as one, similar to the movie "Avatar", when the blue beings joined together with combined energies and intentions to make changes happen. We are capable of doing the same thing, and much, much more. We just have to grant ourselves that power and educate ourselves as to understand who we really are and what our combined purpose here on Earth is. Let's not sink deeper into oblivion. In his own blunt, but highly accurate way, McCanney is also elaborating on the resistance to having people prepare themselves. He says the following: The economic structures do not want to see people moving in this direction since a good deal of money is made by having people locked into dependency on the utilities and infrastructures of modern society. But before, during and after a passage, there will not be any use for any of these, as they will be rendered useless as the time of passage approaches.[13] Again we can see the lack of higher consciousness in these so-called "brilliant minds" who run this planet. What good does their intelligence do, both to themselves and others if it doesn't contribute to all our survival and evolution? Nothing but unsustainable power that will kick back at them ten times harder than they themselves hit the ball. This is not some "vicious wish" on my part, but the application of the universal law called "karma". Still, on a higher level of consciousness, we need to remember that we are here as part of a larger learning process, and there is no good or bad karma, only karma. It's there as a catalyst so we can learn from mistakes; we learn that there are consequences. Karma can be instant but also drawn out in linear time so that it hits back on future and past incarnations of self. From a higher perspective, where time as we know it here doesn't exist and everything happens instantaneously, learning lessons over the lines of time are stored in our information cloud, and more, to be used as a springboard towards more experiences. Although it looks like a person can get away with murder, he's really not. The longer it takes for karma to play out on a person, the more in denial he of she is, and the more forcefully it will hit. If we're evolved enough, we will heal both our past and future incarnation equally and help us gain spiritual power and understanding. Our lack of willingness to reach more enlightenment will also do the opposite; it will sicken instead of healing. Ultimately, nothing is "better" than the other, just different choices of experience. On page 27 in his book, McCanney is revealing that the choice of keeping the public ignorant about what is ahead was done long ago by the governments of the world to avoid panic. In the meantime, our economies are failing, and instead of letting much

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 184

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

of it go and suggest that we all join together in attempts to survive, they are planning for more wars. And the ignorant citizens are over and again falling into the trap, unwittingly sacrificing their lives for nothing. It's childish to think that going down in a bunker or hide in underground facilities would provide a better shelter for Elite members than would some people left on the surface. Yes, there will certainly be mass deaths, and because it seems like this time over, Nibiru will come closer to Earth than it did the last few passages, at least since the Deluge. However, those who have a higher potential to survive are not those who hide under the surface, but those who migrate to high land, up the mountains. However, as McCanney puts it: ...a gravitational wave is sufficient to move waves of land and rock at speeds in excess of a thousand miles per hour across the land. It can take deposited sandstone layers from the depths of the ocean and cast them 15,000 feet upwards as new mountain ranges form. Entire continents are altered and the northern polar caps move and begin to melt as new ones form at the new locations of the north and south rotational poles.[14] This, of course, will affect current mountain ranges as well as the lowlands, but if we look at all the consequences of the Incoming and add them together, we'll see that the mountains are probably the safest; especially when the rivers and oceans start to swallow land. But (and there is always a but) in case of severe earthquakes, the mountains may not be that safe either. You would need a FaceBook account to see the following video, and if you do, you will find it very interesting. It clearly shows how NASA is deleting images so that the public will not discover that a huge planetary body is on its way to our solar system: http://www.facebook.com/video/video.php?v=134399359970261&comments I know this sounds hopeless, but hang in there, because there are solutions and I will come to them in a while.

4. Monoliths in Space--Was Arthur C. Clarke Right? All science-fiction fans are familiar with the late author, Arthur C. Clarke (19172008). This man, with no doubt, was an Insider who knew much more about what's going on between Heaven and Earth than he was letting us know. This shouldn't come as a surprise anymore, because as I have mentioned before: fantasy- and science-fiction writers who are being published by the big publishers are Insiders who know what is going on on a level which the average people don't. They are initiated in secret societies, sometimes disguised as "science fiction clubs" or whatnot, where they learn what they need to know to be able to write about it in fiction form. Jules Verne and H.G. Wells are just two perfect example of this. Why is this so? Because the Powers That Be (PTB) want to prepare the world for upcoming events, staged or real, to avoid mass panic, and in some instances, to do the opposite--to bring about mass panic. In a latter scenario, the PTB would instigate a catastrophe, or perhaps an alien invasion, creating mass panic (problem). Then people would scream for help and ask the government to solve the problem (reaction). The government would then present a solution that serves them and not the people (solution). So the PTB present a solution to a problem they themselves instigated. This formula, called Problem-Reaction-Solution is as old as the

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 185

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Anunnaki and probably older. It's been used by the controllers of the world since the beginning of time.

4.1 2001--A Space Odyssey All of us remember the masterpiece "2001--A Space Odyssey", the movie made by Stanley Kubrick in 1968. It was based on a novel with the same name, written by Arthur C. Clarke.

Figure 5: Arthur C. Clarke

The movie, which follows the novel quite closely (Clarke and Kubrick worked together on both projects), starts out with an alien race coming down to Earth (ancient Africa) in spaceships, 4 million years ago, placing a huge, black monolith on Earth to the astonishment of early cavemen. This monolith speeds up the intelligence and evolution of these early cavemen as shown in the movie when the cavemen all of a sudden started using tools. Then the movie makes a leap into the future (1999), where an identical monolith as the one found by the ape men is found, deliberately buried on the moon in an inconceivably distant past. One and a half years later, a space expedition is heading for Jupiter, where they find a third monolith in orbit around the largest planet in the solar system. When approaching it, the pod is drawn into a tunnel and moves with incredible speed through space and time to land in what could possibly be described as another dimension, where the main character's past, present and future exist simultaneously. This is the extremely condensed story-line, but it's a very interesting one, because the basic of it is true! When the book and film came out in 1968, it was presented as pure sci fi, of course, but in all science fiction that makes the bookstores or Hollywood has truth in it. I mentioned above how successful writers often have

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 186

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

access to occult knowledge, and f course, Stanley Kubrick, as a filmmaker, was not exactly ignorant in this respect. It certainly looks as if the two were trying to prepare us for future events. Clarke, however, was the one with the deepest knowledge, I'm sure. In fact, the 2001 novel is based on earlier work by the same author, released already back in 1948 and 1953. In 1948, Clarke released a short-story called "The Sentinel" and 5 years later, he wrote "Encounter in the Dawn"[15]. These two shortstories then became the base for creating the bigger epos, consisting of four sequential novels by Clarke: "2001--A Space Odyssey (1968)"; "2010--Odyssey 2 (1982)", "2061--Odyssey 3 (1987)" and "3001--The Final Odyssey (1997). All four novels circle around the existence of these monoliths, left behind by an advanced alien race who was traveling around the universe trying to find worlds where intelligent life had evolved, or just begun to evolve. Due to that they had found out that intelligent life was pretty rare in the universe, they selected worlds with potentials and left monoliths behind which would speed up evolution (another version of saying that creator gods are interacting with the evolvement on different planets throughout the universe). Eventually, this alien race evolved into noncorporeal, energy-based life-form, but left the monoliths behind. Although the monoliths in this story has a different purpose than the real ones (as we shall see), it's a comparison interesting enough to make. Now I am going to show how science fiction becomes reality, backed up by University photos and statements by former astronaut "Buzz" Aldrin. Finally, we are going to take a look at what these monoliths really are.

4.2 Revealing Photos From Leading University, and Video Taped Monolith Statement From Famous Former NASA Astronaut In an article in the British newspaper, "The Telegraph", on August 6, 2009, titled, "Mars 'Monolith' Fuels Theories of Alien Life"[16], it's revealed that scientists at the University of Arizona captured an image from a powerful camera on board an orbiting satellite, where an object looking strikingly similar to Kubrick's monolith in the film was showing up. Although the University has no problem verifying that the image is actually a real Mars photo, they discard the idea that it could be a monolith made by intelligent beings. In the article, they are quick to bring up that sci-fi fans are drawing a parallel between the real photo and the monolith in the movie. In normal fashion, the university is trying to debunk any such link. Professor Alfred McEwen at the University says to The Telegraph: Layering from rock deposition combined with tectonic fractures creates rightangle planes of weakness such that rectangular blocks tend to weather out and separate from the bedrock. [...] It is not that unusual. There are lots of rectangular structures on Mars. It is striking when you see one that is isolated, but they are common [17].

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 187

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

If it's true that it's common, first of all, are they all just bedrocks? Well, here is first a photo of a monolith created for the "2001" movie (fig. 6a), followed by the University picture:

Figure 6a: Monolith from Stanley Kubrick's 1968 moive, "2001--A Space Odessey"

Figure 6b: Monolith captured by Arizona University.

Lastly, here is an animated .gif showing the same object, for your consideration:

Figure 6c: Monolith showed as animated gif.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 188

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

One has to have a wild imagination to think that the University image is a natural phenomenon. Sorry, Professor McEwan, but I think that you are the one writing science fiction--more so than A.C. Clarke. Moreover, just to make sure no "conspiracy theorist" will make a good point, the newspaper article is also mentioning Buzz Aldrin, the veteran astronaut, going live on C-Span, telling the audience that there is a monolith on one of Mars' moons (Phobos). They are explaining it by saying it was a fund raiser to be pumped into space exploration. Interestingly enough, in the tradition of "professional debunkers", the newspaper doesn't say Aldrin is wrong; they just say that it was a fundraiser. Very clever. Here is the video and a link to my own blog posting on the subject, so you can hear Mr. Aldrin in his own words:

Multimedia 2: http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2011/02/21/buzz-aldrin-reveals-existence-ofmonolith-on-mars-moon/ Buzz Aldrin has been on air before, talking about UFOs and aliens. Quite recently, he went on air talking about the UFO they saw on their trip to the moon with Apollo 11 in 1969. This is real footage and the commentary made by a senior scientist. Furthermore, we get to hear real conversation between Houston and the Apollo ship. Aldrin is trying to tell us something, and he is not alone. It's well known that he used to suffer from depression and alcoholism (however, seeming to be sober these days)[18], but he is pretty sober in both these interviews, and I have no doubts he's speaking the truth, although it's just a tiny part of what he really knows: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XlkV1ybBnHI&feature=player_embedded.

4.3 Reports on Monoliths in Space Dr. Richard Boylan (http://drboylan.com) is a UFO researcher, who is working on having the government disclose the UFO phenomenon and that the aliens are already here, ready to work with us to become galactic citizens. He has a lot of followers, just like Dr. Steven Greer, who started the "Disclosure Project" back in 2001 (http://disclosureproject.org). Like I've said in an early paper, I have some problems with that they are both accepting all aliens, no matter who they are, where they come from, and what their motives may be. They more or less say we should welcome them all with open arms, claiming that they all have our best interest in mind. This, of course, is not true, as they all have collective and individual imperatives, just like us. However, if the collective imperatives are counter-survival in comparison to our own, we have a problem. As I have documented in these, my papers, there are aliens out there of all kinds. We can't just bluntly accept everything they are saying. Aside from that, Dr. Boylan posted an article which caught my interest. Here he is talking about an anonymous informants from the NSA, who reports to Dr. Boylan that the Apollo X crew saw a monolith in space[20]. A second informant, Dr. Michael Wolf of the National Security Council confirms the first source, according to Boylan. He further says that this is not a "leak", but based on planned releases of information.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 189

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Stafford, Cernan, and Young, the three astronauts of the Apollo X crew, apparently saw a monolith, similar to, but smaller than the one in the "2001" movie. Still, they were not the first humans in space spotting these monoliths; cosmonaut Yuri Gagarin saw the same thing, says Boylan, back in 1961. The same year, astronaut Alan Shephard saw the exact same thing as well when he was sent up, shortly after Gagarin. Apollo 10, years later, filmed it from every angle. Apparently, it acted like a communication device, with a message imprinted on it, revealing which alien races put it there. Interestingly enough, Boylan tells us that the monolith was brought down to Earth in 1972 to be studied in detail. Michael Wolf is elaborating on this by telling us that this monolith emitted both sound and light, like if it was really communicating. Supposedly, Dr. Carl Sagan was working on this project as well. Everyone who was subjected to the monolith over a long period of time developed cancer. This killed both Dr. Wolf and Dr. Sagan, eventually. Boylan's first information thinks there are more monoliths like this out there in space, acting like "postcards". However, as we shall see, they are not postcards, but something entirely different.

4.4 What the Off-Planet Monoliths Really Are In the beginning of 2011, members of LPG-C, including Dr. A.R. Bordon, went to the annual LINK meeting at a nondisclosed location to meet with aliens from a number of different planets to discuss the problem we as human species are facing, as well as to function as Observer Members, taking part of what other off-worldly groups, not being parts of any governmental (govorg) bodies, are facing. To read more in detail about this group and the basics on how it works, see Dr. A.R. Bordon's essay, "THE LINK", beginning of chapter 6.[21] This meeting lasted for 9 days, and I have taken part of the full report from this particular gathering. Although most of it will be revealed in public when time is right, I can give out a few bits and pieces, and about the monoliths in general. The report I've seen is very detailed, showing exactly who was in the meeting, and from which star system they come. It even tells you what they look like.

Figure 6: Our solar system (click image to enlarge)

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 190

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The monoliths are placed in space by alien species to stabilize the orbits of planetary bodies. These items, as Dr. Bordon describes in his report, are located along the pathways of all major astronomical objects up to the seventh planet (which would be Uranus). There are also nodes along all gravitational boundaries between astronomical objects to further strengthen the gravitational field. This setup worked quite well during the last passage of Nibiru, 3,532 years ago. Dr. Bordon goes on in the report with more scientific details about how this all works on a physics level due to that this report is in circulation amongst other scientists, who did not attend the meeting. I am not a scientist myself, and can't understand all of the jargon, but the concept is pretty clear: the monoliths in space, on Phobos, and other planets, are put there as gravitational stabilizers. If this hadn't been done in a distant past, life on this planet would most probably have been extinct by now, or back to a very primitive level because of incoming objects, like planets, comets and asteroids clashing with Earth once and again. Aliens in general normally don't interfere with our progress and experiences here on Earth, but they are protective of the Living Library, the "Great Experiment". Therefore, it's important to them that we don't get extinct due to processes we have no, or little control over. Also it's to protect Nibiru and its satellites during the crossing. LPG-C and certain alien races are currently working on solving the problem with the next passage of Nibiru to try and make it as smooth as it's possible. This time around, like I said earlier, is a tough one, and not easy even for the more advanced alien races to deal with. Nibiru is sometimes called "The Destroyer", and this time it looks like it certainly deserves its nickname.

5. The Year 2012 and The Wave of the Supernova The last big challenge we have is closer in time and has everything to do with 2012 and the Mayan Calendar. It appears that we are facing the End Times, the End of the World as we know it. We are talking about November-December 2012. It will not be the End, like in the destruction of mankind and planet Earth, but it seems like we are facing the death of an old world and the rebirth of a new. In the LINK meeting with the Plenum (all alien members and observers), another most important issue was brought up. Dr. Bordon, in his report, named this section, "Episodic Presence of the Itinerant Gravitational Wavefront Passing Through the Solar System in Approximately 22 Months". Twenty-two months, counting from January, 2011 will be around November-December of 2012. According to what members of the Plenum told the LPG-C members, a wave of a supernova is going to hit the solar system around this time. This is something they have discovered, but it is not clear yet which star it's related to, or how many lightyears away. This gravity wave is not electromagnetic in nature, and depends upon dark energy for its sustenance and involves time in a most unexpected way. This, again, is quite scientific and requires an understanding of how space/time and time/space works-matter and anti-matter. Excluding most of the scientific language here in this paper, a summary of the report would be that the wavefront in itself will perhaps not affect us to any major extent, but the aftermath might.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 191

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The report says that we, at a minimum, would feel like we are reliving moments before the passage as though it never happened before, but we would experience them as a déjà vu. At maximum (and I quote), "the passage may literally induce a sufficiently severe wake such that our medium is momentarily cloaked (as in gone off-phase) from the rest of our local solar system space/time ratio (internally, this would be much like the “day of the Lord” where-in/when-in time stops completely, such that the Earth/solar system would seem to go through a tunnel and come out at the other end hopefully on the same timeline as when it entered the wake." Apparently, this kind of phenomenon, according to more advanced Civilization III members, is not too uncommon, which makes sense, if all supernovae send out a wavefront in all directions. With only space, and no significant objects to stop its progress, it may only gradually lose its intensity, if at all. If this is true, and only my own speculations, many other solar systems will be, and have been already affected as well.

Figure 7: A supernova (photo by NASA) So in this case, just like with the passing of Nibiru, it's uncertain exactly what will happen, but it's interesting to compare this information with both the Ra Material, Royal/Priest in their "Prism of Lyra" and the teachings of Barbara Marciniak's Pleiadians. The Ra Material talk about "The Harvest", where certain members of humanity who have reached a specific vibration will be harvested into the 4th Density together with Earth, while those who have not reached that point in their evolvement will reincarnate on another 3rd Density planet and work themselves

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 192

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

through another cycle, until it's time for a new Harvest. Reading the material with the supernova in mind should be quite interesting. The Pleiadians are even more so. In their lecture, "Moon Musings #55", September 11, 2010, CD #2, they are talking about "The Wave of the Supernova", in quite an encoded, many faceted language, referring to the same time period as Dr. Bordon and his ET friends describe. The Pleiadians refer to it as a part of the enlightening wave coming in and hitting us both from the Sun and the Galactic Center at the end of the nano-second (1987-2012). The effects of this wave will be, that those who are ready for it and have done their "homework", meaning educating themselves, raised their vibrations and had their chakras opened and DNA at least partly reactivated, will find themselves in a far better situation than ever before, while others, who are living in ignorance and oblivion may have a very hard time, because time as we know it is speeding up exponentially right now, and if we don't have our ducks in a row, our issues (or karma) will hit us in the face much more severely than normal. So, is this true? I would say it is, because I can see this happening all around me, and it happens to me as well. The issues we have put aside and don't want to deal with will pop up right in front of our faces with full force until we confront them and deal with them. The key to survival (because many will go insane and die, according to the Pleiadians), is to be able to keep our higher vibrations in spite of the chaos around us, and be an example for others, and just by being us, we help increasing the vibration on those in our environment. Then, in "The Prisms of Lyra", Royal and Priest are telling us, like I explained in a previous paper, that the stars/suns in this universe are the Founders in one of their many forms, and I would suggest that when a star is exploding into a supernova, the Founder is basically separating Itself into smaller pieces of self and spreads Its awareness over cosmos, perhaps with the intention to take other forms. And on this divine wave, many layers of information are carried. So, the "Wave of the Supernova" may be a mixed bag. Whatever will happen, it's going to be the end of the time we live in, and the beginning of a new. Personally, I look forward to it!

Notes: [1] see http://wespenre.com/site-map.htm [2] A.R. Bordon and J.W. Barber (undated), "Journal of End Time Studies: CATASTROPHISM, EXOPOLITICS AND THE RETURN OF NI.BI.RU.: A Case For The Long-Term Or Extended View of Exopolitics", http://wespenre.com/pdf/Catastrophism,_Exopolitics_and_the_Return_of_Nibiru.pdf [3] ibid. op. cit p.7. [4] Bordon, A.R. (2007): "THE LINK" (from the "Journal of End Time Studies" Series). "The LINK" can be downloaded in pdf from my e-book section, http://wespenre.com/e-books.htm [5] http://www.space.com/11627-alien-planets-rogue-interstellar-extraterrestrial-life.html, op. cit.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 193

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________ [6] http://www.haarp.alaska.edu/ ; http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/High_Frequency_Active_Auroral_Research_Program [7] Bordon, A.R. (2007): "THE LINK" (from the "Journal of End Time Studies" Series). "The LINK" can be downloaded in pdf from my e-book section, http://wespenre.com/e-books.htm [8] ibid. op. cit. chapter 8, pp.43. [9] McCanney, 1980, 1981, 1983, 1984, 1985, 1996, 2002, 2003. J. McCanneyscience.com Press - ISBN 0-9722 1 86-3-7. [10] I am not sure to what extent the water will be undrinkable and if it's possible to filter and boil it. [11] James McCanny, 1980, 1981, 1983, 1984, 1985, 1996, 2002, 2003. McCannyscience.com: "SURVIVING PLANET X PASSAGE--A supplement to the text PLANET X COMETS AND EARTH CHANGES", op. cit. p.26). [12] http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2010/10/28/top-100-items-to-disappear-first-during-a-nationalemergency/ [13] James McCanny, 1980, 1981, 1983, 1984, 1985, 1996, 2002, 2003. McCannyscience.com: "SURVIVING PLANET X PASSAGE--A supplement to the text PLANET X COMETS AND EARTH CHANGES", op. cit. p.26). [14] ibid. op. cit. p.29. [15] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/2001:_A_Space_Odyssey [16] http://www.telegraph.co.uk/science/space/5981624/Mars-monolith-fuels-theories-of-alien-life.html [17] ibid. op. cit. [18] http://today.msnbc.msn.com/id/31491377/ns/today-books/t/buzz-aldrins-journey-moon-alcoholism/ [19] http://www.drboylan.com/goodbadugly.html [20] http://www.drboylan.com/monolith2.html [21] Bordon, A.R. (2007): "THE LINK" (from the "Journal of End Time Studies" Series). "The LINK" can be downloaded in pdf from my e-book section, http://wespenre.com/e-books.htm

Acronyms (in alphabetical order) (words followed by a pound sign #): LPG-C: Life Physics Group California, http://lifephysicsgroup.invisionzone.com/

For Additional Research:



Writings and Teachings of the Buddha Issa (Jesus) (from Tibet)



Nag Hammadi Library (from Egypt)

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 194

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________



Kebra Nagast (from Ethiopia)



Bee Bible (from China)



Dead Sea Scrolls (found in Israel)



Kolbrin Bible (The British Hope Trust)

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 195

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(Present and Future Challenges Section) PFC Paper #6: The Return of the Gods by Wes Penre, Saturday, June 24, 2011

1. The Tribulation If we are to believe prophecy (and in this case Bible Prophecy in particular) we are currently living in the pre-Tribulation, in wait for the Battle of Armageddon and the Lord's Return. We are experiencing severe weather anomalies, major and unusual earth changes (pole shift starting to happen, earthquakes, tsunamis, hurricanes, tornados, flooding), birds falling dead from the sky, more mental instability, suicide trends increasing, violence, and self-centered living. The pre-Tribulation Period has just started though, and will continue until the Lord returns, approximately 2060-2095, when land and water will change position, and many, many people will die. More anomalies we will encounter are described in detail in my previous paper, "PFC Paper #5: Present and Future Earth Changes and Their True Causes". In the Bible it is said that the Tribulation will be 7 years, but I personally think that it may be longer, or else we are mislead and Nibiru (and maybe the gods in particular), will arrive sooner than expected.

2. The Lord's Return Now when we know that the planet Nibiru is on its way back into the solar system[1], another question needs to be asked: will the ETs from Nibiru come visit us? Well, let's start from the beginning; what is told in the traditional Bible and the Kolbrin Bible is correct--the Lord is returning. However, the Lord is not necessarily a person, but the planet Nibiru, or Marduk, as it's called as well, named after the eldest son of the Enki. And we know that the planet is inhabited. Yes, these "gods" will land on Earth, and it will not be in secret. There will be giants and "monsters" walking this Earth again, and they will be armed! The monsters (demons) will most probably be the Reptilian race that the Nibiruan Ša.A.M.i. work with. Other species may join as well, such as the Grays. Although they are here for the sake of war first, and peace later, we humans are supposedly not the target for these beings. According to LPG-C members, who have attended the annual LINK meetings, they are here to take care of their own and those who support them. This means that the earth-bound Anunnaki--those who stayed behind and have been here for millennia--will be judged by the ones from the Home Planet; at least the ones who parted with Marduk, the King of Earth. There are other Anunnaki here, who

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 196

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

are still loyal to the Kingdom, and they will part with the Ša.A.M.i. from Nibiru when the time comes.

3. The Battle of Armageddon It may seem like an easy task to take down the few Anunnaki still on Earth (believed to be 300+), loyal to Marduk, by the force from such a large number of Nibiru soldiers. However, this is not the only ones who are going to be taken down. The Nibiruans will kill their own here on the ground, but spare the Lords. Lord is a title, earned on the Home Planet due to bloodline. They are royalty. LPG-C says they never kill a Lord, no matter what crimes he has committed. It has occurred, though; in war casualties happen. A Lord can be punished and sentenced by their law, but not killed. However, there is death penalty for their "common people", apparently. This strikes me kind of funny for a race that has almost completed Oneness. So what will happen within the next few generations is that the Nibiruan Ša.A.M.i. will come down to Earth in spaceships and land here, fully armed and ready to fight? They are, according to Dr. Bordon not only here to take care of their own disobedient race, but also to kill off anyone who has sided with Marduk; whether it's people in the governments, industry and trade, entertainment, education, banking, or any other institution and organization. Not only that, they will also kill regular people on the spot, whom have sided with Marduk's policies; wittingly or unwittingly, by intent or action. As A.R. Bordon of LPG-C put it, "they are not very forgiving." Marduk was left here on Earth to rule us and to get a chance to repent and become loyal to the Kingdom while he was here, but from where I sit, it must have been quite predictable that Marduk would not "repent" during his 1,000 years of more or less unchallenged dictatorship here. He is not closer to the Kingdom now than he was then--probably even more detached. The Marduk side includes a big faction of the Global Elite and Military Complex, which is the major problem for the Incoming. The Military will side with Marduk, most of them deceived, thinking the intruders are the enemy. The Military will fight until last man to protect countries and the world against this invader force of giants. The Ša.A.M.i. may communicate first with the United Nations and the Earth in general, before the attack, but who will believe them? Dr. Bordon has said to me that in his meetings with the Ša.A.M.i. they are telling him they feel responsible for us humans because they created us and now want to help us stand on our own feet and become sovereign, which means the Anunnaki will eventually leave Earth for good, in our hands. Apparently, Bordon has, in his own words, established a personal bond and friendship of sorts with their leader, the son of Nammur/Enlil/YHVH/YeHoVaH, whose name is Nannar, the person who took over after Anu as the King of Nibiru in the 1400s. They are very angry and disappointed at the Anunnaki who were left behind. Instead they did the opposite; let power and greed take over, and continued interbreeding with humans. In addition, they continued their wars, created diseases and different scenarios to divide and conquer. Now they have to be held accountable, says the new King.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 197

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 1: The Battle of Armageddon from an artist's perspective, where the King of Nibiru and his "angels" come down to fight the "Last Battle".

Marduk (equivalent to Satan), in his pride believes he can defend Earth against the Lords from Nibiru. He is well aware of what is planned and very savvy in Biblical Prophecy (after all, the Ša.A.M.i. dictated them). Just like what it says in the Bible, Marduk thinks he can win the battle with the help from joint military resistance, world-wide. He may declare Martial Law to fight this "hideous Invader Force". World leaders may ask civilians to take to arms as well to join in to "save the planet". No matter what the Nibiruans will tell us before they land, Marduk has already used his Media propaganda machine to the fullest and will fool most of the world population. The reason he is so certain is because he has manipulated and mindcontrolled the masses via Media, Hollywood, education and more for so long to subconsciously build a mind controlled population of obedient soldiers, who react like one on trigger words that bring implanted thoughts from the subconscious up to the surface of the analytical minds in people. These phrases, repeated in Media over and over, will have people take combined actions to save the planet. It's very cleverly done, and this is one reason I am never watching TV and reading newspapers. Although I am aware of this Agenda, I still don't want the influence from the Media, because I know how easy it is to bury things in the subconscious, even when we think we don't. After all, the Media is one big propaganda machine and the truth I need I do not get from the mainstream media. This is one big reason why I've said for so long that people need to stop watching the news and read the papers, or at least keep it to a minimum. Headlines and a few subsequent lines in the paper is enough to understand the overall purpose of an article. Same thing goes with new technology, like the latest cell-phones etc. Aside from being tracking devices, they are also altering your frequency, so that you will be more receptive to what the Elite wants you to do when time comes. HAARP is another great example, where the government, via a giant power station in Alaska, is sending out ELF (extremely low frequency), which will have a large amount of people vibrate in a frequency range which is meant to be common to all, a frequency which can then be used (and is already used) for programming. This is done in

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 198

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

combination with the Media triggers mentioned above. Then, when the perpetrators so wish, they can use this frequency to steer the masses in unison into a devastating war. Hitler did something similar, less sophisticated but very successful when he managed to manipulate the majority of the German people to go to war.

4. And the Lord Will Reign for a Thousand Years The outcome (again if we believe Bible- and other prophecies), will be that King Nannar will beat the forces opposing his mission and thus be the victor. Marduk will be thrown into the "bottomless pit" where he will dwell for a thousand years. The other Lords, who have supported Marduk will probably be transported back to their home planet, unless they already died in battle. There they will stand before a Nibiruan Counsel of Justice and get the appropriate (for the Ša.A.M.i. people) verdict. The plan is then to gather the people of Earth under one "flag"--a One World Government--led by a skeleton crew from Nibiru, who will spend the next 1,000 years or more to teach humankind to be sovereign and be able to defend ourselves against outside invaders in the future. Then, at least according to prophecy, Marduk for some reason will rise again and reign for a short time, before he is finally defeated. How this will pan out is still a mystery. However, after that, the Anunnaki will pack and leave the planet once and for all, and it will then be completely ours. I argued with Dr. Bordon about why we need the skeleton crew at all. Haven't we had enough of these people ruling us? Thus far, it has only led to disaster, and after all, these beings are pretty warlike, obsessed with sex and bloodline, and can be quite aggressive and are rather non-spiritual. His reply was that he would also prefers that we don't have a skeleton crew here, but that it's probably inevitable, because each planet is looked upon as real estate by aliens. Who owns a planet is a big deal, and if you can't defend your real estate, you're going to lose it. With that, he doesn't mean we will be in recurring wars with aliens from other planets who want to take over, no matter what, but it does mean we have to be very clear as a species what we are available for, and what we're not. We have to claim our right to the planet and be serious about it, and same thing about our rights to our biokind, and those imperatives can not be compromised. If we can unite in this, most aliens will respect that. But if we again are allowing ourselves to be tricked and taken over by outside forces, we are still not adults enough to defend our real estate. This is the theory behind why we need a skeleton crew, apparently. In addition, I asked Dr. Bordon why we can be so sure that the Ša.A.M.i. can be trusted. Look at their history--war, jealousy, obsessive sex addicts, genetic manipulators and slave drivers, using us as their foot soldier in their own petty wars over real estate and power status, killers, committers of genocide, homicide--the list is endless. I am aware that these beings also taught us things like agriculture, astronomy, astrology, and a lot of other useful things, but it is my understanding that they did this with the intentions for us to support the gods, not for us to be selfsufficient so we can claim the planet. And the fact remains that these beings have huge problems within their own lines, and they are a warrior race. They were the ones who taught us warfare as well. The reply I got was that since the Sumerian times, the Ša.A.M.i. have evolved quite significantly and are now a much more peaceful and very loving species. Dr. Bordon

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 199

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

says he can testify to this from his own communication with them--face-to-face and mind-to-mind. Also, in Chapter 8 of his 2007 essay, "THE LINK", he further states that in one of the annual meetings with them, the Ša.A.M.i. told him (and the rest of the group from what I understand) that their species have now almost completed their cycle to oneness, "wherein all knowledge and mind resources are used in service to the common."[3] Although Bordon is not exactly sure how they have accomplished this, but suggests it is similar to Schumann's Resonance, which means that "when the diversity of biominds of each member remains an individuality while simultaneously being interconnected to the Ša.A.Mi. all-one by low-powered, lowenergetic means that utilizes the planet’s life belt energetics..." [4]. He continues by saying that, however, it is beyond our level of technology at this time to understand how it is being done. What we know is that the Ša.A.M.i. is a highly technologically evolved species, and the longevity issue is high on their priority list. They already have the technology to extend their lives considerably, and it sounds to me that they are using technology to create oneness rather than doing it by raising their frequency naturally; by evolving spiritually, mentally and biologically. If so, it is not the path we here on Earth want to go down, in my opinion. And who wants to live for thousands, if not millions of years? We may want to extend it with a few hundred years, but after that, the burden of having the same body (at least in 3rd Density) and mind more than that I believe is counter-productive for the individual and the species. And I feel strongly that Oneness is not something we want to accomplish through technology whatsoever; it has to be earned from hard work of each individual of a species, until the frequency is raised amongst the whole species from the work of individual by individual and individual to individual. Shortcuts will kick back. We want to connect in mass consciousness naturally and not through technology. There is something strange with this Nibiruan species, and I have reasons to believe that they are not like us and can not evolve like we do. I will do more research on this before I release what I've found, in the "Second Level of Learning". A big problem for ETs in general is our stage of development. We are going through an adolescence stage at the moment and we've learned how to split the atom and how to create negative energy. When this happens, ETs all over the galaxy and beyond become on alert. This is a critical point in the evolution of a species, because this is where it can go either way; termination of our planet (like what happened to the Zeta Gray) or we can get responsible and use our technologies and knowledge for the greatest good of humanity. However, we are not using it responsibly, and this doesn't only affect us and our planet, but also the rest of the galaxy and in certain terms our whole Universe. When we use negative energy, we "borrow" it from positive energy elsewhere and it works like when you're pressing a balloon anywhere but in the middle; it blows up on one end and diminished on the other. And what we borrow we must return for the sake of the balance of the universal energies. We are not paying back, and this means that not only will our own Sun die prematurely, but also other stars around us and even much further away. Dr. Bordon has not said this, but under the circumstances, his group may feel we, as humankind, have no better choice than to welcome the Ša.A.M.i. and let them do their job. That would take care of the negative energy misuse and other issues not accepted by galactic rules and regulations. However, this implies that we believe what the Ša.A.M.i. tell us. I can see the dilemma LPG-C sits in; they want to play their cards just right, and very carefully, because they want to keep their chairs in

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 200

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

the LINK meetings with the aliens. But like Ed Komarek, the well-known UFO researcher said, and I paraphrase: "If the aliens Bordon is meeting with don't want him to expose any, or very little, of what is said in the meetings to the public, what hidden agenda is behind the secrecy? We don't want another little NSA." It certainly sounds like LPG-C is stuck "Between the Devil and the Returning Rock" to quote the title of their own essay. I don't envy their position. 5. Anu Stepping Down From the Throne According to Dr. Bordon in his essay, "THE LINK", chapter 8, Anu announced already decades before the birth of Christ that he was stepping down and needed a successor. This was big news, and the Anunnaki, still here on Earth more or less left what they were doing and went back home to Nibiru. Ankur (the Enki) and Nammur (the Enlil), who belong to different clans (the Serpent Clan and the Ram Clan, respectively) started lobbying actively and aggressively to promote someone from their own camp as Anu's successor. LPG-C's Intel is showing that the lobbying was very dramatic. King Anu wanted a bloodless, coup-less succession, announcing he would choose his successor, depending on how well he had performed while on Earth. Ankur and Nammur were themselves candidates, but considered out of the question for succession due to their performance while down here. Marduk and Ninurta were also disqualified due to "unlordly" behavior. Not sure what "unlordly" means exactly, but King Anu was the one who authorized the nukes to be dropped over the Sinai Spaceport and Sodom and Gomorrah among other things, so I guess that the King is exempted from "unlordly behavior". The following is paraphrased from Dr. Bordon's above essay, but is sticking quite closely to the original. The reason for this is that the section in question is very important, because it has, in my opinion, a lot to do with how the Ša.A.M.i.'s minds work, their imperatives, and how they affect us. From that, we need to make decisions what we want to do. However, I strongly suggest you read the original essay from beginning to end, because we all need to know what is written in there! It can be downloaded for free in my "E-books Section". I am paraphrasing from page 54 and on: When King Anu decided to step down, there was a fast and furious Anunnaki exodus from Earth to participate in the lobbying for whatever clan they belonged to. Marduk and Ningishzidda, both sons of Ankur and their families left, which had as a consequence that the smelting operations in Bolivia closed down. Ankur's son Nergal, his consort (Nannar's daughter, Ereškigal) and Nammur were apparently the first to return to Nibiru, together with King Anu's grandson Ninurta and consort. Members of the Ram Clan led by Nammur, whom also left, were Nannar and consort Iškur (Adad), Inanna, Ašnan, Nanše and some others. They went to a platform, waiting to be transported back home. Apparently, Nannar and his consort returned to Earth for a short time period, to northern Syria, but then returned to the platform again. The reason being that the Enlil, his father, and King Anu, his grandfather, told them to return to Altiplano of Northeastern Peru, in the mid- to late second century of the Common Era to help Nannar' son, Utu to close down the smelter at Asacsahuaman as well as the dismantling of runway operations in the Nazca area of

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 201

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

southern Peru. The smelter was still producing gold, tin and silver from distant and nearby sources from relocated Kassites (southern and central Turkey), the operation stopped before the first millennium of the Common Era. Some time in the sixth century CE, Sacsahuaman shut down and the pre-Incan civilizations from northern Peru through the region north of the Atacama desert in northern Chile were all left to fend for themselves. Other "colonies", like North American Midwest, southeastern and southwestern native groups who came in contact with and were instructed by the Anunnaki on agricultural, animal husbandry and other matters, were also disengaged and eventually abandoned in the seventh and eight century AD.

Figure 2: Sacsahuaman--A side view of the complex (click on image to enlarge)

5.1 Political Dramas on the Home Planet When all the royal Anunnaki had returned to Nibiru, their usual aggressive traits played out again, and there was a furious contest to bring King Anu's attention. Ankur and Nammur led their clans, respectively, in order to bring either themselves or someone of their blood to the royal throne. Both Ankur or Nammur were appointed to serve under something the King now called the "Kitchen Cabinet", which was the former "Council of 12", but in a slightly watered-down form. Others, appointed were trusted Ša.A.M.i., many of them familiar to us through these papers I've written, and of course, through Sitchin's books originally. King Anu had many matters on his mind, whereof one was the destruction of the Sinai Spaceport around 2,500 BC. I am not sure in what sense he was concerned about that, because it was in fact King Anu himself whom approved the nuclear bombings (see previous Anunnaki Paper). Another matter, naturally, was the royal succession. However, the most urgent matter was the "Marduk issue". Marduk, Ankur's son, and the King's grandson, still held grudges after all these thousands of years, thinking he should be the King of Nibiru and the King of Earth at the same time. It showed that when Marduk returned to Nibiru with the rest of the

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 202

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Anunnaki crew, most of them strongly supported him in his mission. Of the approximately 400 Anunnaki who left Earth to come back to Nibiru, around 300 of them supported Marduk. Apparently, at some time after they all had returned home there was some kind of severe confrontation between the Ram and the Serpent Clan, although it is not clear to what extent. Dr. Bordon and LPG-C got this Intel from a Ša.A.M.i. who spoke up during annual meetings with the alien LINK group, apparently when forced to do so by the rest of the members (not only humans). This conflict, however, turned out favorable to a candidate, who was not on the King's list--Nannar, the Enlil's son. Marduk was already out of the question for succession, because King Anu had created a new, firm policy that everybody had to swear loyalty to the King, personally, and to the Kingdom. No one was excluded from this new policy. Marduk and his followers, in particular, were furious over this, because he would never swear loyalty to the King, nor the Kingdom. He had other plans. Also, around 2025 BC, with the new zodiacal era (the Ša.A.M.i./Anunnaki were very much into astrology), Marduk falsified the astrological charts to his favor, so he could quicker come to power on Earth, and he also took on the task to rewrite Earth history--especially the early history how humans came about, when that happened and when the Anunnaki came down. He also wanted to make sure that he was considered the only "God" and authority, so he put himself in charge of all occult and secret societies and rewrote their manuals as well and claimed the highest, hidden authority over them all. This way, he has access to all information and Intel, and thus full control over a big chunk of humanity.

Figure 3: Reconstruction of the Temple of Marduk in Babylon

In addition, Marduk was also attempting to construct a six-stage ziggurat strong enough to support a landing platform at its apex (see fig. 3). This is currently under way in Iraq! Despite all these things, talking against Marduk, and for him being a potential dangerous rebel in the eyes of the King and the Kingdom, his father Ankur (the Enki)

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 203

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

did all he could to support and shield his first-born son. Ankur, sitting on the Council of 12, as well as his half-brother Nammur, made things a little tense to say the least. Through internal familial politicking, Marduk managed to get Ningishzidda ousted and exiled to the New World first (in particular the American southwest, Mexico and he highlands of Peru and Bolivia), and then to the Far East (where he met and worked with Utu in Japan, coastal China, the Korean peninsula, and the Asian highlands of Nepal and Tibet on tasks and projects with natives not disclosed to LPG-C. What we do see, however, is the enormous global influence this Anunnaki group has had on humankind. Ningishzidda also became Quetzalcoatl in Mexico, often, but not always, depicted in reptilian form (fig. 4a and b). Now, when Marduk refused to obey to the rules, he was said to have been put in the equivalent of quarantine (common in Ša.A.M.i. culture under such circumstances when comes to Lords, they told). This did not stop him, however, and he continued to refuse to show obedience to any and all important laws and regulations of the Ša.A.M.e. Kingdom.

Figure 4a: Quetzalcoatl in human form

Figure 4b: Quetzalcoatl in reptilian form

This put both his father and grandfather in a position where the King had no other choice than to expel Marduk and tell him to leave and go back to Earth, to never be able to return again to the planet of his birth. From what LPG-C has been told, Marduk returned to Earth with about 300 loyalists around the turn of the first millennium of the Common Era (1,000 AD). Interesting here is that it is now officially admitted by the Ša.A.M.i. people that Marduk rewrote at least part of our history, but we are not told exactly what he rewrote. It's too hard to speculate on it, because it can't be more than that-speculations, but there are some significant point made by metaphysical sources (the Pleiadians, the Ra Material, Lyssa Royal's channeling, Ashayana Deane, the WingMakers--the list goes on) that we humans were highly evolved beings before the Anunnaki came and chased away the creator gods, who were building the Living Library. It was when the Anunnaki started tampering with our DNA to create obedient, but not too smart, workers that the problems started. We can read about the Anunnaki history on Earth through the Sumerian cuneiform texts, but there is no real history about what happened before these creator gods came. If it wasn't for the metaphysical entities, who have told us what happened before the Intruders came, we wouldn't know anything about the Living Library and previous creator gods.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 204

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Dr. Bordon is saying something quite remarkable in his essay in relation to that Marduk and his followers returned to Earth. Anu had a very hard time choosing his successor, having to be very careful whom he chose, not to create political consequences way beyond his own death. Dr. Bordon continues: "It would split both the people and the biomind. Such an act would carve out a huge chuck of Ša.A.M.i. Kaluemti [all+is+life; that of being 'ONE'] power. This, we were told, is the power of the entire Ša.A.M.i. population to act as one, like a single degree of freedom organism, under certain circumstances."[7] I find this quote quite informative, as it indicates to me that this is not freedom, but some kind of effort of the Ša.A.M.i. leadership to get their population under control under the guise of "being One". Becoming ONE is nothing that can be forced on someone by rules and regulations; it's a personal thing. It also has nothing to do with nano-technology or any other technology either, for that matter. And moreover, the King of Nibiru has his people swear total obedience to the Kingdom or be expelled, which is not power of choice, free will or freedom at all; it's dictatorship! Haven't we had enough of that?

5.2 The New King of the Second Coming Sometime in the 1400s AD, the old King Anu stepped down, after finally had made a decision he was proud of--his successor would be one of the most unexpected of them all, Nannar, son of Nammur, the Enlil. He was a big part of the Earth history, also known under the name Sin. Circumstances of which former King Anu hadn't taken into consideration made him make this decision, with the help of Ningishzidda, who was the one coming with the suggestion. Ningishzidda said he was certain that Nannar was perhaps the only one who could unite the people again, and that he also had the life force similar to Anu. Besides, he had been quite popular among the earthlings, allegedly. This was quite an unusual gesture, because Ningishzidda was the son of Ankur, the Enki, and Nannar was of the opposing clan. Anu saw the brilliance in this choice, according to the Intel LPG-C have gathered, and he soon made his decision official. Nannar was now the new king of Nibiru and the Ša.A.M.i. people and is up to this day. Marduk, who was expelled from his original world, has been a major player in Earth's history over the last millennium. He and his 300 or so, Anunnaki followers have controlled major organizations, institutions, governments, political parties, religions, educational systems, entertainment, and not the least, secret societies from behind the scenes, and it's not been in our favor, that is just the fact. However, as Bordon is also quick to point out, he is one of the big players, but not the only player. There are more ET races and bands of ET races, physical and non-physical, who have dominated mankind for a long time--some of them side by side, and in opposition to, Marduk. The fight for power has been an endless drama throughout history, and it has not only been between factions of Anunnaki--that would have been bad enough, but there are more which we shall go into in other papers. But keep in mind that the Anunnaki is a widespread term, and we know today that they work together with both the Grays and the Reptilians, and some other races as well, which we shall reveal with time.

6. We Don't Need No Anunnaki--We Don't Need No Thought Control

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 205

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

It's not an easy situation for us here on Earth. The Living Library is desirable real estate, and it's been fought over since it was created, perhaps a billion years ago, or more, by the original creator gods. The question is, what should we do?

Figure : Nannar, King of Nibiru

I have had a flood of communication going back and forth between me and Dr. A.R. Bordon, as a representative both for himself and LPG-C, being one of the founding scientists. Bordon was himself abducted by the Ša.A.M.i. on more than one occasion in his youth--however, not always unwillingly so. Just like I feel that I have things I "need" to do--both for my own sake and that of others on this planet who are willing to feel out my thoughts, so does Dr. Bordon. LPG-C have been taking on the role of self appointed Ambassadors for Earth in the absence of unity amongst mankind. They felt the situation was urgent and decided to speak on our behalf. Some would argue that we don't need ambassadors in the first place? The truth is, they don't! And they know it. Still, due to the circumstances, it seems like they were left with little choice in the matter. Life happens all around us and above and below us every day, and if we all were aware of what's going on in exopolitics and among off-world species in relation to ourselves and our planet, we would be able to consult our ambassadors, and they us, and everything would be easier, not the least for them who have to be our consciousness. Knowing what they know, they feel they need to act in one way or the other. I think it's a little more complicated than that, though. For reasons I can't go into at this point, I have seen indicators of that at least Dr. Bordon made an agreement with the Ša.A.M.i. more than once in Sitter Space to start LPG-C and continue the mission he is now on; a mission we still don't know enough about.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 206

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Apparently, what is being discussed and planned in the LINK meetings with what Bordon calls the "Plenum" (the human and off-world non-government representative of the different member species, both active and spectator groups) is, that first of all, we humans have to show what our true imperatives are as a species, and not only what is suggested by a representative group like LPG-C, who does not officially have the back-up from the people. If approximately 3% of humankind can come together and present some common imperatives, the Plenum will listen and accept this for the record. However, if we keep being scattered, ignorant, and non-caring in general, no one will take us seriously, and the real estate called Earth is for anyone to grab--this planet will not be considered ours, as little as we would consider birds or cats being in charge of our planet. There are quite a few things that bother me with the above reasoning. In summary:

1. One Ša.A.M.e./Nibiru year is about 3,600 earth years (1 šar), and these

beings live a very, very long time, in our terms. I šar is nothing for them. To me it's quite astonishing if King Nannar has managed to unite his people since the 1400s, which is in no-time, from their point of view. The internal conflicts and civil unrest amongst the Ša.A.M.i. people have been an ongoing saga for millions, perhaps billions, of earth years, so it sounds to me most unlikely. The conflicts and separateness were still very much major factors just before Nannar became king, as described earlier in this paper.

2. If, after all, Nannar really has managed to unite people, it's only because he's used technology to do so. Loyalty to the Kingdom is a must for the Ša.A.M.i. people to be accepted, as we already know, and this alone doesn't seem like a true unification to me--more like an enforced one. Someone is making the rules, and the rest are forced to follow, and when they do, it's called "Oneness".

3. Why would we, or anybody trust them? They have showed over and over

again that they are a very immoral, combating warrior race, obsessed with sex and power. To believe that they should have changed so drastically so suddenly is naive to me.

4. Let's pretend that the new king actually is serious when comes to helping us stand on our own feet. Still, we would have to trust that this skeleton crew (yet another crew left on their own here on Earth, just like in the past) is as united as they want us to believe and not start fighting internally again. To me, it sounds like the odds that history will repeat itself are pretty big.

I can understand that LPG-C feel that they are backed into a corner, and that we actually don't have a choice in the matter. According to members of the Plenum, there are two major achievements we as a species need to accomplish:

1. We need to have a 3% unity, able to present the imperatives of the human race.

2. We need to decide whether we can stand on our own feet or need help to do so.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 207

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

If we are to take this seriously, these are enormous goals to achieve! When we look around, we see how ignorant people are around us, and few would take something like this seriously at this point. When I discuss some of these issues with Dr. Bordon he agrees with me that we are still not sure if being supervised by a Nibiruan crew would be in our best interest, but it's one option. It's not up to LPG-C to decide. Our first goal is to make enough people aware of our challenges (not only those with the Nibiruans), and from there decide what kind of future we want, says Bordon. One thing seems certain, as the information is drawn from many different sources, obviously separate from each other: the Ša.A.M.i. are coming back, and not everybody thinks that's a good thing. Some say they are coming back now because we are evolving into higher frequencies and dimensions, and they are not. Therefore, they come back to feed off our emotions once again--emotions being food for them, and it depletes us from ours, like vampires sucking your life force[8]. They have forgotten who their own creator gods are, and that they are not the top of the totem pole. We have also from reliable metaphysical sources that master geneticists, like the Anunnaki, "are capable of occupying many different forms"[9], either meaning they are shape-shifters of sorts (Marciniak and Icke), or that they themselves have tampered with their own genetics to the extent that they have changed forms. The Pleiadians are emphasizing that these beings are shape-shifters and interdimensional, and some of them are reptilians while others are not (and this was before Icke started saying the same thing). If this is all true, the returning gods are certainly bad news. Barbara Marciniak, channeling the Pleiadians, continues in her excellent book, "Bringers of the Dawn": When these beings [Anunnaki, (or the lizzies as the Pleiadians used to call them)] return to Earth, there will be many of you who will turn to them and say, "Yes, these are wonderful gods. I feel wonderful about them. They are so magnificent. Look what they can do." Some of these gods will seem to fix and save your world. This is where it will be easy to miss the bigger picture. It will look as if they are coming to fix and save your world when, in actuality, what they are doing is simply creating another form of authority and control (emphasis not in original). What we are saying is that people will put a belief system and a paradigm on these entities. There will be a large marketing program to sell the presence of these entities to you. This program is already going on.[10] Note that the above was channeled already in 1992. With all the Intel I've gathered, and the material available on this subject that I have taken part of, where some is pro Anunnaki returning, others are against-, and some are indecisive about it, I can't help but coming to a very similar conclusion as the Pleiadians did 19 years ago. They knew what were coming down the pipes, and there is indeed a great promotion for the returning of the gods, and many are working behind the scenes to help them, such as the German, British, American, and Swiss Thule Order, described in details in my previous e-book, "The Myth Around Supriem David Rockefeller"[11]. They are working on opening stargates on our end to let some of these gods through. Others are working on this, perhaps unbeknownst of what is coming down the line, and LPGC may be one of these organizations. If they think they can be ambassadors for the gods once they have "cleansed" our planet, I'm afraid they are up for a surprise.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 208

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Still, the gods would not have as much of a chance to establish a New Kingdom here on Earth without help from our brightest minds. But even our most brilliant people can be deceived. It sounds to me that the Return of the "Gods" is just a carefully planned take-over of our planet. It's time for the Changing of the Guards and once again, these beings want to rule in the open instead of behind the scenes. IF you haven't already, read my "Anunnaki Papers", and especially "Paper #5: Abraham. Moses, and the Chosen People". If that doesn't support that the Anunnaki are feeding off our emotions, I don't know what would. The Enlil, here in the form of YHVH, shows off as the coldblooded murderer he was, and while telling his chosen people not to kill in his Ten Commandments, he afterwards ordered them to kill thousands of people who did not obey the Anunnaki "god". YHVH himself killed hundreds of thousands of people in the name of worship and religion. Afterwards, he must have felt well-fed, thanks to ignorant human beings, who gladly went into his trap and obeyed his insane orders unconditionally. Many who read this paper will find they come to the same conclusions as I do, and it's important that we exclude the Return of the "Gods" from our possible future. We need to get together and raise our vibrations, become more like light beings and become unconditional love. We have to set our imperatives, and those imperatives do not include the Anunnaki ruling us in fear and terror for at least another 26,000 years, when we get a new chance to evolve in the sense we do now. That's when the solar system align with the galactic center in this fashion next time. But the best chance to break what Neil Freer calls the "Godspell"[12] is now, at this very moment in time, and we are running late! See my "Soulution Papers" for more details. We need to become sovereign and not depend on "gods", aliens, governments and whatnot for decision making. We are our own Gods, and though we are considered being at the bottom of the totem pole in terms of cosmic intelligence and technical advancement, we have something few other biokinds have--a wide range of emotions and RNA/DNA from many different, highly spiritually evolved beings, who created us before the Anunnaki came down. We have a lot of power of our own, and we are knocking on the multi-dimensional doors right now. Previously they were closed, because we didn't even know which doors to knock on, but now more and more people have found them. We knock gently and reluctantly at first, and the doors open just a little bit, but now we are beginning to gain more certainly and knock harder. And lo and behold! The doors fly open and our connection to the multidimensional existence happens quickly and surely. We are finding that the Multiverse in not out there, but within ourselves, and that revelation alone is freeing us from our vibrational prison. We were talking about Marduk changing the records of their own history on Earth, and I asked the rhetorical question, what exactly did he change? First of all, I think Marduk was not the only one of the Anunnaki who changed history. History, as they say, is written (or told) by the winners, and there were many winners and losers in the endless battles the gods fought against each other. Being full of themselves, I'm sure they told their "workers" (homo sapiens sapiens) their version of history. I believe that the most blatant lie they told the Sumerian people was that we are coming from apes with low intelligence and primitive lifestyle and that the Anunnaki sped up the process by manipulating our RNA/DNA. Now the Ša.A.M.i. are using their triumph card, that they were the ones creating us, or rather upgraded us from apes

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 209

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

to homo sapiens sapiens and hence sped up our evolution with millions of years. So in other words, we should be grateful to them and forgive them for what was done to us in the past. Every cell in my body tells me this is wrong. But why would we believe channeled, metaphysical sources, then? Well, once we've felt them out and understand why they are here, and have checked their credibility (not all of them are here in the best of our interests), these entities, who have the ability to read our energy fields and that of the planet, can see our past the way it really happened on our current common timeline, and in addition, many of these sources were part of the creation and thus have first hand experiences with our planet. Some of them are even us in the future, so they are speaking of theirs and ours pasts, respectively, but from a multidimensional viewpoint. I consider these sources pretty reliable. Still, that's not what's most important, but what do you feel inside to be the truth and what does not sit well with you? Trust your inner self. Something I have not been able to prove at this point is the theory I have that Marduk's clan and the Ša.A.M.i. on the Home Planet are basically on the same side and it's just a game to fool us humans into taking sides in a battle where the winner is the same, no matter which side wins. We have been suppressed for so long now that people start seeing through the oppression and they are waking up from their sleep. The Ša.A.M.i. always knew this would happen, and not to lose their real estate they had to put on a little show, starting with creating Prophecy. We have to remember that these people think "long thoughts", and a few 10,000 years of thinking ahead is nothing for them; like it would be for us thinking a month ahead. Now, when we wake up, one by one, two by two, they come down from the Heavens pretending to be on our side. They will turn man against man, possibly in the most devastating war we've ever seen (the Battle of Armageddon), using weapons of mass destruction that are not even imagined yet in the sf literature. The outcome will be a vastly reduced population which can easily be managed by a skeleton crew and the Reptilian Gatekeepers. So in reality, Marduk and the Home Planet are siding with each other, turning man against man. Sounds unlikely? Not if we look at the history of these people. We think we know who they are, and particularly, how they are. These people have erased our memories of them, most probably more than once. Listen to this: The original planners, the Vegans and the Lyrans, inserted a source code into our DNA that is activating now (see previous papers). Over time, the Ša.A.M.i./Anunnaki, while doing their genetic experiments on us found out that this source code exists and will wake humanity up in the near future (from their time perspective); or maybe they knew from the beginning, although not likely, as they may have kidnapped Lyrans to get the secret out of them--perhaps through torture? There is always a chance they knew the Lyrans wouldn't speak no matter what torture they used. Or even more likely, the Ša.A.M.i. didn't find out about the source code until the Lyrans had left. Now the Ša.A.M.i. desperately try to find it (and so do the faction of the Grays who are abducting humans), but can't. The original planners knew they hid it well enough so that it couldn't be found by any intruders. Instead of attempting to find something which is more or less impossible to find, they decide to make sure humankind remains as distracted as possible during the nano-second (1987-2012) so most people stay asleep. They understand that it may

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 210

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

not be possible to stop some of us from ascending, but that may be an "acceptable loss" to them. Their problem is the population of 7 billion people. I'm sure the Reptilian Gatekeepers and the earth-bound Anunnaki have had a hard time keeping us in check sometimes. The answer for them is always war. So why not create a war greater than any before to reduce the human population down to 500,000,000, which has been the plan for so long? It's not happened yet because the Ša.A.M.i. are supposed to take care of that part. And the Global Elite have probably been promised to be spared in the Armageddon Battle. After all, it's the Ša.A.M.i. and their Reptilian cohorts who are feeding them. If we think about it; why would Anu, the former Ša.A.M.i. King all of a sudden get an epiphany about that he should turn Earth over to the humans and then leave someone with Marduk's mindset here to rule on Earth with an iron fist for a few thousand years? Additionally, they destroy a big chunk of our planet by nuking Sodom, Gomorrah and other cities, plus the Sinai Spaceport, making the area highly radioactive up until this day[12], mercilessly killing the humans they just said should own the planet, and as destructively as possible, many of them leave. Where's the compassion in that? Isn't it more likely that they left Marduk here because they knew he would rule us with an iron fist and that's exactly what they wanted? To keep humanity oppressed and obedient while the rest of the Ša.A.M.i. were gone, doing business elsewhere? And in the middle of everything, the Reptilians are helping Marduk, maybe from bases on the Moon and other planetary bodies in the solar system. Yes, Marduk may have been rebellious towards the Kingdom since young age and felt mistreated, but how loyal/disloyal is he when it comes down to it? Ronald Reagan and others have said that in case of an invasion from outer space, humanity would finally be united in a global effort to defeat them. Yes, that is what we are getting prepared for. Thus, when 7-9ft tall humanoids, together with demonlike Reptilians and other strange creature, as if directly taken from the Bible (which they are in certain terms), come down in spaceships, most people will side with the governments, on which Marduk's clan is pulling the strings. Of course, people don't know how this is orchestrated, and a devastating world war will take place where man fights against man, gods fight against man and man fights against gods. Others, who think they've seen through it will join with the Incoming, but it doesn't matter, because they are one and the same; it's just a big deception! When it's all over, the Ša.A.M.i. has won and the remaining humanity is now at their mercy. The Ša.A.M.i. species is a conquer race. Why would they voluntarily give up real estate they once won in battle? They have conquered other worlds as well, according to LPG-C and many metaphysical sources as well. It would be interesting to see how they manage those worlds and look for similarities. These were just my thoughts on this subject, but let's go on and relay the story LPGC and the Ša.A.M.i. themselves are telling us. The above concerns raise even more questions, and I'm sure that you, the reader, have a few as well. We will continue this discussion in much more details in the "Soulution Papers", but at least the cards are on the table, and we have no choice but go from here...

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 211

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Notes: [1] see Wes Penre (2011), "PFC Paper #5: Present and Future Earth Changes and Their True Causes". [2] Simon & Garfunkel, "The Only Living Boy in New York" from the 1970 album, "Bridge Over Troubled Water". [3] A.R. Bordon THE LINK (2007), op. cit. p.42. [4] ibid. op. cit. [5] Wes Penre: "Anunnaki Paper #3: "After the Deluge", http://wespenre.com/after-the-deluge.htm [6] Barbara Marciniak (1992): "Bringers of the Dawn", and various channeled material between 19882011. [7] A.R. Bordon THE LINK (2007), op. cit. p.58. [8] Marciniak (1992): "Bringers of the Dawn" p.34. [9] ibid. p.36 op. cit. [10] ibid. pp.42 op. cit. [11] Neil Freer's website, http://www.neilfreer.com/ [12] Nexus Magazine had a very interesting article on the nuking of Sodom and Gomorrah in the Nov-Dec 2000 issue, where many scientists have concluded that the salt pillars and the salt levels in general in the Dead Sea and around that area can only be possible in case of a nuclear bomb. The salt covering these pillars would have been washed away by the first rain. This kind of "harder salt" only builds from nuclear energy.

For Additional Research:

A.R. Bordon: "THE LINK" chapter 8, pp.50. Speaking in great detail about how the Ša.A.M.i. government is set up and how their political system works. Very enlightening and a must read for those who want to know more about the Nibiruans.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 212

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(Present and Future Challenges Section) PFC Paper #7: More on Artificial Intelligence, Increased Longevity, and Nano-Tech—the Path of the Gods by Wes Penre, Thursday, July 7, 2011 @ 5:50 AM

"The journey here is about self-discovery in relationship to others" - Barbara Marciniak, "Bringers of the Dawn", p.218

1. Abstract: The Fine Balance Between Science and Metaphysics It is easy to get affected by other's viewpoints (in this case often off-worldly) on how we should evolve and behave here on Earth--especially if there is a group which we feel is challenging us and put our feet to the fire. And how about if these off-worldly beings do this from a surprisingly emotionless state of mind? This will induce fear; even a certain sting of hopelessness and these emotions may color our choices as a human race. I hear from both LPG-C, writer and researcher George LoBuono, Alex Collier and the Andromedans, and others, that the aliens more than once have threatened to interfere with our evolution if we don't shape up as a species and stop destroying our planet, ourselves and other planets and galaxies in the vicinity due to our misuse of negative energy. They have even thought of terminating us as a species. Author and researcher, George LoBuono, explains in his "Alien Mind" how civilizations go through different stages, and we are like adolescents now. It's a critical time in the history of mankind, because we are wobbling at the edge of the cliff and everybody out there is holding their breath if we're going to fall down or not. I can see how aliens are concerned over how we're going to handle to stage of our development, because our misuse of negative energy is alarming and our arrogance level high. Not only are we about to destroy our own species and our planet, but it will also affect other parts of the universe, as we, simplistically speaking, are borrowing energy from other parts of space in a "balloon-effect" and thus deplete that space of energy without "paying back". This will decrease the longevity of star systems and galaxies close to us, and in larger terms, when this is done by other civilizations as well (which it is), the longevity of the whole Universe. So it's no wonder aliens are concerned and monitor us closely. If worse comes to worse, they may actually terminate us as a species if we don't learn our lessons, but save the Living Library otherwise and just start over, seeding a new species, perhaps. It would not be the first time.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 213

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

So it's all up to us. We can't blame everything on a Global Elite or even malevolent aliens behind the scenes; we "ordinary humans" are the majority and the responsibility is ours. I doubt we will be granted sovereignty of this planet if we can't even stand up for ourselves, and instead of coming together and stop being lazy, prefer to watch football games on TV.

1.1. Waking up the Sleeping Giant It's time to wake up to reality, which here is defined as our joint current moment and what is happening around us at this present time, and how the choices we make now will directly affect our future. The reason we have been taken so much advantage of is solely because of our ignorance; sometimes self inflicted (we don't want to hear no evil, nor see no evil), and it always kicks back on us. We can almost look at it as demon- or entity possession on a grand, planetary scale. Where there is ignorance, fear and low vibrations, entities come in and take advantage of the sleeping population. In this case we have different alien species fighting over dominion of Earth, the real estate and its inhabitants, even being able to do so without the knowledge of billions of people. This in itself can look like a discouraging situation, but it may only take a big shake-up to wake the sleeping giant (we humans). I am trying to wake the giant up before the shake-up will be too traumatic. Metaphorically speaking; if we think we can avoid a car accident to happen, why would we look the other way? Our impulse would be to help, wouldn't it? An "accident" is about to happen very soon, but we still can avoid it from happening. Albeit, what is planned for our future by forces whom might seem to have our best interest in mind, but don't, in my opinion, is no accident. There are those among us with a talent to convince the masses, who are wittingly, or unwittingly, attempting to steer us in a very dangerous direction. We are now talking about Alien Technology and Artificial Intelligence (AI). I don't mean that all alien technology is bad or dangerous. Some of it can be very helpful and something we may want to look into, but the danger lies in how it is used! We are already using lots of alien technology, mostly within the military industrial complex (no surprise). Other is used by all of us on a daily basis; I am using it now, when I am writing this--I am using a computer and a word processor. Technology is neutral; it's not good nor evil, it's neutral. It won't do much unless there is a higher consciousness which programs it. So it depends on how it's programmed and what it's used for. But even that is stone age today; our future, if certain factions of ETs and humans will have their way, is Artificial Intelligence and enhanced longevity, created with technology. These two goals are what we are mainly going to discuss in this paper. If we let certain scientists and their followers do as they please, where will it take us? I have mentioned elsewhere that science and religion (and metaphysics) need to merge for humanity to be whole and be able to move on, but that doesn't mean we need to adapt to any specific scientific idea out there; especially not the ones introduced, overtly or covertly, by the Global Elite and their alien masters. Science is the knowledge of the Universe--who we are, our place in it, the goal of a universe, how universes are born and how they die, the fact that we are both physical and

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 214

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

spiritual as One, what stars, planets, nebulae, and galaxies really are, and combine that knowledge with who we are on a subquantum, metaphysical level, and what the purpose is if we combine all this and realize that we are all ONE. When this is understood by mankind, we will be able to raise our vibrations above the current low and break the prison walls. Only those who can match our vibration will stay with us in our incrementally achieved new reality. The questions are: if the above are the goals, where does AI, nano technology, and other advanced physics and mechanics come into the picture? Do these technologies enhance our consciousness, or do they do the opposite? Will we use technology wisely? These are very important questions that we need to discuss on a serious level.

2. The Codes of Consciousness Things are going to be tough in the next few years for all of us--some of it are staged events by ETs and their human cohorts, while other events are natural cycles of the cosmos. People will be highly effected in many different ways, and it's up to us how we are going to react. Those, who have been prepared by doing their homework will have an easier time, while those who chose to remain ignorant are in for a big shock. This is a great opportunity for certain forces in the ET science community to come forward and offer solutions. The most amazing scientific "new" discoveries will be presented to humanity in an apparent effort to assist the situation. But of course it comes with a price; and I'm not only talking about money. There are these ET factions who want us to be dependent on technology, and many of our brightest minds here on Earth are supporting and working furiously on it. I can't help but stress enough what I personally don't believe in, and that is to be part of any future super-technological society. It's a trap. Instead, go inside yourself. Other programs will open up, which are currently sealed away. They are codes of consciousness, and there are things firing off these codes. From hereon, things are going to happen rapidly, and catalysts in the environment, whether its planetary events, or off-worldly by friendly ETs, will take consciousness on this planet to a totally new level. Those who go with the flow will find themselves on an island where the storm doesn't hit, no earthquakes reach and no hurricanes blow. Who will do this for us? No one but ourselves. We have this encoded inside of us, we are just waiting for these codes to activate and to be fired off, one by one, like a series of firework.[1] But will everybody be ignited? Yes, everybody to a different degree. However, those who receive the changes with fear and anxiety will misinterpret what is happening and the codes may misfire and back flash. It's imperative, whether you agree with this or not, to set your goals to reach higher consciousness. I am painfully aware of that it's still not for everybody, and that is okay--some humans want to continue experiencing the 3rd density/dimension reality and go through all the hardship and continue into the Machine World on the other end, and that is their choice. I know I wouldn't like it one bit, and my Soulutions Papers will reflect this and tell you why.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 215

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

This time is about connecting with the cosmos and become Multi-dimensional again. Most of those who have worked towards this goal have a subtle feeling that we have experienced this high in consciousness before, but we can't put our fingers on it. It's flashing up like a buried cell memory and then goes away. If you have had this flashback, it's one of many signs that you are starting to connect, because we certainly have been multi-dimensional before here on Earth, but we were tampered with by more than one species; by those who either wanted to create a slave race out of us, or by those who saw our potentials and wanted to take advantage of it and use it for their own survival. There are about 7 billion people on the planet right now, and that is just the right amount. We will not see an increase of people to 8-9 billions and beyond. We have more or less reached the maximum amount a people this planet will probably ever see. This is not an accident but per design. Everybody alive right now chose to be born into these times because of a tremendous group agreement that we made before we incarnated here in the so-called "end times". All of us, no matter what we think, are either here to help raising the consciousness of the species and of the planet, or to just be here to feel it out, out of curiosity. Not everybody will make it through 2012, and you will see many people exit before then; often unexpectedly. This, too, is no accident. There are those who wanted to participate in this mass event, but not be part of the 2012 wave we will talk about later. Still, we are all here to help out one way or the other. We need this amount of people--7 billion--to pull it off. It's the numbers that count for us to be able to create a New Earth; it's all about connecting energy! Be happy you have a body right now and take good care of it, because you are lucky to be here. There are lots of discarnate beings who wanted to be part of this as well, but not everybody gets a chance to have a body during the nano-second. If you have one, feel fortunately--you can't evolve without it!

3. How "New" Alien Technology Will Be Introduced, Creating Split of the Human Race We will see much more "new" alien technologies being released. Not all of them at once, but it will be done, step by step. Before we go on, we need to understand that when we're talking about science, there are different kinds. We have a) mainstream science; b) secret (or occult) science; c) alien science, which includes Nikola Tesla science, that may be thousands of years ahead of mainstream science d) rogue science. Science is based on theory. Then it's up to the scientists to prove these theories. If it can be proven and replicated over and over, we have proven fact. This is how science has been working for hundreds of years, but now, when they are starting to look into smaller and smaller particles and enter the realm of quantum physics and mechanics, nothing is consistent anymore. You can't use the same formula to prove or disprove a theory, because everything is fluid, moving, and changing attributes and behavior. Moreover, quantum physics often has a tendency to prove old, solid science wrong! Nothing is black or white, and this is a huge problem for scientists. How can anything be proven anymore? What was true yesterday is not true today. Everything changes so rapidly, and if we are stuck in old, outdated thinking and

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 216

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

behavior, our lives are going to be very dysfunctional, even if it worked okay not so long ago. However, in all this chaos, there will be "fixes". High-tech Enterprises will come out with technologies that can put some stability to the chaos. But these fixes have everything to do with the Machine Kingdom, which is planned to be introduced incrementally here on Earth until people get used to it and incorporate it into their lives step by step. We will see PhDs or authoritarian researchers/writers who promote this new Kingdom as a solution for mankind, and many, many people will agree and follow. I will say there will soon be a split in mankind, and this has to do with the new technology. There will be those who go for it, and those who choose not to be part of it. Machines will blend with humans so that they will become part machine and part human. This is of course not real to many people today, but is nevertheless what is planned, which I will show. This is nothing new; there are ETs out there who have already fallen into this kind of reality by their own doing or had others do it to them. Now they are trying to implement this on humanity as well. Later on we will discuss why this is introduced. For now, control over consciousness may be a clue.

Figure 1: Machine Technology

The impostors, who want to introduce what we call Artificial Intelligence (AI) into society know how to do it. Just like with everything else they have introduced, which is for their gain and our loss, it follows a certain formula that seems to work on us humans most of the time. And with the risk of repeating myself here, this formula is based on fear. The formula itself is quite known to people who have looked into how the Global Elite work. It goes: problem-reaction-solution. In other words, to be able to end up with a solution which benefits you when you know that people in general would object to your proposal is to instigate a problem big enough to create a reaction among the general population and a demand to do something about it. Then you can introduce the solution to the problem you created in the first place, and the population will, due to fear of loss and perhaps reluctantly at first, adjust

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 217

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

accordingly and accept your solution, and you get what you want. This formula, however, needs to be calculated precisely, because the problem created has to be in proportion to the solution you want to achieve. For instance, if the problem is too small, people may not think that the solution is worth it. A perfect example of this calculated, well balanced formula, for those who haven't seen through this yet, is the 9/11 attack on the Twin Towers. The Global Elite commits a mass murder which traumatizes the whole nation. The Media do their part and start feeding off the fear, saying that this can happen again, anywhere, anyplace and anywhen; "no one knows where the terrorists will hit next!!!" So, here we have a problem, which was created, and we have the reaction, and now we can introduce the solution, which is a much tighter security and surveillance system. We live in an Orwellian 1984, Big Brother society, and many people welcome it out of fear from what would happen if they wouldn't. It works like a clock. So, if someone wants to steer us into a new direction, going towards a machine society and an acceptance of AI, it has to be done in increments. Hence, the impostors use what they have, and again feed off human emotions. Problem: Young men and women go to war to fight for their country (which is another lie) and get their arms and legs shot off in the process. The Media bring up the problem and run random stories of soldiers being severely wounded at war and how it affects them and their families. Reaction: People feel for the soldiers and their families and wish everything could be alright. Solution: The soldier gets a new prosthetic and joins up again. Of course, he has to pass the test, running so many miles with a heavy backpack etc., and he does it! This "brave soldier", who doesn't give up fighting for what he/she thinks is right, can do so with this fantastic new technology. This is a story from real life, and it was brought up in the Media last Fall. So this is what technology has come to; and of course it's just the technology that has been released. There is so much more they haven't showed us yet. The moral of this story, though, has not so much to do with the soldier as how it affects our subconscious mind. We think that if they can fix up a soldier like that and he'll be as good as new, it's comforting in case we need prosthetics and artificial body parts ourselves in the future in order to survive. This is how they seduce us. It's like saying implants are good on babies, because they can't be stolen at the hospitals. And who is stealing the babies? Many of them are stolen by secret organizations to be used, either as sex slaves, breeders, mind controlled assassins and more. So again, the solution is presented after first have created a problem. Many people chip their pets so they can be easily found, and it is a good thing in this particular sense, but when used on humans, there are darker agendas behind it, such as lowering peoples vibrations, controlling your thoughts and behavior and much more... "The Machines can't come in without you, but after a while they don't need you." - The Pleiadians[2]

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 218

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

What we're going to end up with if we don't face the agenda behind this is that we will have machines that are many, many times smarter than we are. Isaac Asimov's old novel, "I, Robot" is not so farfetched after all. Of course, being a world famous sci fi writer, he knew what he was writing about. Speaking of robots; what could be better, if you want to create a certain future, than to influence our kids and program them from early age? Brilliant! And that's of course exactly what is being done. How about robots as problem solvers? Cool, huh, children? Here is merely one example out of many how our young kids are being manipulated via cartoons, video games, and TV. How about a life inside a video game?: (A video was supposed to go here, but after I posted it, the video was taken off YouTube due to copyright issues) This is where parents' responsibility is so important. By choosing to stay ignorant, parents must be held accountable for the programming of our children. Those who don't educate themselves and their children are just as responsible as the Powers That Be, who program them. Especially today, when there is so much information available, parents should know better. Instead, many parents turn a blind eye because it's convenient to let the kids play with electronics and watch movies which control their minds. Due to the lack of responsibility and interest in educating their kids, people, especially of the next generation, will be very excited and thrilled over all the new technology that is introduced, while others don't want to have anything to do with it. That's where the major split is going to happen. For those who choose the latter, what is happening in the Machine World will be a perfect catalyst for them to really take the step, leave the functional insanity behind, and go back to nature and build new, small communities at first, which will grow in size, and join together as this develops. The fans of the machine technology will move into bigger cities where they can enjoy the new technology. It may feel fantastic at first when your needs are taken care of and you get the medical attention necessary, but you have to be chipped and you will soon become part machine. Eventually you need to "plug yourself in" to even start functioning, and you will connect to a virtual reality that is built on machine technology--a Matrix within the Matrix within the Matrix...How far down the rabbit hole do we want to sink? Some may argue and say that the Global Elite and those behind them will not allow the rest to reject their machine society, but they will have no choice. It's all about vibration. Those choosing the Machine World will do so because of underlying fear. They believe, whether they are aware of it or not, that by introducing higher developed technology into their lives, they have better chances of survival. However, it's only superficial and this whole agenda fills a much bigger purpose. If the machine followers knew, and were willing to face their hidden fears, and clearly see what is really behind it and what the end goal is, they wouldn't be so thrilled. Those who choose not to participate will create their own, much less technologically based societies in their local universes and build their multi-dimensionality where it should be built; in biological bodies close to nature. The forces whose imperatives are to take over always feed off fear, and when I say "feed" I mean it in all its definitions. Beings of lower vibrations, whether they are

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 219

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

human or not, are psychic vampires, and they get stronger by using the busy fear energy and enhance their own, in a large degree negatively oriented, energy field. It's food, and their survival depends on it![3] But what about space travel? Don't we want to be part of the galactic community and travel between the stars? Yes, we do, and we will. There are many ways to travel between the stars. It can be done with or without technology, or with minimal technology. Some aliens travel in 3D spaceships, using Einstein-Rosen Bridges to go from one place to another, perhaps million light-years away. Others use their "avatars", or light-bodies, while their 3D bodies are still left on the original planet. Others have the power to bring their original bodies with them. There are multiple ways to travel inter-galactically. Also, I am not saying we are not going to use technology to travel; technology in itself is not bad, it's only if it's used to manipulate and control that it is bad. However, before we even go there, we need to create a new world, a totally new society built on a higher frequency and level of understanding life and the universe. When we can do that, we can start thinking about space travel, and perhaps even time-travel. Our environment, and how we use the technology we feel we need is in direct ratio to our level of consciousness. Which level of consciousness is TV, twitter, text messaging, video games, FaceBook addiction? Think about it. Some say we should be looking at a middle-way, which would be the way to go, by using technology wisely, and that would all be fine and dandy, if we as a humanity were high enough in frequency to break out of the frequency fence we're currently stuck in and are all able to see what is done to us, presently. If we can't do that, we are going to see a split of humanity to begin with; there is no third way.

4. Protecting Our Biology 250,000-300,000 years ago, our biology was hijacked. We were successfully cut off from the higher dimensions and densities and put in a frequency band which glued us, more or less, to the 3rd Density. Our DNA was tampered with in such a way that the whole Living Library Project came to a definite halt and has been on hold ever since as the new owners of this planet changed the policies. They were only interested in a slave race who could do the dirty work for them. We have been their slaves in one way or the other ever since. To call it something else would be false and the arrogance with which they were (and still are) treating us is overpowering at best. Our responsibility now is to get back on track and not let anybody else own our biology to further develop a machine race or by genetically tamper with us again behind our backs to create new hybrids for new, updated purposes. And don't believe for a second that this is not already happening! The Grays are a perfect example of this, and human traitors are working in secret bases such as Area 51 and others to create a new hybrid specie. Our own human Global Elite and those who support them on lower levels have been working very hard the last decades or more to create this in conjunction with bands of different ETs. Many of us have listened to the whistleblowers and perhaps even seen some pictures of scary looking hybrids in test tubes, being developed deep down in underground facilities, far from scrutiny, if it wasn't

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 220

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

for the whistle-blowers. This is not science fiction, it is happening on a grand scale as we speak. The good news is that we are supported on our quest to free ourselves from hundreds of thousands of years of slavery. Not all aliens have imperatives that clash with ours. In fact, most aliens, in terms of species agreements (imperatives) are here to help and assist in one way or the other. Like the Pleiadians say; cosmos is not malevolent; it's benign. The Multiverse is there to guide you live in a friendly and supportive universe. They go on saying that there is of course those who want to manipulate us and work against our development as a species, and control us, but they are way fewer in numbers than those who would accept us with open arms. The Pleiadians are one of the latter, the Guardian Alliance[4] another. Still, none of them are here to do the work for us while we're sitting on our behinds. It's up to us to do the work. I am going to discuss in details what this work includes later on, and the reason why I want to wait is because there are others, who want to push another solution on mankind, which I don't agree with. I want to present them "side by side" so to speak, so the reader can distinguish and make a conscious decision in what direction you want to go. In this space and time there are many forces from the cosmos; dimensionally, interdimensionally, from Inner Earth, from the surface, other galaxies, and even other universes, who pay interest in our development, because the Living Library is unique; the idea is unique! This can seem very overwhelming and overpowering for our limited ways of thinking to comprehend and meet without fear, but that's exactly what we need to do. To many, it will seem like a hopeless situation, because this group has this agenda, and that group has that agenda, while a third group...it seems like there's no end. However, when it really comes down to it, it really doesn't matter. We need to evolve in spite of these forces, learn who we are and how to raise our vibration and recognize the fear and anxiety within us, and learn to master these emotions and not tune into the vibrations that go along with these lower vibrations. Not until then can we break out from the frequency fence we're stuck inside. Even if it's not pleasant, we need to know what's out there, what the imperatives of certain ET groups are to be able to understand who we really are in this organized chaos, and then take appropriate, peaceful steps away from the battle ground. Instead of taking sides in any given battle, we simply walk away and do our own thing, knowing the battle rages somewhere, but it's no longer part of our own local universe. That's our first step.

5. The Internet vs. the Innernet Marciniak's Pleiadians are very clear. Over and over again, they emphasize how dangerous our electronic devices are; everything from cell phones and TVs to the Internet. They encourage us not to waste our time, and stop letting our lives depend of electronics. They would like to see us throw our cell phones away, only using computers minimally (if at all) and instead of letting Google be our "All-Knowing God", we need to go to our "Innernet" instead of the Internet for answers; the Innernet being our inner knowledge, our "Inner Google". We have all the answers inside, because we are part of All That Is; of God Source, if you will. We need to

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 221

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

start believing in ourselves and listen to our "inner voice" or intuition for answers. However, as long as we are addicted to electronics (yes, it is an addiction worse than heroin), we will not be able to reconnect with our Innernet. This can only be successfully done in full when being in nature. We need to stay grounded in our bodies to become multi-dimensional. It's not a matter of leaving our bodies to seek enlightenment; the bodies are our guides and helpers. When we're talking about multidimensionality we don't mean that we should become multi-d; we are multi-d. Not only our souls, but our bodies are multi-dimensional bodies. We use our bodies as extended "nerve endings", and the 12 strand of DNA, representing each of the 12 chakras, is our ticket into the Multiverse. Very few people on this planet know what their bodies can do. Here on Earth, at worst, we think that our bodies are us, and when our bodies die, we die; or at best, our bodies are our vessels, so that personality (mind) and spirit (us) can experience things in the 3rd dimensional physical reality. Still, the body is so much more than that. It has a wonderful cellular memory, it has soul memory and can be used for time- and space travel in ways totally unheard of by most humans. Life is all about experiencing and learning in the reality where we incarnate. Although we were tampered with in a not so constructive way, our goal is to enhance the power in our bodies by reconnecting our dormant DNA, from 2 strands to 12 strands, which is what is currently occurring. On the other hand, the Pleiadians say that electronics could be used in a way that's not harmful, but the way we're using it now, in the hands of the wrong people, it is very destructive, all the way down to a cellular level. By introducing these technologies to our kids at an early age, we help setting the stage for them to meet their own demise in a not too far away future. Again, welcome to the Machine Kingdom, where illusion and deception are the names of the game, and the consequences are devastating.

Figure 2: The Internet; a dangerous route to go

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 222

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Our task is not to turn this around and start using electronics more responsibly, but again to step out of it all together and develop our Innernet. It's like when you leave a lit up house in the middle of the night and go outside, it takes a while before your eyes get used to the dark and you can see the stars. Still, the more time you spend away from any artificial light, the more stars, nebulae and galaxies you can distinguish. Not until we have totally withdrawn from electronics can we appreciate Nature and the elements again, and it takes some adjustment. At this juncture we have no other choice, and I don't say that in the sense that it would mean something "necessary evil", but as part of a new, exciting journey. I used to live with nature all the time when I was younger, so I developed a very close relationship with it. I talked to the birds, the squirrels, the butterflies, the trees, and expected them to return my communication. And they did. I thanked Mother Earth for letting me take part of all her beauty and magic. When you are able to connect with your environment, realizing that it is all a part of you, and everything is unconditional love on a higher level of existence, life becomes very rich and fulfilling, and that to me is true happiness. I am still doing this on a smaller scale, hindered by work, research and writing, currently, but that will hopefully change soon. In all honesty, I have never been happier than when I was living with nature. With that said, let's explore further the other side of the coin, the upcoming machine technology--our possible parallel future.

6. Welcome to the Machine Kingdom--Man and Machine Becoming One! There are geniuses in all areas of life. Raymond Kurzweil was a prodigy in machine technology and became a well respected man in his field. In 1965, as a high school student, he was on Steve Allen's Show, I've got a Secret, and played a fascinating piece on the piano. Afterwards, the young boy was grilled on how that piece came together, and Kurzweil said it was done on a computer [5]. This was unheard of at the time, when music was still made by people on real instruments. Furthermore, the young boy told the audience that he had built the computer himself. It was quite an impressive piece of work for its time, but the show panel, as usual, did not connect the dots, but instead of being fascinated by what Kurzweil had actually built, they focused on his young age. Time Magazine wrote in February 2011: ...Kurzweil would spend much of the rest of his career working out what his demonstration meant. Creating a work of art is one of those activities we reserve for humans and humans only. It’s an act of self-expression; you’re not supposed to be able to do it if you don’t have a self. To see creativity, the exclusive domain of humans, usurped by a computer built by a 17-year-old is to watch a line blur that cannot be unblurred, the line between organic intelligence and artificial intelligence.[6] There we go. If I didn't know better, I would be in awe that such a genius is born and manage to become a front-figure for the machine world technology. However, I know (and the reader who has followed my series of papers knows as well) that we

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 223

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

all are born into this world by first setting goals for ourselves to accomplish in a certain incarnation. Of course, this is the case here as well.

Figure 3: Raymond Kurzweil

Today, Kurzweil believes we are getting close to the time when computers will become intelligent, but not just intelligent, but more intelligent than humans (compare the Pleiadian prediction above). And this is not something we says with regret; he looks forward to it, because this is what he, and many others working with him want. And not only that; they are working towards Singularity, which means that man and machine become one. I would suggest you put the word "singularity" in memory, because not only will we discuss it here; you may have, or you will be hearing that word a lot. Kurzweil goes on saying that when the time comes when the machines exceed our own intelligence, our bodies, our minds, and our civilizations will be completely and irreversibly transformed. According to his own calculations, the civilization as we know it will end in 2045; that's when the machines will take over. This is no longer science fiction. It's not only Kurzweil setting up some delusive target of something that has nothing to do with reality; this is really something scientists are working on, and it's now getting all over the news, and we will be introduced to this by the media in a manner that we eventually will welcome it and look forward to it--too many already do. The Global Elite know how to manipulate the masses. Some people (like myself and others) will fall between the crack and "get away" from it, so to speak, but they won't care. They will get what they want and if a few refuse, so be it. You see, this has been planned for hundreds of years, and people can't see the cleverness of it all. The problem is that people can't think in terms that someone may set goals that span over several lifetimes; hundreds, sometimes thousands of years. It's not real to them, and those who are behind it know this. What is so hard to believe is that time is not the issue; those who want to manifest this are next to immortal and not from this world. Furthermore, they don't

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 224

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

live by our local time system; it's unique for Earth. If the mass population started to understand this concept, it would be easier to see through the agendas played out. Time Magazine again, same article: So if computers are getting so much faster, so incredibly fast, there might conceivably come a moment when they are capable of something comparable to human intelligence. Artificial intelligence. All that horsepower could be put in the service of emulating whatever it is our brains are doing when they create consciousness — not just doing arithmetic very quickly or composing piano music but also driving cars, writing books, making ethical decisions, appreciating fancy paintings, making witty observations at cocktail parties. [7] And here are the punch lines (my emphases): If you can swallow that idea, and Kurzweil and a lot of other very smart people can, then all bets are off. From that point on, there’s no reason to think computers would stop getting more powerful. They would keep on developing until they were far more intelligent than we are. Their rate of development would also continue to increase, because they would take over their own development from their slower-thinking human creators. Imagine a computer scientist that was itself a superintelligent computer. It would work incredibly quickly. [...] Maybe we’ll scan our consciousnesses into computers and live inside them as software, forever, virtually. Maybe the computers will turn on humanity and annihilate us. The one thing all these theories have in common is the transformation of our species into something that is no longer recognizable as such to humanity circa 2011. This transformation has a name: the Singularity. The difficult thing to keep sight of when you’re talking about the Singularity is that even though it sounds like science fiction, it isn’t, no more than a weather forecast is science fiction. It’s not a fringe idea; it’s a serious hypothesis about the future of life on Earth. There’s an intellectual gag reflex that kicks in anytime you try to swallow an idea that involves superintelligent immortal cyborgs, but suppress it if you can, because while the Singularity appears to be, on the face of it, preposterous, it’s an idea that rewards sober, careful evaluation.[8] Here they are introducing the idea of Singularity; first as something fantastic and amazing, but the more it will be discussed in the near future, the more incorporated these ideas will be with the common population. It is already happening, in fact. People are reading about it in magazines and newspapers and watch interviews on TV with brilliant inventors and scientists, but no one can wrap their heads around this concept. Yet, the concept is easy once the mind accepts to think in these terms: our biological bodies as we know them will be obsolete! In the future, a body will be both biological and machine, and what happens then? The bodies are not sufficient

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 225

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

enough to carry a soul fragment (human mind, personality, thinking unit)! Like the same article above says; there are many theories about it and one is that we humans will merge with the computers and become super-intelligent cyborgs. This is the goal. Of course, no one is telling you that the more machine-like a biomind becomes, the less chance someone can incarnate into it, which means there is no soul consciousness there; the consciousness which carries the intelligence will be artificial; thus, Artificial Intelligence (AI). The consequences should be obvious to the reader by now, but if not, and if you haven't already, read my "PFC Paper #4: The Animus, Artificial Intelligence, and Blank Slate Technology" about the Animus race. The idea of a machine society has been introduced to us, as usual, by all open channels thinkable; Hollywood being the most effective media if you want to reach out to the masses. Robots appear in almost any sci fi movie worth its name since the 50s or so, but it has become more sophisticated over the last few years, where cyborgs often have taken the front seat in the plot. It started for real back in the 1980s, with Arnold Schwarzenegger's "Terminator" movies. Oh yes, this man, who later became the Mayor of California, knew more what was behind the plot of these movies than people think. His goal is with the Global Elite and he admires Hitler; he wants to be a dictator. He's admitted to this.

Figure 4: Arnold Schwarzenegger as the Terminator

Since three years back, there is a Singularity University, which Kurzweil co-founded, hosted by NASA, with Google being a founding sponsor.[9]

We are still staying with Time Magazine here for a while longer, just because it is an excellent article on an extremely important subject. I encourage the reader to read the whole article online at http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2011/03/06/2045-the-year-man-becomesimmortal/, but I am selecting the highlights here to make my point for our further discussions. Here is a very interesting part: The Singularity isn’t a wholly new idea, just newish. In 1965 the British mathematician I.J. Good described something he called an “intelligence explosion”: Let an ultraintelligent machine be defined as a machine that can far surpass all the intellectual activities of any man however clever. Since the design of machines is one of these intellectual activities, an ultraintelligent machine could design even better machines; there would then unquestionably be an “intelligence explosion,” and the intelligence of man would be left far behind. Thus the first ultraintelligent machine is the last invention that man need ever make.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 226

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The word singularity is borrowed from astrophysics: it refers to a point in space-time — for example, inside a black hole — at which the rules of ordinary physics do not apply. In the 1980s the science-fiction novelist Vernor Vinge attached it to Good’s intelligenc e-explosion scenario. At a NASA symposium in 1993, Vinge announced that “within 30 years, we will have the technological means to create super-human intelligence. Shortly after, the human era will be ended.”[10] We've discussed earlier that most science fiction writers don't make up their stories from nothing; they have inside knowledge gained from association with the Power Elite. You wouldn't be published by the big publishers if you didn't have a story which could further enhance an agenda set by those behind the scenes. Here again, we have a science fiction writer speaking at a NASA symposium. The indoctrination and manipulation needs to have many outlets and the ideas introduced in increments to the masses from many different angles. Kurzweil has not been lazy since he appeared on TV in 1965. He has worked intensively on developing machine technology and AI ever since and received lots of rewards, holds many patents, and of course made himself a fortune. President Bill Clinton gave him "The National Medal of Technology" in 1999, and Bill Gates called him "the best person I know at predicting the future of artificial intelligence." Kurzweil says that Singularity is not just an idea; it attracts people, and those people feel a bond with each other. Kurzweil calls it a "Community". "Once you decide to take the Singularity seriously, you will find that you have become part of a small but intense and globally distributed hive of like-minded thinkers known as Singularitarians." Singularitarians (who are increasing in numbers) believe in technology when to shape our future. And don't think twice about it; these people, who are almost obsessively pushing machine technology and Singularity in particular, did incarnate here with the purpose of steering us in this direction. We will see many, many more people promoting this future, and our children who are growing up now during the nano-second, if they are not educated as to what is happening, will fall into the trap. It's enough to go out for a walk or drive your car around; you will see teenagers everywhere texting and twitting at the same time as they are walking. Many of them are totally caught up in what they are doing and don't even notice what is happening around them. This world, which I am writing from, is beginning to cease to exist for the younger generation. I often see them in groups, where most of them are either on the cell phone or texting, not engaged in any conversation with their friends who are walking beside them. I have seen them many times crossing the street, forgetting to look for cars. It's come to a point where the drivers pay extra attention when they see teenagers coming, because they are aware of this problem. Parents have an enormous responsibility right now to educate their children and don't let them get all these new toys for their amusement. We live busy lives in a busy society, and it's easy to take a shortcut and letting the kids play around with their electronic toys so we get off the hook and can concentrate on "important things that need to be done". We need to understand that this is all a giant setup where one thing is connected with another. We are kept busy so we don't get a chance to reflect, and if we're busy making a living in an incredibly fast pace, we don't have time for our children in the way we ought to.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 227

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

When this happens, we need to step back and reflect; we have no choice. If we only slow down for a while, we'll see what we're caught up in and hopefully will understand the seriousness of it. When things around us speed up, it's our duty to slow down. The children are our future, and if we choose to look the other way and think that electronics is just the signs of our times and human progression, we are helping forces who have no empathy for us as a species, but only to implement their own imperatives on us; imperatives which eventually will cause our demise as biological entities. We have been asleep for millennia, but now we have no choice but to wake up. This whole thing with machine technology and Singularity leads to another subject, which goes hand in hand with the former; it's about longevity and immortality. The Singularity University holds annual summits, and the following was discussed during the 2010 summit: After artificial intelligence, the most talked-about topic at the 2010 summit was life extension. Biological boundaries that most people think of as permanent and inevitable Singularitarians see as merely intractable but solvable problems. Death is one of them. Old age is an illness like any other, and what do you do with illnesses? You cure them. Like a lot of Singularitarian ideas, it sounds funny at first, but the closer you get to it, the less funny it seems. It’s not just wishful thinking; there’s actual science going on here. [11] This is what I mean when I say the world will split into two. The Machine World and the World of Natural Evolution. Death is something many people are afraid of, only because it's a mystery; they don't know what will happen. Still, with a little research, it's easy to find out that death is not something to fear; quite the opposite. I have written a lot about it in previous papers. However, the fear of not existing anymore and the loss of relatives and friends (another falsehood) make people attracted to ideas like Singularity, where their lifespan can be extended with many extra years, and perhaps by then, technology has come to a point where immortality is possible. You can see where this is going. It's a trap, because what they are creating are an artificial, super-intelligent race, which can be programmed as a hive community, where All is One in an artificial way, and where everybody is becoming disconnected from Source Energy. Their intelligence is synthetic but intelligent, emotionless and soulless. Your spirit/information cloud can no longer manifest! Is this the future we want? If people really thought about it this way, who would want it? The problem is that those who fear death so much that they fall for this won't even read papers like this. Still, it's their choice. In a Free Will Universe, like our own, anything goes, but there are always consequences/karma in everything we're doing. There are no free rides. The alternative, of course, is to evolve naturally, without machine technology at all. We have our biological body, our mind and our soul working together to find enlightenment and higher realms of existence through experiences and cognition. Our DNA is reactivating more and more as we learn and we will learn to become multi-dimensional again, with and due to our thoughts and emotions, not without them.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 228

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The choice for me is easy.

7. Artificial Life Created, Called "Cynthia" An article was published, originally in "Science", that "researchers have constructed a bacterium's "genetic software" called "Cynthia", and transplanted it into a host cell. The resulting microbe then looked and behaved like the species "dictated" by the synthetic DNA." This team of scientists was led by Dr. Craig Venter of the J Craig Venter Institute (JCVI) in Maryland and California. The scientists have put two methods together to create a "synthetic cell". "As soon as this new software goes into the cell, the cell reads [it] and converts into the species specified in that genetic code." [...] "This is the first time any synthetic DNA has been in complete control of a cell," said Dr Venter. 'New industrial revolution'"[12] What this means is that science has revealed they are now able to create synthetic life forms which paves the way for designer organisms that are built rather than evolved. They are now about to be able to build life from scratch; the New Human! Michio Kaku, professor of Physics, and well known by many for his best seller, "Parallel Worlds", went live on Fox News, comparing this new revelation like the biggest discovery since the splitting of the atom.[13] He compares it with downloading apps to a cell phone, and in this case they took a cell from a goat and "downloaded" new DNA which they then programmed, but yes, they used human DNA as well. The point is, says Professor Kaku, that it is artificial. Both him, Dr. Craig and others are promoting this as a potential solution (or partial solution) to global warming. Even the oil industry is interested. But none of these scientists are really discussing the ethical and moral parts of this in any great details. What else can it be used for? When asked about the ethical issues, they say these have been discussed in details among the scientists. Where? Behind locked doors? The details of these discussions have not, as far as I can tell, been made official. But just the mentioning of having discussed them calms most of the population down, they believe. And they are correct in that. People can go back to sleep. When asked by the Fox News reporter if this is not some kind of "Jurassic Park experiment", Kaku reassures us that you can recall a car, for example, but not a life form. In other words, he says it's not going to be used to replicate the human biokind, although he admits to that this kind of research can have "unintended consequences". Kaku is still on the fence regarding this research, he says. I would say, no he's not. He is working for the Machine Kingdom and is their spokesperson in popular media. He has the charisma necessary to seduce the masses and this is what he is being used for. By "being on the fence" he can attract those who are "being on the fence" and eventually win them over.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 229

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

To put this in a metaphysical perspective, the Pleiadians[14], in a lecture from 2010 tell us that there are time-jumpers; people from our future who are returning to our time to steal human female eggs and interfere with our evolution because they themselves have become totally synthetic life form, like metallic skeletons we see in sci fi movies. They come to try and reestablished their DNA to become biological entities again. These entities, on one of our future timelines, took the microchip, the brilliance of electronics, and abdicated their own biology[15]. Anyone can make any decision they want, but what I like to stress is that we are at a crossroads right now where we have to decide which way to go, and whatever choice we make, we have to live with the consequences. Before we make any decision, it's therefore very wise to consider all the factors involved. The Pleiadians also bring up "Cynthia" in a few of their lectures, and although this story got kind of "buried" by the Media after a while, the Pleiadians see it as a tipping point in the human history.[16] It's the catalyst forcing us to make a choice. Very soon, more sophisticated information will be released. Of course, it's already researched and ready to go; all that is needed is to seduce humanity into accepting it. Michio Kaku and cohorts, we will see more and more of your kind in the very near future, spamming our news channels and in series like those on the Discovery Channel.

8. Smurf's Village If we as grown ups start thinking about this, it's quite astonishing. While the parents are doing something else, the kids are playing on Smurf's Village on iTunes. This game is about getting the most "smurfberries"--that's how you become the most powerful person in this game. But don't think it's free. Here is the price list: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

BUCKET OF SMURF...$4.99 BUSHEL OF SMURFB...$9.99 BARREL OF SMURFB...$24.99 BUCKET OF SMURF...$4.99 WAGON OF SMURFB...$99.99 BUSHEL OF SMURFB...$11.99 WHEELBARROW OF ...$49.99 WHEELBARROW OF ...$59.99 BARREL OF SMURFB...$29.99[17]

There was an article at MacLife and other places, where this horrendous game was exposed. An 8 year old child charged their parents credit card for $1,400 to buy delicious smurfberries[18] in a game that is designed for 4 year olds (who normally can't read). But this is no exception. Children. as early as at the age of 5, have racked their parents' credit cards.[19] Let's stop here for a while and reflect. First of all, think back when you were 5 years old. Most people couldn't read at that age, much less have the grasp of how to use a credit card. We didn't even know what it was and how money worked, other than we perhaps got a small allowance to buy a magazine or some candy. These kids, however, are very "profound" and know how to do these things. It's not a coincidence, it's per design. Babies are born into this era to play out theirs and our

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 230

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

collective karma; much of it going back to the Atlantean Era, where technology eventually, to a large degree caused its destruction. These babies, when they grow up to be little kids, know instinctively how to use technology. We, as parents, can only watch in awe. What takes us a long time to grasp, they get the hang of in a few seconds. If you as an adult need help to fix your electronic device, don't go to the manufacturer, go to your kids; they can fix it in no-time! These little kids will be the front people in the new Machine Kingdom. As a side note, let's go back to "Smurf Village". What do you get for $1,400? A lot of smurfberries. What are they? Expensive, wonderfully tasting berries? No, they are nothing; just imaginary berries in an electronic game. But to the kids, these berries are real. This is what machine technology does. People start living in a totally new matrix, which is electronic in nature. They disappear into a computer screen and start living the holographic life inside of it and forget the life outside. Many parents may recall the times when they had to drag the kids from the computer games, the ipods, cell phones etc. And when they return to your reality, they are not very responsive. They want to go back to "the other world", which is more appealing to them. Can anyone see where this is intentionally leading to? And how can someone get away with selling illusionary smurfberries for a shocking price to 4 year old and up without going to jail? The scary part is that the consciousness of the kids transfer into the computer screen, and this virtual reality becomes conscious. This is not science fiction, as you can see; it happens now. Wars are raging on the planet as usual; that's nothing new. But there is another, more covert Electronic War going on behind our backs, that in the extension is much more devastating.

9. WikiLeaks and a Flashback to the Atlantic Technology Era Fairly recently from the time I write this paper, WikiLeaks leaked a lot of supposedly classified information, some 90,000 pages, among other things, of what was going on in Pakistan and so forth. Everybody was all wound up about this and wanted to know what was in these papers. But after a while we noticed that it wasn't that hot and exciting, really. It wasn't so much about what was released but what these 90,000 papers represented, of what could be leaked. What is there if you push buttons and know how to do it. Because today, everything is stored along "electronic highways". Things have changed rapidly since the computers were introduced in society and the Internet became accessible to almost everybody on the planet. Of course, much of this is alien technology, received during TTPs (Technology Transfer Programs), but there is more to all this; it's an old dramatization--an old civilization once again coming to life. Back in the Atlantean era (if we talk about the Atlantean era as the time just before the Deluge--there were more than one Atlantis and they were not all in this dimension or on this planet), the Anunnaki had a similar technology, with electronic highways. They had their records, their blueprints, their patterns to build civilizations, to map the heavens, to understand agriculture, metallurgy etc. They stored this information on something they called meš (pronounced, mesh, like in she). And they fought over them, punishing each other with death penalty

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 231

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

sometimes, if they stole another's master meš. If you recall, I wrote about this in the "Anunnaki Papers", when Anzu stole the meš to the super-computer system from the Enlil, and eventually was punished with a death sentence. The Anunnaki stored their history and everything on meš; it was all recorded. The problems they had was that just like us, they had secret information stored there, which those who were not initiated wanted to take part of, so there was a constant struggle to keep this information safe. In this respect, nothing has changed. We are still playing the same games as the gods of old. It may not be so strange when we realize that some of them are still here. However, if we continue playing the games they set up for us, we will not only bring about a New Atlantis, with all its negative sides, leading to another disaster, but this time it will be ten times worse. Long before the American Revolution, when Freemasonry and the Rosicrucian's took over America, the dream of the New Atlantis had already been planned in secret behind the scenes for hundreds of years (officially), and thousands of years (unofficially). Francis Bacon wrote about the vision of the New Atlantis[20] and that it would be set up in the future. Manly P. Hall, the Honorary Freemason[21], who was perhaps the leading expert of Masonry all times, also wrote about the New Figure 5: Francis Bacon's book, "New Atlantis, and that it was finally accomplished by the Atlantis" (click on image to enlarge) take-over of the North American continent, which eventually became the United States of America. Hall was potentially murdered for leaking information that was supposed to be held secret. We owe much to this fantastic scholar. I said "took over America" in the last paragraph, because that's of course what happened. This was Native American land, which was brutally raped and plundered by so-called civilized men, and whole invaluable spiritual cultures were destroyed to the core, and only remnants of the old wisdom of the Native Indians live on. We got our Atlantis, alright, and Bacon would maybe have been able to finish his book if he were alive. Now, what are we going to do with it? Are we going to let history repeat itself?

10. Technology and Longevity Longevity is the big issue for humanity; at least for those in power who serve the gods. How can we extend our lifespan and become immortal, just like the gods? Immortal in the sense that we can live perhaps a million years or more? The writer and researcher, Nigel Kerner, writes: A body vastly enhanced through biotech and nanotech may suffice to extend life spans indefinitely, but the ultimate leap is to transcend biology entirely.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 232

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Before 2050, Kurzweil predicts that AI and nanotech will have advanced so far that his brain, with its memories, capabilities and characteristics, can be reduced to pure information and rebooted in a non-biological format, be it a supercomputer, a real or virtual body, or a swarm of nanobots.[22] Being 3rd Density beings, we have separated ourselves from the cosmos, and our longevity has decreased since ancient times. Now we're coming down to a point where we are building our world on itsy-bitsy pieces called nano particles. But what has happened is that all this exploration into the nano is creating tremendous problems in the food supply, in peoples bodies; you have these nano particles, and these nano products. Nano technology was not approached with any care at all, and this is going to create a very devitalized probability in the future for those who will be unable to extricate themselves or to pull their energy away from that probability and move towards a different one; one that is more connected to the cosmos and connected to nature. Science are talking about "junk-DNA", and have no clue that in that is the solution. We don't need any kind of technology to activate our dormant DNA, and we will go into this in depth in a future paper. The less technology oriented we become, the more the DNA can reconnect with the cosmos, so instead of adding technology to improve our lives, we should diminish it. And we don't need nanotechnology to extend our lives; it is done in a natural way, something for scientists to think about. Dr. Bordon, in his essay, "The LINK", he reveals that the Nibiruans are extending their lives significantly, and are becoming in ONENESS as a species, probably because of nano tech; and they are inhaling gold to extend their lives as well. Now they want to introduce these technologies here on Earth, so at least the Elite and those who can pay for it get a longer life than the poor guy with minimal wage, who is standing on his feet all day at McDonalds under tremendous stress. And who are the Ruling Elite, the Powers That Be, really? Think about it. They are 13 main ruling families of tremendous fortune, and they interbreed with each other. Why do they want to keep their bloodline so intact? The answer, of course, is easy. These families, who are set here to rule while the Ša.A.M.i. Nibiruans are gone elsewhere, are all Ša.A.M.i./Anunnaki hybrids. At least half (probably more) of their genome is Anunnaki. Then it's easy to see what the Anunnaki traits are; just watch the Global Elite to understand the Anunnaki mindset! (Alex Collier wrote an excellent article as well on this subject, which you can read here: http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2010/03/19/alex-collier-on-reptilians-jehovahterran-control-groups-and-derivative-concepts/) Are you one of these people who has a hard time looking at details as you drive, do data entry on the computer at work, when you have a job situation which requires multi-tasking? In situations like these, are you making errors and feel stupid that you never "learn"? It requires a whole different consciousness to be detail oriented in this high-tech society with fast pace and multi-tasking than it does if you take your horse and ride out on the prairies for five days. The details you pay attention to are very different from these in the high-tech society. Some people have a very easy time adjusting to high-tech and their brains can do all these fast thing simultaneously; not a big deal for them. But people like myself, whose mind is multi-dimensionally oriented, where nature, beauty, slower pace and with my mind set on details far different from these in today's society, have a hard time adjusting, and also a reluctance and resistance to it. I want less of that, not more. Would you agree?

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 233

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

3-D reality has come to a dead end. Like the Pleiadians say, it has nowhere to pull its juice from (Pleiadian Lecture [8/13/2011-8/14/2011]: "Awakening to the Sun", CD 3, Track #5). People are mixed up and can't find their meaning in life; they don't know how to heal themselves anymore. It's true that our biology was tampered with and our lifespan reduced significantly as they went on with their experiments. They didn't want us to live too long either, because we multiplied uncontrollably. The Bible talks about how humans (hybrids, actually), lived for 900 years or more; sometimes thousands of years, such as the patriarchs, who had to live a long time to be able to complete their tasks, but some Anunnaki were not pleased with the increase of the human population. We became cumbersome to handle and they let most of us be wiped out by the Flood. It's been known for a long time (and I've been writing about it and posted relevant articles on http://illuminati-news.com) that the Power Elite want to reduce the population; some say to a manageable 500 millions. How do they do that? By war, famine and disease? Weather control and vaccination? Yes, that's part of it, but it won't do the trick. The Elite are basically waiting for prophecy to take effect. That will reduce the population drastically. For the survivors (and there will not be many if they get their ways), the new technology is now introduced and the future visualized. What the Power Elite and their Masters apparently seem to want is a population big enough to control, united with technology and made into half machines, half human, or perhaps 100% synthetic, with no means to mass produce. What Nigel Kerner is talking about in his article (above) is how the use of nanotechnology and biotech will "complete the cycle" and humanity will merge into Oneness. Again, where have we heard that before? Remember Dr. A.R. Bordon's "The Link"? On page 55, he says that in one of the Link Plenum Meetings with offworld beings, he heard a spokesman for the Nibiruans saying that their species have almost completed there cycle into oneness, probability with the help from nano-tech. I am quoting Dr. Bordon: Ša.A.Mi.s too have been undergoing the changeover from disconnected bodyminds to a common, or a biomind of the whole biokind. It is reported by members who have attended the conferences that they are near the completion of their cycle to oneness, wherein all knowledge and mind resources are used in service to the common. This, it was said, can only be possible when the diversity of biominds of each member remains an individuality while simultaneously being interconnected to the Ša.A.Mi. all-one by low-powered, low-energetic means that utilizes the planet’s life belt energetics – something akin to what Earth enjoys in the form of Schumann resonance. There is yet much we don’t quite understand about their system of oneness, as there are technologies used to enhance the common biomind that are beyond our level of technology at this time. However, we do now possess a theoretical understanding of how it all works.[23] To me, as I've said before, it's not a desirable way to evolve as a species. I am not subscribing to neither nanotech, nor biotech, or any other tech I am aware of to evolve our species. They are manipulating us into becoming a hive society, where all minds work as one, controlled by an alien race.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 234

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Longevity is one thing, technology another. I agree with that living 70-90 years is too short, and we should be able to live much longer than that. Yes, that can be accomplished with technology, and perhaps to some degree by inhaling monatomic gold, like the gods do, but there are indications that gold can be highly addictive, just like cocaine and narcotic substances. The way to achieve a longer life is to develop our sleeping DNA so we will become multidimensional again, and also live considerably longer. But how long? If we think about it, it really doesn't matter that much. Figure 6: Visualization of Who wants to live for a million years in the same body? With the Machine Kingdom a lifespan like that, things can go terribly wrong. If you have direct access to your memories from what happened a million years ago, on your own timeline, where you created certain events, you are too involved and affected by whatever situations you have gotten caught up in, and often intensify them as you move further in local time. This may even be one of the problems with the Ša.A.M.i. We don't want to be another Anunnaki species, where petty wars and childish vanity are big parts of their lives because the gods are bored. I believe we need to end a lifetime after a certain amount of years, considerably shorter than that of the gods, whom achieved extended life through technology. We need to have time to reflect and sort things out between incarnations, in my opinion, and make new goals in a new unit of time. As we move higher up in frequency, this issue will probably resolve automatically. What about if the gods are not able to evolve the same way we are? Perhaps they were not created to be able to do that because their creator gods created them for their purpose, which was not to have them evolve and ascend like us? So they use machine technology to reach what we can do naturally. They want our basic biology, but can't merge it with their own, because their biological structure is different. They can only evolve up to a certain point. Knowing that there is no way they can reach our potentials, they do what they can with their own genome, but on the other hand, they are created for power and control, so therefore they can't accept that we evolve differently from them. Besides, they feed from the fear they are creating in us and we are their food source. They don't want us to evolve, because when we're out of their frequency fence we are out of reach for them. They manipulated our DNA so that we wouldn't evolve and ascend easily, but our 12 strand DNA was already in our bodies, and they, to their own misfortune, only have 11 strands.[24] This, I believe, is that we have to face; we have a lot of Anunnaki DNA inside of us, but we also have DNA from the earlier, more spiritually uplifted gods, with our junk DNA still inactivated to its full potential. Do we want to become like the Anunnaki, and achieve longevity by taking shortcuts through nano- and biotech, or do we want to use free flowing, fluid energy to reach higher forms of existence? In addition, knowing how it usually works, artificial longevity through bio- and nanotech may be something only available for the Elite (they are already getting older than the average man, if you've noticed, e.g. Bush Sr., David Rockefeller, Henry Kissinger), and the virtual Machine World, the cyborg existence, may be for the masses. Whatever it may be, it gives me the shivers. The question is: what future do we dream? With this I mean both in an awake state and in dream state. We have prophecies, but not everything is predestined; by

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 235

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

deciding our future and dreaming it up, we create it. Like-minded will create a likeminded future. Another big concern from my point of view is how the technology achieved by TTPs # can be used for warfare. What would stop the people who have access to this technology to create super-soldiers? This concern is very real; look at the drones they are using already. It's stone age in comparison, but we can see in what direction things are going. It's therefore, in my subjective opinion, with all the above mentioned, discouraging to see respected researchers and writers like Neil Freer, who have done a great job with exposing alien visitors who have been worshipped as Gods in our past (and still are), and awoken people from the "godspell" we've been under, to promote artificial intelligence like he does on his website[25]. I encourage people to read it to make up their own minds, but I personally think he's on a dangerous path, and I hope people who have now woken up from the godspell also will wake up from the Artificial Intelligence spell. Dr. Bordon and LPG-C have worked on longevity for about a decade, and Bordon replied to a comment on one of my blog entries about Ray Kurzweil with the following statement: We are already becoming immortal – small steps at a time. We started a program ten years ago designed to achieve longevitility and the knowhow to access, affect, and when necessary change the information bandwidth of our RNA-DNA. You can read about this quiet revolution in The Coming Longevitality of the Earth Human Biomind (Lulu Press, lulu.com).” Immortal is one of those words poorly used. Often it’s used to mean long living instead of never dying. Theoretically, a biological entity can be immortal provided certain things are part of the genetic make up of the body of that person. But for us today, we function on chromosomes that contain some 31,000 genes (plus some 3,000 genes in our mitochondria) and we biologically exist on 20 base aminoacids. That’s us today. Question is, what can each of us do (instead of relying on what Kurzweil and the singularitarians propose: let’s use technology to enhance and prolong our lives, such that the people will say we can be immortal. Good press, but that’s about it.) If we use a generation (25 years) as a measure and begin teaching our kids what we started teaching the members of the experimental groups in our study, starting some ten years ago, how do we tell if their lives are being prolongued? Well, you can’t well tell by using linear time. You have to go to other ways. One is the bioelectricity of the body, which is a good measure of the bioelectric age of a person (which is not the same as the time-linear age in years) (or revolutions around the sun). This measure can be given a larger frame of view: longevitality, or the amount of energy we have and keep at various points as bioelectric age by comparison to one’s linear age. So you have a 60 year old woman who has the body of a 42 year old female, or a male who is 71 but has the body of a 54 year old male. The knowhow I mentioned before is the how to get to change your bioelectric age by using a number of ways to intervene on our body/minds to get them to restore or even gain electrostatic energy in our cells, exercise routines that (combined with nutritional regimes fitted to the physical needs of a person) can result in

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 236

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

body mass retention of the good kind (more protein, less body fat, keeping the numbers in the “good” range (triglys, ldl, ldh). All of this is possible. It takes a conscious decision and information. All of the people participating are not rich, quite the contrary, they are middle class and also people working at McDonald’s paycheck to paycheck. The thing that changed is their lifemind (mind time applied to keeping the body optimal), how they handle stress, how they consume health information that translates into what they need to do for themselves, to keep in track of what each of them want to do for their body/mind, their families, etc. My argument with Ray is that relying on technology assist to reach instant longevitality doesn’t necessary give us the time to change the mimes (belief systems) by which we live. That requires at least three generations (or 75 years). However, it is also possible to accelerate the bioelectric transformation of a generation and see in ten years some results that encourages the soul. On the average, 6.5 retroyears in ten years of participation. Let me translate this: this means experimental group participants are gaining an average of 6.5 years in bioelectric terms, so if a man was fifty when he joined and his wife was 47, subtract 6.5 from their linear ages and that will tell you the bioelectric age of the person. This, in my opinion, is a much better way to achieve a longer lifespan; that in conjunction with activating the dormant DNA, which will automatically make us live longer.

11. A Multi-Dimensional Perspective on Nano Technology Time, a we know it, is a local custom; something we have talked about earlier. In reality, on a muti-dimensional level, all time happens simultaneously, and so do our incarnations. We send out a number of soul fragments who incarnate simultaneously in different places in different times per local custom. What happens now and will happen in the near future, if we are still speaking of technology, is nothing spontaneous. In certain terms, certain beings set up things already millions, sometimes billions of years ago to play out at a later time. Therefore, on a Multi-D level, the violence and technology spurts were planned to happen at certain local times (an easy task for beings who can look at things from another perspective than we presently can, trapped in the local time system). So we have the Atlantean time with all its technology and violence, we have the Incas and the Aztecs, and the violence connected with them, we remember Hitler and Nazism, and last, but certainly not the least, we have the U.S. government playing Gods, dramatizing the Atlantean period, which is now being relived again to give us a chance to clear a ten thousands of years old collective karma. Each civilizations, whether they happen now or happened in the past go through their peak time of violence and aggressiveness; although it is all happening at once from a Multi-D perspective. Just as every culture's genesis and flourishing is happening at once as well.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 237

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The Pleiadians asked an interesting question in one of their lectures, related to the above: "Which one of the civilizations will meet at the 'supernova point'?" [26] (The supernova point being the point in 2012, when the wave of enlightenment will hit us; I'm sure being the same wave LPG-C are talking about, which I discussed in an earlier paper). The answer is: all of them will, because time is simultaneous. And timelines will merge by 2012 and are already in the process of doing so. Technology and certain key events that were (and are) meant to happen are hidden on certain frequencies. Just like we hide what we don't want others to find in locked cabinet, bank vaults etc., multidimensional beings in the past (in our term) hid what was not meant to be found right away on different frequency levels, and when certain people (or a percentage of the population) reached that frequency, what was hidden was suddenly found. This is another perspective of "alien technology". Great inventors, like Nikola Tesla, ingenious scientists like Albert Einstein, thinkers like Pythagoras etc., have been said to have had alien invention with their discoveries. This is certainly true, but on much more levels than most can imagine. Many metaphysical sources mention the Anunnaki having encoded our DNA as well, so that at a certain time, certain codes are activated so that we start inventing new technology or whatever they want us to achieve at a specific level of our development. This is what could be called predestiny, if you will, but remember that predestiny only works when consciousness is sleeping. If we wake up to the fact that we have been programmed, and that we live in a free will universe (something the gods have tried to neglect in our case, trying to make us predictable in certain terms), we will see it's easy to step off the road we're traveling on, watch the "lorries roll by", tighten our backpack and walk in the opposite direction, away from the road, and out in the unexplored wilderness. After a while, the sound of the lorries and cars rolling by fade out and disappears. No one can force us to go in any direction than the one we choose. Not when we have decided and put our energies towards it. It may sound too fantastic, but it's really basic, and it is working. Make a wish-list if you want to; put down what you really want for yourself and ask those around you to do the same. Then make this wish-list come true, item by item, by manifesting the thoughts in this reality. Once you do this; without using any effort, just light thoughts; your reality will change. Put your thoughts, emotions, intentions and your certainty behind the fact that this is how your life is going to be from now on, and nothing less than that. However, be realistic and don't make wishes that are too "way out there". I think you get the picture. Be clear and feel gratitude for what you have, and when you make wishes for your present and your future, do so without creating counterintentions telling you why this or that is too hard to accomplish, e.g. "what will my parents say?", "what will happen with my friendship with John?" etc. These objections, or counter-intentions are exactly what keep people from achieving their goals. Your goals are your goals, and you have the perfect right to achieve them; actually, it is your responsibility to do so, because that's what you're here for. We can choose not to, and no "God" or "Devil" will punish you, but you will waste our time. Every day we wake up it's an excellent idea to set the direction for the day. Say to yourself, "this day is going to be a great day where everything is working out to my favor; better than I can imagine". This really sets the tone. Just think the thought,

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 238

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

manifest it and let it go. After a while, by doing this every morning, you will see how your life changes to the better. So why am I bringing all this up while talking about machine technology? Because, like with everything, technology can either enhance life or be used to control and enslave. What we have gone over in this paper is how certain forces want to use it, and are using it. Do we want it? Is it ethical? Moral? If you would choose, is that the future you want to see? Or does the multidimensional future, using the Third Eye and the Heart Chakra in particular, sound like a more exciting journey?

Notes: [1] Barbara Marciniak channeling the Pleiadians, "Moon Musings #57, Track 6, November 4, 2010"; Ashayana Deane (2002), "Voyagers I: The Sleeping Abductees, 2nd Edition". [2] Marciniak/Pleiadians, "Moon Musings #57, Track 7, November 4, 2010". [3] See Wes Penre (2011), "Metaphysics Paper #2: The Flow of Energy in Daily Life, 2 - Psychic Vampirism", http://wespenre.com/flow-of-energy-in-daily-life.htm . [4] The Guardian Alliance are communicating with Ashayana Deane through data streaming, which is digitally encoded coherent signals per definition (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_stream), meaning the receiver is getting packages of information (Deane compares it with computer "zip files") which h/she then decodes and puts down in written form. [5] Time Magazine, Feb. 10, 2011: "2045: The Year Man Becomes Immortal", http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2011/03/06/2045-the-year-man-becomes-immortal/ [6] ibid. op. cit. [7] ibid. op. cit. [8] ibid. op. cit. [9] ibid. [10] ibid. op. cit. [11] ibid. op. cit. [12] http://www.smeggys.co.uk/viewtopic.php?f=47&t=16241&p=316853 [13] http://futurepredictions.com/2011/06/19/future-predictions-new-artificial-life-formcreated-first-synthetic-cell-cynthia-created-by-emailing-genetic-code-replicatesbillions-of-times-in-lab/ [14] When I refer to the Pleiadians in the future, I am talking about the group channeled by Barbara Marciniak. If another Pleiadian group is discussed, it will be clearly noted. [15] The Pleiadians, September 19, 2010 session, "Exuberance", CD 1, Track 2. [16] The Pleiadians, June 7, 2010 session, "Moon Musings #56", Track 15.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 239

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________ [17] http://itunes.apple.com/us/app/smurfs-village/id399648212?mt=8 [18] http://www.maclife.com/article/news/ 8yearold_girl_racks_1400_bill_buying_smurfberries_smurfs_village [19] Pleiadians, January 8, 2011 session, "Into the Rapids", CD 2, Track 11. [20] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/New_Atlantis [21] Manly P. Hall (1944, 1972), "The Secret Destiny of America". [22] Nigel Kerner: "2012--And Man Shall Walk as Machine?", http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2011/03/24/2012-and-man-shall-walk-as-machine/ [23] A.R. Bordon (2007): "The Link", p.42, op. cit. [24] Ashayana Deane (2002): "Voyagers I + II" [25] http://www.neilfreer.com/SRPAGE10.html [26] Pleiadians: "Through the Eye of the Needle", CD 2, Track 11-12 (lecture held on October 2, 2010).

Acronyms (in alphabetical order) (words followed by a pound sign #): TTP = Technological Transfer Program. Exchange program between human governments and extraterrestrials. They give us technology in exchange for something else--normally access to DNA bases, being allowed access to human DNA banks, allowed to abduct certain amount of people, or for using space for middle-landings on Earth.

For Additional Research:



Time Magazine: "Can Machines Think?", http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,984304,00.html



Time Magacine: "Gadgets Then and Now", http://www.time.com/time/specials/packages/article/ 0,28804,2033483_2033504_2033435,00.html



New Energy and Fuel: "Synthetic Life Begins", http://newenergyandfuel.com/http:/newenergyandfuel/com/2010/05/25/synthetic-life-begins/



Inorganic Chemical Cells - Creating ‘Life’ Without Carbon Bonds, http://www.sciencedebate.com/science-blog/inorganic-chemical-cells-creating-life-withoutcarbon-bonds

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 240

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(Soulution Section) Soulution Paper #1: Breaking the Spell by Wes Penre, Thursday, July 14, 2011 @ 5:55 AM

1. Introduction to the Frequency Fence and the 3rd Density Quarantine I have touched this subject in passing earlier in these papers, and many other researchers have gone into it in detail as well. Yet, there are others who guarantee you that there is no such fence, but to me it is obvious; it's just a matter of definitions, and Frequency Fence and/or Quarantine are the ones closest in definitions. To really grasp the vastness of all this, it's mandatory to have a decent grasp of Zecharia Sitchin's work, "The Earth Chronicles". I have written a super-condensed version of them in my "Anunnaki Papers", and if you're unfamiliar, or just slightly familiar with Sitchin, I would suggest you read those papers first. The series of Papers, which I have called "First Level of Learning" to a large degree discuss what could be defined as "The Anunnaki Problem". According to the stories told in the Sumerian tablets, the Anunnaki did not pass themselves off as Gods at first and were not treated as such, either. That came later, and when it happened, some of the Anunnaki took advantage of this and pretended they were God Almighty. Two such people were Nammur, the Enlil as YHVH, and Marduk as himself, and then behind the scenes as any of the Gods of the major religions, working in the background. Of course, the Anunnaki are not Gods. If we really want to use the word "god", it could be as in "creator gods", but with a small "g". They were miners and geneticists, and they did tamper with our DNA big time. The story goes that the Anunnaki took an already existing, primitive humanoid race here on Earth (homo erectus) and mixed their own DNA with them to create a labor (slave) race, intelligent enough to understand and follow orders. Thus homo sapiens sapiens were born (the thinking human). The key word here is "primitive". This is what Sitchin says homo erectus were, and this is apparently what the cuneiform say. And what does Marduk have to say about it? Remember how he changed history? This is most possibly one of the changes he made. The Sumerian tablets were written 5-6,000 years ago, much of it based on hearsay. Those who wrote down the history knew nothing about it, except what they'd been told by the gods. They knew their present situation and perhaps what happened at large two-three generations back, as it was passed down verbally. The rest was most probably changed, just like A.R. Bordon indicates in "The Link", to the

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 241

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Anunnaki's advantage, so we got a wrong picture of the gods. Bordon even said to me at one time, "Whoever wrote the Enuma Elish was taking dictation--at least in the granite rock tablet"[1]. This was a response to my question whether the Ša.A.M.i.* from Nibiru agree with Sitchin or not regarding their own history on Earth. Apparently, they do. And they probably did take dictation, but was the dictation correct? I have reasons to believe that they had been on Earth much longer than 450,000-500,000 years. Some sources, like The Guardian Alliance insist they've been here for at least 850,000 years, which is almost twice as long. The Pleiadians as well, in some of their lectures, give hints that the "gods" have been here at least half a million years. But it was in the Anunnaki's interest to waylay and deceive mankind into believing in a partly false history. What resonates with me, and always has, even before I read any information on it, is that we were already evolved beings before the Anunnaki came down here and started genetically altering us. There are quite a few sources who agree with this statement; both metaphysical (via channeling), and sensory data streaming[2]*. Earth is an Experiment, and what we today call homo erectus was a part of that experiment. These, our forefathers, were seeded by the earlier creator gods, like the Vegans, Lyrans, and their cousins, the Pleiadians, in conjunction with reptilians, insectoids and others. We see homo erectus as primitive, because they supposedly didn't live in cities and didn't have technology. However, you who have read one of my previous papers, Genesis Paper #1: Human Origins and The Living Library, know that they were in charge over a highly evolved civilization and they carried 12 strand DNA, fully activated.

Figure 1: Anunnaki

The Pleiadians are very outspoken about this and consistently tell us that we were evolved beings before the Anunnaki came and we had the ability to move through realities and manipulate matter. Furthermore, they say that many of these abilities were scattered purposely by them. They tell us that all realities have their guardians, and stewardship changes over time. Guardians are not always uplifting and benevolent beings. The guardians who manipulated out genes some 300,000 years ago were a warrior race and kept everybody out who would set us free [3]. The Anunnaki were not alone on the planet even when they were in charge. There were other races here at the same time. Some were working together with the Anunnaki, others were not. The Anunnaki at some point made an agreement and an alliance with the Dracos, a reptilian warrior race who are hybrids of a reptilian race, the Drakon, from another galaxy, and humans in an earlier genetic mix. They often were seen working together with the humanoid Anunnaki [4]. This is not mentioned in the Sumerian stone tablets. When I talk to Dr. Bordon about DNA, and mention to him that homo erectus had 12 strand DNA, which was split and deactivated downgrading them to 2 strands, he firmly disagrees and says that this is impossible. And even if it was possible, it would "grow back" within the next 10 generations or so. Then he refers me to the scientific evidence about DNA that is available today on the Internet. He also adds that we have thousands of strands in our DNA already now, so 12 strand doesn't make any

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 242

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

sense. This may be true or not, but if we have thousands of strands already, why are we calling our DNA today 2 strands, or double helix? However, he fully agrees that there is no such thing as "junk DNA".

Figure 2: Reptilian hybrid

intuition in this.

Dr. Bordon is frustrated that people can't get their heads around what RNA/DNA is (even in academia and among highly educated researchers), so I told him this is because almost all information we read on this subject is highly scientific and close to impossible to understand, unless we want to spend days after days with dictionaries, getting caught up in endless word chains. So instead I suggested that he writes a paper on DNA which is both educative and simple to read for the average person, because this would be the only way for people to truly understand it. He said it is a great idea, but as I am writing this, he has still not written it despite a reminder. If he does, and when he is finished, I will post it as a separate paper, word for word. His viewpoint on this is that even though the Anunnaki did use us as slave labor and made soldiers out of us to fight their wars, they also sped up our evolution with millions of years by adding their own DNA to our existing one. This is where I disagree. According to almost all research I've made, this is not correct, and I include my

We have to understand that science today on Earth, even when it comes from the most brilliant scientists, doesn't know everything. DNA is not only physical; it expands and branches out all through the Multiverse. That's how we have access to All There Is on a subquantum level. You are multi-dimensional because of your DNA. If 10 of these strands are made dormant, what would happen? We would become very limited to what we are able to experience, just like we are today.

1.1 Ungluing the Radio Knob--Freedom of Frequency When I talk about a Frequency Fence around our planet, or a Quarantine, there is a physical electronic fence and there is a limitation in our DNA, a limitation which, together with the electronic fence around our planet, keep us trapped in a frequency prison. What happens when someone changes your DNA from 12 helix to 2 helix is that you are almost totally cut off from the Multiverse. You forget who you are, where you come from, and who are your true creator gods. When left with a double helix, everything, more or less, is unplugged from our cosmic, multi-dimensional connection, and left is only what is needed for basic survival. We are locked into limited, controllable frequencies; the ones necessary for us to be able to function as a slave race for the gods. The physical frequency fence (which according to David

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 243

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Icke is controlled from the Moon by the Dracos [and I would say the Ša.A.M.i. as well. Icke looks at these two races as one, which is incorrect]) makes it very hard for the frequencies of light (information) to penetrate. There were times when light frequencies could penetrate after the fact we'd been unplugged, but there was no one there able to receive them. The light-encoded filaments were no longer organized, so the cosmic rays had nothing to plug into and hold onto (Marciniak: "Bringers of the Dawn", p.17). When in ignorance, all you don't know becomes a mystery and somewhat scary. It's easy to create fear in such beings, who previously were quite fearless. The Anunnaki, and other service-to-self, negatively oriented beings, feed off fear. Again, I am not saying all Anunnaki are/were bad, but it is definitely a cultural thing. These beings fed off fear like food; that's beyond any doubt; the evidence is everywhere. They, and other dominant alien races, have created terror and fear on this planet Figure 3: Earth in chains ever since the Anunnaki tampered with the DNA of our ancient ancestors, all the way up to this day. Certain people are more targeted than others by these beings; the more anxiety and fear you feel inside, the more "interesting" you become to these beings. Those people who have learned to conquer fear are no longer a target in the same way, because they are no longer a food source. The good news is that we can still reactivate our 12-strand DNA by educating ourselves like we do now, and use what we learn. In addition, we have the alignment with the Galactic Center and the changes in the Sun, where more gamma rays than normal, rays that carry information, reach us here on Earth. Still, it doesn't matter how much light is coming through if there is no one here to receive it. If we are not awake and aware and start communicating with our environment (including the Sun as a part of our Higher Self), this information will just go wasted. However, if we do our job, these are very enlightening times, and as we grow as a whole unit of body/mind/soul, our DNA will be reactivated, little by little. Our big chance is now, within the nano-second, between 1987-2012. Although 3rd Density is a frequency prison, created some 300,000 years ago by Anunnaki geneticists, it is still an experiment, and many alien species are curious to see how we can find our way back to cosmic consciousness. Some of them are impressed by the hard work many of us do to help ourselves and others. The Frequency Fence, as we've mentioned earlier, works like a radio station; you turn the knob to a certain frequency range and you will hear what is broadcast on that channel. However, unless you turn the knob again in one direction or the other, you

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 244

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

will only hear what's broadcast on the radio station you just tuned into. This is how 3rd Density on Earth works. The knob is stuck on the frequency range we are currently operating within and we have to work ourselves up the frequencies and be able to turn the knob at will to experience the whole Multiverse. We do this by reactivating all our "junk DNA" (the 12 helices).

Figure 4: Turning the knob on the radio we receive another radio station

Until then, humanity is trapped here. Pretend, in our current state, that we went to other planets; we would only experience them from the frequency range we vibrate on. This means that we may land on a planet and say it's barren with no intelligent life forms, when in fact that's not true. We just can't perceive the intelligent beings living there, because they vibrate on a higher frequency. Another obstacle is time, which we have discussed either. In which "time" does the astronaut land on a certain planet? Before it was life-bearing, when it is life-bearing, of after? Time is indeed a local custom. We are controlled by fear and terror so that those who are in control can make totally sure we are not able to unglue the dial again, and still, despite of their efforts, they are no longer successful. People are waking up, seeing through the Veil of Forgetfulness that the RA Material is talking about. If you look around, you see that the controllers are getting more and more desperate. They are moving too quickly! In their desperation, they are now trying to implement all new restrictions at once and people are seeing through it, and in some professions, like nursing, the employees are coming together and refuse to follow the new rules of functional insanity.

2. DNA Code Activation

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 245

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The original planners knew what they were doing. They would not give up on humanity this easily and let the Anunnaki get away with their changing the DNA structure in humanity, which refused us the ability to connect in full with the Multiverse[4]. The Anunnaki were brilliant multi-dimensional geneticists, but they didn't know everything about DNA. The original creator gods implanted an activation code into our DNA, which would be activated at a certain time in the future when humanity hopefully are developed and evolved enough to be able to handle this activation, which is embedded in our so-called "junk DNA". This time is now. Some of us will handle this transition with excitement and go through it just fine, but others, who are not prepared, will have a harder time. The main thing that is happening is that we start remembering who we are and the timelines of our different incarnations will merge. In other words, in the beginning we will get flashbacks of earlier and future lifetimes, and these flashbacks will feel very real. They will be a few in the beginning but increase in numbers. People who don't understand what this is and meet this new challenge with fear and rejection may even go insane, similar to a schizophrenic person. We may be able to visualize this by first understanding that this is the End Times as prophesized, where time on this planet is imploding and linear time is no longer sufficient to carry the human race further. So, similar to a black hole, time is merging and retracting. By experiencing this, when at the same time it is triggering our DNA code, we regain our multi-dimensional abilities and will ascend. When this happens (and it has already started to happen in many people), go with the flow, look at the new information with hope and excitement and understand what it is you are experiencing, and you will be more than fine; the transition will be fairly easy. During this transition, however, you may or may not experience periods of unease, or some parts of your body will start acting strange, sometimes resulting in pain. However, if you go to the doctor, they may not find the cause to the problem and will act quite confused. This is normal and usually nothing to worry about as these symptoms will disappear with time. On a larger scale, there will be planetary changes as well as changes in the Sun. We have discussed these previously, but it is not up to us to solve these seemingly unsolvable problems, only to understand them. Even problems are energy, no matter how condensed this energy is. The definition of a problem is intention versus counter-intention, which creates stuck energy, as two or more forces clashing with each other and get stuck. If we see the problem as it is and how it was created, the problem disappears in our own minds and no longer stays as a part of us, unless we manifest it again, wittingly or unwittingly[5]. This is one of the main reasons I want to present a problem as close to how it is manifested from both sides, so that the reader can recognize it and diffuse the stuck energy. Not only will you be able to step out of the problem, but also help the rest of the planet to heal, because others will be affected by your own recognitions. There are people today in the New Age and UFO movements who think we should not expose negativity, because it makes this negativity stronger. I understand where they come from, but I disagree. We need to present the problem as is for it to be understood and discharged. Then, and only then, can we move on past it. Our task, after we understand what is going on, is to ride on the wave of this inner knowledge and understanding, transmit the increased light within us into our local

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 246

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

universe (our environment and everything in it) and transform it into unconditional love. This will raise the vibration of our environment and it will spread like ripples on the water when we throw stones into a lake. What one person does is making a huge different. Dr. Bordon and LPG-C are trying to, via memes (belief systems), to influence people from all walks in life to be inspired enough to come together, creating the effects of the so-called "3% rule", or the "100th Monkey Syndrome". The theory is that if 3% of the world population are united in a certain way of thinking, the rest will follow due to that we all are ONE and of the same multiversal energy. I want to make use of the 3% rule as well, but maybe not using the same memes as LPG-C are attempting to create. Important here is that we want to evolve by ourselves and don't need any descending gods to show us how to do it, or to protect us. We have the tools we need, and we don't need their technology either. We evolve by using our own energy, by activating our DNA code and by influencing others in our environment by being examples, and by living what we learn. This is how we expand the mass consciousness.

Figure 5: The Andromeda Galaxy, ~2.2 million light-years away

The Pleiadians are talking about Earth having a sister planet in another galaxy[9]. They don't mention which galaxy that might be, but if we go to Ashayana's Voyagers II book, we see that this sister planet is located in a solar system in the Andromeda Galaxy, approximately 2.2 million light-years from our own Milky Way Galaxy. Much because of Invader Forces like the Sirian Ša.A.M.i. and the Anunnaki, the original

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 247

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

creator gods, who seeded humanity to begin with (called the Breneau Order by the Guardians) had to hide certain stargates called the Halls of Amenti, which lead to planet Tara, the original Earth from which our present planet stems. How this is related on a higher metaphysical level will be a subject for another paper, but for our purpose, these stargates, the Halls of Amenti, which once upon a time were placed in the core of the Earth, have been moved several times and were once located in the core of a sister planet to Earth in the Andromeda Galaxy. The Halls of Amenti for Earth were created 25 million years ago to allow for teleportation ascension from Earth to Tara[10] when opened. Just like the Pleiadians and the 6th Density Ra Collective, the Guardians tell us that we humans need to work on the reactivation of our original 12-strand DNA to be able to go through the Halls of Amenti and be "harvested" to the 4th Density Tara, which is our original home, after what the Guardians call "The Fall", where Tara descended into 3D. The Harvest will not happen all at once, but gradually, and start in 2012 [11]. However, time is limited, as the stargate will close again around 2017. Those who haven't been able to activate their DNA code by then will continue evolving on another 3D planet (just like the Ra Collective says), while those who ascend will pass through the stargates and enter a higher density Earth (Tara). Although the Halls of Amenti stargates are Density 2, Tara exists in a parallel universe called HU-2, which consists of Dimensions 4-5-6. The Guardians have their own way of explaining the differences between densities and dimensions, but for now, all we need to know is that from our perspective, and as far as these papers of the "First Level of Learning" go, the ascension will be to a 4th Density planet. Some readers of the Ra Material don't like the idea of a Harvest and believe it to be a selfish and negative thing, because you leave those behind who are not ready to ascend. I used to think the same way after had read the WingMakers Material. Mahu Nahi, who runs the site, as well as LPG-C, are talking about a collective ascension, a no-one-left-behind attitude. However, the more I research this I come to the realization that this is not a selfish or unselfish thing, it's a graduation. If you're in school and miss too many classes or don't do your homework, resulting in that you can't graduate, you will need to take the classes again. It's the same thing with ascension; it has to do with how well we are able to handle energy. If we are not handling energy well enough to go to the next level, we need to go back and do it all over again. Here's the Guardian Alliance directly: Ascension is not some lofty spiritual concept design by the minds of man, it is a literal, tangible scientific process of the evolution of consciousness and biology within the laws of energy mechanics that apply to a multidimensional reality system. You can go about your human lives, with your consciousness confined to the limitations presently imposed by your physical body, or you can learn the mechanics by which those limitations can be released, and begin to experience the reality of freedom that is the comprehension of yourself-assoul. Whether or not you view ascension and multidimensional evolution as a reality while you are alive on Earth, you will be directly-faced with that reality once your consciousness has passed out of physical life and into the multidimensional framework.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 248

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

At the death of your physical body you will discover that your consciousness lives on and your evolution continues. All souls will eventually evolve and ascend through the 15-dimensional scale, to re-emerge as sentient identity within the realms of pure consciousness beyond the dimensional systems... ...Immortality, freedom from death, disease and pain are the natural birthrights of your species. (Voyagers II – Page 106) This is a personal responsibility, and although Guardians from HU-2 (Harmonic Universe-2) can assist in this process, the ultimate success of DNA building lies in the hands of the embodied consciousness who directs this process by the way in which personal energy is used and applied. (Voyagers II – Page 108) The process of Ascension is simply going "up", going up the dimensional scale by raising the particle pulsation rhythm of your body. It's a holy concept because that is what the concept of Spiritual Evolution really is about. As you do this you pull in more At-one-ment with your God/Source. So Ascension is a religious concept and a scientific concept all at once. [12] It's not a punishment not to ascend and be part of the Harvest. However, a window of opportunity has opened between 1987-2012, and if we don't take advantage of this now it will be so much harder later on, until a new certain alignment with the Galactic Center is taking place. In the end we are all ascending back to Source, but due to the experiences we choose to have, it will take longer for some and go faster for others. Still, those who take longer and need to go through another cycle in 3rd Density are highly contributing to the overall experience of consciousness in the Multiverse and are enriching the understanding of self, which is the goal of Source, and therefore it is our goal as well. This is done through individual experiences, no matter what these experiences are. Experiences and learning processes are needed in all densities and dimensions, and no one is better than the other just because he or she moves up to another density. I hope the reader can see the point here. This is how Multiverse physics works and everybody is contributing. Our DNA is being charged up! Everything that goes with it that I've learned through my research and I held as true is happening! I can't deny it, and even if the whole world told me I was wrong I know what is happening inside and what abilities I am gaining. The Pleiadians say that "new helices or strands are being formed as the lightencoded filaments are beginning to bundle themselves together" (Marciniak [1992]: "Bringers of the Dawn", p.29 op. cit.), and I can feel it happening and see it happen in others. We are on our way to create a new world and a new reality. I hope as many as possible are following on this journey.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 249

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

3. The Quarantined Earth and the Misuse of Energy So what is the difference between Quarantine and Frequency Fence? I have sometimes used these terms interchangeably, but they are two different things. The difference is that the fence, which can be compared to a radio station, was setup by the Anunnaki to keep us trapped within a certain frequency band, while the Quarantine was setup by other ETs, often in Near Earth Space, in an effort to protect the Living Library. It had to do with the misuse of energy, like what happened during the Atlantis Period, when nuclear power was used extremely irresponsibly by gods and humans, and it blew up landmasses more than once (Pleiadian Lecture, June 12, 2010: "The Inner Net", CD 3, Track 12). Although there was an attempt by earlier creator gods to stop the destruction of misuse of nuclear power during Atlantis, the intervention only made things worse and a nuclear war broke out (Ashayana Deane (2002): "Voyagers II"). Finally, the original creator gods and other Guardians and Protectors of the Living Library quarantined Earth. The Invaders (Anunnaki and others) could leave, because it was not their planet, in terms of how the previous creator gods looked at it, but humans, who had gone along with the ride and used nuclear bombs as well, has to prove themselves "worthy" to be part of the galactic community before the Quarantine is lifted. It's up to us to prove that we are not using nuclear and negative energy for military purposes but under clear restrictions. There are those ETs out there who don't look kindly on those who destroy our planet. Today, we are on our way to repeat the stupid mistakes we did during Atlantis, starting with the atom bombs over Hiroshima and Nagasaki, which opened up wormholes in many places on Earth, letting uninvited visitors in. Earth advertised its coordinates all over the Multiverse and ripped holes in space where there weren't any before. Not only did we do it twice; we have been blowing off nuclear bombs in the ocean and in the deserts around the world frequently since WW II. UFOs have been seen during all such events, circling around the explosion areas. The beings watching us are less than pleased, to put it mildly. They did not interfere at those times, although I've heard it was a borderline intervention. Now, when we are trying out missiles in space, they do interact. ETs say, "here, but no further!" There are lot of witnesses, and I've also seen article in mainstream media, where UFOs have intervened when we've tried to use weapons in space. Here is Professor Robert Jacobs of the U.S. Air Force: So this thing [UFO] fires a beam of light at the warhead, hits it and then it moves to the other side and fires another beam of light. And the warhead tumbles out of space. What message would I interpret from that? [The UFOs were telling us] don't mess with nuclear warheads….Major Mannsman said, "You are never to speak of this again." After an article [about the incident years later], I would get phone calls all night long. People would call and start screaming at me. One night somebody blew up my mailbox.[13] Reports like the above clearly shows where ETs stand on this issue.[14] Yes, as intelligent species who have developed on this planet as a part of the Living Library we are eventually meant to be the Guardians of it, not the destroyers. In attempts to claim ownership of Earth, in arrogance and stupidity, we use nuclear warheads to show our power. I'll tell you a no-secret; no one is impressed. And believe it or not,

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 250

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

but animals (oh, so smart), who are more Multi-D than we are, often migrate out of this reality to one that is safer and they can survive better (Pleiadian Lecture, June 12, 2010: "The Inner Net", CD 3, Track 12). And extinct animal species, whom we in our madness have made extinct, or almost extinct, are not so. Nothing "disappears", it just changes location in time and space. So it's not so strange to imagine that some versions or Earth have a Quarantine or Frequency control around them, while other versions of Earth, that operate on higher value and consciousness, don't. There are many futures existing at once. They are not necessarily waiting for us to create them; they already exist. It's up to us which future Earth we want to experience and live on. Do we want to live on a planet where we have to duck for the warheads and where sneaky power-hungry ETs and their human cohorts want to make machines out of us, or do we want to live on an Earth where there is harmony and peace and where we live per the Universal Law of One, where the inhabitants live by these values in unconditional love? The decision for most people, of course, is not hard when I put it like this. However, the problem is to get people to the point where they read this paper (or other information of a similar context) are convinced that these negative things will happen if we don't change. Those who think that things will sort themselves out and everything bad will go away by themselves and just read "spiritual stuff" or "conspiracy theories" on the weekend for fun or for the thrill of it, are going to end up in the nightmare I am here describing. Not only do we need to educate ourselves, but more importantly, we need to live and apply what we learn! I can't emphasize this enough. The futures that are already in existence are drawn to you, or you to them, as you start imagining them and create them inside. By raising your frequency and reactivating your DNA you start vibrating accordingly to the future you desire. There are multiple Earths; more than we can imagine, and they are all there as probable futures. It's like being a child, when your parent opens a candy box with lots of different candy. "Pick one". This is why it is so important to be very, very clear in our thoughts and in our desires. Our thoughts and emotions are the two most powerful tools we have as human beings, and we need to use them wisely, for we get the reality we dream up; always, no exception! We can't blame anybody else for the reality we're in now, or the reality we choose in the future. Be clear! It's extremely important. If you feel you aren't, start working on it now. Sloppy language and sloppy thoughts will create sloppy reality. Your body is your best friend because it's your tool to ascension, but it is quite literal. It follows your directions in thought and speech. If you keep on saying, "it's a pain in the neck", your body is going to respond by giving you a literal pain in the neck. On the contrary, if you tell your body it is beautiful and a perfect vehicle, it's going to respond accordingly.

4. Subliminal Messages in Films and on Music CDs, and the Effects of Electronics

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 251

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Most of us have probably at one time or another wondered about how everything could turn so fast from horseback riding, wagons and trains being run on coal, to our modern society with high tech. Seen from the perspective of human evolution, it's almost like a blink of an eye. Many wonder, but few know... In fact, our modern technological society was not entirely developed by us humans. Most of this technology came from aliens via TTP#. We gave them what they needed and we got what we needed. And much of this technology was used within the military for warfare, for business and trade, and for direct control of humankind. Today, after 9/11 and other so-called "terrorist attacks", governments are developing the perfect surveillance system to watch all citizens 24/7. Then, people in the New Age Movement or those who are waking up spiritually may say that there are now many good movies and TV series revealing to the people what is going on. However, when we watch a show on spirituality, subliminally we are hit with a frequency which keeps us from original thinking. Often, the subliminal tells us to remain in a "survival, go-to-work, be silent and fearful" society. The day after we've watched the show, we still go to work as usual, perhaps even with a stronger feeling that we have to. Subliminal technology was to a large degree developed by ETs. In 1992, the Pleiadians had the following to say about subliminals: The use of subliminals to upset human consciousness has become a worldwide program. If you think about the houses that have two, three, and four televisions in them, you must agree that this has been a very successful marketing program. Some people who know about the subliminals on television feel that they are immune to them. However, the effects of television are so permeating that no matter how clear you say you are going to be, you cannot counterbalance what the technology is presently doing to your vibrational frequency. We have said that there are entities who feed off your emotional bodies. Think about what a clever tool television is for them. All over the world, billions of humans are emitting emotional juices into the atmosphere based upon what they are watching on the tube. They don't have to have too many wars anymore to get you all riled up--they can simply make movies! (Marciniak [1992]: "Bringers of the Dawn" p.91, op cit.). And then we have the music industry, of course, with subliminal messages on the records and CDs, called "backward masking"[15]. It's much more common than people think. Then we have the change of the Standard A tuning (A=440Hz) from 444Hz, which is much more harmonious and in line with cosmic frequency[16]. The change was apparently introduced by the Rockefeller Foundation when exploiting military music. In spite of many conductors and musicians protests, the change was also implemented on classical music and eventually rock music. The real introduction to low frequency rock music was made by the British rock group, Black Sabbath in 1969. The official story goes that the guitar player, Tony Iommi, had lost some of his fingertips in an accident, so it hurt to play on stings that were tuned in standard tuning. He resolved this by tuning down his guitar to a low Db (D-flat), which created the characteristic Black Sabbath sound. Many say they

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 252

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

were the forerunner for other heavy metal and death metal groups, who still tune down their instruments to a lower tuning. This, of course, creates certain effects in the listener. If you also add distortion to the guitar sound (Black Sabbath even used a distortion box on the bass guitar sometimes, like in the song N.I.B., something unheard of before), you can create very unwanted emotions in the listener (which of course was the purpose). It doesn't help that you are singing about Lucifer and Satan as well. Their defenders say that they were Christians and sang against Satan and warned us from him, but this is just a clever psy op. All of the Black Sabbath members were into the Black Arts (admitted by Geezer Butler in a YouTube video). The fact that they mention Satan, Lucifer, and demonic possession in the lyrics is enough to trigger the subconscious mind, which does not distinguish between if the message is positive or negative. However, with the music that comes to it, the mind does interpret it as negative. The image of the rock group does the rest; long hair, rebellious and "dangerous". If you don't believe the music industry is totally corrupt and controlled, I strongly advise you to read "Inside The LC: The Strange but Mostly True Story of Laurel Canyon and the Birth of the Hippie Generation" by David McGowan[17]. It's probably the most detailed story of rock music with the most amount of truth that is out there. It's impossible to read the series of article and say it didn't happen and that it's not happening today. Everybody should open their minds to this and read it. If you are unprepared, it's quite shocking. The following may not make me very popular in some camps, but something that is very destructive is the mega rock concerts. If we understand that the ETs who are controlling us from other dimensions are feeding off our emotions, what then is a rock concert? It's an orgasm of emotions! The musicians are the first to receive all the excitement from the pumped up audience, who transmits both raw energy and a lot of sexual energy at the same time. The musicians then work as antennas for the other-dimensional beings, who suck up the emotions and feed off them. More power to them! That's one big reason why Band Aids, Farm Aids and whatnot are arranged, with huge arenas and marathon music playing almost around the clock. Not to mention the rave festivals where people are taking ecstasy and dance all night. Woodstock in the 1960s was a forerunner and a huge experiment in human behavior on a mass scale under the influence of drugs. The authorities were passing out drugs to the audience, who was stunned by this but of course welcomed it. To be able to tune out as much as possible from the frequencies which are there to trap us and keep us trapped we need to unplug the Television, be very careful what music we listen to (yes, I know that's the hard part). Only listen to uplifting music which takes you to higher realms of existence. Some say they feel "high" when they listen to Death Metal, but it's certainly not the same "high" as listening to Mozart of Beethoven. The "high" the Death Metal fan is feeling is adrenaline flowing through their body, seemingly uplifting them, when in fact it does the opposite, without the listener being aware of it. How much criminality and drug abuse can be traced back to the music industry and the products they are releasing? The percentage is much higher than most of us can even imagine! How about cell phones and computers? These days almost all people (at least in first world countries) use them all the time. Many of us are using electronics during the day more than we are off them. Our job situation requires it, and then we continue when we get home, and the same thing goes for cell phones.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 253

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Electronics jam our frequencies; that should be obvious. There are incompatibilities between our own frequencies and those which are emitted by electronic devices. Most of the time this is done intentionally, but even when it's not, it still doesn't "vibrate with us". This can be extremely damaging for our nervous system and stop us from effectively evolving as body/mind/spirit. We need our bodies and our minds to ascend to higher frequency bands, because our bodies are carrying much of our DNA, which we need to evolve. Electronics tamper with this structure and is therefore very destructive on our system, not to mention that it can produce cancer and other unwanted effects on the body and mind. I am using electronics myself; both when I'm writing my papers (I'm using a computer right now), and at work some of the time (mostly for email purposes). However, I rarely use my cell phone and I never ever watch TV (I stopped 5 years ago and I'm a happy camper). My plan is to use the computer less and less once I'm done with my writings and return more and more to nature. I am working on paying off all my debts (and I mean all) and become self sufficient. We haven't seen the bottom of the rabbit hole yet, but I'm going to be prepared together with my family. The less dependent on the old system of "functional insanity", the better. I am a free spirit and I can do whatever I want. I can dream, and I'm good at it. As an artist I can dream up whole realities, and I know what I want, and what I dream I will get. There will be more to follow (ripple effect again) just like I will follow those who went before me. Those who tune in will choose a similar future reality in a future version of Earth. The old world is declining rapidly and chaos and disasters are coming upon people faster and faster and more drastically than ever. This is normally what happens just before a transition. Those who want to hang on to the old (like the captain who is determined to sink together with the ship) will perish or be caught up in a very disturbing reality, while those who choose not to be part of it will create a new existence on a higher level. However, to be able to do the latter, we need to master two of our worst enemies to ascension; fear and anxiety! Not until we have learned to conquer these emotions can we ascend to something we like better.

5. How to Conquer Fear and Anxiety It all began with the nano-second in 1987, or around that time. More and more people started waking up, realizing that something was very wrong with their lives. Someone was controlling it! The Global Elite and those who manipulate them saw this and knew that it was coming and were prepared. A new concept was implemented into the work environment; it was called "multi-tasking". A person who previously was use to doing more or less one thing at the time at work now had to learn how to do several things at once. To a certain degree, it's nothing wrong with this, and if done in the right way, it can even be therapeutic in the sense that we become more multi-dimensional. However, when it's done with the intention to overwhelm the person, it has the opposite effect; it stresses us out and keeps us more attached to linear time as we have to complete several tasks within certain time limits. There "is no time" to do anything else. Who, in that situation, "has time" to be multidimensional?

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 254

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Here is a practice in learning how things are planned in different layers by those in charge: Level 1 (lower level planning): As times go bad and the economy crashes (planned event), the industry does not want to employ more people. Instead they lay off people and let the ones who are left do the job of those they got rid of. So now we have an almost impossible situation, where people feel enslaved and taken advantage of. Often, they don't get a raise either, which is also blamed on the bad financial situation. People who have some insights think the reason for the unemployment rates and not enough people employed to do the job is because the Global Elite intentionally crashed the economy. Level 2 (lower level planning): The unemployed have enough problems trying to make ends meet while the few who do the job of the many have to multitask until they are absolutely exhausted, often working long hours without pay. Employees are frustrated and don't understand why the Management is making totally irrational decisions which do not enhance the workers or the Company, but rather destroy both. No one says anything, because they are programmed to think, "oh well, at least I have a job!" People with some extra insights may think that they have us multitask so we can't see what the Global Elite are doing behind the scenes; no one has time or energy to get involved and stop them. Level 3 (higher level planning): The solar system is aligning with the Galactic Center and the Sun and the Galaxy are sending loads of information to us to upgrade our RNA-DNA, but for that to happen there has to be someone here on our end who receives this information. If people are too caught up and involved in the functional insanity around them, there are fewer people who are receptive to the encoded information carried on the gamma rays. More people "miss the boat" and don't get upgraded. Some people with higher awareness can see this. Level 4 (higher level planning): Mind you, Levels 1-4 are happening simultaneously to have the optimal effect on us lulus (humans). Companies run themselves to the ground and the Media are blaming it on the bad economy. That has nothing to do with it. The bad economy was planned to set Levels 1-4 in motion. We hear on the news that old, established Companies now are bankrupt and have to merge with other Companies, or Businesses who still are standing on their feet are merging anyway "just in case" things get worse, and after all, they have to keep their position on the market. On the highest level, no one cares which Company goes out of business and who is not. The Corporations that count are all owned by the same people on the very top. Smaller businesses, owned by honest, decent people, stand no chance on the market anymore and disappear in endless streams of bankruptcies and go out of business. The end result is a global structure which is a preparation for the future to come. The Smart Cities are already in place and the real owners, who normally don't travel in limousines but in spacecraft, can come and inspect the result. The Reptilians and the Dracos have done the groundwork here on Earth, and their masters, the Ša.A.M.i., can come back and inspect their real estate and give their approval. Can you see how this is all connected and what seems to be separate events are not so? It doesn't matter which insights a person may have; whether it's on a Level 1 or a Level 3, it's both going to be correct, but only part of the picture. And it doesn't end with Level 4, either...

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 255

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

This set-up by the PTB# creates fear and anxiety in most people; it brings these emotions up to the surface. People get sick from them; sometimes seriously ill, as they tear on the immune system. The plan, to a large degree, is working, but people are still waking up, because when put into a corner where there is no obvious solution, people can become very creative and start thinking outside the box. This is what is happening to a percentage of the enslaved population. When life is speeding up, which it is, both due to the nano-second and the general job situation, we need to slow down, even if everything around us tells us we can't do that. The PTB know that the soulution is to slow down, so therefore they make sure our life keeps being hectic. We need to "unplug" ourselves from the Matrix. What we need to do more than anything else is to rest. Some people are needing a tremendous amount of sleep and rest. It's not because we're getting lazy. Here are the Pleiadians again: There will be times when some of you will wish to sleep eighteen hours. Do it. It is necessary. You have no idea of the lands you travel to and the work done on your physical body when you sleep. It is the time when you are unplugged from this reality and recharged and taught in other realities. The bridges, and your eyes, will open between realities, and you will begin to see and carry these memories (Marciniak [1992]: "Bringers of the Dawn" p.177, op cit.). Yes, the times are difficult, and before it turns around, they will be even more difficult for most people. Instead of fearing them and build up anxiety, welcome the difficult times and let them teach you what you are here to learn. In a status quo, there is nothing to learn, but in difficult times we can grow tremendously. If we look at our challenges without fear and anxiety, believe it or not, we can even be excited about them, because the learning lessons are so great and we have the possibility to grow tremendously! I know this to be true from own experience. I have learned to conquer most of my fears and carry no anxiety inside, and I am working on the fears I still have. So I really feel that the challenges in my life teach me a lot. And they will teach you a lot too. Give yourself an endless amount of love and encouragement. Say "Hi Self, I love you and you are wonderful and beautiful!" In the morning, or whenever you see her first, say hello to the Sun and tell her you love her and ask her to give you great energies that will help you get information so you can flourish and prosper through the day. Learn where in the sky She is at different times of the day and send your thoughts in that direction as soon as you can think of it. Also, when you wake up, the first thing you can do is to tell yourself: "Today is going to be a wonderful day. Everything I do, and everything that happens to me will be in my best interests and will help me grow!" You are setting the rules for the day when you first wake up in the morning. If you think; "oh no, another hellish day at work. I'm going to be so worn out I can't stand it!", then that's what's going to happen. Our thoughts and emotions are tremendously powerful. Stress is always harmful to the body, if experienced in large quantities over a long duration of time. It leads to blocked chakras, and body problems always have to do with blocked chakras; even injuries. When things are not working for you, and you pull things into your life that you don't want, look at your belief systems. The ones you're operating on, or one or more of

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 256

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

them, are obviously not working. There is a fine line between a catalyst and nonfunctional belief systems. A catalyst is when something is happening to you and you can pick up some good experience from it, handle the situation and move on. An old, non-functional belief system is one that doesn't enhance your life and doesn't make you grow. Recognize why it is that keeps you attracting certain kinds of energies over and over which make your life harder, and simply tell yourself that you are not available for that anymore and change your way of thinking. If this doesn't work, you are stuck in fear somewhere, which makes it hard to let go. You still need to recognize this fear and realize that it is your own creation, and let go. If you do, the stuck energy flow will become fluid again, and the reason for the fear you had will start dissolving and disappear, or change direction. We all need to be exceptionally clear in thought, in words and deed. I've said it before, but these are the times when we can't fiddle around and be sloppy on any of the three. The energies are so fast that we manifest quite immediately what we think and feel. Negative thinking will draw to us more negative energies in quantity, and positive thinking will do the opposite. There's no time to sit and say, "yes, but..." We need to train ourselves, or we'll go in directions we most probably don't want to experience. We need to be clear how we sit, how we stand, how we talk to people, what kind of images we put before our eyes; it's a matter of being in charge of both body and mind and know what we're doing 24/7. We need to dream, even when we're awake, but at the same time stay grounded in our bodies, and take care of them and eat what makes the body feel good and strong. If you're reading this and your body is not in the best of shapes, do what you can to improve your situation; any improvement will lead to a better outcome. We often take better care of our cars than we do our bodies. Still, our bodies are what keeps us alive in the cosmos and are ours to use for multidimensional purposes. I am also saying this in preparation for times to come. Many think that the financial meltdown and the financial low has reached the bottom and now everything will be better, but don't get fooled because the long trend is showing soaring statistics. There will be more crises on the financial market, more crashes. I walk the dog in the evenings and I see foreclosures everywhere; people have to go from their homes because they can't afford them anymore. If things like this seem to be happening to you, clear your energies. You need to have the intentions that you're always in the right place in the right time and everything will turn out better than best for you. Be sure of it. Clear your field from negative thoughts by putting positive thoughts there to replace them as soon as you spot them. Train yourself to recognize the destructive thinking and tell yourself: "hey, that's not what I want. Cancel that!" Then replace the negative thoughts with positive ones. Practice this on a daily basis, as soon as you hear the nagging in your head, and quite soon these negative thoughts will diminish and disappear. Your survival depends on it. Then bring your positive energies to others in your environment and those who are anywhere near your own vibration will pick up and automatically be more positive themselves. And they will know you had a big hand in their own development. Another negative emotion is anger and fury. They are negative because they are out of control and affect the environment negatively. They create fear and anxiety. Anger and fury are the two emotions positively oriented aliens have the hardest time with when comes to humans. It has been reported from the LINK Plenum meetings * that when a human gets angry, the aliens withdraw.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 257

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

If you feel furious, angry of frustrated, the first thing will be to recognize the feeling, but not to be so identified with it that you become the feeling. This is often what happens with these particular emotions. Once you recognize the feeling (you may face a person who is not very nice to you), get neutral about it and ask yourself, "what is this feeling telling me? Do I need to do something, do I need to pay more attention, is it telling me to speak up and not hide what I think, or is it telling me I don't need to be available for this?" Find out what is going on and why you are feeling what you're feeling before you act out. You then diffuse your own energy by recognizing it instead of using it destructively by letting it out on another person. If you ask yourself some questions, there will be an answer. And remember, if tumult and chaos seem to happen around you, it's important to take the advice I've given, but also be sure that this is the end of a cycle and the beginning of a new. Everything that's old and doesn't work--whether it's inside of you or on a planetary basis--has to go to make place for the new to come. It's a normal process and I am giving you a few tools to use to make the transition easier. Whatever you do, don't stop feeling. Feelings are essential to our enlightenment and evolvement as individuals and species. That's what makes humanity so unique--we have to look far and wide in the Universe to find a species with such a wide amount of feelings. Alien who are watching us are amazed and impressed, because it's our thoughts and emotions that will help us evolve. The only concern positive aliens have is that we seem to have such a hard time controlling our feelings so they don't control us. It's perfect to feel a lot; let the feelings be strong when they're positive and include love and light and acknowledge them when they are destructive, work with them and transpire them, and use them as experience. The worst thing we can do is to suppress our feelings and pretend they are not there. Some people think it's "macho" not to feel, and they are bragging about it and look down on those who do feel. That's not the best path to go if you're human. What's unique about us is that we have such a wide variety of DNA from a huge variety of galactic and intergalactic beings as part of the Living Library, and in that sense we are divine and have enormous potentials if we are willing to develop them. We are still primitive now in comparison with other ETs out there, but they too know our potentials and want to see us grow. If we grow, they grow. By some aliens we are considered royalty, because homo sapiens sapiens in its current version has DNA from Ša.A.M.i. royalty and that of the Orion Queens, as an intermarriage between the two species was orchestrated in the far past. The ones who mixed their genes with ours were both of the Ša.A.M.i. royal bloodline as well as that of the Orion Queens. Another thing to remember is that you never need to know how you are going to get from one point in your development to another; all you need to do is to put a clear picture in your mind of what you want, and the universe will adjust accordingly. Don't write down a long future journey-book telling you step by step what you need to do; let your energies take care of it. This is not some lofty New Age statement; it can be backed up scientifically and has to do with basic energy flows. And if other pictures keep popping up that are not exactly in line with your first picture, perhaps you need to refine the first picture a bit and your energies will be clear again. Recognize the changes in your life and look where they are taking you. If they are not taking you to where you want to go, you are changing your original picture subconsciously to adjust to situations around you. If this happens, you are not in charge and you let others take the steering wheel. I am aware of that sometimes things need to be done that are not 100% in line with our basic intentions, but when this happens and you need to go along with it for any good reason, still keep your basic intentions in mind, tell yourself that this is just a temporary thing I need to do,

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 258

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

but then I'm on my way again. However, most of the time, when you feel you don't want to do something, you can say no, unless it has to do with your job. Even with your job, if it leads you off track, it's time to look for another one. To go back to fear and anxiety a little bit more; when we're in fear, the ones behind the scenes are in control, and when we love, we are in control. Or, "the power ends where the fear begins". They have no way of controlling positive energies. The only thing they can do when they see people getting more and more positive is to counter it with more and more negativity (which is being done now). If we are aware of this and don't let it affect us anymore, they have lost and can do nothing but give up. We want to reach that point as a humanity. And remember, it's the few who are controlling the many. The ETs who are behind the Global Elite need humans to execute their commands. So long as they do so, they are not breaking the Law of Free Will, because these human puppets have agreed to do this against their own species. The ET controllers can't just come down in spaceships and take control; that would be an invasion and they would be stopped by those who guard this planet. Worst case scenario would be a war between the Invader Force and the Guardians. They want to avoid that for more reasons than avoiding a war; to control humanity, they need to keep hidden and us in ignorance, or their mission will fail. They need humans to keep humans in fear and agony, and this is how they have controlled us for thousands of years. This may change soon, and the non-human controllers may show their real faces in a disclosure that is well planned and not in our favor, but for now they still want to keep hidden for a while. Fear is a choice, and a part of raising consciousness is about eradicating fear (Pleiadian lecture, October 9, 2010: "Revolution of the Mind", CD #1, Track 13). Fear can be a good thing in a "fight or flight" situation when we are directly faced with a challenge that is threatening us or our family/friends. However, it's not appropriate to choose fear in situations that are instigated by people who want to control us for their own purposes with imperatives that are destructive for us. If we can't handle the situation right away (like with the ET control on Earth), instead of being fearful, we need to raise our frequency above fear so that the negative forces can not control us anymore. And most importantly; if you look at a current situation and there is really nothing there to be fearful about, don't engage in fear that is not appropriate, or it will play you right into the hands of those in power. Look around in your local universe and tell yourself you live in a safe world. The flowers are growing outside your window, the neighbor is cutting the lawn and the birds are singing. Tell yourself that your world is safe and there is nothing to be fearful about. And if you have a chaotic job where everybody is so stressed out that they start attacking each other because they are too overwhelmed to take in any communication whatsoever, and everybody is afraid to lose their job, you need to tell yourself that in the midst of this chaos you're safe and everything will work out better than best for you. Repeat this to yourself as often as you can, take deep breaths (and if possible, do short meditations) and just do the best you can with the best of attitudes. Soon enough, your local universe will adjust; people will get more peaceful around you if you know how to manage your own energies. On the opposite side of the coin; if you believe that all bad things possible can happen to you, and these things are always heading in your direction, and perhaps tomorrow you will get fired, stand on the street without a home, then this is what your future will get. You have probably seen people standing there, sinking in quicksand, and while sinking they are saying, "see, I told you this was going to

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 259

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

happen!" Yes, this person is right; he or she told you this was going to happen, and that's why it happened. There is great power in beliefs, so be aware of what your beliefs are! If there is no immediate reason to be afraid, tuck your fear away and say "fear, only come out when I really need you". Sometimes it takes a while to change thought patterns, but that's the key thing right now; to change old thought patterns that don't support your growth. A good practice to change your belief system may be to sit down for as much time you can spare (10-20 minutes a day) in a quiet, safe environment, all by yourself and say to yourself with intention: "I can be prosperous, I can live safely without fear, I am living in a safe environment and everything that happens will turn out in my favor and be better than best." Then, when you're done, you can go back to your life again and live it according to you old, non-functional belief systems. However, if you do this practice regularly, you will find after a while that it's ridiculous to live the old way. Why hang on to old beliefs when I can live by the new ones? Your mind will change its pattern. Another important thing to conquer fear or other emotions that bring you down is to have a good support system. Having at least one person you can bounce ideas on is extremely helpful. Not everybody is that lucky, and if not, practices like the one above will still work. Believe in yourself and trust that you can change in a way that will turn a vicious cycle around. It's all about beliefs, and beliefs can change, but it's up to each and everyone to be willing to make the changes. Once we have mastered these obstacles and we don't fall for the fearful news we hear about in the Media, and we see through the fact that we humans are still used as slave labor for ET races, we can start changing our vibrations to the point that we break the frequency fence and see the Multiverse on the other side; depict it! Powerful images can work as guidelines. We are the winners in this game. If you've followed me so far, we're on the same frequency and we are here to break free, and many, many more will follow.

Notes: [1] Penre/Bordon correspondence, March 28, 2011 [2] A few examples: "The Pleiadians"; "Ashayana Deane: Voyagers I & II"; "WingMakers Material"; "David Icke (2011)". [3] Marciniak: "Bringers of the Dawn", p.57. [4] Deane: "Voyagers II". [5] Marciniak channeling the Pleiadians (miscellaneous lectures); Ashayana Deane: "Voyagers I & II". [6] Wes Penre (2008): "Dialogue with 'Hidden Hand', Self-Proclaimed Illuminati Insider", http://illuminatinews.com/00363.html [7] http://lawofone.info; http://www.llresearch.org/home.aspx

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 260

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________ [8] Ashayana Deane: "Voyagers I & II". [9] Pleiadian lecture, August 14, 2010: "Awakening to the Sun", CD 3, Track 3. [10] Voyagers II, p.445. [11] Voyagers I – Page xlvi. [12] Keylontic Dictionary online, http://www.keylonticdictionary.org [13] Dr. Steven M. Greer (2001): "Disclosure Project", p.184, 187, op. cit. [14] http://www.wanttoknow.info/ufos/ufos_nuclear_missiles_warheads_shutdown [15] http://www.nauglefest.net/backmask.htm [16] http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2010/10/22/musical-cult-control-the-rockefeller-foundation’swar-on-consciousness-through-the-imposition-of-a44ohz-standard-tuning/; http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2010/09/01/does-conspiracy-extend-to-musical-scale/; http://battleofearth.wordpress.com/2011/06/10/frequency-528-for-healing-dna/. [17] http://illuminati-news.com/articles2/00201.html

Definitions (words followed by an asterisk *):

LINK Plenum Meetings: On an annual basis, the Life Physics Group California (LPG-C) meet with offworld beings either in a secret designated place here on Earth or up in space to discuss human issues, or ET issues that both have to do with Earth or their own home planets. The representatives are all nongovernment, and the gathering is to solve problems that may have to do with governmental issues as well as other issues.

Acronyms (in alphabetical order) (words followed by a pound sign #):

PTB: Powers That Be (the Global Elite) TTP: Technology Transfer Program.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 261

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(Soulution Section) Soulution Paper #2: Earth As Real Estate by Wes Penre, Monday, July 25, 2011 @ 5:50 AM

1. All Biological Life is Seeded Everything that has a biological form has been designed. The butterfly, the cockroach, the bird, the lion, the moth, the snake, humans...Except for the fatalists, who may think that all that is just came to being by accident and evolution, most people agree, in spite of different religions or beliefs. Most religions, sects, cults and free thinkers believe there is a divine design to all life on Earth and in the Universe. The questions is, why do so many people believe in a huge man with long hair and a long, white beard? Because, that's how "God" (or the "gods") depicted themselves in the minds of human beings. The ultimate design of this universe and beyond is created by All That Is, or "Source"; something we have discussed in earlier papers, and Source then created a semi-hierarchy of appointed creator gods. I say "semi", because it's not a strict hierarchy as in, "you take order from me, and you are in charge of them over there, and that's how it's done around here!". It's rather a hierarchy of knowledge and the ability to create matter out of light; how to be masters in creating holographic illusions and manipulating DNA, which is not limited to the human body, but continue "spiraling out" over the Universes. Thus, everything that has a biological form has been designed. Very little has evolved in the manner Dr. Charles Darwin taught us. Humans, for example, have looked the same since we were last genetically manipulated by the Sirian Anunnaki. The elephant did not evolve out of the mammoth and the mastodon, or the bird from the dinosaur; they are different creations all together. And life did not spring out of nothing. Nothing is random; it's all been built and seeded with a purpose in mind. In our case, like mentioned so many times before, the purpose is the Living Library. Earth's original creator gods wanted to build life on this planet; both plant, animal and human life; which would be a mix of biological life from hundreds, if not thousands, of planets and star systems around the cosmos. From our perspective, we can look at it as a giant library, where species from near and far can come and study how biological life forms interact and evolve as body/mind/spirit. It's a great experiment and the creator gods are very determined to protect their library to the best of their abilities.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 262

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Figure 1: All life in the universe is seeded

Ancient texts speak of ETs, way back in the past, introducing the rudiments for agriculture, animal husbandry, teaching us about astronomy, astrology, and metallurgy. These are all rudiments to build a civilization on a world such as ours (Pleiadian Lecture, June 6, 2010: "Built on a Mirage", CD #3, Track 8) . Many of these creator gods, in a joined effort by other alien species, are still watching us and our development today, as we have built this civilization based on the knowledge we gained in the far past. However, in our foolishness, we could more or less have blown ourselves up hundreds of times the last fifty years or so, but these old creator gods, who watch but don't want to interfere with our development, make sure we are not destroying ourselves, and in particular, this planet. This is why we see UFOs around manmade reactor blow-ups like the one in Japan in the earlier part of 2011. This is also why we hear of UFOs who have destroyed missiles which have been sent off, but stopped mysteriously halfway to the target. Creating a civilization like ours was part of the original plan and a part of a normal development on any life-bearing, given planet. There is a time in the development of most intelligent species, where they, as adolescents are playing with their toys and almost destroy themselves and their world in the process. However, like a separate human grows from adolescence to adulthood, so should we as a species, before we blow each other up. This is a critical stage in our development, and we, as a humanity, have been unusually asleep during this critical process and let the most destructive adolescents play with the most dangerous tools. Therefore, we who have grown up past this point since long, need to help the teenagers (most of the population) to grow up as well. However, there is an agreed upon moratorium on the highest level of creator gods to make certain that the atomic energy is contained! (Pleiadian Lecture, June 6, 2010: "Built on a

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 263

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________ Mirage", CD #3, Track 8).

There are ETs who have told the highest level of governments that if we want assistance, we need to disarm ourselves; and no weapons in space! When the government or the Media are using the words "atomic energy", or "nuclear energy", they are often code-words for "ETs" (ibid.). Obama, and others before him, manipulated behind the scenes by those (ETs and humans) who are not willing to give the power back to the people, know about this and have actively destroyed underground ET bases; the oil spill in the Gulf of Mexico being just one example. UFOs who have entered our reality have been shut down, cold-bloodedly, and if any survivors, they have either been killed or captured. All this is, and has been, happening behind the scenes for a long time, and it's talked about in the Media all the time, but it's coded. By using terms as "atomic energy", "nuclear energy/power", the Global Elite, who "know how to read the Bible" (newspapers), read it very differently than the rest of the people. For them, the Media are delivering encoded news, and they know how to read between the lines. A news reporter is telling a story, but the average Joe is hearing one thing, while Mr. Rothschild is hearing another. You have to be initiated to get the real message.

2. The Free-Will Zone The original creator gods worked with, and were carefully guarding a certain aspect of consciousness called light. These Guardians of Light worked with, and for, the Prime Creator in an effort to expand consciousness by creating experiments of probabilities which consciousness could experience and expand itself, and thus also expand All That Is, the Prime Creator. These highly evolved beings knew what can be done with light, and their plans were carefully orchestrated and it was decided when they were going to go into effect. The plan for Earth was to be an exchange center of information for all the different galactic systems. Everything was very carefully planned, and many of these creator gods incarnated here on Earth as a part of this plan, to light candles in the dark and eventually defeat the darkness just by being able to emit and transmit high frequencies of light. These incarnated creator gods, who have been here and lived through all this darkness in human bodies, have not given up. They are still here and their time is now. Their mission is no longer to light a candle, but to become beings of light, whom by their presence alone will make the darkness in others and the environment to diminish and disappear. Are you one of them? If you feel you are, now is your time. Light gives information without even having to use words, while darkness withholds information. With this in mind, it's easier to see who is who in this otherwise complicated game. Once you start traveling outside the 3rd Density realm, you will still keep this in mind. Darkness keeps you disinformed and light keeps you informed. If someone is wanting to expand by becoming more light from retrieving more information, and the information the person wants is being withheld from him/her, the one who withholds is holding on to darkness. Very soon, times will change drastically, and everything that was hidden will come to the surface and shown to the world, in ratio to how much light will be spread and how fast it will travel. The darkness which has been so prominent here on Earth for so long will no longer prevail. It's already starting to happen big time. Just look at what is being

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 264

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

revealed right now in all walks of life. These are not the times when it's an easy task to hold on to secrets; they will reveal themselves. According to the original plan, the creator gods act like parents for what they create. Earth, like so many other planets in the Free Will Universe and others, are real estate and meant to be owned by the creator gods who seeded them, but real estate can easily change stewardship over time; through wars, invasion, and any other reason for that matter. But if everything goes per the plan, the "parents" let their children grow up while guarding them, until they are adults and can take over the real estate. Each team of creator gods are seeding more than one planet at the time, and due to that time in the Universe is not linear, it can on one level all be done simultaneously. There have been many different creator gods interfering with the human DNA over billions of years, and many claim stewardship over Earth. There will be those who will come here, presenting themselves as "helpers" and saviors of this world. People will embrace them and think they are wonderful and powerful gods; "look what they can do!" When everything is going downhill on the planet, and an alien race is coming down to offer a solution, many will swallow the bait without seeing the bigger picture. All they are doing is to create another, new form of control. The Old World Order goes out the window to make space for a New World Order. Peace and prosperity is offered; some will say they are staying here as long as it takes for humankind to grow up and be self-sufficient and then leave.

Figure 2: Nibiru and the gods are returning

This is when it's so important to understand our own past; where we come from and who has been stewarding us, and in what direction. The same creator gods who created all these wars and all this chaos now come back and tell us they have cleaned up their act and can help us because they feel responsible for us. There will be (and already is) a gigantic marketing program to introduce the return of the gods, and it's very cleverly done. Once they come, and after they have "cleaned up" here, they will reign in peace for a while, but knowing their history, we will soon find ourselves in a highly technological tyrannical environment; much worse than the one we're experiencing now. Don't get fooled, people. Instead of giving any more power away to the gods who put us in this mess in the first place, we need to work on creating our own planetary sphere; our own Earth. It already exists, we only have to

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 265

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

picture it! If we are to use the Working Model, which I introduced in the Physics Papers, as a base for how the Multiverse operates, we understand that just as thoughts travel on Earth, there are highways on which thought can be directed throughout the cosmos. We need to dance between frequencies, knowing what we want and rest assured that we get it. The power is within us, not with any landing alien force. Please remember this when things start taking off! There are many different types of universes that were created with different purposes in mind. Even different galaxies have different purposes. We live in a "FreeWill Universe", which means "everything goes". All aspects of consciousness have gathered here to have a totally "wild" experience in an effort to learn as much as possible. You can do anything you like, but there are consequences. There are physical laws here based on karma--what you give out, you get back. This, too, is set up so that energies meet energies and bounce back to the instigator of thought and action/inaction. This is how energies work here. If we look at it objectively, it can be a great system for the Prime Creator to experience Itself. The multitude of experiences are extremely fast pace. Here, we affect each other, because that's how consciousness experiences itself. In another universe, everybody may be absolutely free, be on their own and serve no purpose to anybody else. In this free-will zone everything is interlocking and inter-working with everything else. The Pleiadians put it this way: Your purpose is to carry information and, by carrying it, to make the information accessible to others by frequency [...] Information is light; light is information. The more you become informed, the more you alter your frequency. You are electro-magnetic creatures, and everything that you are, you broadcast to everyone else. [...] Your assignment is to carry information and to evolve yourself to the highest capability within the human form. When you do this, you cannot help but affect multitudes. [...] everything you come in contact with is affected by your vibration (Marciniak [1992]: "Bringers of the Dawn", pp.139 op. cit.).

2.1 Free Will vs. Predestiny When we talk about free will, we can't discuss it in any length without also bringing up pre-destiny. We need to do so, because in some religions, the followers believe that everything is predestined. Even in secular groups people believe everything is predestined. There is even something called "fatalism", meaning everything is fated and there is no way around it. I happened to see a bumper-sticker yesterday on the car in front of me, saying: "Even those who believe everything is predestined look for cars before they cross the street". That's quite profound. The truth is that it's a little bit of both. In Metaphysics Paper #4 we were discussing what is happening between lives, how we set new goals for what we perceive being the next lifetime (although from a higher perspective all lifetimes are simultaneous), whom we want to meet, what we want to do, and so on. When we incarnate to a certain time we meet with our "tribe" or "soul group". We have a certain tribe we

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 266

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

meet with when we are kids and adolescents and another tribe when we pass our twenties etc. Sometimes, one or two members of the childhood tribe stay with us throughout our lifetime, but that's not too common. Of course, your immediate family usually does. We could say that predestiny is the overall experience that we have decided upon before incarnation, but within the framework of these happenstances we are free to do whatever we want to do. We can even change the whole setup we planned out between lives if we suddenly decide, while in incarnation, that we want to do something totally different. That's the beauty of free will. Those who say that you have to do this, and you have to do that because it's predestined imply that there is no free-will whatsoever, and that is not at all true for this particular universe. Free will is a most predominant factor. Let's say that when a person is twenty-five years, two months, three weeks and six days old he is predestined to meet his life partner at a party, because that's what the two have decided upon before they incarnated. However, in the last minute he decides that he is too tired to go and he stays home instead. This means the predestined meeting never happens as planned, and all he had to do was to decide not to go. As easy as that. The woman may have gone to the party, though, but felt that "something was missing" and left early. Usually, meetings like these are predestined to happen due to correlation and in accordance with astrological signs, and important events in a person's life are often planned under a certain astrological attuning to have the most powerful effects. In our example, as it turned out, the young man blew it off for any reason, and let's say that he instead meets with the lady three years later in another space and time. They may still get married, but the astrological signs are different, and they may or may not achieve exactly what they had planned. You can plan anything you like between lives, but there's always that unknown factor--in fact, a big unknown factor-called free will which may spoil it or lead you in another, sometimes even more desirable, as it turns out, direction. Predestiny is something set into the perceived future while free will is always the choice in the present moment. Looking at it this way, you can easily see which one is predominant over the other.

3. Revisiting Old Egypt--Era of Magic and Multi-Dimensionality I am taking you on a multi-dimensional tour in this paper, explaining things in a more non-linear timeframe to get the reader used to this kind of thinking. Hence, I now want to take you back to old Egypt for a while. The Egyptian people have always been quite different from people from the rest of the world in certain terms. They have a history that is pretty rich in many ways; not the least due to alien presence and influences on their society. In previous papers I have described in details Sitchin's translations and interpretations of the Sumerian cuneiform tablets, describing the Anunnaki's involvement in the building of Egypt and cultures in many other parts of the world. In subsequent papers in that series of papers I will continue discussing other alien influences coinciding with the Anunnaki timeline here on Earth. They were not the only ETs on this planet in the old Egyptian Era and at other times. All these alien civilizations effected the Egyptian culture enormously, of course, and also the people; not only the cultural part, but also from

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 267

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

a genetic aspect, with a lot of interbreeding and genetic engineering. This has made the Egyptians quite a psychic people and in some senses a bit more multidimensional in their thinking than much of the rest of the world. Therefore, it's interesting to watch what happened in Egypt earlier this year (in 2011) with the uproar against the sitting regime and how it was done. What we are seeing on a higher level is timelines merging. This incident is not the first, but it's a bigger one and we will see more of timelines coming together and meeting at an apex. When the gods were interacting with us, especially those with questionable reputation, to say the least, knowledge was passed on through the Mystery Schools. It often took many lifetimes for the human initiates (often royalties, Figure 3: Artist's view on the "Old Kingdom" of Egypt Anunnaki hybrids, first or second generation) trained in the priesthoods to open their eyes to other realities. The gods trained them to reincarnate into certain families and remember who they were. The mothers and fathers knew who was going to incarnate into the baby body before the baby was born, because they dreamed about it. With training they learned to see and interpret different realities. This concept was called the Eyes of Horus, or the Third Eye of Horus (A. Deane [2002]: "Voyagers II", misc. pages), because they could look into many different worlds; the world of waking and of sleeping, the world of death and that of dreaming (Marciniak [1992]: "Bringers of the Dawn", p.74). What some of the gods did (and still do), which they did not teach their human students because they didn't want us to be a threat to them, or in competition, was that when their current body either grew old (perhaps hundreds of thousands of years old, or even millions), got fatally wounded in battle or accident, or got seriously ill, they could quickly vacate that body and immediately incarnate into another cloned version of themselves and continue their lives without passing the between lives area which I tend to believe is only assigned for us ignorant 3-D soul fragments. These gods did not do so casually, though, because each clone is always a little bit less powerful and efficient than the previous one, but apparently they were afraid to die the natural way. There is a reason for this, which I will bring up in the second level of papers. Our original strands of DNA, which we are now redeveloping, are seemingly of a higher order and can take us higher up on the echelons of the multiversal ladder than they can the Anunnaki. We are talking 11 strands versus 12 stands of DNA. The Anunnaki made a choice a very long time ago which they regret today.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 268

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

This is also particularly interesting, because this knowledge has been passed on down the generations of certain families through Mystery Schools and secret societies to present time. Today's royal families and Global Elite families do the same thing; certain soul fragments incarnate over and over into the same genetic line having full memory of who they are. Interestingly enough, this doesn't necessarily make today's Global Elite particularly spiritually inclined. Yes, they know they are soul fragments occupying a biomind, but they don't always see the bigger picture beyond their own accomplishments and designed tasks. However, I should add, some of them do. There are those who know who they are and why they do what they're doing. Although we may look at them as evil because of the effects they create, there is certainly a bigger picture that most people miss; those who have read the Hidden Hand article may understand this concept better[1]. A few beings incarnated over and over on this planet to be our catalysts. By doing horrendous deeds, they are also sacrificing themselves by inducing very difficult karma upon themselves, and they are doing this to make us wake up. We are blaming them for what they do instead of understanding that the magnitude of darkness put upon us by these people are in direct ratio to our own inefficiency, negligence, and inability to wake up and complete the task we're here to do. By another token, the Ša.A.M.i. people, as it seems, go from incarnation to incarnation with full memory of their previous one without reflecting over what they're doing and their real purpose. Hence, they have since long forgotten what the meaning of their thoughts and actions are. Like in the "Michael Lee Hill Case", as discussed in another paper, Marduk (if it was him) is perhaps seeming to understand this catalyst phenomenon and is telling Hill that now when humanity is waking up, he and his people can finally find rest from being our catalysts and start expressing love in a positive way. However, I doubt that this is a sincere attempt, and that "Marduk" is just playing on what he considers "fashionable" amongst UFO and alien researchers here on Earth--to look at the Anunnaki as catalysts. He wants us to believe that his people now have changed, but as far as I'm concerned, it's a trap! And as far as Michael Hill is concerned, it is my conviction that even if some people are our catalysts and we realize this, it doesn't mean we should, or have to mingle with them. Never before have so many people lived on Earth as in these times. We need the numbers to be able to pull Earth through her birth pain and transfer us to a higher frequency. It's our combined effort that will make this happen, thus the seven billion people plus that will live on this planet between 2012-2017. Not everybody will be able to transform and it's not meant to be, but everybody is contributing with their own frequency, wittingly or unwittingly, to make this happen. Still, all these people know that they were born into this specific time because of what is transpiring. Some just want to "ride the wave" and have fun, or a certain experience, while others are serious about where the want to go. They will "check out" and leave their bodies when it's getting tough, and that's something they had planned before they were even born. To those, let's send our gratitude for being here with us, who have planned to stay, for helping us on our journey. It's all perfectly fine, but we still need more people waking up to increase the overall frequency. We literally need to shed light into the darkness by being ourselves and affect our environment, creating the ripple effect we discussed earlier. According to the Pleiadians, many well-known people from the past chose to come back at this particular time as well to participate in the energy work.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 269

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

I am slowly taking you back in time here, inserting dialogues that are multidimensional in nature for a reason, which will be apparent before you've read this paper until the end, and Egypt has had such a profound effect on humanity-both positively and negatively--that we need to grab a handful here and a handful there of their history and place it in present time to understand our current path and what is happening to us today. By understanding certain sequences of the past, we will make the transition easier for those who want to follow. The first thing that comes to mind to many people if you say "Egypt" is the pyramids of course. There are pyramids found in all different places on Earth (and there are those buried deep in the jungles, overgrown with layers of vegetations), but the most famous ones are the Egyptian pyramids.

3.1 The Pyramid Structure and What It Does First of all we want to be clear that pyramids are not something that originates with the Global Elite because it's on the back of the One Dollar Bill, albeit the Elite know the power of the pyramid and it also symbolizes whom they are working for. I just want to de-demonize pyramids right away, because for many people who have studied the Global Elite and their plans see pyramids as something only related to them, and therefore evil. The universe we live in is built around the language of light. Light actually has geometric forms, like circles, squares, rectangles, pyramids, triangles, spirals, lines, pentagons etc. These who have this knowledge know the power of geometry and the shape of the pyramid. It's as old as the universe, because it's been present as long as there has been light, but the Founders used the pyramid shape (alongside many other geometric shapes) already when they started seeding the universe. These creator gods are still around in pure consciousness and are here to help us, emitting tremendous energy of love and light. We humans have 144,000 seals of energy that will eventually be infused within our being. This entire symbolic language structure will be infused through out being. The pyramids on this planet are primary locator points, and throughout cosmos represent a great unity of consciousness. They are the structure of perfection and very difficult to create. This structure gathers energy from Earth and sends it outward. They have also been a sighting point for landing of alien spacecraft; especially when they arrive from other dimensions and densities. When we think of the pyramids we think of them as being built during a certain time period and that they filled some kind of purpose at that time for the builders, and that the Great Pyramid was built around 2,600 BC[2]. That may be true on one level, but if we look at it from a more multi-dimensional viewpoint, we could picture the pyramids being built simultaneously at different point in vertical time and inserted onto the planet, filling different purposes at different times. According to the Guardian Alliance, for example, the Great Pyramid was restored in 5,540 BC (Ashayana Deane [2002]: "Voyagers II" p.86). We know from Sitichin's work that the Anunnaki were the builders at one time, but we also know from the Ra Material that the Ra Confederacy (the Ra Collective) also were the builders. The Pleiadians refer to this multi-dimensional concept as well in one of their Winter Lectures of 2011, including the original seeders of this planet as

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 270

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

an addition to the mix. In fact, the pyramids, on another level, are a measure of local and planetary consciousness, working as a "chronometer", telling inter- and multi-dimensional creator gods where the overall level of consciousness is and how an upcoming Harvest would pan out for humanity. Egypt is not the only country which has these measuring devices built into the pyramids; they are all over the place, and they fill this same purpose, on one level built by the same beings. When a certain consciousness is reached, it sends out a signal through time so that this consciousness can be balanced.

Figure 4: Pyramids in Peru: On December 30, 1975, this photograph was taken by the Landsat II satellite at an altitude of 500 miles over the jungles of southeastern Peru at 71 degrees, 30 minutes west longitude in the Madre de Dios region of the Amazon. The photo shows eight symmetrical structures on the edge of the Amazon jungle. These pyramids are only slightly smaller in height than the Great Pyramid of Egypt! (http://www.rickrichards.com/ac/ac_2.htm)

Some of the "true" pharaohs of Egypt, who were of higher consciousness, said that the pyramids were ancient even before they began (Pleiadian Lecture, "Freedom's Frenzy", February 12, 2011, CD #1, Track 13). It's obvious that the pyramids were built to survive through time and not only serve a purpose for a short time period. We also learn from the same Pleiadian lecture that long ago, there were pharaohs who were taught by ETs how to pay attention to time inside their mind and when something went off in another time (like today), they could respond from their present (our past) to influence the future. As all time is simultaneous and no one really dies, they knew how to work through time and balance things out within the framework of their own capacity, through the pyramids. In other words, they didn't take precautions back then in case something would happen in the future; they are there now, in our past, which is their present and able to respond to what for example was happening in Egypt a few months ago from this writing. This is a very interesting and accurate way of looking at multi-dimensionality. If you can picture this and can think with it, you can grasp the concept of how multi-d works.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 271

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

As you may know, we do have proof there are pyramids built on other planets as well, such as Mars. These NASA pictures are all over the Internet. This is telling us, that for somebody, pyramids are pretty important. They've been used for initiation, energy enhancers, tombs (later on when the dynasties were declining and consciousness declined as well), "lighthouses" for travelers through time and space, unity of consciousness and anchor points in time, teleportation, and ascension among other things. They are also an encapsulation of the language of light, a code for building, just like a hammer can be used for different things in different hands. So, the Great Pyramid in particular could be said to be an anchor of energy. Time can be compared to a container where consciousness can express itself. As we have discussed so far, time as a linear concept is a local custom and is not applicable outside the realm of our planet. Therefore, if we look at the Great Pyramid as a time container, being multi-dimensional in concept, time in this container is not linear. Here, timelines merge; parallel timelines that have to do with Earth, or other versions of Earth. This is why a person may enter certain points within the pyramids who work like apexes for timeline energy and the visitor may have a very profound multi-dimensional experience. This was well known by the ancients. Now we can see how powerful the pyramid structure is, and how it can be used for so many incredible things. Still, here on Earth almost nobody knows what they are, why they are there, and when and by whom they were built. It's a mystery. Timeline-wise, in the perspective of the linear, and the bloodlines from where the current version of humanity originates, it goes back around 500,000 years on this planet, which brings us back to the time when the Anunnaki arrived.

4. An Attractive Real Estate--The Gods Return As discussed earlier, the Nibiruan Ša.A.M.i. seem to be in charge of Real Estate Earth at this time, and they are themselves a mix of humanoids and reptilians from have interbred with the reptiles from Orion (and who knows with whom else). The Pleiadians tell us over and again that there were multiple conflicts and wars between alien races here on Earth and elsewhere in the solar system before and after homo sapiens sapiens were created. The Ša.A.M.i., a galactic and interdimensional warrior race, won these wars, and as part of the peace treaties, there were agreements made with the Orion Reptilians and the Dracos of Alpha Draconis to manage Real Estate Earth and its human inhabitants. Exactly how these agreements were made is unknown to me at this time, but it is quite obvious that both the Dracos and the Reptilians are controlling humankind while their "bosses", the Ša.A.M.i., are elsewhere, only leaving skeleton crews on Earth. Every now and then they come back to check on us and their real estate, apparently when Nibiru is in crossing. This time is now, more or less, and we start seeing more of the typical Ša.A.M.i./Anunnaki here on Earth. What we need to keep in mind (and this is extremely important) is that Marduk and others, like Ningishzidda/Thoth (both sons of the Enki/Ea) changed history and/or lied about important parts of it. Both brothers, independent of each other, and for different reasons, changed the records, probably withdrew some of the cuneiform, replaced them with falsified records, and like in Marduk's case, bluntly lied about their own history and that of humankind.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 272

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Humankind were not some savages running around killing animals on the savannahs of Africa with pointed sticks. There were more than one human species present on our planet when the Anunnaki came, and not all of them were highly spiritually evolved, but some were. They were living with nature but also had an advanced civilization, which was destroyed by the Anunnaki. Some, like David Icke, the Pleiadians and a few others say that they were androgynous, even, "with a genetic structure that allowed them to access, and interact with, a range of densities" (David Icke [2011]: "Human Race Get Off Your Knees--The Lion Sleeps No More", p.227) . This was before we were genetically engineered by those from the incoming Nibiru.

4.1 Shapeshifting When we speak of David Icke, we come on touching the subject of shape-shifting. In 1999 he released his now classic book called, "The Biggest Secret: The Book That Will Change the World", about shapeshifting Reptilians. Changed the world it did in certain term, and those who came about this information were divided into two camps; for and against his latest research. What Icke did, successfully I think, was that he snapped people out of the 3rd Dimension/Density linear time Figure 5: David Icke paradigm and made people think more outside the box; more multidimensionally. Even those who laughed at him and thought that he know had enough rope to hang himself were not unaffected. Humanity owes him a lot of credit for where we are today; he was, and certainly still is, a great contribution to the mass awakening. Today, 12 years after the book release, there are still two camps, but Icke's camp is gaining ground and we are getting more and more tuned into his research and the future he is suggesting we'd head towards. I don't like using the word "camps" because it separates, but in lack of another term...and after all, they are camps. Icke is convinced that certain members of the Global Elite are possessed by Reptilian entities from the lower 4th Density/Dimension, who are manipulating our world leaders from an unseen world. Sometimes these Reptilians show themselves in their real form and people from all around the globe have claimed to see them; both in meetings with government officials, in cold-blooded human and animal sacrifice rituals, and just spotted on their own. Some of these are supposedly shapeshifting from reptilian to human form and back again. When this information was released in 1999, most people were shocked and said that this was scientifically impossible. Interestingly enough, it's not. We have talked earlier about light and darkness and how advanced beings can manipulate light, and LPG-C, whose members are brilliant scientists, expanding on both Einstein's and Bohm's theories, emphasize that light can certainly be manipulated. LPG-C has a term for it, Light Encoding Reality Matrix (LERM), which is a highly advanced technique to manipulate light. And if you know how to do it, you are fully capable to change shape and form, like the man who showed himself off as Marduk did in the Michael Lee Hill case[3]. People said it was not scientifically possible only because they hadn't read about it in any scientific journal. That doesn't make it impossible,

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 273

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

though. In Quantum Physics and Subquantum Physics, it is quite well known that the Multiverse is fluid. Shape-shifting is nothing strange at all. In physics we know that energy vibrates on different frequencies and it's quite obvious that if something vibrates faster than the eye can follow, it's going to seem invisible. That doesn't mean that it's not there; In fact, it exists in the same space and time as we do. People also tend to forget is that shapeshifting is nothing new that David Icke all of a sudden invented. We all have heard of the shamans who can shapeshift into bears, lions or whatnot. I am going to quote a few more paragraphs from Bringers of the Dawn, and mind you that this book was written in 1992, but I believe most of the lectures this book is based upon were channeled some time around 1988. This is 11 years before Icke came out with his revolutionary book. When your consciousness learns the laws of creation, manipulation, and management of reality, it is quite easy for you to manifest into any form you choose. For those of you who have activated your shamanistic and native cultural memories, you well know that part of the teachings of native cultures was how to go into various realities and change form. The shamans in certain cultures were revered for this. They carried genetic coding, and there were very few on the planet in relation to the entire population. They held the magic and mystery and kept the process alive. They were able to move in the forms of animals and various other shapes and guises. This was quite a profound science, indeed. Because this science exists on the planet, of course, it also exists off the planet. Earth is a "happening" place right now, a hot spot. It is coded to start its own revolution--not necessarily just a revolution in the United States to change lifestyle, but a dimensional shift that is going to alter all of the space around Earth. Many extraterrestrials who are curious about life forms know how to rearrange their molecular structures and come onto the planet in disguise as humans (emphasis not in original). In times of tumultuous change, when dimensions have the potential to merge and collide--as you are setting up here for Earth--there is a great gathering of energies that come to participate in the big show. The big show happens on many levels, not just in 3-D. A chain reaction moves through all of the dimensions of existence and all of consciousness. (Marciniak [1992]: "Bringers of the Dawn", p.110 op. cit.) . We humans, who have absolutely no clue what kind of technologies and knowledge that's out there, have to jump off our high horses and face reality as it is, or we will be fatally fooled. If aliens have the capability to manipulate light and rearrange their molecular structure from a higher density level; this can be used for all purposes imaginable, and beyond. One such would be an alien invasion similar to the ABC TV show, "V", which was aired in 2010, but based on a TV-series from the 1980s(!), where the Invader Force showed themselves off as loving and caring humanoids, but in fact were cold-blooded Reptilians, who wanted our DNA. Too close to the "real deal" in my opinion. Remember, they are preparing us and confusing us with science

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 274

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

fiction movies where an alien race is good in one movie and predators in another. When the real thing is happening, people don't know if it's Jesus, Buddha, shapeshifting Reptilians who want our guts, or friendly ETs who are trying to assist. Again, humanity is split, and when it comes down to it, man will fight man as it always has been from being manipulated behind the scenes, unless we wake up to the deceptions out there! We may argue whether the Anunnaki are basically "lizzies" or not, but as far as I'm concerned, they took an existing, highly evolved humanoid species (our forefathers), could have just added their reptilian genes to the mix and in addition deactivate 10 out of 12 helices of DNA. But why all this obsession with control, both amongst humans to some degree, and amongst the Anunnaki to a large degree? Why do people want to control others? To a large extent, control over others by using any means, but also control over others in general, stems from spiritual ignorance, and from fear. Like the Guardian Alliance say, "The Egotistical mind perceived itself as limited and finite, and so developed an overly aggressive need to dominate and control its external environment as a means of attempting to insure its survival." (Deane [2002]: "Voyagers II", p.80, op. cit.). The "Egotistical Mind" can in some terms be compared with the "analytical mind" in Dianetics, the "logical mind", or the "pea" in the Pleiadians "Garden of the Mind", which is separated in awareness from the sub- and unconscious minds, where the answers to the "secrets of life" reside. It's easy to see why humans have a tendency to control others; it's a survival instinct due to being disconnected in direct conscious thought from our Higher Self and All That Is. Although there is no real disconnection, the connection has been cut off in the sense that humans in general no longer remember who they are. When comes to alien races, like the Ša.A.M.i./Anunnaki and others who want to control, fear is always a factor[4], and disconnection and isolation another. And ultimately, we're a food source for them; both energetically and physically. What I notice in myself is that the more aware I become and the more I learn, the less need do I have to control or even compete with others. In this lifetime, I haven' had much of that to start with, but at this point I have next to zero. If I had to use the term "competition" it would be with myself only, and it's in a positive sense of the word. I compare myself sometimes with whom I was one, two, three, five, ten, or more years ago to see in what areas of life I have changed and where I feel I need to improve. Interestingly enough, when I've improved one area, another area sometimes improve "by itself"; it just follows. I am having much fun with this, and have definitely come to a point where I've realized that any violence, fight, or war is pointless and plain stupid and certainly a sign of lower consciousness. Why do we want to fight and destroy ourselves? If we go to war against a perceived enemy and shoot them all down, whom are we hurting? Ourselves, of course. The ones we kill are just other manifestations of ourselves; it doesn't make any sense to kill parts of ourselves, because it's insanity. Look at the soldiers who are coming back from war.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 275

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Good young men who didn't know any better and are often hopeless wrecks, not due to what was done to them, but due to what they did to other-selves in the heat of the moment. Things they otherwise wouldn't dream of doing. So, how come that so-called highly advanced and developed ETs fight and control each other? One answer is that they fight over territory because the territory has resources and food stuff, and that food stuff happens to sometimes include us. Their concern is not their spiritual development as much as how much territory can they control. They are still in survival mood and service to self. This is a dual universe where polarity must exist for the universe to exist in its current form, so some beings need to play the role as the "bad guys". Love is the strongest force in the Multiverse, but love can be expressed in so many ways. There are those who express it by showing tremendous love towards their fellow man and everything around them, and there are those who only love themselves. The Multiverse does not distinguish between the two by condemning one and embracing the other; both expressions are allowed to have catalysts going. As much as darkness is a catalyst for light, light is a catalyst for darkness. You hear me mention the word intuition a lot, especially in these "Soulution Papers"; intuition and discernment. This is what we need to use, because by only using our 5 senses, we will not be able to figure out who's the bad guy and who's the good guy, or even what to do, besides from that. We cannot figure out the Multiverse using only our 5 senses, that is a given. Intuition represents information from the Higher Self sent to the conscious awareness via the body and sub-conscious mind. (Deane [2002]: "Voyagers II", p.80, op. cit.). So again, fear disconnects us from our Higher Self, and the level of fear we feel in general in life is in direct ratio to how close our direct and open connection is with our Higher Self. The emphasis here is on open, because a person in fear and anxiety still has a connection, but often uses their intuition in destructive manners.

5. The Electromagnetic Spectrum and the Reptilian Consciousness Light has a wide spectrum, from gamma-ray to infrared. All we can see is a very narrow spectrum between infrared and ultraviolet (see Diagram 1 ). Below that are microwaves, tetra hertz radiation, radio waves, and long-waves. Above our visible spectrum we have x-rays and gamma-ray. This is called the Electromagnetic Spectrum. What we notice is how incredibly little we can perceive; some say 3-4% of what is possible. All spectra of light are carrying information. The more outside the visible spectrum, the faster and faster the particles of light move. At the end we have this density-packed gamma-ray. Gamma-rays carry through everything and carry loads of information and we are organized around gamma-rays pulsations. The visible spectrum of 36 inch pretend electromagnetic spectrum is where we can see what is going on; this is our tiny reality, although our perceptions of light can

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 276

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

also go into infrared and ultraviolet to some degree. So, obviously, a whole lot more is going on than any of us realize. Here I sit, writing down my new discoveries, and much of this, people in general don't know. Still, what is considered "new" to some is still only touching the surface on the wealth of information that is out there (or inside, if you will). It's impossible to comprehend at this stage; we can only do our best, but it makes us humble, and the word enlightened gets a new meaning. At the same time, it is quite thrilling to know how much more there is to know. It's always the path that is important; more so than the goal.

Diagram 1: Electromagnetic Spectrum

Still, once upon a time, our visible spectrum was wider and normal for humans. Again, if we are to believe the wealth of metaphysical sources, we were quite evolved "before the tanks came" so to speak. I don't want to point the Anunnaki out

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 277

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

as the only scapegoat for halting our development (or taking it in a new direction), but they had big, giant hands in the soup, literally and figuratively speaking. We can see evidence of our wider spectrum in our folklore. There are trolls, goblins, fairies, angels, and you name it. Who were they that people saw and who were, in certain culture, totally accepted as real? This does not go back longer than 2-3 generations in some parts of the world. My mother grew up in northern Sweden, where there are deep forests, canyons, and unexplored wilderness. People saw things all the time and no one thought twice about it. Some of the creatures were invisible, too, and affected both humans and horses, making them very uncomfortable. These entities were called "mitra" in Sweden. In addition to that they saw goblins, hob-goblins, strange creatures without names, it was part of their reality, and my mother often talked about these things among us family members when I was little. The reason we don't see these extra spectra today is because we have learned to ignore them in order to build machines and technology, and migrated to cities, which are isolated from nature to a large degree. We had to pay a price and make a choice. Industrialism came and farmers and other hard workers who worked with their bodies from dawn until dusk, seven days a week, could now move into the cities and work for someone else, being guaranteed a wage to live on. This was tempting for many, and they didn't realize the price they paid. However, it took a tremendous shift in consciousness for the modern world to develop. My mother, who loved the magic of the nature, has still not gotten used to it, 65 years after she moved into a bigger city. She refuses to learn computers, for example, although she is brilliant, or maybe because of that! These days, we are tuning out what the cats and the dogs see. The spectrum of light they can see is much wider than ours, and that's why some people call animals psychic. It's extremely valuable to have a pet and watch its behavior. If it starts acting out of the norm, ask it what is going on. "What do you see?" Let your animal send you the picture of what its seeing and then complement it for what it just did. They will respond right away; we just need to learn how to see the mental pictures they send us. They can be our psychic teachers, indeed. They are way better than us humans, who can't compare ourselves to these creatures of the animal kingdom. In my field of work, I am rarely alone; there are unseen entities around most of the time. Some are just curious while others can be more energetically intruding. My basset hound can immediately spot if someone is in our space in a density close to us. He tells me and I thank him and give him a treat. It works! I also make it a habit to cleanse my house and build invisible shields to protect myself from abusive intrusion. We have covered the Anunnaki and their humanoid form quite extensively in these papers, but talked very little about the reptilians and the reptilian consciousness. This is on purpose, as this will be brought up in more detail in the Second Level of Learning. I'd still like to touch this subject some. David Icke, on the other hand, is covering this to a great extent in his books and lectures. Reptilians, as we know, have been given a pretty bad reputation here on Earth. Still, besides that the Reptilians in some ways are just like us; there are bad and good people from our perspective, but there is also reptilian consciousness that is part of

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 278

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

being the Master Geneticists and the seeders and creators of life, just like the Founders sometimes take on the life form of praying mantises. So again, we have to be very careful not to generalize and say that all Reptilians are bad (I know I am repeating some things over and over, but it's just because it's important). However, it's reasonable to say that the reptilian consciousness which monitors and controls our reality has imperatives that seriously clash with our own, so from our perspective, this faction of reptilians can be called "bad". The Reptilian Brain is based on flight, fight, or freeze; that's its responses. You run away from a situation, you fight it, or you become so overwhelmed by the situation that you freeze. The brain, just like the DNA, is symptomatic of the activity of energy moving around. It is extraordinary misunderstood in its capacity; in reality, we are using our whole body to access intelligence, not just the brain (Pleiadian Lecture, November 6, 2010: "Rise of the Inner World", CD 2, Track 7) . According to Web Bot[5], somewhere around the end of 2010 there was soon going to be a battle between snakes and dragons. These were metaphors for the Catholic Church and China, respectively. These are archetypes, using countries and organizations for their agendas and purposes. It looks like it's the Church against China; that's on the physical level. What it's really about is Snakes and Dragons, and they have their own reality. There is a lot of healing to be done on a global scale (no pun intended) from our past encounters with Reptilian and humanoid visitors for us to more easily move on, because we are going to have to encounter them again when they land here, not too many years from now. This is part of the initiation; to let go of the past; confront what happened, forgive and move on. Here is a very good example of when we can use the Six Heart Virtues, as described in "The Six Heart Virtues - Living from the Heart" from the WingMakers site (you can also download it in pdf here). The healing has to do with showing compassion, forgiveness and understanding for those races who are expressing love in a selfish way by manipulating and controlling others. By sending them love in our thoughts in an unselfish way we will let go from the negative ties they have to us, and it helps us heal along the lines of time; something that is absolutely necessary for us to break free and cut off the chains of bondage.

6. The Purpose of the Human Experience The purpose is for us as a biomind at this time is to abdicate muti-dimensionality and to understand we are not alone and isolated. This is an experiment where we agreed to believing we are isolated and to build a probable world where we forgot that we are connected to all things; where humanity forgot that we live again and again; where we perceive what happened as something long ago instead of sharing the present; and where the future is often some ambiguous, strange place that holds a lot of fear. This is a noble venture, and beings who agreed to take part of this experiment (which is the entire human race) are pretty brave. This venture has been going on for many thousands of years here on Earth. This experiment sprang out of the destructions that occurred on this planet about 13,000 years ago (half of a "Great Year"; a Great Year being a full galactic year cycle, which is 26,000 years). We are talking about the destruction of Atlantis and what came about after that destructive

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 279

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

event, which had its climax then, but had many things happening that were building up to it. Destruction can't happen unless it's created, it doesn't happen by itself. This planet is a trading group, a playground, a place where consciousness is allowed to express itself. It's a library, and what is a library? It's a place where things are borrowed but must be returned. And if it's not returned, there is a fee. That's a good analogy. All the animals, all the plants; most of them were not seeded like is normal on most other planets (referring to those planets that are not Living Libraries), but life was brought here from a huge variety of planets throughout cosmos. Thus, most of these life forms exist elsewhere; the lion, the butterfly, the rose, the bull, the cow; you name it. This is also where we meet up with our soul friends and soul mates. The Pleiadians even say that the 21st Century is a time where we connect with old, old friends; it's like a reunion. We are meeting with people we are feeling a great connection with. Within the next few years, the world will tumble around us and many will be in shock; even those who thought they wouldn't. However, it's the end of what doesn't work anymore and the building of something new. And to build something, something needs to be destroyed. Old paradigms, old ways of building civilizations must die and new roads for the future need to be paved. These are very exciting times if we can journey between the turmoil. Things we have taken for granted will disappear, and many of us need to be self-sufficient, go back to gardening, barter, smaller communities, return to nature--big changes, because we are spoiled even in our prison state. Some will wish themselves back to how it is now, and even though cities will still be there, where they don't get destroyed, and technology will develop, not everybody is going to be welcomed there, either. They are building a new human race that is more like half machine, half human. It's our job, here and now, to be the light in the dark, the catalyst for those in darkness, to have fun and feel joy, create meaning to our lives and live it fully. It's our job to raise the vibration, until a new world emerges, which is beautiful and welcoming. And when most people have made their choices, this Earth is going to split in two; the machine kingdom and that of spiritual/biological evolvement. Many worlds may emerge from that as peoples desire differ, but this will be the main split. Our purpose is to break out of linear time after have experienced it fully, and go back to being multi-d. When we do, the 3rd Density Experience is finished.

7. The Pleiadians and The Complexity of Power There is a reason the Pleiadians call this time the nano-second (1987-2012). The renegade group, who is channeling through Barbara Marciniak are from our future. They are also our creator gods in some terms; or more precisely, their ancestors were our creators a long time ago, together with other creator gods. The future of these beings (their present) is apparently compared to a living hell. This group (which is rapidly expanding) has realized that their own present is what it is because of decisions we made here and now in the nano-second. On their timeline we made decisions which directly affected them. They are, in certain terms, us in the future. By coming here and speaking to us through a channel, they are hoping that we (or some of us) are making other decisions that will also help them free their karma and move into another probable future, which is more pleasant to live in. How

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 280

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

is this possible? It's possible by teaching us all that was hidden from us. By learning this, we also have more conscious choices which may lead humanity in another direction, on another timeline, which will be the same as the one the Pleiadian experiences. When asked, they say there is a certain chance that they will be "erased" in the process, but it's worth it. Consciousness lives on. As the reader may realize, when groups like the Pleiadians (and they are not the only ones) start teaching humans about our true ancestry, our hidden history and the fact that we've been lied to, it doesn't sit well with certain other aliens. Still, there is little they can do to stop the truth from coming out. For those who are familiar with this Pleiadian group know that they are helping us to self-help. They are doing service-to-others by teaching us to think outside the box. They don't always provide direct answers, and the meanings are multi-leveled but their teachings are always coherent. They have been channeling for 23 years as of this writing and their early work is still coherent with what they are teaching now. I find this quite impressive and comforting. The fact is that without the wisdom they are sharing with us, we may have made decisions in this nano-second which would have thrown most of us into the machine world. However, there are other teachings that take on where the Pleiadians leave off and are still intermingled with their information. The Guardian Alliance is one of them. Still, the latter is much more complex and may or may not have reached the same amount of people, and on the other hand perhaps not filled the exact same purpose. As usual, I suggest you take part of all this information, like I have, and make up your mind in what direction you want to go. I have my direction pretty clear, but it's all of our responsibility to decide which road each of us wants to travel. Before the Pleiadians started their mission here on Earth in 1988, there was very little material in this capacity. We had the RA Material, and the Seth Material before that, and a few others as well, but the Pleiadians started a flood of channeling from other beings, who became inspired for many good and not so good reasons. The mission we are on is about Freedom by freeing up the human DNA and make other probabilities. L. Ron Hubbard once said: "A culture is only as great as its dreams, and its dreams are dreamed by artists." This is quite true, and in that respect we all have to learn how to become artists and dreamers who can dream up our future. Like we discussed earlier, darkness is what is hidden and light is what is in the open. We, who have studied and researched the Powers of Darkness for years have still only touched the surface. Unfortunately, many good researchers stop where the Rothschild's and the Rockefellers end. Or the Catholic Church, the Jewish Bankers, the Zionists etc. Others blame everything on Satan (no wonder this entity has so much power! If he was never meant to exist, he most certainly does now, because so many people continue creating him). Any and all of the above are just scapegoats or pawns in the game. When we reach the upper echelons of human power there is always non-physical beings involved, or those who reside in the next, "unseen" dimension or density. To those who are looking for a single being responsible for the mess we're in, you will not find him. There is no single black magician in power of this planet or beyond. It's so much more complex and multi-layered. The ET issue in itself is very complex if we for a moment put our attention towards those whose imperatives clash with our survival.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 281

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Even here most researchers are stopping at a certain point. They find an ET race through their research which quite obviously is pulling the strings of mankind and think "that's it". No, it's not. There are multiple races in control here; different factions of governments serve different ETs; physical and non-physical. Some of these races work together (something which is known in some cases, but not always--intelligence work is done on this as we speak) and some races work alone. Others are just bands or factions of an otherwise quite benevolent race and have thus given the benevolent ones bad reputation. It's complex, and one of my next tasks is to separate out ET species from each other to see who is working together with whom, what their imperatives are, and how that affect us humans. This needs to be done, if only to understand what is going to happen in the near future and learn who is who in the cosmic drama. Some may say it's unimportant if we anyway are going to create another type of reality, and that is true, but the levels of deception are many, and the more educated we can be, the better prepared, and we are less likely to being fooled, tempted or sidetracked.

8. Regaining Sovereignty of Mind No matter what I say in these papers, there are always those whom from pure excitement would like to welcome the gods once again because they are curious. Just beware of that the deception will be grandiose. People will feel they have no choice but to take sides in the battle. Others, who have had enough of fighting and violence (like myself) will choose neither side and go in another, totally different direction. But will the direction I'm choosing be safe and free from turmoil? Most probably not. We will all have our share of shake-ups, but it's our attitude towards what is happening that is the key. If something unwanted comes my way, instead of cursing and blaming something or somebody for it, I ask my Higher Self what the learning process is for me in all this chaos. What can I gain from what is happening? Any challenge will take me to a new level (just like it has thus far) and I will work on riding through the hard times on a wave of consciousness, duck and slide between the obstacles and come out finer than fine on the other end. But it's up to me; not some creator gods. It's my evolvement, and I am learning from my own mistakes and from what I'm studying and practicing. I do not need the Ša.A.M.i. to guide me. It's not that times will not be rough ahead of us; they will. A new financial collapse is around the corner, we will feel the effects from the Incoming Nibiru, alien controllers will furiously try to hold on to what they have, as will the humans serving them. People will "meet their demons" (karma) faster than they can imagine and have to be able to learn very quickly, or things will get overwhelming.

8.1 Owning Your Sexuality You have heard about it in the news; it's getting more and more common that these things come out; priests are doing it, government officials are doing it, common people are doing it! I am talking about incest, promiscuous behavior, sodomizing bodies, mother having sex with sons, fathers having sex with sons and daughters. Sexual slave trade...

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 282

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Where do you think this all comes from? You guess it; Anunnaki genes. This is exactly what the Anunnaki were engaged it, wasn't it? Among humans, it's more common than we want to believe. Many poor children have been abused sexually by family members. Pornography is everywhere, and by engaging in all this, or parts of it, will tune people into the lower astral planes where entities will happily attach to the person to live out unusual sexual acts and behavior. Then it becomes an addiction the person has a hard time getting rid of. It's supposed to be as hard as with any heavy drug, if not harder. Sexuality is very powerful. Free your mind, if you need to, from any degrading sexual behavior and don't participate in it if you want to evolve from here. The sexual act between two people who feel attraction to each other, who love each other and feel they are on a similar wavelength can accomplish a lot through the sexual act and through the orgasm. It's a merging of two souls, who share an extremely powerful sensation that affects their Higher Self and even cosmos as a whole. It's a portal that opens to other realms. Depending on how you use your sexuality, you will open your mind to realms that can be enormously supportive to your growth, or they can be very destructive. It's powerful either way. These are highly karmic times for humanity, and the struggle we're going through is our struggle. We need to live and learn. An old world is dying and is at the same time giving birth pains to a new. This is what we are experiencing, and no one else, who is not earth-bound, should interfere with this process, in my opinion. There may be exceptions from this rule, and perhaps someone is landing for a good reason, but I would have a lot of questions to ask this race before I accepted them as a part of our development. And when it really comes down to it, why would a positively oriented ET race land and present themselves to humanity in the news media or to the government? If an alien race is positive towards mankind they would not interfere with our process like that. It's my firm belief that if an alien landing by positively oriented ETs is presented by the mainstream media, it is not to be taken seriously--what they present is not going to be the truth.

8.2 The Migration into Virtual Realities Now, for the near future: things are going to change rapidly when comes to technology. Things are going to be built on holograms (holographic inserts into this reality); both openly so and covertly, sometimes we will not know the difference. The whole Universe (the Matrix) is a hologram in itself, but we're talking holograms within holograms within holograms here. We have already mentioned the Machine Kingdom, and the devices will be more sophisticated year by year for some time before it levels out. What is fashionable and astounding today is stone age next year--I am exaggerating a little bit, but you get the point. There's going to be great pressure to "keep up with technology" and go get the latest. The younger generation (many who are here because of technological karma from the Atlantic Era) will love this new technology, and show jaw-dropping brilliance in the speed of learning these new inventions, which of course are not new at all but given to the human government through TTP. It's like they were born with the knowledge. The older generation, on the other hand, will not be able to catch up, because their brains are

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 283

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

not "wired" to understand these things, and they will be lost in the new technological society. They will have no idea what their own kids and grandkids are talking about. Already now we see children disappear into the virtual world and they can walk around like zombies from place to place, while constantly texting or using some other new device. Many of them are not aware of their surroundings and do not appreciate what is growing around them; the animal life; the smells; the beauty of the real world. We will have a few very lost generations ahead of us, playing out their karma. They are all here to learn, and some of them will, while others will be part of the future where they are building the New Atlantis, based on advanced technology. Will our future generations be so lost that their consciousness totally disappears into the virtual reality that they can make the cartoons alive and live among them? Will they become the hero in their own computer game by selling their consciousness to the software they just bought? And what will the implications of this be? People are giving their minds away! The biological body they were born with becomes a machine which pushes buttons so that the consciousness can live in the virtual reality. People won't even need to have real sex. Instead, they disappear into the software and have cyber-sex; always the way they want it. At first, they may even experience orgasms within the software and in the biological body at once. Then, as this addiction continues--well, forget the biological body. I know this is unreal to many and too way out there for plenty, but step back and look at it; it is already starting to happen! Look at your children and compare them to your generation if you're 40 years old or above! How do you think the next generation will be? And the one after that? Still, it is our responsibility now, and parents and grandparents, having the knowledge and experience we do, to educate and raise our kids as kids and not as biological machines! If we let them loose, who's fault is it? Just because the neighbor's kid is sitting before a computer all day instead of being outside and play, would that make it okay for your kid to do the same? Show them the value of nature, of life in a biological body, the beauty of creation; show them who they are. If you do all this, and the kid still turns out to ignore you, he or she is probably having some great karmic issues that need to be resolved by the person himself, and there's not much you can do than to be there is necessary. If you as a parent is not being respected and taken seriously when you are giving advice that are life-sustaining, you shouldn't push it. They may be our children, but they are not us. Everybody is on their own path, facing their own obstacles in the learning process, and that can't successfully be interfered with. What we want to steer them away from is the strong influence from their environment; we want to teach them how to think for themselves and use critical thinking in their daily life (something that is not even taught in school anymore, although it was in the 1800s!). If that's not successful, at least we tried. As frustrating as it may be sometimes, we are not here to "save" people from themselves. We are here to grow and help others grow by being examples and be of service when help is asked for. However, help needs to be directed towards helps to self-help, and this is important. Too many people misunderstand the term service-toothers. They think that when they are spiritually evolved, they must do whatever another person asks for, even if it means it brings the helper down. No, no, no! We are not here to be taken advantage of, or let others drain our energy because they don't have much of their own. We always want the ones we help (family members or

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 284

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

others) to be willing to ask themselves the questions: "How can the situation I'm in benefit me? What can I learn from this experience? Why does it happen to me? How did I instigate it?" Whatever situation they are in, in which they need help, these are the questions you ultimately want them to ask themselves, once the urgent situation is handled. This is help to self-help! We are not here to sacrifice ourselves. Again, if the person ignores your advice, you need to tell him or her that you have already helped them in a way you believe would truly assist them. If that shows not to be helpful, you did what is expected of you; that's all you can do, and let go. I want this information out to the public, expressed in an as simple way as it is possible, because it is so incredibly important. There are others who have touched these subjects as well, but the information I've taken part of is getting quite technical about it, which defeats the whole purpose. We need to be clear in our communication so everybody can understand! I say it again and again. We can't sit in some lofty tower and use words that are buried deep down in the most exclusive dictionaries and think we can change the world. No one has time to sit and read complicated papers, which contain valuable information and only understand every second or third word. I started reading some interesting stuff from another author and researcher, whom had looked into our old ET history and the challenges we are facing when comes to artificial intelligence. However, it was written in a complicated language, which bothered me, but I continued. A few paragraphs down, the author admitted he was using complicated language, but told the reader to "suck it up" more or less, and use a dictionary. I stopped reading right there. That's the height of arrogance and authors and researchers with this kind of attitude are wasting our time. Don't bother with them, and find something that resonates and is readable instead.

9. The Collapse of Time What we are seeing now is time collapsing into itself. Timelines are merging, and this is affecting everything on our Earth, all parallel Earths and all probable Earths. The Mayan people, whom had extended knowledge from their connection with the Pleiades, Sirius/Nibiru and other star systems, ended their calendar at Winter Solstice, 2012. It has been interpreted as "The End of the World", or "The End of the World As We Know it". These are indeed the End Times, but not the end of everything. It's the end of a cosmic cycle, which lasts for about 26,000 years (a Great Year). When this happens, energies merge, time is speeding up to finally "collapse", leading to the end of a cycle or an era, and a new begins. The transition is not going to be an easy one for many people; especially for those who refuse to let go of the old. They will be the ones with the toughest challenges, and many, many people will not make it through. Of course, we are all spiritual beings, so we can't really die, but our biominds can. When time collapses, new realities will be born out of the old, which is also the meaning of the symbolic Phoenix Bird, who raised out of its own ashes. Out of the ashes will spring a planet split in different factions, where like-minded stick together and create their own reality. The rebirth will be gradually, and not in form of any Rapture or such, where people wake up one day and are transferred to some lofty

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 285

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Heaven. No one will transfer us anywhere; no God will call the chosen ones and condemn the rest to Hell. We "earn" our reality by how much we have learnt and how flexible we were to change our belief systems. The latter is the most important, because when it all comes down to it, it is all about belief systems. Like when you were a child, perhaps you could create all these imaginary worlds inside of yourself and when you read a good book, you could identify and create your own reality in your mind, expanding on the concept in the book. This is vibration, this is creation; the power of the mind!

Figure 6: The Phoenix Bird, symbolizing death and rebirth

This is why it's so important to be sovereign and let no one else be in charge of you and your mind. No one owns you and no one has the right to force you to do something against your will. It's part of the initiation to be able to master this. There are old benevolent creator gods who are watching the evolution of the species they once created. They know that there are those who are ready to move to a parallel Earth to create a new world, with new memes (belief systems) where their lives are of higher moral and ethical value than the one they leave; where nature and man becomes one in symbiosis, and plants, animals and humans can interact and communicate. It's not going to be a utopia in the sense that there are no obstacles or counter-intentions. We are still in need of such things, but the challenges will be on another level and more positively oriented. For those who choose this new reality, which we call the 4th Density, there is no longer any need for extreme evil to work as catalysts for us to learn. Instead we learn from each other and our environment, because we will be more psychic and telepathic. Those who can comprehend this kind of reality, where life is less serious and less dense,

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 286

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

and are picturing it in their minds, thinking that this is their new home, are ready to move on. Now, if you are one of those, you already have raised your vibration above the masses and your task is now to remain the "Keeper of Frequency" to the best of your ability. Claim your mind as your own, keep your dreams alive and expand on them. Be your own artist and create your reality inside yourself and paint it on a giant 4th Density pallet. Put no effort there, just light thoughts containing love and passion and pictures of what you want. If the world around you is starting to fall apart, learn not to be afraid and not to feel anxious about it. Know that you are safe, like an island in a stormy ocean. Ride the wave and welcome the changes, because if you learn from what is coming your way and have the attitude that this is a high learning curve, but an exciting one, and see opportunities in all events; if you can do this, you are a safe haven for yourself and others. Feel joy and pleasure, just like you could when you were a child, and play! Children, until they get really caught up in the school system, are highly multi-dimensional and vibrate above the frequency fence. That's why it's so important for the PTB to have mind controlled parents who tell them how to live within the frequency fence and get trapped.

Figure 6: Deuter, German New Age Composer

Have fun, in spite of what is happening. Do what excites you. If life gets overwhelming at times, do something else for a while which you normally feel is fun to get a chance to discharge yourself. You may be tired and feel resistance from doing so, but once you've started, the positive energies connected with the activity will start taking over. And meditation and breathing exercises are incredible tools. Listen to the most uplifting music you know; be it classical or some of the New Age (the German New Age musician, Deuter is a great inspiration). I know we live busy lives, because it's the sign of the times, but when the wheels starts spinning faster and faster, what we, who understand what is happening, need to do is to slow down by any means. Don't get caught up and swallowed by the pace of your environment. There are exercises for this too, which I will write down in the "Cognitive Section" of this website. Again, I want to emphasize that machines and technology are not bad in themselves. All civilizations come to the point where we are right now. We have developed technology of which some can enhance us and help us through the day, but now it's

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 287

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

time to find the balance. The trick is to be aware enough to understand that machines have their own consciousness, and if we develop them to be more powerful than us, society will take a direction which for most people is not desirable. Today we are on this dangerous road where tomorrow must have a better developed technology than today. Instead of being all about raising consciousness, society is all about raising the level of technology, and that's where the path gets dangerous. If we knew where to stop and went back to nature to a large degree, we would be fine and would have passed our initiation as human beings, but instead we're in for a split of humanity and of Earth. This is not the first time this has happened to a planet and its beings, but it's a sign that we are playing with tools we are not mature enough to handle. In the universe there are rules for machines, believe it or not. With too much machine life loses its vitality. It's not that it's wrong, but do we want to be cyborgs? When you have problems with a body part today, they give you medicine or a heart transplant; a living heart from another human being who donated that body part. Tomorrow they exchange your injured or diseased body part with machine parts. And if you are genetically prone to getting breast cancer, they may just as well exchange your breasts with a machine body part which can't get cancer. It will be very absurd to the extreme, but the research is there already today. No one out there in the Multiverse is going to judge a Machine World, but it's a world out of balance. Like the Pleiadians say: "If you build a world out of chocolate, guess what? It's going to melt" (Pleiadian Lecture, October 16-17, 2010: "The Great Recess Expands" CD# 3, Track 9) .

10. The War Over Real Estate and the Human Factor The reader has probably had the feeling that this paper is building up to something, and it is. We have mentioned the Ša.A.M.i. and the Royal Family from their species, who came down to Earth and then were called the Anunnaki (those who from Heaven to Earth came), or the Nephilim, the Fallen Angels of the Bible. I want to tackle this subject from many angles, because with time, I believe more and more that many of our ET problems may actually stem from them and branch out from them. They are what we call "the spiders in the web". I am not saying all ET problems we have are the Anunnaki's responsibility, but still, they are tricking us into merging into a New World Order and a One World Government. Of course, they tell us it's not going to be what "conspiracy theorists" claim, that it's going to be a dictatorship, but that it's going to be Heaven on Earth! Read the Bible, it's all in there. Here is part of the story of what really happened when the Anunnaki came, according to the Pleiadians. According to Sitchin and others, Alalu, the former King of Ša.A.M.e. (Nibiru), was fleeing for his life after a coup on the home planet where Anu took over and became King of Ša.A.M.e. What is either not told in the cuneiform stone tablets from Sumeria (or Sitchin withheld it), is that Earth was not inhabited only with primitive human beings, animals and plants. This was a Living Library under construction, and the creator gods were here at the time. Some of them were insect-like in appearance, others were reptilian-like or bird-like. The Pleiadian renegade group, whom are channeled by Barbara Marciniak, are descending from the bird-like and the reptilians. If we look at the drawings of ancient cultures in Egypt, South America, and North America, we will see signs of the birds and the reptiles. Why do you think Native

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 288

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Indians wear feathers? Also, I've noticed something else that the reader may, or may not, have seen too. If you live in the Western World and are surrounded by mostly white people, you can see that we look slightly different; some people are bird-like in their structure, with long limps, thin bone structure, with quick, bird-like movements. I've found these people (and I know a few) being very open and spiritual in nature; often loners because they think outside the box, considered a little "weird" or "off" by the mainstream. Then we have others who look more reptilian-like, others look like frogs, bears, cats, dogs...we have all kinds of features, and it's very interesting to notice. The ancient creator gods were many in numbers and came from many different star systems and galaxies. If we are observant, we can see their features and traits in humans today, because it's embedded in the DNA. The Asian people, who are more of a "hive" community, were seeded to a large degree by the Grays who work together with the Ša.A.M.i. We can clearly see the resemblance in their outlook.

Figure 7: American Indian dressed in feathers, recreating the appearance of their old ancestors from the stars--the Pleiadians.

At one time, birds and reptiles worked together, other times they fought. We like to think of creator gods as some angelic beings who do no wrong and were next to some perfect God in appearance and in nature. This was not the case; some were warlike, others peaceful, some were both. Like we discussed before, just because

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 289

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

someone has a great knowledge, it doesn't mean they have great spiritual awareness. The Central Race and those working directly with them are almost perfectly spiritually evolved, but those who came later may not always be.

Figure 8: I showed this picture before, taken from my old friend, Wiolawa's website, http://wiolawapress.com . See how many different kinds of creator gods you can find carved into this rock formation, then come back to it another day and see how many more you can find.

When a larger group of Anunnaki landed to take over Real Estate Earth, due to its incredible resources, which were both native to the planet, and had been seeded and planted by the original creator gods, there were, as we've mentioned before, already highly evolved humans on the planet, living together with other, less evolved beings. These highly evolved humans were also interacting with the original creator gods in a peaceful and constructive way. They did not know war at that point. The Anunnaki brought down war to the Living Library and had soon taken over the real estate. As we know, they were/are brilliant geneticists of their own, but there were those who wanted them to be expelled from the "creator god club" due to that they didn't value life. They are, like the Pleiadians say, uninformed, which means they don't understand the whole picture of reality, in spite of their knowledge of DNA and how to seed a planet. At least two vital things are missing in their own biomind; true love and compassion. These two terms have blended together in this species into passion. They seem unable to feel deep love, not to mention unconditional love. They are, what we call in metaphysics, service-to-self. Anunnaki women, like Inanna, is a typical example. She was very sexual and passionate, but her sexuality and love was only in service to self. These beings feed off our emotions! This is one big secret they never told us, and not even today, when they are directly in contact with certain human scientists on this planet, do they tell us this: the Ša.A.M.i. have, if we are to believe the Pleiadians, set up devices on Earth that can broadcast and magnify the emotional turmoil on this planet. That turmoil is sent to them, and it sustains them in some way. I have reason to believe that this species have outposts elsewhere in this solar

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 290

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

system and that some of these outposts are still guarded by them in real time. One of these outposts is the Moon. Sitchin even says that the Moon is not native to this solar system, but is one of Nibiru's old moons, which was dropped from its orbit around the huge Red Planet during one of its crossings. Therefore, it shouldn't come as a surprise if the Ša.A.M.i. claim our Moon as theirs. One of the unofficial Apollo missions filmed the following on the Moon; something that looks like a city, but I have reason to believe they are giant "antennas", and that they have everything to do with monitoring Earth. It would be interesting to see if we could find a corresponding device somewhere on Earth.

Figure 9: The "Moon City". An Anunnaki monitoring device? (Click on image to start the video).

We certainly have a lot of other clues around us that we are so used to that we don't even reflect over them. For example, take countries like Pakistan, and Anatolia (old name for Turkey); and these are just two examples. What does An stand for? It stands for An or Anu, the King of the Anunnaki.

11. Opening of Stargates to Let the Ša.A.M.i. in In 2011, there are still people on Earth who treat these people as Gods with capital "G". They even call them Gods (or Götter in German) and they can't wait until they come back, so we can experience Heaven on Earth. And these people are reading history; the same history I have read; coming to totally different conclusions. Neil Freer is absolutely correct when he says we urgently need to break the "godspell" [6]. These are extraterrestrials, not Gods. That's lesson number one. Lesson number two is that they are not our creators! I believe we are dangerously mislead by Marduk, Ningishzidda, the Enlil and others of the clan that they created us out of poorly developed apes, enhanced our DNA and thusly sped up our evolution with perhaps a million years[7]. No, I believe it's the other way around; they halted our progress and got us stuck in Third Density after had been multidimensional. This is a very

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 291

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

important distinction, because if we believe that they are our creators and we owe them our intelligence and our awareness, we are on thin ice and exactly where they may want us! In order for Ša.A.M.i. to land, they apparently need a portal/stargate/wormhole to enter and leave. That's one of the reasons why they nuked the Sinai Spaceport about 2,500 BC. They did not want Marduk and his cohorts to use it (at least that's the official story); hence they were more or less trapped here on this planet. As we have noticed, there has been a lot of turmoil in the Middle East the last few decades. George HW Bush attacked Saddam Hussein in the early 1990s, and Hussein was taken out a decade later, although he had nothing to do with 9/11. So what is this unsettlement in the Middle East about on a higher level? It's about the old Sumerian artifact and the old libraries which were in the possession of Saddam Hussein. On an even higher level it's about who wins the Sinai Spaceport, and who is going to reopen the Sinai Stargate to let the gods in. On remote, this is also what the modern Thule Society is doing, as described in my earlier book, "The Myth Around Supriem David Rockefeller" (2009) with the vibration from sound/music. Not all Anunnaki are bad people, but by and large, it doesn't matter. Not all Americans are bad either, although it may have looked that way in the eyes of the North Vietnamese people, when the US soldiers came storming in. The Anunnaki are part of our reality; they may have done things to us that we don't appreciate, and we don't need to fight their wars once again. What we need to do is to realize they are real, and we need to forgive them and move on, not to interact with them again at this point. I am telling people all this to spread the information, but also to ask you to use the 6 Heart Virtues to forgive and feel compassion for this part of ourselves. If we hold grudges against anything, it will persist until we let go. But before we let go, we need to understand what it is we need to let go of. That's why information is crucial and withholding of the same so destructive. We may also want to forgive ourselves for the involvement we may have had in creating the situation we're in, because it's all about karma now. If nothing else, it's old Atlantis revisited, and especially people who are incarnated here in the U.S. of A. today have karmic connections to Atlantis and Mu. When we forgive ourselves and others, we really do it for our own sake. Then, if something positive happens on the other side, and those we forgive somehow respond positively, that's a bonus. Still, this is not necessary for it to work. These are highly karmic times in general--not just for Americans, of course, and some people simply need to live out their karma and welcome these beings, calling them gods, or like the German Thule, "die Götter". Personally, I feel I have come to terms with the karma involving this species and need to move on. I don't feel angry, revengeful, or negative towards them at all, and I don't look up to them as gods or "higher beings" either, and I am definitely not afraid of them. I am aware of that they will return to Earth on a probable timeline, and on that timeline it will happen in the next few generations if not earlier, but I for one want to move on, creating a timeline that is sustaining another reality, another frequency. I am not talking about escapism; I have no interest in that, because I know that if that's the case, it will come back to me, and my reality that I want will not manifest. This is why it's so important to forgive, let go and move on and to clear our karma. We have a huge karmic connection with these beings on a mass consciousness scale. Those who are

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 292

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

fighting over the stargate to win the gods over are playing the same old game over again, repeating what should already be left behind as experience. But like I said, these are highly karmic times. In this time period, where timelines merge and time is speeding up, we are like magnets for experiences in our perceived past and future that are yet not fully lived out and completed. The Pleiadians go so far as to say that the Anunnaki are drawn back here at this time because of the Divine Plan (Marciniak [1992]: "Bringers of the Dawn", p.34). Contrary to the information the Ša.A.M.i. ambassador told LPG-C in a LINK Plenum Meeting, that they are coming to rescue humankind, the Pleiadians go on saying: The creator gods (the Ša.A.M.i., Wes' comment) are coming back to raid you again because they don't want to starve, They understand that there is "system busting" going on through you, so they are here to create greater havoc and fear, to fight once again for this territory. Their food source is important to them. They are losing control of the planet, so they are going back to their prime portal in the Middle East, where their nest is located underneath the ground, to create fear and chaos. The Original Planners wish to bring freedom of choice with respect to frequency back to this planet. The gods who have been in charge here for this last period of evolution use frequency modulation and do not allow freedom of choice. They rob your psychic energy by giving you a false picture of reality in every way that you could possibly image. We are not saying these gods are bad. We are simply informing you of events that take place and of how innocently you become involved in these events. You do not realize that these situations are setups to get you to think or feel a certain way and to vibrate with a certain consciousness. (Marciniak [1992]: "Bringers of the Dawn", p.34). This was back in 1992, and what the Pleiadians said then is slowly but surely happening. Which version are we supposed to believe? That of the Ambassador, or that of the Pleiadians? They pretty much contradict each other. Well, for me the choice is fairly easy. If you want to investigate a person, you look at his/her background, which includes patterns and reoccurring events. If we look at the Anunnaki and their involvement on Earth, the patterns and recurring events are not flattering to say the least. I published a summary of Sitchin's translations in earlier papers, but everyone really needs to read the whole series of books to get the picture, although, "The Wars of Gods and Men" is shocking enough. These gods were ruthless, lacking all traces of compassion, understanding of others, and love. They chopped off each others penises and testicles so the perceived enemies within their own lines could not mass produce anymore; and they are responsible for the murder and genocide of the human race many times over. So, is it possible that they come back here to clear their karma? It's certainly possible that this is what they intend, but from the Intelligence Gathering on them it's highly unlikely that they understand the scope of what they're up for. Their karma has yet to hit them, and I do not want to be around them while they are playing it out. The wars, my friends, that they were so fast to create in the past, are not over.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 293

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Those creator gods who rearranged the human species are returning. Some of them are already here (emphasis not in original) (Marciniak [1992]: "Bringers of the Dawn", p.25). The Pleiadians told us already in 1992 about the 300+ Anunnaki on the planet right now, something LPG-C and others found out later.

Figure 10: Nabu, Marduk's son

Here is more from what I feel and believe is very close to the true story of ancient times: The creator gods who have been ruling this planet have the ability to become physical, though mostly they exist in other dimensions. They keep Earth in a certain vibrational frequency while they create emotional trauma to nourish themselves. [...] The food for some beings is consciousness. [...] Your emotions are food for others. [...] Before the raid, you had tremendous abilities. The original biogenetic example of the human was given incredible information, was interdimensional, and could do many things. When those creator gods raided, they found that the local species knew too much. The local species had abilities that were too much like those who were passing themselves off as God. (Marciniak [1992]: "Bringers of the Dawn", pp.26).

12. Pain and Sex and Pornography Addiction The Anunnaki created great stigma in humanity by punishing us. We still do this with our own children when we don't know better--we punish them to get our will instead of having them work with us to create effects on a higher, more positive level. Just like here on Earth, the visitors created hierarchies to punish. That was their service-

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 294

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

to-self way of manipulating reality, and in our usual manner, we copied what the gods did and we got hierarchies on Earth as well to control and punish those we thought were less worthy. Pain got into the picture, and because no one wants to experience pain we became afraid of being punished, and when the gods started using humans for sexual pleasure which included pain, we have the following three attributes; pain, sex, and fear. Branching out from this we now have pornography, child pornography, sodomy and sadism/masochism. Sex, which was originally the stargate to the cosmos and the tight connection between two human beings, spiritually and physically, has now become perverted and associated with pain and something "bad". In certain religions they are even telling us that sex is very sinful and should only be done in dark rooms, under the cover, with the purpose to create children. This is very destructive thinking, instigated by very sick and degraded people. Today, it's culminated with all these government people and others in respected positions in society, who have been busted with child pornography, incest, sex with minor of both sexes, sex slave trade and the list goes on. We're once again back to Atlantis, where this was common-trade as well, when the gods were still here and practiced all this in abundance. We learnt from our "masters". We are sexual beings and we need sex, not only to reproduce. The need for sex is embedded within our DNA. We can suppress it, but when we do, we usually don't do it easily, and if we manage, it feels like a sacrifice. Some people, due to cultural beliefs, think one should stay in a monogamous relationship and/or marriage with an intention to stay with the same life partner until we die, when possible. This is a very noble thought and if it works out, it's probably a very good thing. You get to know the partner in and out and if you have the right attitude to sex and know what it does on higher frequencies, you can reach the Heavens together by experimenting with it. Your energies will merge with time, and not only during the sex act, and you have the chance to grow tremendously together. However, here is the catch. Societies which value marriage before everything else and look down upon divorce and relationships without being married contribute to the old "pain and sex" punishment doctrine. There are a high percentage of people in marriages who don't have sex anymore because they don't love each other, or they've grown away from each other. They still stay together, even when the children are grown, because they're "supposed to". Due to their belief in this, they become sexually frustrated, feel they miss out, and at the same time have bad conscience why they don't have sex with their partner (pain and sex). Instead, when we feel we have grown in different directions and nothing can be done to turn it around, we must move on. It is the same thing that is happening on a global scale right now; the old must die to give birth to the new. We are here to experience life in 3-D and not to get stuck without learning. Find a new partner who meets your frequency and start anew. All breakups are painful and heartbreaking on different levels, but the reward in the long run is well worth it. Believe me, I talk from experience! When two people no longer match each others frequencies and the person with the lower frequency is unwilling to learn, consider that marriage over and move on.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 295

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Then we have the category of people who live in a society which values monogamy, but they want to break the pattern and have sex with different people while still being married; even engage in group sex. This was quite common in the 1970s. It's good to break patterns and experience something new to see where it leads to. However, old values started kicking in after a while, and jealousy came into the picture, not to speak of STDs (sexually transmitted diseases). Many kept a straight face, pretending to feel good about the promiscuous behavior all around them, when in fact they felt more and more lonely and lesser and lesser loved. People never got the chance to grow together and feel safety and stability with each other when everything was just casual and there was very little genuine caring involved. One of the most destructive thing we can do is to engage ourselves in pornography. Unfortunately, it's everywhere in the western culture, and it is addictive. People who've started seem to not be able to stop using it, and with time it becomes more important than having sex with a partner. Pornography addiction skyrocketed because of the Internet. Not only is it addictive, messes up our sex-lives, separate ourselves sexually from others, but it is also of such low vibration that the user and/or abuser stands a big chance to be subjected to entity (demon) possession. Body-less beings in the lower astral planes love the sexual energies and to experience them, because you need a body to do it. The user of pornography, when s/he gets sexually aroused and gets an orgasm, they open up portals through which these lower astral entities can enter and attach, just like black magicians attach entities through certain magic rituals, when the open portals for powerful demons to come in. At least the magicians know what they're doing (most of the time), but the pornography user normally doesn't. The attached entity then uses the mind/body of the person who uses pornography and makes it into an addiction--it can become very destructive and degraded after a while. So, for the sake of the growth of your biomind and spiritual awareness, stay out of that and find fulfillment in other ways. Whether you have a partner or not, it's nothing wrong with masturbating, but don't do it while looking at pornography. Other cultures are used to having sex with anybody at anytime, whenever they feel like it--children or adults doesn't matter. If a a child is old enough to have sexual feelings, it's okay to experiment. This is more common in tribes who live outside of our type of society. They have a more genuine caring and love for each other as a group (tribe) and can still feel the closeness with their partner. I bring all these different beliefs up, because that's all they are--beliefs. But when you put a belief system there for others to adopt and insert pain and fear into it, you will get serious problems. The Anunnaki knew this too well, and used it both on us and within their own hierarchies. In this today's world of functional insanity, people in Congress, the Senate, the Office of the Presidency, or the House of the Pope go to work in the morning and watch porn on the Internet, physically abuse fellow employees or children sexually without thinking twice about it, believing they will never get caught. On the other end of the spectrum we have the common people who believe these insane persons who are supposed to lead our nations and our religious institutions are working for the best of humanity. Although the blinders slowly come off many people's eyes, it's still common belief. We can not discern who is the bad guy and who is the good guy anymore.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 296

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Way back in ancient days, when we chose leaders of a tribe or a smaller community, we chose them by reading their energy fields, not by how slick they were with their tongues and who could read a prewritten manuscript and who couldn't. We have suppressed our psychic abilities and forgotten how to be multi-dimensional. We once again need to learn how to read energy fields and stop electing people to represent us who are functionally insane. Then, when our liberties are taken away, one by one, we can't really blame them, because we were the ones who elected them. They just do what they intended to do in the first place, with our blessings. I know that not everybody in high position is elected, but we placed them there anyway through our inactions. Linear time was something we agreed upon together as an experiment, but it was never meant to have such traumatic twists and turns to it. Almost immediately, we were taken advantage of and controlled by those who don't want us to evolve and become more powerful than them. Believe it or not; albeit we perceive our reality as linear, which means we have cut off most of our multi-dimensional existence, this 3D experience will make us very powerful once we've regained our multidimensionality. The controllers know it and want to keep us stuck in this reality for as long as it is possible; like pressing the lid down on a dish that is boiling over. Our reality is falling apart; it's easy to see. It can't sustain itself anymore, and that's because 3-D reality and linear time have outlived themselves. For many of us, the experiment is over and it's time to move on. However, now there are those who are setting up the beginning of a new Experiment without our consent, knowing that the inevitable is going to happen; people are going to escape from this reality no matter what the controllers try to do about it. So instead they are trapping curious souls in a new reality, which is the Machine Kingdom and Virtual Reality. This is the new prison for those who haven't had enough of entrapments already. This is the new form of control. Feel a need to be part of it? There are many young souls incarnated on Earth as well, and they are eager to take a ride through a free will 3-D universe cycle, and by all means, that is what they may need to experience; there is nothing wrong with that. It's anyone's choice, but I know I'm ready to ride the Phoenix and be born again out of the ashes of the old symbolic bird. That's why I am living in these times.

13. Numbers and Game Masters I am not in need to live another cycle of time where the Anunnaki come down "with our best interests in mind" to create new laws to make us survive better (after we've been significantly reduced through wars, disease, manmade and natural disasters) but with the real purpose for us to keep on being minions to the gods. I don't need any more bloody sacrifices to the Overlords, whether it's in form of animals or humans. I need not see how men are forced to give our women away to mate with sexually aroused aliens, who don't care if she's you're wife, girlfriend, daughter, or friend. I don't need to hear my neighbors say, "as long as we do what they want us to do, we're fine" to make me feel better. Why do you think the gods wanted bloody sacrifices to take place? For food, of course. For food and for worship. Slice a virgin open, who has pure blood, innocent and still "childish", and the gods would come to spice the sacrifice and eat. Same

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 297

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

with animals. We are food source to them in many ways; physically and metaphysically. And blood is life force and when blood is spilled in quantities (like in war, which is a sacrifice on a massive scale--someone's having a party) or in conjunction with fear and terror, it sometimes puts signals out through the dimensions. Same thing with the Global Elite and their occult human sacrifice, done on certain days with astrological significance, or based on sacred geometry-numbers! They are obsessed with numbers. Why? Because numbers have meanings and power attached to them. The physical Universe is built on physics; it's in the word. The Zodiac's position in relation to Earth affects us here and if you know the numbers and can add, you know when to do what to get the greatest effect. You don't learn these things in school. Here's a little exercise you may, or may not have heard of before. This one only works for this year, 2011:  

Take the last two digits of your birth year (if you're born in 1965, you take 65) Add these two digits to the age you're going to be this year--in 2011. Let's say you're going to be 46, so that would be 65+46=111.

It doesn't matter what year you're born and how old you're going to be, it's going to add up to 111 for everybody on this planet. The numbers themselves create a signature. The Global Elite love this number, and it's also said to be the number of Lucifer, the "Fallen Angel", or Ea, the Enki in the Sumerian records. One is also the Beginning, but you can't have a beginning (a one) without a zero; the 1 is the phallus and the 0 is the womb. Three one's add up to 3, which creates equilibrium (balance) and is also a Christian number (the Trinity). When you start playing around with numbers, you hear words that are telling a story. So, from 111 we get e.g. "Trinity", "male energy", "Lucifer" and there is more. In this point in this this sort of "code" is enveloping the planet. A mathematician would discover the numbers and find it to be a phenomenon and ask him/herself "what are the odds for this to happen, et cetera, but it has to do with Game Masters and Master Numbers, and yes--they do mean something and can be used both for predictions and other purposes. So let's join in with the mathematician here and ask ourselves, "what are the odds for this numeric combination to happen to 7 billion people at the same time?" Also, it happens just in time for the alignment with the Galactic Center and the end of the nano-second. We created the numbers on this planet (these are Arabic numbers), symbolizing a beginning, a continuation and an end. But little do we understand how something like this can take off and create the most mysterious effects. Rest assured there is a "bigger hand" at play here as well. Game Masters are often orchestrating reality in a numeric fashion. How many of you have, like myself, often found yourselves looking at the clock at exactly 3:33, 1:11, 7:11; 9:11, 3:45, 4:44 etc? What are the odds for that? Especially when it happens frequently, as it may during the nano-second. It's the play with Higher Consciousness and we are now on a higher level of the game. When these things occur in your life, smile and say "Hello! I noticed, and I greet you! What can I learn from this? What can you teach me?" And see what comes back at you. If you ask, you always get an answer in one form or another. Be perceptive.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 298

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

14. Remote Viewing Within the Military I started this journey with the Physics Papers, and one of the first things I mentioned there was Remote Viewing. This is a big deal within the Military, and Dr. A.R. Bordon, before he left, was the Executive Director of the American Association of Remote Viewers[8], which means he was in charge of training people such as Ingo Swann and Harold E. Putnoff, both former OT III Scientologists. I am not implying that Dr. Bordon was a Scientologist, because he never was, but OT III scientologists especially, were trained in remote viewing by L. Ron Hubbard in the late 1960s-early 1970s and seemed to be doing well once they defected from the Church and were recruited by the CIA and the Military. Remote Viewing, as we have discussed earlier, is much more sophisticated today among scientists like the LPG-C, and I am not sure how much it has advanced in the government the last 40 years. Apparently, according to a Pleiadian lecture, ("Awakening to the Sun", August 13 & 14, 2010, CD #2, Track 7-8), remote viewers do no longer have to RV (remote view) into the future, because ETs have given them devices through the TTP (Technology Transfer Programs) which can show the future similar to what Figure 11: Galadriel's Mirror Galadriel did in J.R.R. Tolkien's, The Lord of the Rings, but instead of using a well, they now use a little device they flip over in their hand and it shows a screen, visualizing the future. This device has gained some status within the CIA and the Military, and it's now being used more and more. However, these people are like children playing with power tools they don't understand the first thing about. The future they are seeing is one version of it, and often the version they want to see, or the version they fear. The ETs who gave them this device (and the Pleiadians are implying, covertly, that it's the Earthbound Anunnaki) didn't do it to help us out. If you think about it, it's quite a dangerous device. If the people who watch the screen project a future that is not necessarily going to happen, they could make it happen! Atlantis revisited!

15. How Do We Counter the Global Elite and the Hostile ET Presence? In November-December of 1998, I launched an website which became very popular. It is still online today, called Illuminati News (http://illuminati-news.com/). It's a giant database, describing the reality we live in; who is in charge, what they are in charge over; what they want for the future of mankind; their ET involvement; the corruption within the music and art industries; the past, which built up to the present we now live in, and much more. It's a mix of my own articles and that of others I've found of great value, collected over time and posted there. By reading from the articles, the reader learns more and more about the world around them; things never told in the Media, in school, or in mainstream society. Not only because of my website, but thanks to thousands of others on the Internet, and books that have been written by very conscious authors, people have woken up.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 299

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

The problem has always been that when people start realizing they've been taken advantage of and deceived and lied to by those they trusted, they sometimes become very angry. They want to go out and demonstrate, build militia groups whose purpose is to either kill government officials or infiltrate governments from within, or "peaceful groups" who want to find peaceful soulutions to the problems. This is understandable; people want to do something about it. However, many good souls have played right into the hands of the Global Elite, unwittingly. People who demonstrate in the street are following Global Elite protocol. Then the Police force can provoke the demonstrators and create a fight, and the Media pick up on it and report about "violent" demonstrations outside the White House. It also shows it's useless to protest. The purpose is to create apathy, so people say that demonstrations don't work--there's nothing we can do. Others are overtly violent in their attempts to overthrow the oppressors. They create an even worse effect and can even provoke Martial Law if the government think it's appropriate. What most people who get involved in resistance groups like these mentioned above are not aware of that many of them are created and/or infiltrated by something called "agent provocateurs"[9], who pretend to be against the government, but are of the government, and they gather people together who could be a potential danger to the current Order. It's a perfect way to get the names of these people and be aware of their whereabouts. I would say there is no resistance group of any importance that is not infiltrated by agent provocateurs. These agents may even suggest that the group uses direct violence against government officials, and before the group is acting out, the same agent is warning the persons the group is attacking and also make sure that police and military is ready to take counter-actions. Afterwards, all group members could potentially be tracked down and arrested. We can go on, but people want to know what to do about all this. "How do we fight it?" is the question I get the most. My answer is simple: don't fight what you don't want; instead, create what you want! If you resist something, whether you fight it physically or in your mind, you will make what you resist even stronger. The soulution is to acknowledge that th negativity is there, but instead of fighting it, you focus entirely on what you want and start creating that instead. This is the ultimate soul-u-tion! You can't fight for peace; I think it was David Icke who said, "you peace for peace". He is absolutely right! It's nothing strange with this. If you think it's not working, think again. This is energy at work; it's science! You attract what you put your attention on; it's as easy as that! Have you ever sat in a break room together with a team of coworkers? They often discuss what they read in the paper the same morning, and it's more often than not about war, terror, criminality, and other negative news. They all think it's horrible and there is always someone saying, "look what this world has come to", or "what a horrible world we live in". The truth is that we live in it because we project it on a mass scale. This is why the Media are there in the first place. They keep the reality in place that the Global Elite want. And we continue projecting their visions by agreeing upon their reality. Instead the discussion in the break room could go: "see what they try to create for us? Fortunately, I am not going to agree with that sort of thing. It is

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 300

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

not happening in my reality, so I am just going to continue creating mine and let them play their games. I'm not going to be part of it by spreading their lies and terror around and solidify them".

15.1 David and Goliath We have to cruise smartly. I have learnt by practice how to create my own reality within myself and a safe environment around me. I feel like a big rock in a stormy ocean, and this rock is growing to become a mountain. Don't think you can fight the forces that are coming, and the ones that are here. They are way too powerful; we are not prepared for that, and like I said in the earlier section; it's not the solution anyway. We would feel like David in the biblical story of David and Goliath. Not only are many of these being giants from our perspective, but they are also much better than us to manage energy and light in particular. This is why it's so important for all of us to alter our reality so we can dance between the vibrations of frequency, or flip into the reality we want to experience.

Figure 12: David and Goliath

The Era of Worship has to stop. Worshipping Gods have been one of the roots to all evil. There is no God to worship; the only God there is, is us and our unity and ONENESS with cosmos, the Multiverse and the Prime Creator, of whom we are extensions. Is there something bigger than the Prime Creator? Actually, there probably is. The Prime Creator, as we see IT, is still learning. Even IT (and we) may be part of something even bigger, which in its turn is part of something bigger and so on. It's logical, because that's how everything seems to be structured in the Multiverse. We are now able to perceive an All That Is, whom we are part of, but if we can perceive it, it's not big enough. There is most certainly something bigger than the Prime Creator, which we can't understand on our level of consciousness.

Our task now is to build our reality from Inside, and not as receptors of the outside reality; the hologram created by other-selves, by agreements and deception. The truth is Inside and always has been. Once you have been able to consciously build your Inner World, you will find happiness in yourself and excitement, hope, unconditional love, light and understanding. Then use your insights when you are operating in the Outer World, and you will inspire others. This is the ultimate serviceto-others! Why? Because of the ripple effect. You will spread your energies exponentially, and many will pick up on them, consciously or subconsciously, but you will be the spark to their own awakening.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 301

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Be the Keeper of Frequency, the stable rock in the stormy ocean no matter what is happening in the outside world. This is extremely important. Don't let bad news bring you down! It is part of the initiation not to take in negativity that is manufactured to bring you down, and it's crucial for ascension that you learn this. Train yourself to do it every hour of the day! To be able to, you first need to have confidence in yourself and what it is you're building. While you learn, you will be operating more on light and love; light being the frequency of information and love that of creation. You achieve stability in this by knowing and understanding who you are, and that you are capable of creating worlds and realities inside yourself, and these images and energies can be shared with others by you just being yourself. This is not science fiction; it's how we build a New World!

Notes: [1] "Dialogue with 'Hidden Hand', Self-Proclaimed Illuminati Insider", http://illuminatinews.com/00363.html [2] "The Great Pyramid - A Chronograph in Stone", http://ezinearticles.com/?The-Great-Pyramid---AChronograph-in-Stone&id=3263290 [3] Wes Penre (2011): "PFC Paper #2: The Remarkable Michael Lee Hill Case". [4] Some may say, in the case of the Anunnaki, that it also has to do with preserving their bloodlines, but it is still fear-based. If you are fighting others to show you are of the most powerful bloodline, there is certainly a big dosage of fear involved. [5] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Web_Bot [6] http://www.neilfreer.com/SRPAGE2O.html [7] Penre/Bordon correspondence, 2010. [8] See Bordon's biography at the end of this article: http://www.agoracosmopolitan.com/home/Frontpage/2007/12/25/02043.html [9] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Agent_provocateur

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 302

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

(Soulution Section) Soulution Paper #3: Expansion on the Living Library, DNA, and Ascension by Wes Penre, Friday, August 7, 2011 @ 5:15 AM

1. Borrowing From, and Returning to, the Living Library We live in a Universe which is a Free-Will Zone, which means that anyone is allowed to do whatever they want to do in order to contribute to the overall Experiment. The Living Library was set up as a giant peaceful experiment, where virtually everything that's growing and developing in form of plant life, animal- and human life were seeded onto this planet during different time periods. The flora and the fauna come from all over the Universe; not only from our galaxy. Our planet is not the only Living Library in the Universe, but certainly one of the richest and most beautiful. Not only the Pleiadians call this planet a Living Library; it's a term generally used, so it seems, by aliens who know about it (and all aliens that are here on the planet or in Earth near space do). A library, per definition, is a place where you can borrow something if you promise to return it to keep the library going. So, in cosmic terms, it's nothing wrong with genetic engineering of the species of this planet, as long as it is done to enhance life and the Library in general. It is not meant to be taken advantage of, and to harm the species living here. Therefore, what ETs like the Anunnaki, the Zeta Grays, and a few others do is not considered ethical or just. This is why ET renegades like the Pleiadians, and confederations like the Guardian Alliance are helping us regaining our perception of multi-dimensionality. Almost everything and anything you can think of that we humans need in form of food, medicine, and life-enhancing herbs etc. is present here on Earth, in nature. We basically don't need any pharmaceutical drugs to suppress the symptoms of underlying causes, which is the way most "diseases" are treated today. The remedy for basically any human condition exists in nature. The problem is that we have forgotten how to use the Living Library. We go out in the forest, are climbing mountains, or walking by the ocean, without understanding what it is we are seeing around us. All the plants, mushrooms, herbs...they just grow there and we have no clue what they can be used for.

2. From the Dark Ages to Big Pharma and the Witch-Hunt on Alternative Medicine

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 303

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

In the Dark Ages, the "witches" knew pretty well how to use the Living Library. However, the Catholic Church, who didn't want people to be well, accused those who used the Library to heal people of witchcraft and burned them on the stake. Eventually, this very important knowledge disappeared from the Western World (or went underground); also, much of it is still known by natives and tribes around the world, who have still not been totally destroyed by western intruders. We learn in school that punishment for "witchcraft" is something of the past and of course doesn't exist anymore. Wrong! The only difference is that it's not done so overtly, and no one is burned at the stake. Today, we have Big Pharma (the Pharmaceutical Industry), who have more insights in the hidden knowledge of the Living Library than common man. However, they know they can't just take a plant or an herb, take patent on it, and sell it exclusively as their own product. Instead, they take ingredients from the Library and add chemicals to it in a mix and can then patent it and sell it, name it and call it their own. People don't get side effects from the herbs or plants; they get side effects from the chemicals and whatever else Big Pharma put into the pills we get at the Pharmacy. Doctors, of course, have not really been taught how to cure somebody's issues, unless it directly has to do with surgery, broken bones, and other obvious things. Instead, they are suppressing the symptoms by giving the patient a pill or two. Most PCPs (Primary Care Physicians) see a lot of patients a day; I am working in the Medical field, closely with doctors, and notice that they sometimes see 30-40 patients a day, handling 2-4 patients simultaneously, putting them in different patient's rooms and go back and forth between them in order to be more efficient. It gives each patient around 5-10 (if you're lucky you get 15) minutes to explain their problem and for the doctor to find a solution. The solution, more often than not, is to write a prescription for a drug, increasing the strength of a drug the patient is already taking, or changing to another drug. No one cares to look at the underlying reason for the condition the patient has. They just ignore it and gives the patient the most sufficient drug to suppress the condition, in order for the doctor to go over to the next patient. It's a functionally insane money machine. The doctors often get commission on the drugs they prescribe, and drug representatives from Big Pharma (drug reps), who visit the clinics regularly, are there to promote their Company's drugs, sometimes "bribe" the doctor, offering him/her a cruise, first class, or something similar if they switch to this particular Company's drug(s). I have seen this happen on at least two occasions. I wasn't supposed to know, so how many times did it really happen and I never found out? The Pharmaceutical Industry is making an amazing amount of money on people's illnesses. This industry is gigantic to say the least, and it's obvious that no one with such power and wealth, making profit on people's misery, would like us to be well. That would defeat their purpose and be an enormous threat to the entire industry. Think what would happen if people all of a sudden got well, or even worse; if they got well by using other means than the Health Industry (which is really the Sick Industry). What a nightmare, not only for Big Pharma and the doctors offices and hospitals, but for all other industries that on a higher level are working in unison to keep people sick. I am talking about Monsanto, the US-based multinational agricultural biotechnology corporation which gives us genetically manipulated food that makes us ill; I am talking about companies like McDonalds and other likeminded corporations selling junk food to people which makes us overweight and gives us heart problems. People go there to comfort themselves after a long, multitasking day

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 304

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

at work or because it tastes good and is fast and easy. See, all these industries, and more, are working together to keep the business going. They are feeding off our sickness and dis-ease, and so are the Insurance Companies who also are dependent upon that you are sick. A happy, healthy citizen is not the goal of the modern society. Huge profit and greed is one reason why the witch-hunt is still alive and well. The attacks on alternative medicine and those who are practicing alternative methods to heal the patients and even find the underlying causes to their illnesses are intense. The best weapon Big Pharma has is the law that you need a license to practice medicine. In reality, this means that if you are not part of the so-called Health Industry and play by the rules, which means you can only promote medicine distributed by the drug companies, you can go to jail for "practicing medicine without a license". This law practically takes care of all resistance. Homeopathic, Nephropathic, and Naturopathic practices are closed down and the owners punished by law. This is not meant as an attack on doctors; they are just part of the system and thus part of the problem. The cause to the real problem is again, of course, interdimensional. We can choose to look at it from whichever level we want, and there's another level right above it which controls that level. But let's stay on a 3-D level a little bit longer for the purpose of this paper...

2.1 The Witch-Hunt on Mind-Altering Drugs There are certain substances in the Living Library, as when taken in will expand our consciousness and connect with Earth and the Multiverse on a higher level. Poppy seed is one (opium) and Cannabis (marijuana) another. When you know how to make opium out of poppy, and morphine/heroin out of opium, you have a strong pain killer, provided by nature itself. Opium and morphine (even heroin in the early part of the 1900s) are used by Big Pharma as painkillers; opium is included in Hydrocodone (Vicodin), Oxycodone, and Oxycontin, although synthetic. It's perfectly okay to go to the doctor and get a prescription if needed, but if you're in pain and don't have Insurance and know how to make opium from the Living Library to ease your pain, it would be illegal. I am not suggesting people should go out and make opium, morphine or heroin left and right, but it's the suppression of knowledge and the suppression of free will that make people obsessed with things; if they can't have it, they feel they must have it. If people had been given the knowledge of the Living Library and been taught that all medication they could possibly need is out there for the body and mind to use, it wouldn't be such a big deal. There would always be those who overuse drugs, but it's each and everyone's responsibility to take the consequences for their actions. Then we have the hallucinogenic drugs, like LSD and mushrooms. The LSD molecule was discovered by Dr. Hoffman in the 1930s, and was later introduced to the public by our own Intelligence Agencies as an experiment during the hippie era in the 1960s and 70s to calm the Vietnam protesters down, among other things. It was also an experiment in mind control, but it became illegalized due to that you can't control somebody who is expanding his/her mind. As usual, some abused it and went

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 305

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

insane, while others had wonderful, mind-expanding experiences from it. It's not for everybody; mind-altering drugs must have a purpose for the person who takes it. It's synthetic, but the mushrooms out in nature are not, of course. And you will have a similar experience by eating them. Again, if a person wants to try a mind-altering drug, it should be in modesty and with a purpose in mind; not just getting high. Because these drugs can take you anywhere. The interesting thing, though, is that the government forbids us to use the Living Library, as if they owned it. It's illegal to eat hallucinogenic mushrooms as well. Mescaline was used broadly and widely 100150 years ago, especially among artists and creative people, but also among businessmen and regular people. It was the BIG drug at the time, and it was free. People have always looked for something to break down the barriers and to help them understand reality. These days, when things are heavily controlled in general, so of course are these mind-expanding plants and herbs. I have left marijuana to last, because it's the worst contradiction of them all. The medical field has acknowledged that the plant has healing effects on a patient; it calms people down (it's a great natural pain reliever) and it has good mental benefits as well if used with care. So in certain states in the U.S., we have something called "medical marijuana", which is given to people who would benefit from it, but you'll go to jail if you plant it and use it yourself without permission from a doctor. It's of course hypocrisy. And the animals have always eaten mind-expanding plants and herbs to expand their minds, because it's free out there to eat. And believe it or not, but animals are much more multi-dimensional than we are; not only because of their intake, but just naturally. The deer, for example, love to eat various mushrooms and get high; I am not making this up. In the ancient days, people had cannabis tattoos and were even buried with their cannabis seeds beside them. They were using the Library, knowing what was in it. They borrowed some and planted some like was the purpose of the Library in the first place. Our ancestors were far more familiar with their environment than we are. This plant has long enhanced people's consciousness when taken in moderate doses. This, and other plants from the Library can literally open doors of perception into higher densities and realities, and hence speed up the ascension process to a certain degree. One can actually see other realities, which are basically as real as this one. Aldous Huxley wrote the book "Doors of Perceptions" decades ago, which was a huge inspiration for Jim Morrison and the Doors (they got the name for the band from that book). The rest of the band could take these drugs more moderately, but the possessed Morrison could not, and after a while that had more to do with his entity possession than to expand his mind consciously. I am not suggesting that the reader should be illegal and go out and do things that can get you in trouble with the law by any means, but if you still decide to use any of the above, use it wisely and have respect for the substance; don't go overboard. It's a natural thing, but we must learn how to use things in moderation. For the record, I am not taking any of these plants and herbs myself, and haven't done for years. I tried most of it in my younger days, but now I can reach the same heights by working with myself. However, I see nothing wrong with using what is there for us to use; only the government does. By the way, did you know that the Founding Fathers grew hemp and smoked marijuana? I suggest you check out the

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 306

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

brilliant author, Doug Yurchey, whom also happens to be a friend of mine. I have posted quite a few articles of his on my Illuminati News website, and he digs deeply into the Marijuana and LSD Conspiracies and much, much more[1].

3. The Future--Back to Using the Living Library Years ago, people thought they were really on track by "going organic". This is a good start, although it will not quite do the trick anyway because of the way food is manufactured, even when it's organic. However, food grown with conscious awareness is what we need to regain our health, not just without the lack of poison. This is a whole other level! The Pleiadians have a lot to say about this, because their ancestors were the ones (in conjunction with other beings) who created the Living Library in the first place. Magnets, pyramid shapes; planting things underneath a pyramid, and moving a pyramid around a garden can generate as much energy as the native people did in the U.S. and around the world to balance the forces, always talking to, and blessing the earth. Once in a while, kissing your hand and putting it down on the ground; we have so much to learn from those whom we almost totally terminated in our insanity (Pleiadian Lecture, December 4-5, 2010, "Bursts of Acceleration", CD #2, Track 7) . Today, when we take everything for granted, humanity as a whole has a great need to feel gratitude for the intelligence of the elements; the magic of it, and the movements of things, and how nature feeds us. To put out crystals can work, talking to plants...In the early 1950s, L. Ron Hubbard (1911-1986), the Founder of Scientology, was measuring the consciousness of plants and a picture was taken of him putting electrodes on tomato plants[2] (see Fig. 1). He knew already then that plants had consciousness, but all the way up to present day, this picture has created great ridicule amongst scientists and the general public. No, he was just way before his time, and now it's catching up with him. Fewer and fewer people are laughing... There is no doubt that there is consciousness in everything, and talking to plants that you are planting and growing in your garden, and giving them love is the most fundamental thing you can do to get healthy products. Also, always talk to the Sun when dealing with the elements and planting things. The highest levels of consciousness are light and unconditional love, and the Sun is giving us both light, love, and information. She is our Higher Self and she will hear you and know who you are when you address her directly. All these things are absolutely necessary to grow healthy food. In the old days, before the Industrialization and further back, people used to go out in the field, lay down together and make love. Of course, it can be a totally different sensation to make love outside than to always do it inside, but the sexual energies are very powerful and the orgasm exponentially so. It literally opens up portals and shoots the energies out into the Universe, but also enhances growth around the area where the lovemaking took place. Especially if the people who do it are already very close and truly love each other and are on the same frequency, the effects can be very profound. The energies highly increased the fertility of the land. They shared their joy with all the plants and herbs in the garden with the energy build in an

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 307

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

orgasmic nature. That was what lovemaking in the garden was about in the old days; people had a greater knowledge of things that matters back then.

Figure 1: L. Ron Hubbard researching if plants can feel pain

These days, there is not much "sharing" anymore. People are suing each other as soon as they get a chance, finding new ways to earn an easy buck so they can get lazier and be home and watch more TV. That is not coming together; it's separation. And not only are we separated as human beings by technology and such, we have also totally forgotten how to energetically connect with nature as a human species. We take the Earth for granted, rape her, disrespect her, forget that she exists, and know nothing about that she's a living being, hosting people like us so we can have an experience. Where is the gratitude, the recognition, the love for our planet? Where's the respect? In spite of the lack of all these things, Mother Earth is still housing us patiently, but she is tumbling and struggling under the pressure. Still, she is giving us all we need, and more, to survive and have a more than meaningful life! We need to learn how to share our love and consciousness with Mother Earth and use her and give to her the way it was supposed to be. Yes, the Living Library is beautiful to look at; Earth is stunning in her presence, and it's for us to enjoy, but it's also meant for us to use it as a Living Garden; with respect and a give-and-take situation, where we replant what we borrow in a constant symbiosis with Nature. By being in Nature and relearning how to deal with the elements we learn when there's going to be rain, sun, storms, thunder. You will soon get to a level where we can sense it on a metaphysical level and in your body, rather than only know it by visual signs. It's a part of being multi-dimensional. The Global Elite, who know the power of words, always use the term "fight for freedom" or "war against drugs" etc. Like we've discussed earlier, by fighting something we are actually getting more of what we don't want, and we are creating separation. Instead, let's claim what we want: "we claim freedom"; "we reclaim the Living Library". This way we are already creating inside what it is we want.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 308

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Many have asked me if Earth is a common planet out there, with all its beauty and variety in plant and animal life. From have taken part of the information from many different metaphysical sources, I have come to the conclusion that although Earth is not the only planet out there with tremendous beauty, it is in larger terms quite unique. There are myriads of planets in the cosmos which host intelligent life, but if we would travel to them, we may find many of them deserted and quite barren. First of all, it's a matter of landing at a time where there is life on the planet, which is not always easy to do if we don't know the right coordinates and the point in local time. Others are "cloaked" with technology so that they look barren when they are not, but it's also very common that intelligent life forms live inside the planet instead of on its surface. Earth is unique in its beauty and its variety, but also in that the Inner Earth is very rich on life forms; both plants, animals and higher intelligent beings (we will discuss this more in a separate paper). And once we have entered the caverns leading to the portals to Inner Earth and been able to pass through them, we will find a beautiful world inside Earth as well. So let's feel gratitude for having the privilege of being here now at this time, on a remarkable planet which is willing to host us, take care of our bodies who are our tickets to here, and start getting along with self and others, no matter differences. Enjoy the Living Library and use it with care and respect, but use it! Forgive those who have done you harm, and forgive yourself and make up for the harm you may have done, and if you can't meet with people to tell them in person, do it in thought and in dream state, and you will heal along the lines of time and come together as a whole Earth Being. Your different incarnations will be healed by the work you are doing now, and you can complete Experiment Earth with grace and pride, having had the most valuable overall experience possible. Enjoy life, the planet and everything on it, and realize it is here for you and you are here for Her. And you and Mother Earth help each other heal!

4. DNA - What it Is, and How to Reclaim What Was Taken From Us DNA! This is a very touchy subject. Scientists, whether they are mainstream or alternative, have very firm ideas of what DNA is, or even better, what it's not! Earth Science when comes to DNA/RNA is significantly different than that told by most metaphysical sources. Dr. A.R. Bordon of Life Physics Group California (LPG-C), whom I've come to know quite well over the last months to almost a year now, is quite upset about the way metaphysics often looks upon the "DNA problem" humans seem to have. He told me that DNA/RNA needs to be understood for humankind to continue to evolve. To that, I agree 100%. It's extremely important. I gave him the metaphysical version, or the watered down version of it, rather, thinking he might already know that information. Now, afterwards, I don't think he ever looked too deeply into it, thinking it was too way out there and inaccurate. Dr. Bordon, when he has time, hopefully, will write a simplified scientific explanation of what RNA/DNA is, so I am not going to go into the mainstream version of what it is and how it works until I have read his article, and in the meantime I am going to dig into the metaphysical aspect of this subject, which in my opinion is explaining it in much easier terms but is also making a lot of sense. Until I am proven otherwise, I will look at Earth science when comes to this subject as accurate up to a certain point to where our human knowledge ends and the metaphysical knowledge starts. I think it's very important that we study this issue from a broader perspective, no

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 309

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

matter if our scientists agree or not. Some of these metaphysical sources are of high quality, and I have looked into them quite deeply and find no reason why they would deceive us on this subject, and they are very serious about it, too, because they know the importance. They also tell us straight out that even the best of scientists on Earth do not understand the metaphysical and multi-dimensional concept of the RNA/DNA, and that it will probably take generations before that will happen. After all, the double-helix was not discovered until 1958 (http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/DNA#History_of_DNA_research), 53 years ago. Also, in his essay, "The LINK", Bordon admits to that we know very little about RNA-DNA. The question is: those scientists who discard the following information, can they create a new species with the knowledge they have now? The answer is no. Can the metaphysical beings who are explaining how DNA-RNA works create a new species with the information they have? The answer is yes. That should speak volumes. A common misunderstanding is that we think we can track the genome, or the gene pool, but it's not going to be totally successful, because in the Multiverse, it changes all the time, and it's fluid. In the far, far past, in our terms, a lot of different species throughout the Universe contributed their DNA to the Living Library. Cosmic Master bio-geneticists were then able to use these different forms of DNA to design functional life-forms for the Living Library; they seeded the Library. Today we can see all these different races on Earth; Caucasians, Black people, Red People, Yellow people, Brown People; all sorts of humans. We are all looking similar, but we don't look the same. Same thing with the cosmic beings; they all have a head, a torso, two arms and two legs, because it's a prototype; a template throughout cosmos, but from that stems a huge variety. Not all worlds are the same. Not all of them are a mix of different genetics. Earth is an experiment, and in these terms quite, but not totally, unique. Now, when things are speeding up here, all these cosmic beings who contributed to our genetics are very interested to see the product of their contribution. This is not a small thing; it's the end product of a long term experiment with a biokind (humans), consisting of DNA from a myriad of beings in order to become the gatekeepers, the Library Cards to the Living Library. 300,000 years ago, we were already almost evolved to accomplish this task when we were interrupted in the process, but now all these species from cosmos are holding their breaths to see how well their experiment turned out. The human race is not just any race in the cosmos; some say we are royal in more than one definition of the word. The DNA which was part of the mix was contributed by Royal Races out in the Universe, and we are connected to them. And what we do with our energy, due to the connection we have with all these species, affects them as well. Yes, the human race is "special", indeed! This little planet in the outskirts of a galaxy of billions of galaxies can have a great impact on many things in cosmos. Mind boggling? Big responsibility? Absolutely! Separate from our genome code are other codes; master numbers and information that is invaluable to the Multiverse. So in larger terms, great beings have stored things within the DNA of Earth life-forms; not only in humans, but in rocks, plants, and animals as well. This is for us to explore. Until we know how to read it and

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 310

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

understand it's there, we can search forever (Pleiadian Lecture [8/13/2011-8/14/2011]: "Awakening to the Sun", CD 3, Track #4). This was a way to have things hidden in plain sight. Many cosmic beings are very anxious to find out what is in our DNA, and that's part of why we have those abduction scenarios. Beings, especially those whose DNA is deteriorating (like is the case with the Zeta Grays), are very curious to find out the secrets of our DNA; where is the "gold", where is the "gem"? They want to know so they can use it. However, they do not have the key to unlock the secrets, so they are not succeeding to their huge frustration. We have sister planets in other parts of the galaxy; on the other side, far away from Earth, which are sort of parallel worlds, where there are similar things stored. The beauty we see around us is quite unique for our planet and its sister planets in other parts of the Milky Way (in terms of 3rd Density), and we, who are the Living Library are the ones who are creating this beauty together; humans, plants, animals...Can you feel something bigger emerging in these pictures? Good, because this is much bigger than any of us here on Earth can yet perceive. Our DNA is like a "modem"; it allows us to operate in different realities; in different dimensions and densities simultaneously. So, the DNA is in other words multidimensional and not something located only in the 3-D reality, like most scientists think. We have created a world based on linear time, based on separation. There is nothing wrong with this, and in fact, it's been a wonderful learning experience for us and for interdimensional beings who have followed our progress, but the game is over and we are going back to thinking Multi-D. The 3-D part of the Experiment is over; we need to expand into the cosmos by activating the light inside of us so that the Experiment can get to another level. The Universe in our sector of the galaxy is still relatively unstable in the sense of polarity and the respect thereof. Wars are still raging; imperatives are clashing with imperatives; there is unhappiness out there as well as there is happiness, joy and peace. Humans can become the stabilizers as the Key Masters to the Living Library, and that is our task in the future if we are up to it and can pull through. And yes, I believe we can!

4.1 The Early Human had 12 Strand DNA, Corresponding with 12 Chakras In metaphysics, it is quite established that humankind was quite highly evolved before the Anunnaki came to Earth and started manipulating our DNA, some 300250,000 years ago. At that time, there was more than one version of human-like creatures on Earth, but at least one of these species was quite highly evolved. This also makes sense if we are to believe the creator gods, whose ancestors are equivalent to many of these metaphysical sources. They are here to re-establish the Living Library and remedy what was destroyed or altered. Even non-mainstream scientists, like these of LPG-C know that life was seeded and that the original creator gods of this Living Library were the Lyrans, the Pleiadians and a few others. But the agreement ends where DNA starts, more or less. However, if we think about it, the original creator gods, who seeded and planted the Living Library, also created evolved beings who were supposed to guard and use the

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 311

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

Library for their own pleasure and others from outer space. It is only logical that they would create a quite highly evolved, intelligent biomind, which could then be housed by a soul/information cloud who wanted to experience the Living Library and evolve here. So, at one time, our DNA was intact. The earlier humans had 12 strand DNA; one corresponding with each chakra. Seven chakras are placed within the body, and five outside of it. We were like a wonderful library ourselves, where the information was all catalogued and referenced and we could find anything we wanted to find instantly[3]. The 7 body chakras are as follows: Chakras 1-3 are dealing with survival, sexuality, and perceptual feeling, also called the Root Chakras. Chakra 4 is the heart (center of compassion and connectedness to all things) Chakra 5 is the throat chakra, related to speech. Chakra 6 is the Third Eye, the "vision". Chakra 7 is the Crown Chakra, which opens to the knowingness that one's identity goes beyond the physical realm.[4] The above 7 chakras are the ones we most often work with because they are connected with the body. Albeit, many people think these chakras is all there is. The Pleiadians and the Guardian Alliance, among others, are working on the idea of a Universe based on 12 when comes to human perceptions, and therefore the chakra system is based on this number as well. To go further up the chakra system and connect with the non-physical chakras, the person needs to figure out what is going on by finding new ways to do so, without even being totally sure it is real. Chakra 8 is within our realm of activity. It hovers 12 inches or more above our heads. Most people keep their eight chakra close to the physical body. Chakra 9 is also quite close to the body, within a few feet from it. When these 9 helices are formed, this chakra will move out into the atmosphere of Earth to become more of an Earth chakra, connecting into the gridwork. It's a link. Chakra 10 is much further out, as are the 11th and 12 chakras. The 10th Chakra, once it is in line and plugged in, will be in your solar system. Chakra 11 will move out into our galactic system. Chakra 12 will be located and anchored some place in this universe.[5] As we evolve back to what we once were, we will receive information from these personal centers, because they are collective centers as well. As we learn to

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 312

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

translate the chakra experiences, life is not the same anymore. And it's happening now on the planet, big time! With all these 12 chakras open, you can imagine what possibilities are opening up as well. There was a time, more than 250,000 years ago, when the human species occupied higher dimensional frequencies and we had the ability to surf through realities and manipulate matter.

4.2 How We Were Unplugged From the Multiverse and How To Plug In Again When the new owners of this real estate called Earth arrived, around 450-500,000 years ago, everything changed. The Anunnaki wanted a race intelligent enough to be able to understand commands and execute them, but not intelligent enough to question them or rebel against the "gods". Apparently, the apes and monkeys inhabiting Earth at that time weren't smart or good enough, and didn't have the right attributes to accomplish the task. The evolved humans did! However, these human, highly multi-dimensional beings, who basically were a threat to the Anunnaki anyway due to that they were too similar to them in intelligence and awareness, but much more mellow, fit the task pretty well. The only problem was that they were way too evolved and intelligent. So what the Anunnaki did, with the help of technology and trickery, much of which the Earth humans lacked, was to manipulate their DNA. They mixed their own 11 strands[6] with our own 12 strand, unplugged 10 of the 12 strands and created a 2 strand DNA, the double-helix, which is all that most humans have activated up to this day. This effectively disconnected us from the Universe and the Multiverse, left us with what today's scientists call "junk DNA", and thus created a frequency fence with a narrow band in which most humans operate today. We have forgotten who we are and what our purpose is, where we came from and who created us. I can see a very sophisticated agenda playing out above our heads. The Anunnaki lied to the Sumerians because they knew they would come back full force and take over again, and they want to do so as peacefully as possible, having already manipulated mankind by telling us through ancient scriptures that we owe our intelligence and evolvement to them, when the opposite is more likely to be true: they robbed us of our connectedness with the Multiverse, and due to our naivety, we apparently didn't see what was coming, or for some reason didn't do anything about it. We may not have been able to, because we were a peaceful and playful race. We don't know the exact history (yet), so another option is that the Anunnaki took what they wanted (called abductions) and killed off the rest. Then, in fact, they have infiltrated, and to some degree even created, many of our organized religions and channeled prophecies like these in the Book of Revelation, so that their "Second Coming" will look like God's prophecy fulfilled. Use discernment here.

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 313

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

I can understand LPG-C's reasoning when they say that we need to find a way to defend ourselves against Invader Forces who are interested in this real estate, and Ša.A.M.i. (the Nibiruans) are offering just that to our human representatives (albeit self-elected) amongst other things like teaching us how to build a peaceful relationship with each other and our cosmic brothers and sisters and how to be self governed. Well, this sounds fantastic on the surface, but for the reader who has followed this series of papers and read Sitchin's books, there may have arisen a certain amount of doubt about the sincerity of our Giant (literally speaking) cosmic relatives. It seems ironic that this species who has created so many wars and so much havoc on this planet should teach us about living in peace. Now, let us return to the DNA. Picture yourself a fiber optic cable with a 12 fiber optic "highway" running through the bigger cable, and then you unplug 10 of them and let two of them continue running. The other ones are still there, but not connected and activated anymore. Even the two remaining are then being altered and manipulated. This may be a poor and inaccurate picture from a scientific perspective, but it may help people understand what happened to our DNA. Everything that was not necessary for survival and anything that would keep us informed was unplugged. Left was the double-helix, which locked us into controllable frequencies[7] and unplugged us from the cosmos. The root chakras and the heart chakras were still slightly open, as was the throat chakra, but chakras 7-12 were successively closed. Because, in addition to the Frequency Fence or Quarantine we talked about earlier, the Anunnaki also created a literal Frequency Fence around our planet to be able to control how much of the human frequencies could be modulated and changed. Thus, it made it very difficult for the higher frequencies of Light, bringing gamma ray information to the planet, to penetrate and keep us informed and updated. Once in a while, when the higher frequencies of gamma ray information managed to penetrate in spite, there wasn't anybody there to receive the information[8]. As always, like with any information, one has to ask oneself, who's to gain from telling us? And this is the whole reason why I am not swallowing the scientific idea of DNA/RNA, hook and sink. The metaphysical information is the extension of what is already known by scientists here on Earth. And who benefits? However I twist and bend it and look at it from everybody's perspective involved, I can only see that we humans gain in conjunction with those who are trying to help on the metaphysical level. If this was told with evil intents, the motives are not there, neither is the negative manipulation, ever so subtle, but if we think of it as an effort to make us grow, the motives are there, including the fact that it feels right. As our DNA is evolving towards its original 12 stand, the "new" helices are being formed as the light-encoded filaments are starting to bundle themselves together. As this is happening, we are creating a more evolved nervous system which allows much more data to move itself into our consciousness. We will begin to be able to use the full capacity of the brain, which will create effects unimaginable for the presently evolving human. It doesn't all have to do with increased intelligence (although it's a part of it), but by connecting our dormant extended nervous system with the cosmos, we will become multidimensional in thought and action again. And not only that; we will realize, and experience, the true nature of our body. We will find out what this amazing body we inhabit can really do, and how important it is for our growth and multidimensional existence. It's not just something you carry along

1st Edition, October, 2011

Page 314

“The Wes Penre Papers – A Journey through the Multiverse” (First Level of Learning Part 2 of 2) ___________________________________________________________________

to be able to go from one place to another, or do certain tasks, or accomplish some skills we are so used to today. The body is a container and a storage place for all the multidimensional knowledge we'll need to expand our consciousness. Therefore, we would benefit a lot from feeling gratitude not only for having one of these amazing bodies, but also for having one here and now. There are an incredible amount of discarnate beings who would love to have a body in this space and time, here on Earth. This is when and where things are happening! In this little window of time, just before what is called the End Times, with the help of a healthy and well maintained body, we can evolve and regain our 12 strand DNA and connect with the super-cosmos we call the Multiverse. So it's high time to start taking care of the body we have; start eating well (preferably plant and seed your own food), exercise, have good sex with someone you love who is vibrating on a similar frequency as yourself, love yourself and your body, talk to your body and complement it, love and assist others when possible, give them compliments when appropriate, get plenty of rest, slow down your pace, connect with Nature, and HAVE FUN! Get together with people of your kind, get guidance from your Spirit Guides, and expand your consciousness by using and trusting your intuition. How is that for a start? Doesn't sound boring to me. Although we do live in exciting times, not everybody will be able to enjoy it as much. We, who are aware of all this are the forerunners; those who are paving the road for others. It is our responsibility to anchor the higher frequencies into this reality and ground it. There will be tremendous chaos coming up, and people around us will cave in and have nervous breakdowns, because their nervous systems get overwhelmed with all the changes of which they have no awareness. We will sometimes feel helpless when we see those around us whom we know or don't know at all, break down before our eyes. Have compassion and show understanding when this happens. Be a stable point, give them the best of your energies and show them you care and that you love them. This will not always be enough, and when you notice there is not much you can do, just let go. After a while you will realize that you can't save the world on your own, but you can help raising the vibrations and let those who are ready follow. That is all, and the best, you can do. Remember, not everybody here on Earth today were incarnated with the purpose to make it through. Accept that and let go, even if it's a partner or a relative. It will cause us grief and sadness, but if we learn more about the higher purpose and why we all are here, it will be an easier transition for all of us. Another important thing to be able to reconnect the unplugged helices is oxygenation. Oxygen feeds the coding and awakens the "junk DNA". People have asked me what the best way to meditate is, and although there is no straight answer to that question because it's individual, breathing exercises is something I would highly recommend, and it's always safe. I can personally not think of any single exercise that would be more valuable, if I could only choose one. There are many ways to do it, and each one of us have to feel it out and find a way that works for us, but the best one I've found so far is the "Quantum Pause", which is also the one I use myself. It was originally published on the WingMakers website (http://wingmakers.com; http://eventtemples.com), but I also have included it here on this website (http://wespenre.com/quantum-pause.htm). I will post more good exercises in time. Once the 12 strands are activated, our eyesight will change, our hearing will be different, our lifespan will increase etc.; no technology needed!